LG Electronics USA L01B PCS GSM Phone User Manual

LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone

UserManual.wiki >

LG Electronics USA >

L01B User Manual HTML Version

User manual

Part 15.21 statement

" Change or Modifications that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment. “

Part 15.105 statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,

the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

* This device is not intended for sale in the USA.

Part 15 Class B Compliance

This device and its accessories comply with part15 of FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device & its accessories may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device & its accessories must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Body-worn Operation

This Device has been tested for typical body-worn operations with the distance of 0.79inches(2.0cm) from the user’s body.

To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements, a minimum separation distance of 0.79inches(2.0cm) must be maintained from the user's body.

Additionally, Belt clips, holsters & other body-worn accessories may not contain metallic components.

DOCOMO

W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS Systems

Thank you for selecting "docomo STYLE series

L-01B".

Before or during use of L-01B, thoroughly read this manual

and other manuals provided with your package and other

optional devices in order to use L-01B correctly. If you have

any questions after reading the manual, contact "General

Inquiries" at the back of this manual.

L-01B is designed to be a convenient tool. Treat it carefully at

all times to ensure that it will keep serving you well.

Before Using Your FOMA Terminal

• Because the FOMA terminal uses radio waves, it may not function

in locations where radio waves cannot reach, such as in tunnels,

underground passages and some buildings, in other areas where

radio waves are weak; or when out of FOMA service area. Even

when you are high up in a tall building and nothing blocks your view

outside, your FOMA terminal may not be able to receive or transmit

signals. Also, even when radio waves are strong enough for

three antennas to appear on the display, and you are not moving,

communication may still be occasionally interrupted.

• Be considerate of other people around you when in public or where

it is especially crowded or quiet.

• Because your FOMA terminal uses radio waves to communicate,

there is a possibility that third parties may attempt to listen in on

your calls. The W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS systems automatically

encodes signals for all calls so even if someone should somehow

be able to listen in on the radio signals, an eavesdropper will hear

only noise.

• Your FOMA terminal sends and receives voice communication as

encoded digital data. When you are operating your FOMA terminal

while moving from location to location, sometimes you may

encounter weaker radio waves and the transmitted digital data may

not be correctly decoded resulting in sound distortions.

• It is recommended that you save important data on a microSD card.

If you use a PC, use DOCOMO keitai datalink to transfer and save

data such as Phonebook entries, mail messages, Schedule events,

etc. to the PC.

• When you use SSL for a secure connection, you agree that you are

responsible for any actions you take. DOCOMO and the certiﬁer

listed below do not guarantee the safety of SSL for any activities

of customers while using SSL, and are not liable for any damages

incurred through using SSL.

Certiﬁers: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust Japan Co., Ltd.,

GlobalSign K.K., RSA Security Japan Ltd.,

SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd.

• The FOMA terminal is available in FOMA Plus-Area and FOMA

HIGH-SPEED Area.

• The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network

provided by DOCOMO and DOCOMO's roaming area.

• It is recommended that you make a backup of user-deﬁned

data (Phonebook entries, Schedule events, text memos, Record

messages, voice memos, or moving picture memos) saved in the

FOMA terminal by keeping the separate record or note of those

data, etc. and storing them at a separate location. DOCOMO is not

responsible for lost data due to failure, repair, or changing model of

your FOMA terminal.

Before Using This Manual

This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (P111). If the

Menu screen design is changed by using Kisekae Tool, menu

structure may change, depending on menu types, according

to the frequency of use.

You can download the latest version of this manual from

DOCOMO's web site.

"Instruction Manual (in PDF format)" Download

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index.html

* The URLs and the manuals available from this site may be

changed without prior notice.

Before Using the Handset

Part Names and Functions

Front

Rear

Left side

Right side

* The FOMA antenna is inside the FOMA terminal. To communicate in better condition,

avoid covering the antenna part with your hands.

Before Using the Handset

Using earphones

Connect earphones compatible with the external connector

terminal (optional).

If you use the incompatible earphones, connect the conversion

plug adapter (optional) to the earphones.

Earphone terminal

(Flat type)

Flat plug for the Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with

Switch

Plug

Example: Connecting the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch (optional)

Infrared Port

• When performing infrared communications, point this towards

the other device.→P328

Earpiece/Speaker

• The other party's voice comes out from here.

• Ring tones, alarm tones, and melodies sound from here.

• The other party's voice comes out from here during a Hands-

free call.

Display→P33

Home key

• Return to the previous state or return to the Stand-by display.

• Press this for 1+ seconds to exit each function and return to

the Stand-by display.

Navigation key

Used to move the cursor, scroll through the screen, or execute

the selected operation.

• Execute the selected operation.

• Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel the IC card

lock.→P292

• Move the cursor up.

• Press this in Stand-by to display Schedule.

• Press this while MUSIC player, etc. is running to increase the

volume.

• Move the cursor down.

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Phonebook list screen

(P91), and press for 1+ seconds to display the Add to

phonebook screen (P84).

• Press this while MUSIC player, etc. is running to reduce the

volume.

• Move the cursor left. Also, return to the previous screen.

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Received calls list screen

(P62), and press for 1+ seconds to display the Received mail

list screen (P167).

• Move the cursor right. Also, go to the next screen.

•

Press this in Stand-by to display the Redial list screen (P60), and

press for 1+ seconds to display the Sent mail list screen (P167).

Menu key/Upper left soft key

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Main menu (P37).

•

Execute the operation indicated for the upper left soft key.→P32

Mail key/Lower left soft key

•

Press this in Stand-by to display the Mail menu screen (P137),

and press for 1+ seconds to check new messages.→P150, P173

•

Execute the operation indicated for the lower left soft key.→P32

Start key

• Make/answer a voice or videophone call.→P56, P72

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Phone number entry

screen (P56).

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Dial keys

• Press to enter a phone number or characters.→P443

• Press

for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to enter "+".→P68

Public mode (Drive mode) key

• Enter "

"/"＊".

• Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel Public

mode (Drive mode).→P76

Mouthpiece

• During a call, transmit your voice through this.

• During a moving picture capture, this works as a microphone.

Inner camera

• Capture your own image or moving picture.→P222, P227

• Show your own image during a videophone call.

Illumination

Blink/light up while receiving a call or mails or charging the

terminal, etc.→P113

i-mode/i-αppli key/Upper right soft key

• Press this in Stand-by to display the i-mode menu screen

(P182), and press for 1+ seconds to display the i-αppli

Software list screen (P275).

•

Execute the operation indicated for the upper right soft key.→P32

•

During character entry, use this to switch the input mode

(Hiragana/Katakana/alphabetic and numeric characters).→P376

Camera/TV key

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Still image capture screen

(P222), and press for 1+ seconds to display the 1Seg watch

screen (P245).

• During character entry, use this to switch the input mode

(pictographs/symbols/emoticons).→P381

Clear/i-Channel key

• Return to the previous state or return to the Stand-by display.

•

Press this in Stand-by to display the Channel list screen (P203).

Power/Exit key

• Press this for 2+ seconds to turn the power on/oﬀ.→P51

• Used to end a call or terminate a function.

Manner mode key

• Enter "#".

• Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel Manner

mode.→P105

Charger terminal

Terminal for charging with the desktop holder.

Outer camera

• Capture a still image or moving picture such as landscape, etc.

→P222, P227

• Capture surrounding image during a videophone call.

Photo light/Light

• Light up when capturing a still image/moving picture.

• You can light this up when using the camera.

Back cover

• Remove this when inserting/removing the UIM or battery pack.

→P43, P46

•

Do not remove the sticker attached at the back side of the Back

cover. If removing it, the IC card contents may not be read or written.

mark

• The IC card is included (cannot be removed). Hold this on the

scanning device to use as Osaifu-Keitai.→P291

Strap hole

External connector terminal

• The integrated terminal used for charging and connecting

earphones.

• Connect the AC adapter (optional), DC adapter (optional), FOMA

USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional), or Earphone

Plug Adapter for External connector terminal (optional).

Lock key

• Set/cancel the lock for the touch panel and keys.→P125

Multitask key

• Press this for 1+ seconds to display the New task screen.

→P349

• Display the Task list screen.→P350

Before Using the Handset

microSD card slot

• Insert a microSD card.→P318

CFE

Volume key

Use to adjust the volume, etc.

• Press these during a call to adjust the receiver volume.

• Press

for 1+ seconds to display the Record message list

screen (P79).

• Press these on the Playback screen of MUSIC player, etc. to

adjust the playback volume.

• Press these on the List screen to move the cursor or scroll the

screen to the next page.

Camera/TV key

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Still image capture screen

(P222), and press for 1+ seconds to display the 1Seg watch

screen (P245).

• Press this on the Still image/Moving picture capture screen to

work as shutter and capture images/moving pictures.

→P223, P228

1Seg antenna

• Receive 1Seg broadcasting.→P240

* This is not the FOMA antenna.

Opening/Closing the FOMA Terminal

When you open the FOMA terminal, slide up the front part of

the terminal. When you close the FOMA terminal, slide down

the front part of the terminal.

Note

• Do not open or close the FOMA terminal forcibly. Failure or

malfunction may result.

Before Using the Handset

Soft Keys

Available operations on the currently opened screen

are displayed as Soft keys at the bottom of the screen.

To execute the soft key operation, press the following

corresponding keys or directly touch the soft key display.

• The Soft key description diﬀers depending on the function or display

status.

Operation performed using

appears.

Operation performed using

appears.

• The mark ( ) also appears to indicate the available direction

for scrolling or item selection.

Operation performed using

appears.

Operation performed using

appears.

Operation performed using

appears.

Note

• While the FOMA terminal is closed, some Soft keys may not

appear, or descriptions may change compared to the state

when the FOMA terminal is opened.

Notation for Soft Key Operations

This manual describes the Soft key operations as follows.

[Menu]

Corresponding key

Soft key display

Before Using the Handset

Strong Weak

Signal strength→P51

Self mode set→P124

Out of service area or no signal reception→P51

Voice call in progress→P57

Videophone call in progress→P57

Reject all calls function set→P128

Infrared remote controller operation in progress

→P330

(Blinking) i-mode connection in progress→P183

(Blinking) i-mode communication/i-Channel message

reception in progress→P183

(Blinking) Full browser connection in progress

(Blinking) Full browser communication in progress

Full browser connection in progress (no

communication for a certain period of time)

(Blinking) Packet connection via PC, etc/disconnection in

progress

Packet communication via PC, etc. in progress

Packet reception via PC, etc. in progress

Packet transmission via PC, etc. in progress

Packet reception/transmission via PC, etc. in

progress

Viewing Display

The descriptions of the icons appearing at the top of the screen are as follows.

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

(White) i-mode mails stored at the i-mode center→P149

(Pink) i-mode center mailbox full

(White) MessageR stored at the i-mode center→P173

(Pink) MessageR at the i-mode center full

(White) MessageF stored at the i-mode center→P173

(Pink) MessageF at the i-mode center full

(White) i-mode mails and MessageR/F stored at the i-mode

center

(Pink) i-mode mails and MessageR/F at the i-mode center

full

(White) Unread i-mode mails→P147

(White) Unread SMS→P177

(White) Unread i-mode mails and SMS

(Pink) Inbox in the FOMA terminal full of unread mails and

protected mails

SMS in the UIM full

Inbox in the FOMA terminal full of unread mails and

protected mails. SMS in the UIM full

(White) Unread MessageR→P174

(Pink) MessageR in the FOMA terminal full

(White) Unread MessageF→P174

(Pink) MessageF in the FOMA terminal full

SSL-compatible page displayed or loading→P185

i-αppli running→P275

i-α ppliDX running→P275

(Gray) i-αppli Stand-by display displayed→P285

(Gray) i-α ppliDX Stand-by display displayed→P285

A function (task) activated→P349

Multiple functions (tasks) activated

A function (task) and background playback

activated

Multiple functions (tasks) and background playback

activated

(Blinking) Alarm started when no tone sounds due to another

function (task) activated

− Battery level→P50

Lock all set→P121

(Pink) Manner mode set→P105

(White) Original manner mode set→P105

The ring tone for voice/videophone call muted, and

vibration active→P101, P102

The ring tone for voice/videophone call and

vibration active→P101, P102

The ring tone for voice/videophone call muted, and

vibration inactive→P101, P102

The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F muted, and

vibration active→P101, P102

The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F and vibration

active→P101, P102

The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F muted, and

vibration inactive→P101, P102

Public mode (Drive mode) set→P76

Record message active→P78

Alarm set→P350

Before Using the Handset

Today's schedule/To do set→P350, P357

Today's schedule/To do with alarm set

→P352, P357

microSD card inserted→P318

Outgoing voice/videophone calls restricted→P123

Incoming voice/videophone calls restricted→P123

Incoming and outgoing voice/videophone calls

restricted→P123

Outgoing mails restricted→P123

Incoming mails restricted→P123

Incoming and outgoing mails restricted→P123

• "Data access lock" set to "ON"→P124

• "Secret mode" set to "Secret mode"→P127

• "Secret mode" set to "Secret data only"→P127

Communication mode set and USB cable

connected

UIM not inserted/error occurred in the UIM→P43

Terminal link applied

IC card lock set

i-αppli auto start failed→P286

i-αppli Stand-by display released due to security

error→P286

Call costs exceeded the limit→P363

Reserving Music&Video Channel program download

→P254

Music&Video Channel program download

completed →P254

Music&Video Channel program download failed

→P254

Downloading Music&Video Channel program

→P254

Pattern deﬁnition update completed→P464

Pattern deﬁnition update recommended

Pattern deﬁnition update failed

i-mode mail Auto send failed

The rewrite notice icon→P464

The update notice icon→P462

Reserving software update→P463

i-mode mail Auto send reserved→P139

Missed call (with the number of calls)

Unread mail (with the number of mails)

Voice mail message (with the number of

messages)→P392

Record message (with the number of messages)

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Note

• Some characters or symbols appearing on the display may be

partially deformed or abbreviated.

• Icons appearing on the display are based on the default

settings. The display of the FOMA terminal may diﬀer from

the one in the manual depending on setting changes after

purchase.

• The display of the FOMA terminal employs high-precision

production technology, however, there may be instances where

some dots may not light up while others may constantly light

up. Note that this is not a failure.

Using Touch Panel

The display of this FOMA terminal works as the touch panel.

Touch the screen directly to perform various operations.

• When the FOMA terminal opens, both touch and key operations

are available. However, depending on the functions, only either

operation may be possible.

• This manual describes procedures mainly with key operations.

• While the touch panel light is turned oﬀ, touch panel operations are

disabled. Turn the light on with the following operations.

- Press any key

- Open/close the FOMA terminal

Cautions on using the touch panel

• The touch panel may not function in the following cases. Also,

operations may not be performed correctly.

- Operations with a foreign object put on the panel

- Operations with the protective sheet or stickers attached

• Do not press the touch panel with a sharp-pointed object such

as nail, pen, pin, etc. or ﬁnger strongly.

Before Using the Handset

Touch the panel softly and

release your ﬁnger

Ex.: Select an item or execute

the selected operation

Keep touching the touch

panel and move your ﬁnger

Ex.: Adjust volume

• This operation is described as

"touch" in this manual. • This operation is described as

"slide" in this manual.

Touch the panel softly and sweep upward or downward

Ex: Scroll at high speed when there are too many items, etc.

to be displayed on a screen (This operation may be disabled

depending on the screen.)

Note

• Touch panel operations can be notiﬁed with sound or vibration.

→P104

• Touch operation is not available on sites which use Flash

movies, and i-Channel or i-αppli screens.

Selecting Menu

The FOMA terminal allows you to access or set a function,

and save items, etc. from the Main menu or sub menu.

• This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (P111). If the Menu

screen design is changed by using Kisekae Tool, menu structure

may change, depending on menu types, according to the frequency

of use.

Selecting Functions from Main Menu

You can select a function using the following 3 methods.

- Navigation key

- Dial keys

- Touch panel

Using steps for accessing the Main menu in Stand-by

and displaying the setting screen for "Color theme" as an

example, this section explains each operation method.

• This manual explains how to select functions using the navigation

keys.

Main menu

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Functions and corresponding keys displayed on the

Main menu

Function Operation Function Operation Function Operation

Mail

i-mode

i-αppli

Phonebook

Data box

MUSIC

LifeKit

Media

1Seg

Settings

Own Number

Osaifu-Keitai

Using Navigation Key

Press

in Stand-by

Main menu appears.

In the Main menu, use

to move the cursor

to "Settings" and press

[Select]

Setting screen

On the Settings screen, use

to move the

cursor to "Display" and press

[Select]

Display screen

On the Display screen, use

to move the

cursor to "Color theme" and press

[Select]

Color theme

screen

Before Using the Handset

Using Dial Keys

Press

in Stand-by

On the Main menu screen, press

corresponding to "Settings"

On the Settings screen, press

corresponding to "Display"

On the Display screen, press

corresponding to "Color theme"

Using Touch Panel

Touch in Stand-by

• Alternatively, press

to display the Main menu.

On the Main menu screen, touch the icon for

"Settings"

The cursor is moved to "Settings".

Touch the icon for "Settings" again

On the Settings screen, touch "Display"

The cursor is moved to "Display".

Touch "Display" again

On the Display screen, touch "Color theme"

The cursor is moved to "Color theme".

Touch "Color theme" again

Selecting a Function from Sub Menu

When "Menu" appears on a soft key, you can access a sub

menu to perform various functions.

• The sub menu items vary depending on the function or the FOMA

terminal settings/saved items, etc.

Items with

second

hierarchy

[Menu]

Sub menu

Phone number

entry screen

■ List screen sub menu

The list screen sub menu contains options such as "Delete"

that apply only to the highlighted item and ones such as

"Delete all" that apply to all items. When performing the

operation that applies to only an item, move the cursor to

the relevant item, and then press

[Menu].

Note

• You can move the cursor using

while the sub menu

appears. Also, you can select an item by pressing the dial key

corresponding to the menu number.

• For an item with the second hierarchy, move the cursor and

press

[Select]/

to display the second hierarchy item.

• Press

[Close] to close the sub menu.

Before Using the Handset

Using Hot Keys to Access a Function

You can use each function by touching 4 hot keys displayed

in Stand-by.

Display the Main menu.

Display the Phone number entry screen. Touch for

1+ seconds to display the Recent call list screen.

Display the Mail menu screen (P137). Touch for 1+ seconds

to check new messages (P150, P173).

Display the Phonebook list screen (P91). Touch for

1+ seconds to display the Add to phonebook screen (P84).

Note

• Hot key operations are available only by touching the touch

panel directly.

Using Shortcuts to Access a Function

You can set shortcuts in Stand-by to access each function

quickly by selecting the shortcut icons.

• Setting shortcuts→P106

Stand-by display ▶

▶ Select a shortcut

icon

Shortcuts

Shortcut icons

Note

• You can perform operations by touching a shortcut icon twice

directly.

• To change the setting, touch a shortcut icon for 1+ seconds.

Select the icon with "×" to delete the function from the

shortcuts. Select "Edit shortcut" to display the Stand-by display

setting screen.→P106

Before Using the Handset

Basic Operations for Each Screen

Returning to the Previous Screen/Stand-by Display

If you selected undesired menu item and want to return to

the previous screen, or cancel/end the operation and return

to the Stand-by display, perform the following operations.

•

: Return to the previous screen. (Touch for touch

panel operations.)

•

(for 1+ seconds)/

: Return to the Stand-by display. If a

conﬁrmation to exit appears, select "Yes" to cancel the operation.

Note

• Depending on the current operation on the FOMA terminal,

pressing

may not return to the Stand-by

display/previous screen.

Operations for Setting Items

Each setting ﬁeld on a setting screen shows currently set item.

To change settings, perform any of the following operations.

Select the setting

ﬁeld to change and

select an item on

the list

Move the cursor to

the setting ﬁeld to

change and use

to change the setting

Move the cursor to

the setting ﬁeld to

change and use

to switch the setting

▶

Authentication

Depending on the function or service to

use, a password entry screen (P118)

may appear for the authentication

purpose. If the entry screen appears,

use dial keys to enter the password and

press

[OK]. If correctly entered, you

can complete the steps or continue to the

next step.

• The entered password appears as "＊"

(asterisk) marks.

Password entry

screen (Ex.:

Terminal security

code entry screen)

Note

• To cancel the password entry and close the entry screen, touch

Before Using the Handset

Notation for Menu Operations

This manual explains operations to be performed mainly from

the Stand-by display. Basically, descriptions of operations are

simpliﬁed as follows.

Example of Operation Description

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Call & Mail image"

Key illustration to press for operation.

Function name for the main menu. Use

to move the cursor

to the function name and press

[Select] to select.

Menu item names. This manual also uses the phrase

"Perform the following operation" or "select XXX". Use

move the cursor to an item and press

[Select] to select.

Example of Sub Menu Description

Items displayed on the sub menu may vary depending on the

settings or saved items of the FOMA terminal.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc.

in "Data box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc.

of the microSD card.

Item name. Press

to move the cursor to the item and

press

[Select] to select.

Functional description of the item.

Item names, functional description, and operation description of

items displayed when the items are selected.

Note

• If multiple sub menus such as the Redial list screen or Redial

detail screen are collectively described, some sub menus

that do not actually appear may be included depending on the

settings or screens.

Before Using the Handset

Notations

Description of operations starting from other than the

Stand-by display

At the beginning of the operation, the status of the FOMA

terminal or the screen to be displayed such as "Ringing" or

"List screen" is described.

Omitting

[Select] in the "Select" operation

As shown in

and

of "Example of Operation

Description" (P42), when selecting a target function from

icons or lists, operations such as

[Select] are omitted

from description.

Similarly, in the cases such as password entry or ﬁxing

entered characters, the operations such as

[OK] are

omitted.

Omitting

in the operation to make into

The operation to select items with and press

change to is described as "Mark" omitting the operation

Using UIM (FOMA Card)

The UIM is an IC card that contains subscription information

such as your phone number. You can use communication

functions such as calling, mail, and i-mode, etc. by inserting

the UIM into the FOMA terminal. You can insert the UIM into

other FOMA terminals to use for various purposes.

For details on how to handle the UIM, see the UIM instruction

manual.

Inserting/Removing

• After operations described in "Turning Power OFF" (P51), turn over

the FOMA terminal and remove the battery pack, then insert or

remove the UIM.→P47

Inserting

When inserting the UIM, close the FOMA terminal and hold it

with both hands.

With the IC side (gold) of the UIM down, while

pushing the UIM surface, insert the UIM slowly

until it is ﬁxed Notch

Note

• Do not use excessive force when inserting the UIM to avoid

damaging it.

Before Using the Handset

Removing

When removing the UIM, close the FOMA terminal and hold it

with both hands.

While sliding the UIM, pull it out slowly

Note

• Do not misplace the removed UIM.

Security Codes

You can set 2 security codes to the UIM: "PIN1 code" and

"PIN2 code".→P119

UIM Security Function

The FOMA terminal incorporates the UIM security function

(UIM operational restriction function) to protect your data

and ﬁles.

• When you download data or ﬁles from sites or acquire data

attached to mail with the UIM inserted into the FOMA terminal, the

UIM operational restriction function is automatically set to these

data or ﬁles.

• Data or ﬁles with the UIM operational restriction function set are

accessible only when the same UIM used when downloading data or

ﬁles is inserted.

• The following data/ﬁles are restricted:

- File attached to i-mode mail

- MessageR/F with ﬁle (melodies/images) attached

- Screen memo

- Images inserted in Deco-mail or signature

- i-motion

- i-αppli (including i-αppli Stand-by display)

- Image (including animation and Flash movie)

- Chaku-Uta

/Chaku-Uta Full

song

- Melody

- Kisekae Tool

- Mail template with motion-restricted data

- Music&Video Channel program

* "Chaku-Uta" is a registered trademark of Sony Music

Entertainment Inc.

Before Using the Handset

• Hereafter, the UIM that was inserted when you downloaded or

obtained data or ﬁles is referred to as "your UIM" and any other UIM

as "another UIM".

Replacing the UIM

Your UIM

Another UIM

If the UIM used for

obtaining data or mails

is inserted, you can

browse or play back UIM

restricted data.

If the UIM used for

obtaining data or mails is

not inserted, you cannot

browse or play. back UIM

restricted data.

Note

• When you set data/ﬁle restricted with this function to the

Stand-by display, etc., the setting will return to the default

if another UIM is inserted or if no UIM is inserted. When you

re-insert your UIM, the setting will revert to the original state

you set.

• Pre-installed i-αppli programs are not restricted. However, if you

delete i-αppli and download it, the newly-downloaded i-αppli will

be restricted.

• The following data/ﬁles are not restricted with this function:

- Data/ﬁles obtained via infrared communication, a microSD

card, or data communication

- Images captured/edited using this FOMA terminal

• Even if a UIM diﬀerent from the one used when data/ﬁles were

obtained is inserted, the data/ﬁles restricted with this function

can be deleted.

• Settings that are saved on the UIM are as follows:

- Phone number display - SMS Center settings

- PIN1 and PIN2 codes - Select language

- SMS Validity Period

• If the UIM is inserted into another i-Channel-compatible terminal,

the ticker will not appear. If you press

in Stand-by and

display the channel list, the latest information is downloaded

and the ticker appears.

UIM Types

Note that the speciﬁcations of the "UIM (blue)" diﬀer from

those of the "UIM (green/white)" as follows:

Function UIM

(blue) UIM

(green/white) Reference

Number of phone

number digits to be

saved to the UIM

Phonebook

Up to 20 digits Up to 26 digits P87

WORLD WING Not available Available P408

Service Numbers Not available Available P399

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

WORLD WING

WORLD WING is DOCOMO's FOMA international roaming

service that allows you to use the same mobile phone

number registered in Japan to make and receive calls

even overseas using the UIM (green/white) and supported

terminals.

• If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1,

2005, a separate subscription is not required. However,

if you declared that you did not require this service at the

FOMA service subscription or canceled this service, a

separate subscription is required.

• If you initially subscribed to the FOMA service before

August 31, 2005 and have not subscribed to "WORLD

WING", a separate subscription is required.

• This service is not available for some billing plans.

• If your UIM (green/white) is lost or stolen overseas,

contact DOCOMO immediately and temporarily

suspend your subscription. For contact information, see

General Inquiries at the back of this manual. Call and

communication charges after the FOMA terminal was lost

or stolen are still charged to you.

Attaching/Removing Battery

Pack

• Turn oﬀ the FOMA terminal and hold it in your hand with the terminal

closed.

Attaching

While pushing the

Back cover in the

direction of

, slide it

in the direction of

and hold it up in the

direction of

With "

" side up, align

the metal contacts of

the battery pack and

the FOMA terminal

in the direction of

, then insert the

battery pack in the

direction of

• When attaching the battery

pack, push it underneath the

tab and push it down.

Tabs

Before Using the Handset

With approx. 3mm

space kept to the

Back cover, align

it to the ditch of

the FOMA terminal,

and while pushing

it in the direction

, slide it in

the direction of

and insert it until it

clicks

Back cover

Approx. 3mm

Note

• Attaching the battery pack forcibly with the UIM not properly

inserted may damage the UIM.

• Attaching the battery pack forcibly may damage the FOMA

terminal.

Removing

While pushing the

Back cover in the

direction of

, slide it

in the direction of

and hold it up in the

direction of

and

remove

Hold the battery

pack with a ﬁnger

by the recess of

the FOMA terminal,

and while pushing

the battery pack

in the direction

, hold it up in

the direction of

and remove in the

direction of

Recess

Charging

Use the speciﬁed AC adapter (optional) or DC adapter

(optional) to charge the FOMA terminal. Use the exclusive

battery pack L04 for the FOMA terminal.

■ Battery pack life

• The battery pack is a consumable. The available usage time

decreases every time the battery pack is recharged.

• When the usable time after each recharging shortens by

approximately half compared to a new battery pack, it is

recommended that the battery pack be replaced with a new one

as soon as possible. The battery pack may swell as the battery

life is near its end depending on the battery pack condition, but

it is not a malfunction.

• If you use i-αppli or videophone, etc., or watch 1Seg for long

periods of time while the battery pack is being charged, the

battery life may be shortened.

For environmental protection, be sure to

bring the exhausted battery pack to NTT

DOCOMO, the sales agent, or recycle shop.

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

■ Charging

• For details, see the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC

Adapter 01/02 (optional), FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use

(optional), and FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (optional).

• The FOMA AC Adapter 01 can be used only for 100V AC. The

FOMA AC Adapter 02 and the FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global

use support the voltage from 100V to 240V AC.

• The adapter plug shape is for 100V AC (for domestic use).

To use an AC adapter that supports from 100V to 240V AC

overseas, the compatible conversion plug adapter is required.

Do not charge the battery pack with a transformer designed for

overseas trips.

• To charge the battery pack with the AC or DC adapter, make

sure that the battery pack is inserted into the FOMA terminal.

• Plug or unplug the connector slowly and securely avoiding

excessive force.

• If you start charging the fully drained battery pack, the FOMA

terminal may not be turned on for a while.

• If you make a call or packet communication while charging, the

inside of the FOMA terminal may become hot and charging may

stop. In this case, end the functions in use and wait until the

FOMA terminal becomes cool down, and then try charging again.

■ Do not charge the battery pack for a long time (several

days) with the FOMA terminal power on.

• If the FOMA terminal is left with the power on for long periods

of time during charging, you may not be able to use the FOMA

terminal for long duration as expected and the low battery

alarm may sound, because the FOMA terminal receives the

power from the battery pack after charging is completed. In this

case, recharge the battery pack properly. Before recharging the

battery pack, disconnect the AC adapter or DC adapter from the

FOMA terminal and reconnect it.

■ Approximate battery pack usage time

The usage time may vary depending on the operating

environment and the battery pack deterioration.

Continuous

stand-by

time

FOMA/

3G 3G/GSM

setting:

Moving: Approx. 260 hours

3G/GSM

setting:

AUTO

Stationary: Approx. 310 hours

Moving: Approx. 200 hours

GSM 3G/GSM

setting:

AUTO

Stationary: Approx. 220 hours

Continuous

call time FOMA/3G Voice call: Approx. 200 minutes

Videophone call: Approx. 90 minutes

GSM Voice call: Approx. 180 minutes

1Seg watching time Approx. 140 minutes

• Continuous call time is approximate duration for calling with

normal radio wave reception level.

•

Continuous stand-by time is approximate usage time when

moving with normal radio wave reception level. Depending on

the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as

ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (poor or weak

radio wave reception level), stand-by time may be reduced by

half. During i-mode communication, the call (communication)/

stand-by time becomes shorter. Even if you do not make calls or

i-mode communications, the call (communication)/stand-by time

shortens when you compose i-mode mail, start i-αppli or i-αppli

Stand-by display, perform data communications or Multiaccess,

use the camera, play back moving picture or music, or watch

1Seg, etc.

• Depending on network conditions at your location, usage time

may become shorter than the described values.

• Continuous stand-by time in a stationary is the average usage

time in stationary state with normal radio wave reception level

with the FOMA terminal closed.

• Continuous stand-by time in a moving state is the average

usage time in a state combining "stand still", "in motion", and

"out of service area" in an area with normal radio wave reception

level with the FOMA terminal closed.

• 1Seg watching time is approximate time when watching with

normal radio wave reception level and using the Flat-plug Stereo

Earphone Set P01 (optional).

Before Using the Handset

• The call/communication or stand-by time may be reduced to

about half, or 1Seg watching time may shorten depending on

the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as

ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (poor or weak

radio wave reception level).

■ Estimated battery pack charging time

FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 Approx. 180 minutes

FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 Approx. 180 minutes

•

The estimated charging time is the duration of time to charge a fully

drained battery pack with the FOMA terminal turned oﬀ.

The charging time becomes longer with the FOMA terminal turned on.

Charging with AC Adapter and Desktop Holder

Insert the AC adapter connecter, with the inscribed arrow

side up, straight into the desktop holder.

Insert the power plug of the AC adapter into an outlet.

Align charger terminals of the desktop holder and FOMA

terminal (

), then insert in the direction of the allow

• The illumination lights up in red and charging starts. When charging

completes, the illumination turns oﬀ. (If unread mails or missed

calls exist, the illumination lights up according to "Lighting LED"

settings.)

After charging completes, grasp the head of the FOMA terminal

and lift it out while holding the desktop holder with ﬁngers.

Power plug Charger terminal

Desktop holder

100V AC

outlet

Release buttons

Illumination

Connector

Inscription

Charging only with AC Adapter

Open the external connector terminal cover (

) and ﬂip it

over (

). Then, insert the AC adapter connector, with the

inscribed arrow side up, straight into the FOMA terminal

external connector.

• The illumination lights up in red and charging starts. When charging

completes, the illumination turns oﬀ. (If unread mails or missed

calls exist, the illumination lights up according to "Lighting LED"

settings.)

Insert the power plug of the AC adapter into an outlet.

After charging completes, pull the AC adapter connector

straight out while pressing the release buttons.

External

connector

terminal cover Release buttons

Connector

Inscription

• Make sure to insert/pull out the AC adapter connector straight

with the correct side up. Forcibly trying to remove the adapter may

cause damage.

DC adapter (optional)

The DC adapter supplies power to the FOMA terminal from

a cigarette lighter socket (12V/24V) of a car with the

battery pack inserted in the FOMA terminal.

For details, see the FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 instruction

manual.

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Note

• When the power is turned on, you can set the FOMA terminal

to sound the charge start tone or charge complete tone. The

setting of "Popup tone" is applied.→P101

• You can set the FOMA terminal to charge with the Display

backlight on.→P110

• While charging, the battery level icon changes in the order of

→ → → in an animation display. After charging

completes, lights up.

• A fuse (2A) is a consumable item. Purchase a replacement fuse

from a car parts shop.

Battery level

Checking Battery Level

An icon indicating the battery level (appears at the top of the

screen).

: The battery is full.

: The battery is getting low.

: The battery is almost running out. Charge

the battery.

: The battery is almost running out. The

FOMA terminal will automatically turn oﬀ

in a moment. Charge the battery.

Note

• When an icon indicating battery level is or , camera

functions (including the bar code reader) and infrared

communication functions are unavailable.

• When the color of the icon indicating battery level is other

than and you activate 1Seg/MUSIC player, the notiﬁcation

indicating the low battery level appears (may not appear when

the battery level is ).

Checking Battery Level with Sound and

Display

The battery level can be checked with display and sound.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Battery level"

A conﬁrmation appears and a tone sounds

according to the battery level. The battery

level screen disappears in approximately

3 seconds.

Three beeps : The battery is full.

Two beeps : The battery is getting low.

One beep : The battery is almost running

out. Charge the battery.

Note

• When "Dial sound" is set to (Silent) or "Manner mode" is

activated, you will not hear the beep.

When the battery is running out

A message, "Low battery. Charge or change

battery" appears and the battery alert tone

sounds. (Depending on the settings, the tone

may not sound.) at the top the screen

blinks. After a little while, the FOMA terminal

turns oﬀ automatically.

Before Using the Handset

Power ON/OFF

Turning Power ON/OFF

Turning Power ON

When the FOMA terminal is turned oﬀ,

(for 2+ seconds)

After the wake-up screen appears, the Stand-

by display appears.

Stand-by display

Note

• If the UIM is not inserted, the message, "Insert UIM" appears.

• When replacing the UIM, enter 4- to 8-digit Terminal security

code after turning the power on. When entered the correct

Terminal security code, the Stand-by display appears. If failed

to enter the code 5 times in a row, the power is turned oﬀ. (You

can turn the power on again.)

When "PIN1 code request" is set to "ON"

The PIN1 code entry screen appears. When

the PIN1 (P119) code is entered, the Wake-up

screen and then the Stand-by display appear.

You can make emergency calls (to 110, 119,

or 118) even while the PIN1 entry screen

appears.→P120

When "Lock all" is activated

The Terminal security code entry is required.

When "圏外" appears at the top of the screen

The FOMA terminal is out of service area or in a poor signal area.

Move to a location where the icon indicating the signal strength

appears. The signal strength is indicated in 4 levels as follows:

→ → →

Strong Weak

Viewing the Welcome mail

By default, " Welcome Mail " "Welcome ドコモ動画 " is

saved.

Press

repeatedly to display the mail. Alternatively, perform

operations in "Displaying Received Mail" (P154) to display the

mail.

Turning Power OFF

When the FOMA terminal is turned on,

(for 2+ seconds) in Stand-by

The exit screen appears and the power is turned oﬀ.

Before Using the Handset

Select language

Changing Screen Display to

English or Korean

You can switch the display language on the FOMA terminal to

Japanese, English, or Korean.

▶ "設定(Settings)" ▶ "Select language" ▶

"日本語(Japanese)"/"English"/"한국어(Korean)"

Note

• When the language is switched to English or Korean, "Select

language" is displayed as "マルチリンガル".

• The setting of this function is stored on the FOMA terminal

and UIM in use. If another UIM is inserted, the setting on the

inserted UIM takes priority. If the UIM with Korean language set

is inserted into the Korean-incompatible FOMA terminal, the

display language is set to Japanese or English.

Making Initial Settings

After the FOMA terminal is turned on, make initial settings

of "Set Date&Time", "Change security code", "KeyPad Sound

(Keypad tone)", and "Calibration".

Turn the power on ▶ "Yes"

Set the date&time (P53)

Set the Terminal Security code (P120)

Set the keypad tone (Select "ON" or "OFF")

• If "OFF" is selected, the keypad tone volume is set to

(Silent).→P101

Adjust the touch panel (P115)

• When initial settings complete, the software update

conﬁrmation may appear. Perform operations according to on-

screen instructions.

Note

• While All lock, etc. is activated, the initial settings function is

not activated.

• To cancel the initial settings, press

. When the power

is turned on next time, the rest of the settings resumes.

Before Using the Handset

Set Date&Time

Setting Date and Time

You can set the FOMA terminal to update the time

automatically. Also, you can set the local time zone, daylight

saving, and date&time.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Date&Time" ▶ "Set

Date&Time"

Date&Time

settings screen

Perform the following operations

[Auto time adjust]

Set whether to adjust the time on the FOMA terminal based on the

time information from the network.

ON : Adjust the date and time automatically.

OFF : Does not adjust the date and time automatically.

[Local time zone]*

Set the time zone for the date and time.

Press

[<Prev.] or

[Next>] to switch the list by page.

[Daylight saving]*

Set the daylight saving time.

[Set date&time]*

Set date and time manually.

• You can set the date between 1980/01/01 and 2099/12/31.

* Available when "Auto time adjust" is set to "OFF".

[Done]

Note

• Time or time diﬀerences can be adjusted when the power is

turned on.

• If time is not adjusted for a while after the power is turned on,

turn the power on again.

• Time may not be adjusted depending on the signal strength,

etc.

• When using the FOMA terminal overseas, the time or time zone

may not be adjusted depending on the network service to use.

Also, the time may not be properly displayed. Set the time of

the location where you stay with the World time.→P363

• An error of a few seconds may occur.

Before Using the Handset

Caller ID notiﬁcation

Notifying the Other Party of

Your Phone Number

You can set the FOMA terminal to show/hide your caller ID

on the network in advance.

• Your caller ID (phone number) is important information. Please take

care when sending your caller ID.

• Caller ID notiﬁcation cannot be set when "圏外" appears.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Caller ID

notiﬁcation" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Activate/Deactivate]

Set to show/hide the caller ID.

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status.

Note

• Your caller ID is displayed only when the other party's phone

allows the display of caller ID.

• You can set the Caller ID notiﬁcation for each call.→P66

Own Number

Checking Your Own Phone

Number

You can check your phone number (own number) saved on

the UIM.

▶ "Own Number"

To display the saved detail information

Pressing

[Detail] and entering

the Terminal security code on the

Own number screen displays the Own

number detail screen. You can also

save information other than the own

number.→P360

• If a phone number other than your own

number, mail address, or URL is saved,

you can make a call, create i-mode mail,

or access a site by moving the cursor

and pressing

Own number

screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

Making Calls/Videophone Calls

Videophone Calls ････････････････････････････････････ 56

Making a Call/Videophone Call ･･････････････････････ 56

Making a Call Using Redial/Received Calls ･････････ 60

Making a Call Using Recent Calls ･･････Recent calls 64

Using Chaku-moji ･･･････････････････････ Chaku-moji 64

Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for Each Call

････････････････････････････････････････････184/186

Sending Touch-tone Signals ･････････････････ Pause 67

Making International Calls ･･･････････ WORLD CALL 67

Setting Preﬁx to Be Added to a Phone Number

･･･････････････････････････････････････････ Preﬁx dial 70

Making a Call Specifying a Sub Address

････････････････････････････････ Sub address setting 71

Setting an Alarm until Connection is Reestablished

････････････････････････････････････ Reconnect alarm 71

Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear

･････････････････････････････････････ Noise reduction 72

Receiving Calls/Videophone Calls

Receiving a Call/Videophone Call ･･･････････････････ 72

Setting How to Answer Incoming Voice Calls

･･･････････････････････････････････････ Answer mode 74

Ending/Holding Call by Closing the FOMA Terminal

････････････････････････････････････････Close setting 74

Adjusting Earpiece Volume ･･･････ Receiver volume 74

When You Can/Could not Answer a

Voice/Videophone Call

Putting a Call on Hold when You Cannot Answer

Immediately ･････････････････････････････････Holding 75

Setting Answer Holding Tone ･･････････On hold tone 75

Setting Holding Tone･･･････････････････Holding tone 75

Using Public Mode ･･････････････････････････････････ 76

Checking Missed Calls ･･････････････････ Missed call 77

Recording Voice Messages when You Cannot

Answer the Call ･･･････････････････ Record message 77

Recording a Message when You Cannot Answer

Incoming Call ･･････････････ Quick Record Message 79

Playing/Deleting Record Message

････････････････････････Play/Delete record message 79

Videophone Settings

Setting Image to Send ･･････････････････････････････ 80

Changing Videophone Settings ･････Videophone set 80

Setting Answer Method of Videophone Call during

i-mode ････････････････････････ V-phone while packet 81

Voice/Videophone Calls

Videophone Calls

The videophone call can be used with a mobile phone that

supports DOCOMO's videophone call.

• DOCOMO's videophone call complies with "ISO 3GPP

standardized

3G-324M

". DOCOMO's videophone calls cannot connect with

mobile phones that support a diﬀerent videophone call system.

*1 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project)

The regional standards organization for developing common

technical speciﬁcations for the third generation mobile

communication systems (IMT-2000).

*2 3G-324M

The international standard of 3rd Generation Mobile

Videophone.

• There are 2 diﬀerent videophone call communication rates, 64K

(64kbps) and 32K (32kbps), this FOMA terminal cannot use

videophone call at 32K.

• This FOMA terminal does not support remote monitoring.

• The battery pack life may shorten if you make a videophone call

for a long time while charging. The power may turn oﬀ during a

videophone call, if you make the call with the charging adapter

connected when the battery level is low.

Videophone Call Screen Components

Main window

The other party's image appears by

default.

Sub window

Your image appears by default.

Call duration

Displayed in the format of minutes:

seconds.

Settings icons

/ Zoom adjustment→P59

/ Display Hands-free ON/OFF

state→P57

/ Picture mode (Camera image/Substitute image)→P59

Making a Call/Videophone Call

Enter a phone number

• Up to 80 digits can be entered and

displayed.

• Enter a number from "0" to "99" to

view the Phonebook entry of the

corresponding memory number.→P97

• Start from the area code even for a

local call.

•

[Save]: Add a new or extra phone

number to the Phonebook.→P89 Phone number

entry screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

To make a voice call

[Call]

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

A ringing tone sounds

from the earpiece, and the

"Calling..." dialing screen is

displayed until the other

party answers the call.

•

[Spk ON/Spk OFF]:

Switch Hands-free ON

and OFF.

• Pressing a dial key,

during a call

allows you to send touch-

tone signals. Voice call screen Videophone call

screen

During a video call

The following icons show the state of the settings on the

Voice call screen.

• / Display Hands-free ON/OFF State

• / Mute/Unmute→P59

• / Receiver volume→P74

During a videophone call

•

[Image/Camera]: Switch the image to send between the

substitute image and the camera image.

To terminate the call,

Note

• If you hear the voice guidance for the Caller ID request, make

the call again sending your caller ID.

• You cannot switch between a voice/videophone call during a

call using this FOMA terminal.

• Closing the FOMA terminal during a call terminates the call

when "Close setting" is set to "End the call", and holds the call

when set to "On Hold". However, if the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected, closing the

FOMA terminal does not terminate the call or place the call on

hold.

• The low battery alert sounds from the earpiece if the battery

becomes low during a call. You can continue the call; however,

the call will be terminated momentarily and the power is

automatically turned oﬀ.

• This FOMA terminal does not support Hands-free devices via a

USB connection (such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01).

• A call cannot be connected if you make a videophone call to a

mobile phone that does not support videophone calls, or if the

other party's mobile phone is out of service area or turned oﬀ.

If you make a videophone call to a phone that does not support

videophone calls when you have set "Auto redial as voice"

to "ON", the call will be disconnected before the connection

is established, and the FOMA terminal automatically redials

the number as a voice call. However, if the other party uses

an ISDN 64K connection, or ISDN videophone that does not

support the 3G-324M standard (as of June, 2009), or you

dialed a wrong number, the above action may not be taken.

Note that communication charges may apply.

• If you make a videophone call to an emergency number such as

"110", "119", or "118", a voice call will be made automatically.

• Incoming i-mode mail or MessageR/F during a videophone call is

stored at the i-mode center. SMS can be received even during a

videophone call.

• Digital call charge applies for sending the substitute image.

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Correcting an entered phone number

To delete an entered digit, use

to move the cursor to a digit

to delete, and press

Screen display during dialing

The other party's name is displayed if the other party's phone

number is saved in the Phonebook.

If a videophone call could not be made

The following messages appear if a videophone call could not

be made (depending on the other party's mobile phone model or

subscribed network services, the displayed messages may not

describe the actual situation).

Message Description

Check number,

then redial The phone number is not valid.

Busy The other party is on a call (this message

may appear when the other party's

mobile phone is performing packet

communication depending on the mobile

phone).

The other party is in packet

communication.

Out of service

area/power oﬀ The other party's mobile phone is either

out of service area or turned oﬀ.

Set Caller ID to ON The caller ID was not sent (when the call

is made to the number for visualnet, etc.).

Your call is being

forwarded The call is being forwarded.

Redial using voice

call The Call forwarding service is activated,

and the forwarding destination does not

support videophone calls.

Upper limit has

been exceeded.

Connection failed

Your usage fees have exceeded the limit

of your plan (Type limit or Family Wide

limit).

Message Description

Please make your

call from i-mode The videophone call was not dialed

from the oﬃcial i-mode site information

provider (when the call is made to V-live).

Failed to connect Set "Caller ID notiﬁcation" to "Notify" and

redial.

• This message may appear for other

reasons, as well.

Phone Number Entry Screen Sub Menu

Phone number entry screen (P56) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Add to phonebook]

Add an entry to the Phonebook.→P88

[Video phone call]

Make a videophone call.

[Caller ID]

Set whether to notify your caller ID when you make a call.→P66

[Int. call]

After selecting the country code to make a call, "009130010"

(WORLD CALL) and the country code are inserted at the beginning of

the phone number.→P67

[Select preﬁx]

Add preﬁx number at the beginning of the entered phone number.

This can be added only once.→P68

[Multi number]

If you subscribe to Multi Number, select the number to use when

making a call.→P401

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Chaku-moji]

Send Chaku-moji.→P65

Voice Call Screen Sub Menu

Voice call screen (P57) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[New call]

Place the active call on hold, and dial another party.

[End active call]

Terminate the call.

[Hold]

Place the active call on hold. To cancel, press

[Active].

[Mute/Unmute]

Enable/Disable to mute your voice on the other party's mobile phone.

[Send my info]

Create i-mode mail with your number (Own number) entered in the

message text.→P138

[Search phonebook]

Search for a Phonebook entry.→P92

*1 Not available if you do not subscribe to Call waiting service.

*2 Not available when the Phonebook is accessed. To use this

function, terminate applicable functions from the Task list

screen.→P350

Videophone Call Screen Sub Menu

Videophone call screen (P57) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[End call]

Terminate the call.

[Hold]

Place the active call on hold. To cancel, press

[Active].

If you press

[Image] to cancel the hold, the substitute image is

sent to the other party.

[Substitute image/Camera image]

Switch the image to send between the substitute image and the

camera image.

[Camera settings]

Conﬁgure the camera for videophone calls. Use

to select an icon,

and use

to select an item. After setting, press

[Close].

Zoom : Zoom the camera image (×1/×2).

Brightness : Adjust the brightness (High/Medium/Low) of the

camera image.

Night mode : Set this when using the camera in a dark place, etc.

[Videophone set]

Set the display and lighting for videophone calls. After setting, press

to return to the Videophone call screen.

Display setting

Other - Me : Display the other party's image on the main window

and your image on the sub window.

Me - Other : Display your image on the main window and the other

party's image on the sub window.

Other only : Display only the other party's image.

Me only : Display only your image.

Light

Always ON : Always light up during a call.

Terminal setting : Use "Backlight" settings.→P110

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Screen size]

Set the display size of the main window.

[Visual preference]

Set quality of the image sent to the other party.

Prefer img qual : The image with maximized image quality is

sent. This option is eﬀective when there is little

motion.

Normal : Set standard quality and motion for the sent

image.

Prefer motion spd : Set priority to motion for the sent image.

This option is eﬀective when there is a lot of

motions.

[Switch camera]

Switch the camera to send the image to the other party between the

Inner camera and the Outer camera.

[Search phonebook]*

Search for a Phonebook entry.→P92

[Own number]

Display your phone number (Own number).

* Not available when the Phonebook is accessed. To use this

function, terminate applicable functions from the Task list

screen.→P350

Making a Call Using Redial/

Received Calls

Redial and the Received call logs can be used to make calls.

Also, the Recent calls (both sent and received) can be used

to make calls.

Redial calls

Calling the Same Party Again

Redial maintains a list of the last 30 voice or videophone

calls. The phone number and the calling date and time are

recorded in the call logs.

• If more than 30 calls are made, the log is deleted from the oldest.

• If you call the same phone number repeatedly, only the latest one

is recorded.

Stand-by display ▶

Name saved in the Phonebook

If the caller's name is not saved

in the Phonebook, the phone

number is displayed.

Outgoing phone call type

Make a voice call

Make a videophone call

Call date and time

Dialing an international call

Make a call overseas from

Japan Redial list screen

Make a call from overseas during international roaming

Make an international call from overseas during

international roaming

Voice/Videophone Calls

Move the cursor to the number to redial ▶

[Detail]

Outgoing phone call type

The name saved in the Phonebook

If the number is not saved in the

Phonebook, "Unregistered" is

displayed.

The other party's phone number

"Caller ID" setting when dialing

Appear when you make a call with

the caller ID (P58) set to "Notify".

Multi Number used for dialing*

Display the Multi Number used

to dial by the registered name in

"Number setting" (P401).

* Appear when you subscribe to

the Multi Number service.

Redial detail

screen

Call date and time

Call duration

Outgoing international call

Make a call overseas from Japan

Make a call from overseas during international roaming

Make an international call from overseas during

international roaming

To make a voice call

[Call]

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

Note

• You can make a voice call by selecting an entry on the Redial

list screen and pressing

, and make a videophone call by

pressing

[V. phone].

•

If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the Phonebook,

the name found ﬁrst in the Reading search is displayed.

• A call dialed with "184" or "186" is recorded as a separate

Redial entry.

• Press

[Mail] on the Redial list screen/Redial detail screen to

create i-mode mail to the phone number on the selected Redial

entry.

Redial List Screen/Redial Detail Screen Sub Menu

Redial list screen (P60)/Redial detail screen

(P61) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Call function]

Voice call : Make a voice call.

Videophone call : Make a videophone call.

Customize call : Change the redial phone number and make a call.

[Mail]

Compose mail : Create i-mode mail addressed to the redial phone

number.→P138

• If the mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the

saved mail address is used as a recipient.

Compose SMS : Create SMS addressed to the redial phone number.

[Add to phonebook]

Add the redial phone number to the Phonebook.→P88

[Change list]*

Switch logs to display.

Recent mails : Display the Recent mail list screen.→P166

Recent calls : Display the Recent call list screen.→P64

Received mail : Display the Received mail list screen.→P166

Received calls : Display the Received call list screen.→P62

Sent mail : Display the Sent mail list screen.→P166

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Delete]

Delete the selected redial log.

• Multiple redial logs can be deleted on the list screen.

Delete one*: Delete the selected redial log.

Selected*: Select and delete multiple logs.

▶ Mark logs to delete ▶

[Delete]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all*: Delete all redial logs.

* Not displayed on the detail screen.

Received calls

Making a Call Using Received Calls

The Received call logs maintains a list of the last 30

incoming calls and videophone calls. Phone numbers and

received dates/times are stored in a call log.

• If more than 30 calls are received, the most recent 30 calls are

retained.

Stand-by display ▶

Received calls

list screen

The party's name saved in the Phonebook

If the caller's name is not saved, the phone number is

displayed. If the caller did not send the caller ID, the reason

for no caller ID is displayed.

Incoming phone call type

/ Answered/Missed voice call (including rejected calls)

/ Answered/Missed videophone call (including rejected

calls)

Received date and time

Incoming international call

Incoming international call from overseas

Incoming call during international roaming overseas

Incoming international call during international roaming

overseas

Received Chaku-moji

Move the cursor to a log entry ▶

[Detail]

Incoming phone call type

The name saved in the Phonebook

If the phone number is not in

the Phonebook, "Unregistered"

is displayed, and if the caller ID

was not received, "User unset" is

displayed.

The other party's phone number

Multi Number received*

Display the received Multi Number

as the registered name in "Number

setting" (P401).

* Appear when you subscribe to the

Multi Number service.

Received calls

detail screen

Received date and time

Call duration/Ring time (Missed call)

Received message with Chaku-moji

Incoming international call

Incoming international call from overseas

Incoming call during international roaming overseas

Incoming international call during international roaming

overseas

Voice/Videophone Calls

To make a voice call

[Call]

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

Note

• You can make a voice call by selecting an entry on the

Received calls list screen and pressing

, and make a

videophone call by pressing

[V. phone].

• The reason for no caller ID is displayed in the log entry of the

call without caller ID.→P129

• If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the

Phonebook, the name found ﬁrst in the Reading search is

displayed.

• A call log for the number that used dial-in service may be

displayed diﬀerently from the actual number.

• Press

[Mail] on the Received calls list/detail screen to

create i-mode mail to the phone number in the selected

received call log entry.

Received Calls List Screen/Received Calls Detail

Screen Sub Menu

aReceived calls list screen (P62)/Received

call detail screen (P62) ▶ M[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Call function]

Voice call : Make a voice call.

Videophone call : Make a videophone call.

Customize call : Change the phone number in Received calls and

make a call.

[Mail]

Compose mail : Create i-mode mail addressed to the phone number

in Received calls.→P138

• If the mail address is saved in Phonebook, the

saved mail address is used as a recipient.

Compose SMS : Crease SMS addressed to the phone number in

Received calls.

[Add to phonebook]

Add the phone number in Received calls to the Phonebook.→P88

[Change list]*

Switch logs to display.

Recent mails : Display the Recent mail list screen.→P166

Recent calls : Display the Recent call list screen.→P64

Received mail : Display the Received mail list screen.→P166

Redial : Display the Redial list screen.→P60

Sent mail : Display the Sent mail list screen.→P166

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Delete]

Delete the selected received call log.

• Multiple redial logs can be deleted on the list screen.

Delete one*: Delete the selected received call log.

Selected*: Select and delete multiple logs.

▶ Mark logs to delete ▶

[Delete]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all*: Delete all received call logs.

* Not displayed on the detail screen.

Recent calls

Making a Call Using Recent Calls

Up to 60 incoming and outgoing calls can be recorded in

"Recent".

• If more than 60 calls are recorded, the most recent 60 calls are

retained.

Stand-by display ▶ Use

to display "Recent"

For further operations and the descriptions of screen

components, refer to Redial calls (P60) and Received calls

(P62) sections.

Note

• The Recent call list screen/detail screen sub menu operations

are the same as the Redial and Received call list screen/detail

screen.→P61, P63

Chaku-moji

Using Chaku-moji

Send a message at the same time when making a voice or

videophone call to tell the other party the point to talk.

• Up to 10 full-pitch/half-pitch characters, pictographs and symbols

can be sent.

•

Charges apply on the sender side, and not apply on the receiver side.

• For details about Chaku-moji or its compatible model, visit the

DOCOMO's web site or see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network

Services]".

Chaku-moji

• While All lock is activated or Phonebook function is locked with

Data access lock, Chaku-moji is not displayed even if it is received.

After canceling the lock, the message is displayed on the Received

call detail screen.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Editing and Setting Message

Saving Message

• Up to 10 messages can be saved.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶

"Chaku-moji" ▶ "Create message"

Move the cursor to the number to save or edit

▶

[Edit] ▶ Enter or edit a message

• To delete the saved Chaku-moji, move the cursor to Chaku-moji

to delete ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Delete"/"Delete all" ▶ "Yes".

Setting whether to Display Received Chaku-moji

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶

"Chaku-moji" ▶ "Message display set" ▶

Select an item

Display all messages : Display Chaku-moji from all senders.

Only number in PB : Display Chaku-moji only from senders

saved in the Phonebook.

Calls with caller ID : Display Chaku-moji only from senders

with caller ID.

Hide all messages : Do not display Chaku-moji.

Dialing with Message

Enter a phone number ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Chaku-moji" ▶ Perform the following

operations

• You can send Chaku-moji to the party saved on the Phonebook

by entering a memory number with Quick dial (P97) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Chaku-moji".

[Create message]

Enter a message.

[Select message]

Select from saved messages.

[Sent message]

Select from sent messages. Up to latest 10 messages are saved.

[Call]

To make a videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Note

• When the recipient received Chaku-moji, "Transmission

completed" appears and transmission charge applies.

• Under the following conditions on the receiver side,

"Transmission failed" appears and transmission charge does

not apply.

- Chaku-moji incompatible terminal

- Chaku-moji restricting to be sent in Message display setting

- Staying overseas*

- While Public mode (Drive mode) is set*

- When the answer time of Record message is set to 0 sec*

- Out of service area or the power is turned oﬀ*

* The sent result does not appear.

• Depending on the signal conditions, the sent result may not

appear even when Chaku-moji arrived at the other party's

terminal. In this case, transmission charges apply.

• Chaku-moji cannot be sent/received for overseas usage.

184/186

Setting Caller ID to Send/

Not to Send for Each Call

There are 2 ways to show/hide the caller ID for each call:

adding "184"/"186", and using the sub menu on the Phone

number entry screen.

Adding 184/186 to Send/Not to Send

Caller ID

Enter "184" (Do not notify)/"186" (Notify) ▶

Enter the phone number

To make a voice call

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

Using Sub Menu to Send/Not to Send

Caller ID

Example: To use the Phone number entry screen sub menu

Enter the phone number ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Caller ID" ▶ "Not notify"/"Notify"/"Cancel"

To make a voice call

[Call]

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

Note

• You can set to show/hide the caller ID to the network in

advance.→P54

Voice/Videophone Calls

Pause

Sending Touch-tone Signals

Enter "P" and a number after the phone number and make a

voice call to send the number after "P" as touch tone signal

(DTMF). You can use this for services such as online ticket

reservation or bank balance inquiry.

• The signal may not be received depending on the device on the

receiving side.

Enter the phone number ▶ Press

3 times

and enter "P" ▶ Enter the number to send ▶

After the call is connected, the number after "P" is displayed and

press

to send the displayed number.

WORLD CALL

Making International Calls

WORLD CALL is an international call service available on

DOCOMO mobile phones.

If you subscribe to FOMA service, also subscribe "WORLD

CALL" together. (However a customer who subscribe to the

service without "WORLD CALL" is the exception.)

• This service is available in approximately 240 countries and regions

around the world.

• Charges for "WORLD CALL" are added to the monthly FOMA service

call charges.

• No initial fee nor ﬁxed monthly charges apply.

• This service is not available with some billing plans.

• Even if the caller ID notiﬁcation is set, the caller ID may not be

notiﬁed or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on

the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call

from the Received calls screen.

• For details on WORLD CALL, contact "General Inquiries" at the back

of this manual.

• When using international carriers other than DOCOMO, please

contact the carrier directly.

You can make an "International videophone call" to parties who

use a videophone call-compatible terminal of an international

carrier that supports FOMA's videophone call by pressing

[Menu] ▶ "Video phone call" after the following dialing

procedures.

• For information on the countries where connection can be made

and telecommunication carriers, visit the DOCOMO International

Services website.

• The other party's image displayed on the FOMA terminal may

blur, or the call may not be connected depending on the other

party's terminal.

Making an International Call by Entering

the Phone Number

Enter a phone number in the following order.

Enter "010 - Country code - Area code (City

code) - Other party's phone number"

• If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few

countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed).

• Alternatively, enter 009130 - 010 - Country code - Area code

(City code) - Other party's phone number.

To make an international videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Voice/Videophone Calls

Making an International Call Using "+"

Entering "+" at the beginning of a phone number replaces "+"

with an international access code automatically.

• The WORLD CALL (009130010) is set to be added automatically

by default.→P69

Press

(for 1+ seconds) to enter "+" ▶

Enter "Country code - Area code (City code)

- Phone Number"

• You can also press

twice to input "+".

• If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few

countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed).

Dial : Make an international call

after converting "+" into an

international access code.

Original number : Make an international call

to the number entered on

the terminal.

Cancel : Cancel dialing.

Dialed call

conﬁrmation

screen

To make an international videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Select a dialing method

Note

• This option is available only inside the FOMA network service

area.

• If the phone number starts with "+81", "+" will not be converted

into an international access code.

Making an International Call Adding

International Access Code

You can select an international access code from the sub

menu and add it to the entered phone number.

Enter "Country code - Area code (City code) -

Other party's phone number"

• If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few

countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed.)

[Menu] ▶ "Select preﬁx" ▶ Select an

international access code

The selected international access code is inserted at the

beginning of the entered phone number.

To make an international videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Note

• By default, WORLD CALL (009130010) is registered to

"Preﬁx 1".→P70

Voice/Videophone Calls

Making an International Call Easily

The International dial settings can be changed.

• Even if the caller ID notiﬁcation is set, the caller ID may not be

notiﬁed or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on

the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call

using the Received calls.

Setting to Add the International Access Code

Automatically <Auto assist>

You can set whether to add an international access code

automatically instead of "+" when you make a call by entering

"+" at the beginning of the phone number.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International dial" ▶

"Auto assist" ▶ "Auto"/"OFF"

Auto : Convert "+" automatically to the number speciﬁed in

IDD preﬁx.

OFF : "+" is not converted.

Setting International Access Codes <IDD preﬁx>

When "Auto assist" is set to "Auto", specify the international

access code to be added automatically. Save 1 country code

required when you make an international call.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International dial" ▶ "IDD

preﬁx" ▶ Perform the following operations

[IDD preﬁx name]

Enter IDD preﬁx name of International call used for Auto assist.

[IDD preﬁx code]

Enter IDD preﬁx code of International call used for Auto assist.

Setting to Add Assist of Country Code

Automatically <Auto international dial>

Set whether to automatically replace leading "0", if entered,

of a phone number with "+ Country code" during international

roaming. Also, you can specify the Country code to be added

automatically.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International dial" ▶

"Auto Int'l dial" ▶ Perform the following

operations

Auto international

dial screen

[Auto Int'l dial]

Set whether to add a Country code automatically.

[Country code]

Set a Country code to add.

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Note

• Country code is not added automatically in the following cases.

- When entered "+" at the beginning of the phone number

- When selecting a phone number from a message body or site,

etc. and dialing

- When dialing from i-αppli

Registering a Country Code <Country code list>

Up to 50 Country codes required to make an international

call can be saved.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International dial" ▶

"Country code list"

Country code list

screen

Select unregistered item ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Country name]

Save a name of the Country code. Up to 7 full-pitch or 14 half-pitch

characters can be entered.

[Country code]

Save up to 5 digits.

[Done]

• The newly saved Country code is displayed ﬁrst, and the

already saved codes are displayed after the second entry.

Editing Country code

Select the Country code to edit on the Country code list screen

▶ "Edit" ▶

[Done].

Deleting Country code

Select the Country code to delete on the Country code list

screen ▶ "Delete" ▶ "Yes".

Note

• You can also edit the pre-installed Country codes.

• When "Auto Int'l dial" is set in "Auto Int'l dial" (P69), you cannot

delete the Country code speciﬁed in "Country code".

Preﬁx dial

Setting Preﬁx to Be Added to a

Phone Number

Up to 3 numbers (preﬁxes) to be added to the beginning

of the phone number such as an international access code,

"184", or "186" can be saved.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Preﬁx dial"

Select a Preﬁx entry ﬁeld ▶ Enter the number

▶

[Set]

• Up to 10 digits can be entered as a preﬁx.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Note

• Do not include pauses, etc. to the preﬁx. If they are present, the

call cannot be connected with preﬁx.

Sub address setting

Making a Call Specifying a Sub

Address

You can set whether digits after "

" is identiﬁed as a sub

address when entering a phone number with "

". A sub

address is used to access a speciﬁc device connected to an

ISDN line or to select contents on "V-live".

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

Move the cursor to "Sub address setting" ▶

[ON/OFF]

ON : Identify the address after "

" as a sub address.

OFF : The address after "

" is not identiﬁed as a sub address.

Note

• "

" is not identiﬁed as a delimiter of a sub address if:

- "

" is entered at the beginning of the phone number.

- A speciﬁc number such as "184" or "186" is entered at the

beginning of the phone number and "

" is entered right after it.

Reconnect alarm

Setting an Alarm until

Connection is Reestablished

You can set an alarm that keeps sounding until a voice

or videophone call is reconnected when the call was

disconnected due to weak signals.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Call

feature" ▶ "Reconnect alarm" ▶ Select an

Alarm

Alarm OFF : Mute an alarm.

Low alarm : Set to low alarm.

High alarm : Set to high alarm.

Note

• Available duration for reconnection varies depending on the

status of usage and signal.

• If the signal suddenly worsens, the call may be disconnected

without the alarm sounding.

• The call charge applies during the reconnection attempt.

• While the call is disconnected, the other party hears nothing.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Noise reduction

Reducing Surrounding Noise to

Make Voice Clear

Noise reduction suppresses background noises. The other

party can hear your voice clearer even in a noisy place.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Call

feature" ▶ Move the cursor to "Noise reduction"

▶

[ON/OFF]

ON : Activate Noise reduction.

OFF : Deactivate Noise reduction.

Receiving a Call/Videophone Call

An incoming call arrives

The ring tone sounds.

•

: Place the call on

hold.→P75

During a videophone

call

•

[Image]: Answer

the call using the

substitute image.

Videophone call

incoming call

screen

Voice call

incoming call

screen

Answer the call.

•

[Spk ON/Spk OFF]: Switch Hands-free ON and OFF.

• Press a dial key,

, or

during a call to send touch-tone

signals.

During a videophone call

•

[Image/Camera]: Switch the image to send between the

alternate image and the camera image.

To terminate the call,

When the caller sent the caller ID

If the caller is registered in the Phonebook, the phone number and

registered name are displayed.

When the caller did not send the caller ID

The reason for no caller ID is displayed instead of a phone

number.→P129

Note

• The incoming call actions such as a ring tone or vibration vary

depending on the settings or the saved information in the

Phonebook.→P84, P100, P102

• When "Manner mode" is activated, the ring tone does not sound.

However, if "Original manner" is activated, incoming call is

notiﬁed according to the settings.→P105

• Closing the FOMA terminal during a call terminates the call

when "Close setting" is set to "End the call", and holds the call

when it is set to "On hold". However, if the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected, closing the

FOMA terminal does not terminate the call or place the call on

hold.

Voice/Videophone Calls

• If you subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting or Call forwarding

service, and set "Arrival call act" to "Answer" and "Set in-call

arrival act" to "Activate", in-call arrival tone sounds when a call

arrives during another call. If the tone sounds during a call, the

network services are available.→P400

However, the tone does not sound while a call is placed on

response hold, or a message is being recorded (P78) because

calls cannot arrive under these situations.

• When the Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, an incoming

call is not indicated (the ring tone does not sound, either).

Also, even if a call arrives when the display is turned oﬀ, the

display backlight will not be turned on.

• If you subscribe to Multi Number, the name registered in

"Number setting" (P401) appears according to the number

received.

• You can enable "Set mute ring(sec.)" to delay the incoming call

actions for a call made from the other party not saved in the

Phonebook or without the caller ID.→P130

• Use the following functions to reject incoming calls from a

caller not saved in the Phonebook or from a speciﬁc caller.

- Reject unknown→P130

- Reject on List→P127

• You cannot switch between a voice/videophone call during a

call using this FOMA terminal.

• The low battery alert sounds from the earpiece if the battery

becomes low during a call. You can continue the call; however,

the call will be terminated momentarily and the power is

automatically turned oﬀ.

• This FOMA terminal does not support Hands-free devices via a

USB connection (such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01).

• When "Answer mode" is set to "Slide up", you can answer a call

by opening the FOMA terminal. If set to "Any key answer", you

can answer a call by pressing a dial key,

, or

.→P74

• When the Voice mail service is activated with a videophone call,

an SMS notiﬁes you of a new record message.

• Even if the Call forwarding service is activated, an incoming

videophone call is not forwarded if the forwarding destination

is not a videophone device supporting 3G-324M. Check the

capabilities of the forwarding destination device before setting

Call forwarding.

• Incoming i-mode mail or MessageR/F during a videophone call is

stored at the i-mode center. SMS can be received even during a

videophone call.

• You cannot receive videophone calls of the communication

speed of 32K (32kbps).

Incoming Call Screen Sub Menu

[Menu] on the Incoming call screen (P72) ▶

Perform the following operations

[Voice mail]

Connect the incoming call to the Voice mail service center.

[Call rejection]

Reject an incoming call and hang up.

[Call forwarding]

Forward an incoming call to the speciﬁed number.

[Silent]

Stop the ring tone or vibration.

Press

to answer the call.

*1 Not available if you do not subscribe to the Voice mail service.

*2 Not available if you do not subscribe to the Call forwarding

service or you have not speciﬁed a forwarding number.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Answer mode

Setting How to Answer Incoming

Voice Calls

You can set to answer an incoming call by opening the FOMA

terminal (Slide up) or pressing a dial key (Any key answer)

other than

[Answer].

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Answer mode" ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Slide up]

Answer a call by opening the FOMA terminal.

[Any key answer]

Answer a call by pressing a dial key,

, or

in addition to

[Answer].

[Send key only]

Answer a call by pressing

[Answer].

Close setting

Ending/Holding Call by Closing

the FOMA Terminal

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Call

feature" ▶ "Close setting" ▶ Select a condition

when the terminal is closed

End the call : Terminate the call.

On hold : Place the active call on hold.

Continue : Continue the call.

Receiver volume

Adjusting Earpiece Volume

The receiver volume can be adjusted in 7 levels from 1 to 7.

Voice/Videophone call screen (P57) ▶

•

: Increase the volume.

•

: Decrease the volume.

Note

• The adjusted receiver volume will be retained even after the call.

• "Receiver volume" in "Volume" (P102) is also changed.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Holding

Putting a Call on Hold when You

Cannot Answer Immediately

Incoming call screen (P72) ▶

The tone set in "On hold

tone" (P75) is played. The

image set in "Response

hold image" (P80) appears

for videophone calls.

Videophone call

response hold

screen

Voice call

response hold

screen

When you can resume the call,

• You can also cancel the hold on a videophone call by pressing

[Answer]. If you press

[Image] to cancel the hold, the

alternate image will be sent to the other party.

To terminate a voice call/videophone call

Press

Note

• The other party is charged during a hold.

• If you subscribe to the Voice mail service/Call forwarding

service, you can connect the incoming call to the Voice mail

service center/forward the incoming call to the speciﬁed phone

number.→P392, P396

On hold tone

Setting Answer Holding Tone

You can select one of the 3 answer holding tones (guidance)

to play to the caller when you place the incoming call on hold.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "On hold tone" ▶

"Hold tone 1"/"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"

•

[Play]: Play back the hold tone.

Holding tone

Setting Holding Tone

You can select one of the 3 holding tones to play to the caller

when you place the call on hold.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Call feature" ▶ "Holding tone" ▶

"Hold tone 1"/"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"

•

[Play]: Play the hold tone.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Using Public Mode

Public mode is an automatic response service to assist in

observing manners in public locations.

• Public mode includes the following 2 types.

- Drive mode

- Power Oﬀ

• Voice mail service (*1), Call forwarding service (*1), and Caller ID

request service (*2) take priority over Public mode.

*1 For voice calls with the ring time set to other than "0 Sec." the

service is activated after the guidance for Public mode.

*2 If the other party sends the caller ID, Public mode is activated.

• Public mode is not activated for calls you reject using Nuisance call

blocking service.

Public mode (Drive mode)

Using Public Mode (Drive Mode)

The voice guidance is played to the caller indicating that

you cannot answer the call as you are driving or at a place

where you cannot talk (such as on a train, bus, or in a movie

theater), and the call is disconnected.

• You can set or cancel Public mode (Drive mode) only in Stand-by

(even when "圏外" is displayed).

• This option is not available during data communication.

(for 1+ seconds)

When a call arrives, the voice guidance is played in Japanese

saying that "The person you are calling is currently driving or in

the area where mobile phones should not be used. Please call

again later".

When activating Public mode (Drive mode)

When a call arrives to your FOMA terminal, the ring tone does

not sound. appears on the Stand-by display, and the call is

recorded in the Received call log.

The voice guidance indicating that you are driving or you are at

a location where you cannot use mobile phones is played to the

caller, and the call is disconnected.

Deactivating Public mode (Drive mode)

Press

(for 1+ seconds) in Stand-by.

Note

• appears at the top of the screen when Public mode (Drive

mode) is activated.

• Even when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, you can make

calls as usual.

• If Manner mode is activated concurrently, Public mode (Drive

mode) settings take precedence.

• Tones other than from operations (ring tones or alarms, etc.) do

not sound when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated.

• If mail arrives when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated,

incoming mail actions such as sounding the ring tone, or

vibrating the FOMA terminal will not take place.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Public mode (Power OFF)

Using Public Mode (Power OFF)

When a call arrives while the power is turned oﬀ, the voice

guidance is played to the caller indicating that you are at a

place where mobile phones must be turned oﬀ (such as in

hospitals, in aircraft, or near priority seats on a train) and

cannot answer the call, and the call is disconnected.

Enter "

25251" ▶

Public mode (Power OFF) is activated (there is no change for the

Stand-by display).

After Public mode (Power OFF) is activated, when a call arrives

while the power is turned oﬀ, the voice guidance is played in

Japanese saying that "The person you are calling is currently

in the area where mobile phone use is prohibited and cannot

answer the call. Please call again later".

When activating Public mode (Power OFF)

Public mode (Power OFF) is activated until it is deactivated by

dialing "

25250". Turning the power on does not deactivate the

mode.

Public mode (Power OFF) voice guidance is played even when

you are out of service area or in a place with weak signals. The

voice guidance indicating that you are at a location where you

must turn the terminal oﬀ is played to the caller, and the call is

disconnected.

Deactivating Public mode (Power OFF)

Enter "

25250" and press

Checking the status of Public mode (Power OFF)

Enter "

25259" and press

Missed call

Checking Missed Calls

If you could not answer a call, the Missed call notiﬁcation

screen appears on the Stand-by display. The Received calls

list screen can be accessed from the icon to check the caller.

An incoming call terminates

The Missed call icon appears on the Stand-by

display. The number of the icon indicates

number of missed calls.

Missed call icon

(The number

indicates the

number of calls)

▶ Use

to select

The Received calls list screen (P62) appears.

Note

• After displaying the Received calls list screen, disappears.

You can also select and press

for 1+ seconds to

clear the icon.

Record message

Recording Voice Messages when

You Cannot Answer the Call

When Record message is activated and if you cannot answer

a voice call, the voice guidance is played and the caller's

message is recorded.

• Up to 5 messages and approximately 15 seconds per message

can be recorded.

• Record message does not start when a videophone call arrives. The

FOMA terminal answers the call in the normal way.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Setting Record Message

▶ "Media" ▶ "Record message" ▶

"Record msg. setting" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Activate record msg.]

When activate Record message, set to "ON".

[To answer]*

Enter the time after a call arrives and before Record message starts

between 0 and 120 seconds.

[Answer message]*

Select an answer message.

•

[Play]: Check the answer message.

* Available when "Activate record msg." is set to "ON".

[Done]

Note

• appears at the top of the screen when the Record message

is activated.

• If the set response time is longer than the ring time set for the

Voice mail/Call forwarding services, a network service takes

precedence.

•

If the response time is set shorter than the time set in "Set mute

ring(sec.)" (P130), Record message starts without ringing.

When Record Message is Activated

When a voice call arrives, the caller's voice is recorded.

Recording a

message Stand-by display

appears

The set time

has elapsed

Recorded

A new Record message

icon appears

(The number indicates

the number of calls)

A call arriving Playing a

response message

■ To talk with the caller while the response message is

played or a message is being recorded

Press

[Active].

■ To play a recorded message

In Stand-by, press

▶ use

to select or press

for 1+ seconds to display the Record message list screen

(P79).

• Press

[Play] to play a recorded message.

• will disappear after the recorded message is deleted.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Note

• "Record message" is disabled when "圏外" is displayed, the

power is turned oﬀ or Public mode (Drive mode) is activated.

• If a call arrives when the response message is being played or

when a message is being recorded in Record message, the call

is rejected.

Quick Record Message

Recording a Message when You

Cannot Answer Incoming Call

Even when Record message is disabled, you can record the

caller's message with easy operation.

Incoming call screen (P72) ▶

(for 1+seconds)

Caller's voice will be recorded after streaming a guidance.

Note

• If 5 messages are already recorded, Record message will not

start and the caller's message cannot be recorded.

Play/Delete record message

Playing/Deleting Record

Message

▶ "Media" ▶ "Record message" ▶

"Record msg. list"

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected recorded

message.

To delete all recorded messages

On the Record message list screen,

press

[Menu] ▶ "Delete all".

Record msg. list

screen

Move the cursor to the recorded message ▶

[Play]

The recorded message is played.

•

[Stop]: Stop playing the message.

•

: Return to the Record message list screen.

• Use

to adjust the volume.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Setting Image to Send

Substitute image

Setting Substitute Image

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Substitute image" ▶ "Default"/

"Select image"

• When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved

in "My picture" of "Data box".→P296

Response hold image

Setting Response Hold Image

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Response hold image" ▶

"Default"/"Select image"

• When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved

in "My picture" of "Data box".→P296

Holding image

Setting Holding Image

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Holding image" ▶ "Default"/

"Select image"

• When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved

in "My picture" of "Data box".→P296

Videophone set

Changing Videophone Settings

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Videophone set" ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Display setting]

Set images to be displayed on the main window and sub window for

videophone calls.

Other - Me : The other party's image is displayed on the main

window, and your image on the sub window.

Me - Other : Your image is displayed on the main window, and the

other party's image on the sub window.

Other only : Display only the other party's image.

Me only : Display only your image.

[Send camera image]

Set whether to send your image to the other party. When "OFF" is

set, the other party receives the substitute image.

[Screen size]

Set the display size of the main window.

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Visual preference]

Set quality of the image sent to the other party.

Prefer img qual : Send image with maximized image quality. This

option is eﬀective when there is little motion.

Normal : Set standard quality and motion for the sent

image.

Prefer motion spd : Set priority to motion for the sent image.

This option is eﬀective when there is a lot of

motions.

[Light]

Set light setting for the screen during a call.

Always ON : Always light up on during a call.

Terminal setting : Use "Backlight" settings.→P110

[Auto redial as voice]

Set whether to automatically redial with voice call if the mobile phone

of the other party does not support videophone call.

[Hand-free switch]

Set whether to use Hands-free during a videophone call.

[V-phone while packet]

Set the answer method when a videophone call arrives during i-mode

connection.→P81

V-phone while packet

Setting Answer Method of

Videophone Call during i-mode

When a videophone call arrives while connecting to i-mode

or sending/receiving mails, the setting of this function is

applied.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Videophone set" ▶ "V-phone

while packet" ▶ Select an item

V-phone priority : The videophone incoming call

screen appears. When answering

the call, i-mode communication is

disconnected.

Packet download priority : Reject an incoming videophone call.

V-phone answerphone : Connect to the Voice mail service

automatically.

Call forwarding : Connect to the Call forwarding

service automatically.

Note

• If you do not subscribe to the Voice mail or Call forwarding

service, "Packet download priority" setting is applied even if

"V-phone answerphone" or "Call forwarding" is set.

Phonebook

Phonebook Available for the FOMA Terminal ･･･････ 84

Adding Entries to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook

･･･ 84

Adding Entries to UIM (FOMA Card) Phonebook ････ 87

Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc. ････････････････････････････････････････････ 88

Changing a Group Name ････････････････････････････ 89

Making a Call from Phonebook

･･･ Search phonebook 91

Editing Phonebook Entries ･･････････････････････････ 96

Deleting Phonebook Entries ････････････････････････ 96

Checking Phonebook Storage Status

････････････････････････････････････No. of phonebook 97

Setting Phonebook ･･････････････････････････････････ 97

Making a Call with a Few Key Operation

･･･Quick dial 97

Displaying Call/Mail History･････････････････････････ 98

Phonebook

Phonebook Available for the

FOMA Terminal

The FOMA terminal contains 2 types of Phonebooks: The

Phonebook saved on the FOMA terminal and the UIM

Phonebook saved on the UIM. The following items can be

saved/set for each Phonebook.

Item FOMA terminal

Phonebook UIM Phonebook

Number of entries Up to 1,000 entries*Up to 50 entries

Entry

details Name

(Reading) 1 entry 1 entry

Phone number 5 entries 1 entry

Mail Address 3 entries 1 entry

Group 31 groups 11 groups

Image 1 entry None

Other settings Secret code, Ring

tone, Mail tone, etc. None

* Depending on the saved details, 1,000 entries may not be saved.

Note

• If you insert your UIM into another FOMA terminal, you can use

your Phonebook data on the UIM.

Adding Entries to the FOMA

Terminal Phonebook

• Note that the service counter such as the docomo Shop may not

be able to copy Phonebook data from your existing FOMA terminal

to the new one, depending on the speciﬁcations.

Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

Add to phonebook

screen

(FOMA terminal)

Perform the following operations

[ (Save to)]

Select the save location. This section explains the case where

"Phone" is selected as the save location. When "UIM" is selected as

the save location, the Add to UIM Phonebook screen appears.→P87

[ (Memory No.)]

The smallest un-assigned number is allocated automatically. You can

also change it to your favorite number from 000 to 999 manually.

[ Name]

Enter up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

Phonebook

[ Reading]

Enter or edit as required. Enter up to 32 half-pitch characters.

Enter with Katakana, alphanumeric characters, or symbols.

[ Phone number]

Enter up to 26 digits.

▶ Enter a phone number ▶ Select an icon

• On the Phone number entry screen, you can press

[Menu] to

select "Int. call", "Select preﬁx", or "Cancel". Press

[Cancel] to

cancel the entry.

[ Mail address]

Enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. Enter with alphanumeric

characters or symbols.

▶ Enter a mail address ▶ Select an icon

[ Secret code]

Set the secret code.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Select an icon for the phone

number/mail address ▶ Enter the secret code

• On the Secret code screen, press

[Release] to cancel the

setting.

[ (Select a group)]

Select one from "No group" or "グループ1 (Group 1)" to "グループ30

(Group 30)". Groups can be used for the Group search (P92), etc.

[ Image]

Set an image or i-motion to be displayed when making/receiving calls

or when checking a Phonebook entry.

My picture : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data

box".→P296

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data box".→P307

Take picture : Activate the camera, and set the captured still

image.→P222

Terminal setting

: Use "Call & Mail image" settings.→P109

[ Ringtone]

Select a ring tone for incoming voice/videophone call from the caller

saved in the Phonebook.

Music : Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song saved in "Music"

of "Data box".→P207

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song

as a Ring Tone" (P266).

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data box".

→P314

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data box".→P307

Terminal setting

: Use "Select ring tone" settings.→P100

[ Mail image]

Select an image or i-motion to be displayed when a mail arrives.

• Available items are the same as for " Image".

[ Mail ringtone]

Select a ring tone for incoming mail from the sender saved in the

Phonebook.

• Available items are the same as for " Ringtone".

[ URL]

Enter up to 256 half-pitch characters.

[ Zip code]

Enter up to 7 half-pitch characters.

[ Home address]

Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Company name]

Enter up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

Continued on next page

Phonebook

[ Job title]

Enter up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Co. zip code]

Enter up to 7 half-pitch characters.

[ Co. address]

Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Memo]

Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Birthday]

Enter birthday.

[ Substitute image]

Set the substitute image for a videophone call.

Data box : Select an image saved in "My picture" of

"Data box".→P296

Terminal setting : Use "Substitute image" settings.→P80

[ Secret]

This option appears when "Secret mode" (P127) is set to "Secret

mode".

Select "ON" if you save the Phonebook entry to be created as secret

data.

[ (Select Live Character)]

Select a Live Character used in Live Character Park.→P86

*1 For details about the Secret code, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

*2 If you change any one of " Image", " Ringtone", " Mail

image", or " Mail ringtone" of the Phonebook while a moving

picture/i-motion with video/sound is set for "Select ring tone"

(P100) and "Call & Mail image" (P109), the default sound or

image is set to "Image" or "Ringtone" that is not changed.

*3 If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound either for

the image or ring tone, the same moving picture/i-motion is set

for the other item automatically.

[Done]

Changing Live Character of the entry saved on the

Phonebook

• To select a character type displayed in Live Character Park, set

in "Setting Live Character Park Theme"→P337

• Only touch operation is available.

Selected Live Character

Character type

Change a character type to set.

Live Character list

Scroll bar

Slide to scroll the Live Character list display.

Change color to the one displayed on the Live Character list

Restore the changed color of Live Character.

Change color

Change the color of the clothes (or hair) of the selected Live

Character in random order each time this item is touched.

Phonebook

Note

• If the mail address is saved to the Phonebook in the format of

"Phone number + secret code@docomo.ne.jp", you may not send

mail or reply to that contact. Change the mail address format

to "Phone number@docomo.ne.jp" ﬁrst, then register the Secret

code.

• When "Secret mode" (P127) is set to "Secret data only", the

Phonebook entry is saved as secret data.

• The secret entry is displayed only when "Secret mode" is set to

"Secret mode" or "Secret data only".

• Secret entries cannot be saved to the UIM Phonebook.

• The names saved in the secret entries are displayed in the

Redial log, history, or mail list/detail screen only when "Secret

mode" is set to "Secret mode" or "Secret data only". The phone

numbers and mail addresses are displayed when "Secret mode"

is set to "OFF".

• When "Secret mode" is set to "OFF" and you receive a call or

mail from the secret contact, the name or image saved to the

Phonebook is not displayed and the set ring tone does not

sound.

Adding Entries to UIM

(FOMA Card) Phonebook

Add to phonebook screen (P84) ▶

(Save to) ﬁeld ▶ "UIM"

Add to phonebook

screen (UIM)

Perform the following operations

[ (Save to)]

Select the save location. When "Phone" is selected as the save

location, the FOMA terminal Phonebook entry screen appears.→P87

[ Name]

Enter up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Reading]

Enter or edit as required. Enter up to 12 full-pitch or 25 half-pitch

characters. Enter with full-pitch Katakana, half-pitch alphanumeric

characters, or half-pitch symbols.

Continued on next page

Phonebook

[ Phone number]

For a green/white UIM, up to 26 digits can be entered. For a blue

UIM, up to 20 digits can be entered.

• On the Phone number entry screen, you can press

[Menu] to

select "Int. call", "Select preﬁx", or "Cancel". To cancel the entry,

press

[Cancel].

[ Mail address]

Enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. Enter with alphanumeric

characters or symbols.

[ (Select a group)]

Select one from "No group" or "グループ1 (Group 1)" to "グループ10

(Group 10)". Groups can be used for the Group search (P92).

[Done]

Adding Phonebook Entries from

Redial/Received Calls etc.

You can save entries to the Phonebook from the list or detail

screen of the call history, mail, or message that contains a

phone number or mail address records. You can also save a

currently entered/displayed phone number, etc. on the Phone

number entry screen or site, etc.

Display the screen containing items to save

To save phone numbers from the Redial list screen

(P60)/Redial detail screen (P61)/Received calls list

screen (P62)/Received calls detail screen (P62)

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Add to phonebook".

• To save phone numbers from the Redial list screen/

Received calls list screen, select the target number ﬁrst.

• If the phone number is already saved in the Phonebook, "Add

to phonebook" is not available.

To save phone numbers from the Phone number entry

screen

Press

[Save].

To save a sender or recipient mail address

On the Mail detail screen, press

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶

"Address".

• If there are several mail addresses, select the one to save

ﬁrst.

To save addresses/phone numbers included in the

body text in a mail

Move the cursor to the address/phone number to save

to the Phonebook ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶ "No./addr.

in body".

Phonebook

To save addresses/phone numbers displayed on a

site/Screen memo

Move the cursor to the address/phone number to save

to the Phonebook ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Add to Phonebook"

▶ "Yes".

Perform the following operations

[New registration]

Add a new entry to the Phonebook. Go to Step 3.

• The Add to phonebook screen appears with the new entry entered.

[Add registration]

Save additional items to the saved entry. Press

[Srch by] on the

Phonebook entry screen to change the Phonebook search mode.

→P92

▶ Select a Phonebook entry to which the item is to be added

• The Add to phonebook screen appears with the item added.

• If you add an item to the UIM Phonebook, the Add to phonebook

screen appears with the items overwritten when the above step is

performed.

Modify/save the Phonebook entry ▶

[Done]

• For saving procedure, refer to Step 2 in "Adding Entries to the

FOMA Terminal Phonebook" (P84).

• When saving additional data to an entry, the conﬁrmation

whether to overwrite appears. Select "Yes" to overwrite.

Note

• The data can also be saved to the Phonebook from the

Scanned data screen with the bar code reader or Live Character

Park screen.→P235, P336

• If you attempt to save characters longer than the maximum

number of characters allowed, a warning screen notifying of the

problem appears, then, the truncated string will be displayed on

the Add to phonebook screen.

Changing a Group Name

You can group the entries on the FOMA terminal Phonebook

and the UIM Phonebook. Up to 31 groups can be saved on

the FOMA terminal Phonebook, and up to 11 groups can be

saved on the UIM Phonebook (including "No group").

• "No group" cannot be edited.

• Only a name can be edited on the UIM Phonebook.

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Group settings"

•

[Phone/UIM]: Switch between the

FOMA terminal and the UIM group setting

list screens.

•

: View the settings of the selected

group.

Group setting list

screen

Continued on next page

Phonebook

Move the cursor to the target group

▶

[Set]

Group settings

screen

Perform the following operations

[ (Group name)]

Enter up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji,

Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, or Katakana, etc.

[ Ringtone]

Set the ring tone for a call.

Music : Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song saved in "Music"

of "Data box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song

as a Ring Tone" (P266).

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data box".

→P314

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data box".→P307

Terminal setting

: Use "Select ring tone" settings.→P100

[ Mail ringtone]

Set the ring tone for incoming mail.

• Available items are the same as for " Ringtone".

[ Image]

Add an image to a group. The image is displayed when making/

receiving calls or checking Phonebook data.

My picture : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data

box".→P296

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data box".→P307

Take picture : Activate the camera and set the captured

image. →P222

Terminal setting

: Use "Call & Mail image" settings.→P109

[ Mail image]

Select an image or i-motion to be displayed when a mail arrives.

• Available items are the same as for " Image".

[ Accept/Reject]

Set whether to accept/reject calls for groups.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Not set"/"Reject call"/

"Accept call"

*1 If you change any one of " Image", " Ringtone", " Mail

image", or " Mail ringtone" of the Phonebook while a moving

picture/i-motion with video/sound is set for "Select ring tone"

(P100) and "Call & Mail image" (P109), the default sound or

image is set to "Image" or "Ringtone" that is not changed.

*2 If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound either for

the image or ring tone, the same moving picture/i-motion is set

for the other item automatically.

[Done]

Note

• The setting in "Accept/Reject call" (P95) in the Phonebook

takes priority.

Phonebook

Group Setting List Screen Sub Menu

Group setting list screen (P89) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Set]

Change the selected group settings.→P90

[Move]

Change the display position of the selected group.

▶ Select the new display position ▶

[OK]

[Reset]

Reset the selected group settings. The group name is restored to

default.

[Reset all]

Reset all group settings and group order.

Search phonebook

Making a Call from Phonebook

• To search Phonebook entries set as secret, set "Secret mode" to

"Secret mode" beforehand.→P127

Making a Call from Phonebook

You can make a call by invoking the Phonebook.

Stand-by display ▶

The entries searched by the default search

mode appear on the Phonebook entry list

screen.→P97

Phonebook list

screen (Ex.: When

searching all

entries)

Move the cursor to a party to call

▶

To make a videophone call

Press

[V. Phone].

Phonebook

Operations on Phonebook Detail Screen

When selecting a party on the Phonebook list screen, the

Phonebook detail screen is displayed.

Select a phone number and press

[Call] to make a call.

• You can make a call after selecting a phone number and use

[Disp.] to display the phone number.

When multiple phone numbers are saved

• Use

to select a phone number and press

[Call].

• Press

to display the saved phone numbers on the

Phone number selection screen in a list. Alternatively, use

to select a phone number and press

[Call] to make

a call.

Note

• If "Secret mode" is set to "Secret data only" (P127), only secret

Phonebook entries (P86) can be searched/displayed.

Searching Phonebook

You can use various ways to search Phonebook entries.

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Search phonebook"

•

[Default]: Set the

highlighted option as

the search mode for the

Phonebook list screen

displayed when you press

, etc. in Stand-by.

phonebook screen

The default

mode is

indicated.

Perform the following operations

[Show all data]

Display all Phonebook entries divided into reading lines (あ-わ lines,

A-Z) and "他 (others)" (for readings other than the Japanese Kana

syllables).

• Use

to switch the reading line.

• Press the keys

(あ-わ lines) to switch the display to

"Reading search" mode. Operations are same as "Reading search".

[Group?]

Search and display Phonebook entries by group (Group list screen).

Use

[UIM/Phone] to switch between the FOMA terminal

Phonebook and the UIM Phonebook. Use

▶

[Select] to select

a group and display Phonebook entries saved in the group.

[Reading?]

Enter part of "Reading" and search all Phonebook entries. Enter up to

32 half-pitch characters for reading.

• All Phonebook entries are displayed when a reading is not entered.

• You can also search readings using other than the leading

character.

• Press

[Chara] to switch the input mode.

[Memory No?]

Display Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal by every 50 entries

from memory no. "0" in order.

• Use

to switch the memory number.

• The UIM Phonebook cannot be displayed.

• Phonebook entries can also be displayed by entering memory

numbers with dial keys.

[Phone number?]

Enter part of the saved phone number and search all Phonebook

entries. Enter up to 26 digits.

• All Phonebook entries are displayed when a phone number is not

entered.

• You can search phone numbers using other than the leading digit.

Phonebook

[Domain?]

Display Phonebook entries that contain mail addresses by domain.

• Use

to switch the domain.

• Register a domain to search beforehand.→P97

Viewing Phonebook Entries

Stand-by display ▶

Save locations on the Phonebook

• If saved on the FOMA terminal

Phonebook, the icon assigned to

"Phone number1" appears.

• If saved on the UIM Phonebook,

appears.

Phonebook

list screen

Select a Phonebook entry

• When an image is set to the phonebook

entry, the set image is displayed.

• Icons displayed for each item are same as

those for the Add to phonebook screen.

→P84

Phonebook

detail screen

Note

• During background playback, moving pictures/i-motion saved on

the Phonebook are not played.

Operations on the Phonebook list screen

Select the Phonebook entry in which a phone number and a

mail address are saved and press

to make a call, and

press

[Mail] to create mail. If multiple phone numbers or

mail addresses are saved, the Phone number or mail address

selection screen appears.

Operations on the Phonebook detail screen

When selecting a saved phone number, mail address, etc., you

can perform the following operations.

[Call] : Make a voice call to the selected phone number.

[Mail] : Create an i-mode mail addressed to the selected

mail address.→P138

[Connect] : Connect to the site of the selected URL.

[Play] : Play the selected ring tone.

[Disp.] : Display the selected videophone substitute image.

Phonebook

Phonebook List Screen Sub Menu

Phonebook list screen (P93) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Mail/URL]

Create mail or access URL.

Compose mail : Create an i-mode mail addressed to the mail

address or phone number of the selected

Phonebook entry.→P138

Attach to mail : Create an i-mode mail with the selected

Phonebook entry attached.→P138

Compose SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the phone

number saved in the selected Phonebook entry.

→P176

Connect to URL : Connect to the site of the URL saved in the

selected Phonebook entry.

[Call function]

Select the calling method. If multiple phone numbers are saved, after

selecting the calling method, select the number to call on the Phone

number selection screen.

Video phone call : Make a videophone call.

Customize call : Change the saved phone number and make a call.

Int. call(Japan) : Add the country code for Japan "+81"

automatically at the beginning of the phone

number when you make a call from overseas to a

phone number in Japan saved in the Phonebook.

• If the beginning of the phone number is "0", it is

automatically deleted.

[Add new]

Create a new Phonebook entry.→P84

[Edit]

Edit the selected Phonebook entry.→P96

[Copy]

Copy or back up the selected entry.

to the UIM

: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to the UIM.

to the phone

: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to the

FOMA terminal.

to microSD : Copy the selected Phonebook entry to a

microSD card.

Multiple choice : Select multiple entries from the FOMA terminal

or UIM and copy to other locations (FOMA

terminal/UIM/microSD).

▶ Select a copy source ▶ Mark entries to copy

▶

[Copy] ▶ Select a copy destination

Backup : Back up all Phonebook data saved on the FOMA

terminal to a microSD card.

• Images saved in the Phonebook cannot be

copied.

Connect to center : Save Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal

to the Data Storage Center.→P131

[Search by]

Search the Phonebook in another search mode.→P92

[Send Ir data]

Send a Phonebook entry to an external device via infrared

communication.→P328

Focused data : Send the selected Phonebook entry.

all in phone : Send all data saved on the FOMA terminal

Phonebook.

all in UIM : Send all data saved on the UIM Phonebook.

Phonebook

[Delete]

Delete saved data from the Phonebook.→P96

[Create domain list]

Create the domain to be searched by domain search.→P97

*1 Appear for the FOMA terminal Phonebook.

*2 Appear for the UIM Phonebook.

*3 Appear only for the domain search.

Phonebook Detail Screen Sub Menu

Phonebook detail screen (P93) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Mail/URL]

Create mail or access URL.

Compose mail : Create an i-mode mail addressed to the mail

address or phone number saved in the displayed

Phonebook entry.→P138

Attach to mail : Create an i-mode mail with the displayed

Phonebook entry attached.→P138

Compose SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the phone

number in the displayed Phonebook entry.→P176

Connect to URL : Access the site of the URL saved in the

displayed Phonebook entry.

[Call function]

Select the calling method.

Video phone call : Make a videophone call.

Customize call : Change the saved phone number and make a call.

Int. call(Japan) : Add the country code for Japan "+81"

automatically at the beginning of the phone

number when you make a call from overseas to a

phone number in Japan saved in the Phonebook.

• If the beginning of the phone number is "0", it is

automatically deleted.

[Edit]

Edit the displayed Phonebook entry.→P96

[Copy]

Copy the displayed Phonebook entry.

Copy item : Select and copy items from the saved Phonebook

entry displayed.

to the UIM

: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to the UIM.

to the phone

: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to the FOMA

terminal.

to microSD : Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to a microSD

card.

[Send Ir data]

Send the displayed Phonebook entry via infrared communication.

→P328

[Accept/Reject call]

Set to accept or reject calls per phone number saved on the FOMA

terminal Phonebook.

You can select this only when you move the cursor to a phone

number beforehand.

• A phone number saved in "Reject on list" (P128) cannot be set to

"Accept call".

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Not set"/"Reject call"/

"Accept call"

[Delete]

Delete the displayed Phonebook entry.

*1 Appear for the FOMA terminal Phonebook.

*2 Appear for the UIM phonebook.

Phonebook

Editing Phonebook Entries

Phonebook detail screen (P93) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Edit" ▶ Edit each item

Use the same steps in "Adding Entries to the FOMA Terminal

Phonebook" (P84) or "Adding Entries to UIM (FOMA Card)

Phonebook" (P87) to edit items.

To change the memory number and save the entry

If you change the memory number and save the entry,

the original entry remains with the original memory

number and the edited entry is saved with a new

memory number.

(Memory No.) ▶ enter any un-assigned memory

number (000-999).

After editing,

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

Deleting Phonebook Entries

Example: To delete an entry from the Phonebook entry list

screen

Move the cursor to an entry to delete on the

Phonebook list screen (P93) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected Phonebook entry.

Selected : Select multiple entries from the FOMA terminal or UIM.

▶ "Phone"/"UIM" ▶ Mark entries to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

all in phone : Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the FOMA

terminal.

The Terminal security code is required to delete.

all in UIM : Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the UIM.

The Terminal security code is required to delete.

"Yes"

The selected/displayed Phonebook entry is deleted.

To delete a Phonebook entry from the Phonebook

detail screen

You can delete only one Phonebook entry at a time

from the Phonebook detail screen. On the Phonebook

detail screen, press

[Menu] ▶ "Delete" ▶ "Yes".

Phonebook

No. of phonebook

Checking Phonebook Storage

Status

You can check the memory status on the FOMA terminal/UIM

Phonebook.

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "No. of phonebook"

• "Secret entry" is displayed when "Secret mode" is set to "Secret

mode" or "Secret data only".

Setting Phonebook

You can set Phonebook entries or images to be invoked from

the Stand-by display.

▶

"Phonebook"

▶

"Phonebook settings"

▶

Perform the following operations

[Default mode]

Set the search mode for the Phonebook list screen displayed when

you press

in Stand-by.

[Create domain list]

Create a domain to be searched by the domain search.

▶ Move the cursor to unregistered item ▶

[Add] ▶ Enter a

domain name

[Accept/Reject list]

Phone numbers saved on the Accept/reject call list in "Accept/reject

call" are displayed.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Accept list"/"Reject list"

• Press

[Menu] to perform "Add", "Delete", or "Delete all" operation.

Editing the entered domain name

Move the cursor to the domain to edit on the domain list ▶

[Edit] ▶ edit the domain name.

"@docomo.ne.jp" on the domain list cannot be edited.

Deleting the entered domain name

Move the cursor to the domain to delete on the domain list ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes".

Quick dial

Making a Call with a Few Key

Operation

In Stand-by, enter a 1- to 2-digit number with the dial keys

to quickly make a call to the phone number corresponding

to the memory number of "0" to "99" on the FOMA terminal

Phonebook.

Enter a 1- to 2-digit number

• Use

to display

Quick dial numbers in

turn.

The content of the

entry of the memory

no. corresponding to

the entered number

appears.

To make a videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Continued on next page

Phonebook

Note

• If "Quick dial" is set to "OFF", this function does not work.

→P109

• If you use a 3-digit memory number with the ﬁrst or second digit

started with "0" such as "001" or "011", "0" is not necessary to

be entered.

• This function does not work for the UIM Phonebook.

Displaying Call/Mail History

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Call/Mail history" ▶

Select a log to display

Received calls : Display received logs for voice/videophone

calls.→P62

Redial : Display redial logs for voice/videophone calls.

→P60

Received mails : Display received mail logs.→P166

Sent mails : Display sent mail logs.→P166

Note

• Received calls can also be displayed by pressing

in Stand-

by.

• Redial can also be displayed by pressing

in Stand-by.

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Sound Settings

Changing Ring Tone ･･･････････････ Select ring tone 100

Setting Volume of Ring Tone, Alarm, etc. ･･･ Volume 101

Informing You of Incoming Calls and Alarms by

Vibration ･･･････････････････････････････････ Vibrator 102

Changing Ringing Tone ･････････Melody Call setting 102

Setting Eﬀect Tone ･･････････････Select eﬀect tone 103

Informing You of Touch Panel Operation by Sound or

Vibration ････････････････････････････Touch settings 104

Sounding Alarm when a Line is Likely to be

Disconnected ･････････････････････････Quality alarm 104

Setting Ring Time for Incoming Mail

････････････････････････････････････Mail ring duration 104

Sounding Ring Tone only from Earphones

･･････････････････････････････Headset usage setting 105

Muting Ring Tone from the FOMA Terminal

････････････････････････････････････････Manner mode 105

Changing Manner Mode Settings

････････････････････････････････････Manner mode set 105

Screen/Light Settings

Changing Stand-by Display ･･･････ Stand-by display 106

Setting Image for Incoming Calls

････････････････････････････････････Call & Mail image 109

Setting Dialing Screen Display ････････････Quick dial 109

Setting Wake-up Display ･･･････････Wake-up display 110

Displaying Image Set to Phonebook on Incoming

Call Screen ･････････････････････ Show ph. book img 110

Setting Display Backlight ･････････････････Backlight 110

Displaying in Power Save Mode

･･････････････････････････････････ Power saver mode 111

Setting a Color Theme for Display ･････ Color theme 111

Using Kisekae Tool ･･･････････････････ Kisekae Tool 111

Changing Display of Main Menu ･･････Menu settings 112

Setting Incoming Lighting/Blinking Colors or

Patterns ･･････････････････････････････ Lighting LED 113

Setting Clock Display ･･･････････ Date&Time format 115

Adjusting Touch Panel ･･･････････････････Calibration 115

100

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Select ring tone

Changing Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone for voice/videophone calls,

mail, etc.

• In addition to the pre-installed ring tones and melodies, i-motion,

melodies and Chaku-Uta

songs, Chaku-Uta Full

songs downloaded

from i-mode sites or the Internet web sites can be set as ring

tones.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Select ring tone" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Voice call]

Select the ring tone for a voice call.

Music : Select from Chaku-Uta Full

songs saved in "Music" of

"Data box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

i-motion : Select from moving pictures/i-motion saved in "i-motion"

of "Data box".→P307

Melody : Select from melodies saved in "Melody" of "Data box".

→P314

[Video call]

Select the ring tone for a videophone call.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

[Mail]

Select the ring tone for i-mode mail.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

[MessageR]

Select the ring tone for MessageR.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

[MessageF]

Select the ring tone for MessageF.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

[SMS]

Select the ring tone for a SMS.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

• When Stand-by i-αppli is set, the Receive results screen for SMS

does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS do not

work.

[Done]

Note

• The following ﬁle formats can be set for a ring tone (however,

some ﬁles such as restricted ﬁles or ﬁles that contain only

video or sound may not be set).

SMF, MFi, and MP4 (Mobile MP4)

• When moving pictures/i-motion is set for ring tones (Chaku-

motion), "Call & Mail image" (P109) is also changed to the

same.

• If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video for "Mail",

"MessageR", "MessageF", or "SMS", the same moving picture/

i-motion is set for all these items. You cannot set each item

individually.

• If music, melody or moving pictures/i-motion with video are

set as a ring tone, the incoming screen will be reset to default

screen when you change the ring tone to moving pictures/

i-motion without video.

• Image only moving pictures/i-motion cannot be set as ring

tones.

101

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Pre-installed Ring Tone List

i-motion

Alarm 01-04 EXILE

GENERATION Message 01-08

Ring 20-25

Melody

Alarm 05 Message 09-10 Power oﬀ 01-02

Power on 01-02 Ring 01-19

Volume

Setting Volume of Ring Tone,

Alarm, etc.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Volume"

Perform the following operations

•

: Adjust the volume of the selected item. When the volume

level is set to the lowest, (Silent) is displayed and the tone

does not sound. Every time the volume is adjusted, the tone for

the item sounds at the new volume (except "Receiver volume").

• For "Incoming call", the ring tone/eﬀect tone set in "Voice call"

sounds; for "Mail/Message/SMS", the tone set in "Mail" sounds;

for "Power ON/OFF", the tone set in "Power ON" sounds.

* The default ring tone sounds for "Alarm/Schedule".

[Incoming call]*

Adjust the ring tone volume for incoming voice/videophone calls.

[Mail/Message/SMS]*

Adjust the ring tone volume for Mail or MessageR/F.

[Alarm/Schedule]*

Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.

[Keypad tone]

Adjust the volume of keypad tone except dial tone.

[Slide tone]

Adjust the volume when the FOMA terminal is slid up/down.

[Dial sound]

Adjust the dial sound volume.

Continued on next page

102

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Power ON/OFF]

Adjust the sound volume when the FOMA terminal is turned on/oﬀ.

[Popup tone]

Adjust the sound volume when the popup window is displayed.

[Receiver volume]

Adjust the receiver volume. The sound cannot be muted.

* When the volume level is set to the highest, → (Step up) is

displayed to increase the sound progressively.

[Done]

Note

• Adjusting the receiver volume during a call→P74

Vibrator

Informing You of Incoming Calls

and Alarms by Vibration

You can set the FOMA terminal to vibrate when a call or mail

arrives or at a schedule alarm time.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Vibrator" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Incoming call]

Set the vibration pattern for an incoming voice/videophone call.

[Mail/Message/SMS]

Set the vibration pattern when mail/MessageR/F is received.

[Alarm/Schedule]

Set the vibration pattern for the Alarm/Schedule alert.

[Pop-up]

Set whether to vibrate the FOMA terminal when the Popup screen

appears.

[Power ON/OFF]

Set the vibration pattern when the FOMA terminal is turned on/oﬀ.

[Done]

Melody Call setting

Changing Ringing Tone

This service enables you to play a melody to the other party

when a voice call arrives.

• Melody Call is not played for videophone calls.

• Melody Call is a fee-based service that requires subscription.

• For details about Melody Call, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[Network Services]".

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Melody Call setting" ▶ "Yes"

The FOMA terminal connects to the Melody Call setting site.

• Packet communication charges do not apply for the setting

site. However, the charges apply for connecting to other sites.

103

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Select eﬀect tone

Setting Eﬀect Tone

You can set the eﬀect tone when a key is pressed or

operation is performed.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Select eﬀect tone"

Eﬀect tone

selection screen

Perform the following operations

[Keypad tone]*

Select an eﬀect tone when a key is pressed except Dial sound.

[Slide tone]*

Select an eﬀect tone when the FOMA terminal is slid up/down.

[Dial sound]*

Select an eﬀect tone when a dial key,

, or

is pressed in the

Stand-by display or the Phone number entry screen (P56). If set to

"Japanese", "English", or "Korean", the numbers entered with dial keys

will be read out.

[Power ON]

Select an eﬀect tone when the terminal is turned on.

Music : Select from Chaku-Uta Full

songs saved in "Music" of

"Data box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

Melody : Select from melodies saved in "Melody" of "Data box".

→P314

[Power OFF]

Select an eﬀect tone when the terminal is turned oﬀ.

• Available items are the same as for "Power ON".

[Low battery alert]

Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level becomes low.

* On the selection screen of the setting item, press

[Play] to

check the sound each time an eﬀect tone is selected. To mute the

sound, press

[Mute]. If "Silent" is set for "Volume", an eﬀect tone

cannot be checked.

[Done]

104

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Touch settings

Informing You of Touch Panel

Operation by Sound or Vibration

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Touch settings" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Touch type]

Select an action when the touch panel is touched.

OFF : Does not perform actions.

Sound : Sound the tone selected for "Touch sound".

Vibration : Vibrate at the pattern selected for "Touch vibration".

Sound + Vib. : Perform actions with the sound selected for "Touch

sound" and vibration selected for "Touch vibration".

[Touch sound]

Select an eﬀect tone when the touch panel is touched.

[Touch vibration]

Select a vibration pattern when the touch panel is touched.

[Touch sound level]

Adjust the sound level.

[Touch vib. level]

Adjust the vibration level when the touch panel is touched.

[Done]

Quality alarm

Sounding Alarm when a Line is

Likely to be Disconnected

The FOMA terminal notiﬁes you of a call almost disconnected

due to poor signal quality with an alarm tone.

• If the signal rapidly deteriorates, the call may be disconnected

without sounding an alarm tone.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Call

feature" ▶ "Quality alarm" ▶ "Alarm OFF"/"Low

alarm"/"High alarm"

Mail ring duration

Setting Ring Time for Incoming Mail

You can set how many times or how long the ring tone

sounds when mail arrives.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Mail ring duration" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Mail ring]

Select an eﬀect tone sounded when the terminal is turned on.

OFF : Set to mute a ring tone.

1 cycle : Set to sound a ring tone once for up to approximately

30 seconds according to the set ring tone length

such as music or melodies.

Select time : Set a ring tone duration.

▶

▶ Enter a ring tone duration

[Done]

105

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Headset usage setting

Sounding Ring Tone only from

Earphones

You can set the ring tone or alarm tone to sound only from

the earphones when the earphone/microphone (optional), etc.

is connected.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Headset usage setting"

[Select]

▶

"Headset only"/"Headset+speaker"

[Done]

Note

• While Manner mode is activated, ring tone, etc. sounds only

from the earphones.

Manner mode

Muting Ring Tone from the

FOMA Terminal

Turn oﬀ the tones that sound from the FOMA terminal so as

not to disturb others.

(for 1+ seconds)

Canceling Manner mode

In Stand-by, press

(for 1+ seconds).

Note

• 2 types of Manner mode are equipped: "General manner" and

"Original manner".→P105

• appears at the top of the screen when manner mode is

activated.

• A playback conﬁrmation screen appears when you attempt to

play a melody, moving picture/i-motion while Manner mode is

activated.

• Even when Manner mode is activated, the camera shutter tone

sounds.

•

The vibration pattern while "General manner" is active follows

"Vibrator". If "Vibrator" is set to "OFF", "Incoming call" is notiﬁed

with the vibration "Pattern 1", "Mail/Message/SMS" is notiﬁed

with "Message 1", and "Alarm/Schedule" is notiﬁed with "Alarm 1".

Manner mode set

Changing Manner Mode Settings

Select the Manner mode action from "General manner" or

"Original manner". Original manner enables you to change the

each setting of Manner mode.

Example: To change the settings of Original manner

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Manner mode set" ▶ Move the cursor to

"Original manner" ▶

[Edit]

To select the Manner mode type

Move the cursor to "General manner"/"Original manner"

▶ press

[Select].

The Manner mode setting is ended.

Continued on next page

106

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Perform the following operations

•

: Select the vibration pattern or volume of the selected

item. When the volume level is the lowest, (Silent) is

displayed and the sound is muted.

[Vibration]

Use

[ON/OFF] to set.

ON : As same as "General manner", the vibration pattern follows

"Vibrator", and incoming voice, videophone calls, mails, or

messages are notiﬁed with vibration. If "Vibrator" is set to

"OFF", "Incoming call" is notiﬁed with the vibration "Pattern

1", "Mail/Message/SMS" is notiﬁed with "Message 1", and

"Alarm/Schedule" is notiﬁed with "Alarm 1".

OFF : The FOMA terminal does not vibrate.

[Incoming call vol.]*

Adjust the ring tone volume for incoming voice/videophone calls.

[Mail/SMS vol.]*

Adjust the ring tone volume for Mail/MessageR/F/SMS.

[Alarm/Schedule vol.]*

Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.

[Eﬀect/Popup tone]

Adjust the eﬀect tone or volume when the popup is displayed.

[Low battery alert]

Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level becomes low.

* When the volume level is set to the highest, →(Step up) is

displayed to increase the sound progressively.

[Done]

Stand-by display

Changing Stand-by Display

You can set the items (wallpaper, clock, calendar, schedule,

shortcut, etc.) to be shown on the Stand-by display.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶

"Stand-by display"

Stand-by display

setting screen

Perform the following operations

•

[Preview]: The selected preview screen is displayed. Press

to return to the Stand-by display setting screen.

107

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Wallpaper]

TOUCH : Select an image to change when the Stand-by display is

touched.

• Press

[Backgnd] to set a slideshow in background.

→P107

Image : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data box".

→P296

• A slideshow created from My picture cannot be selected

with this operation. Make the Stand-by display setting

from the Slideshow list screen (P305).

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data box".→P307

i-αppli : Select a Stand-by i-αppli saved on the FOMA terminal.

→P285

[Display items]

Set the display such as clock, calendar, shortcut, etc. in the Stand-

by display.

• If "TOUCH" is selected for "Wallpaper", this item is unavailable.

Do not show : Items such as clock, calendar, etc. are not displayed.

Analog clock : Select an item from Analog clock.

Digital clock : Select an item from Digital clock.

Calendar : Select to display only "Calendar" or "Calendar +

Schedule".

Shortcut : Display shortcuts.

▶ Select a registration ﬁeld ▶

[Add] ▶ Select a

function ▶

[Done]

• Up to 8 functions can be saved as a shortcut.

• Press

[Menu] to delete saved function or reset

to default settings.

[Battery icon]

Select a battery icon.

[Antenna icon]

Select an antenna icon.

[Done]

Note

• After changing to the option other than "Kisekae settings" for

"Battery icon" and "Antenna icon, these icons return to "Kisekae

settings" by setting all in "Kisekae Tool" (P111).

Setting Slideshow of Touch Image

If "TOUCH" is selected for "Wallpaper", up to other 10 images

can be displayed as slideshow in background of the touch

image.

• If "Splash clock" or "Game" is selected for the touch image, a

slideshow cannot be set.

Stand-by display setting screen (P106) ▶

"Wallpaper" ▶ "TOUCH" ▶

[Backgnd] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Slideshow image]

Select a background image.

▶ Move the cursor to a list number ▶

[Add] ▶ Move the cursor

to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Select an image ▶ Repeat the operation

to add an image ▶

[Done]

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected image.

•

[Change]: Change the selected image.

[Slideshow speed]

Select a slideshow speed.

[Random slideshow]

Set whether to display slideshow images in random order.

Continued on next page

108

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Done]

Setting "Dual clock"

Selecting "Dual clock" in "Digital clock" displays the dates and

times of 2 countries or areas, and cities.

Select the country or area, and city of the clock displayed at the

bottom of the dual clock.

▶ Use

to move to the target area ▶

[Zoom in] ▶ Use

to move to the target city ▶

[Set]

• Press

[Search] to display the city name list. You can also

enter the city name with dial keys and search for a target city.

• Press

[Menu] to search for a city or set Daylight Saving to

ON/OFF.

Note

• Some data may not be displayed in the Stand-by display.

• The moving picture/i-motion or Flash movie set as the Stand-

by display starts when the FOMA terminal is opened and the

moving picture/i-motion stops when the terminal is closed. Also,

press

to play or stop it.

• Web To function is not available from a moving picture/i-motion

set as the Stand-by display.

• When displaying the Stand-by display, a Flash movie such as a

clock, or GIF animation stops after played for a certain period

of time.

• Under the setting of "4 season", "SAKURA", "SummerBeach",

"MOMIJI", and "Yuki" are automatically switched depending on

the month.

• Under the setting of "4 season", "SAKURA", "SummerBeach",

"MOMIJI", or "Yuki", part of touch image disappears and the

clock appears when the display is touched once. The entire

touch image and the clock disappear and only the background

image appears when the display is touched once again. Both

touch image and background image disappear when

pressed.

• If the background image and the text color of the clock

are overlapped, the clock becomes invisible. Change the

background setting or touch image.

• Under the setting of "Splash clock", the clock moves to the

position you touch.

• Under the setting of "Game", you can play game on the Stand-

by display such as concentration or hidden catch, etc.

• If the time zone is set to other than GMT+9 in "Auto time

adjust" (P53) or "Local time zone" (P53), the clock is

automatically changed to "Dual clock".

•

After this option is set, press

in Stand-by ▶ move the cursor

to the clock display ▶

to display the following screen.

- "Dual clock"

The Date&Time settings screen (P53) appears when the

Home clock (the upper clock) is selected, and the Stand-by

display setting screen appears when the Sub clock (the lower

clock) is selected.

- Other clocks

The Alarm list screen (P350) is displayed. (If the date is

selected, the Calendar screen of the schedule (P354) is

displayed.)

•

After this option is set, press

in Stand-by ▶ move the

cursor to the calendar display ▶

to display the Calendar

screen of the schedule (P345).

• After "Calendar + Schedule" is set, press

in Stand-by ▶

move the cursor to the schedule ▶

to display the Schedule

list screen (P354).

109

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Call & Mail image

Setting Image for Incoming Calls

Set an image displayed on the screen for incoming calls, etc.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Call & Mail

image"

Perform the following operations

•

[Preview]: The preview screen of the selected image is

displayed, and press

to stop the preview.

[Incoming voice call]

Set an image displayed on the screen when a voice call arrives.

Image : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data box".

→P296

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data box".→P307

[Incoming video call]

Set an image displayed on the incoming videophone call screen.

• Available items are the same as for "Incoming voice call".

[Mail sending]

Select an image displayed when sending a mail from "My picture" of

"Data box".→P296

[Mail receiving]

Select an image displayed when receiving a mail and MessageR/F

from "My picture" of "Data box".→P296

[Mail complete]

Set an image displayed on the completion of receiving a mail and

MessageR/F.

• Available items are the same as for "Incoming voice call".

[Check new messages]

Select an image displayed on the completion of checking new

message from "My picture" of "Data box".→P296

[Done]

Note

• A sound only moving picture/i-motion cannot be set to the

incoming call screen.

•

If a moving picture/i-motion with sound is set to the incoming

call screen, the "Select ring tone" (P100) is also changed to the

same.

• If a moving picture/i-motion with sound is set as an incoming

image, the ring tone settings are automatically reset to the

default when you change it to a still image or moving picture/

i-motion without sound.

Quick dial

Setting Dialing Screen Display

Set whether to search and display the Phonebook entry

corresponding to the memory number when entered between

a 1-digit and 2-digit number in Stand-by.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ Move the

cursor to "Quick dial" ▶

[ON/OFF]

110

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Wake-up display

Setting Wake-up Display

Set an image displayed on the screen when the FOMA

terminal is started up.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Wake-up

display"

•

[Preview]: The preview screen of the selected image is

displayed, and press to stop

the preview.

[Select] ▶ Select an image

• To select from other folders, press

and then select an

image.

[Done]

Note

• Flash movies cannot be set as a wake-up screen.

Show ph. book img

Displaying Image Set to Phonebook

on Incoming Call Screen

Display the image set to the Phonebook entry when a call

arrives from the number saved in the Phonebook with caller

ID shown.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ Move the cursor to "Show ph.

book img" ▶

[ON/OFF]

Note

• The image display priority for an incoming call is as follows:

Image set to a Phonebook entry

Image set to a Group in the Phonebook

Image set for the Call & Mail image

Backlight

Setting Display Backlight

You can set the Display backlight.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Backlight" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Display duration]

Set the backlight duration of the display from between 10 seconds

and 10 minutes, or Always ON.

• When the set time elapsed after the last operation, the screen

becomes dark. When approximately more 5 seconds elapsed, the

backlight turns oﬀ completely. (While i-Channel ticker is displayed,

the backlight does not turn oﬀ completely until at least 1 minute

elapsed after the last operation.)

[Display brightness]

Set the backlight level of the display.

111

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[AC connected]

Set the lighting when the AC charger is connected.

Display setting : Use the settings in "Display duration" and "Display

brightness".

Always ON : Light is always on.

[Done]

Note

• During the voice call, the backlight turns oﬀ after approximately

5 seconds, regardless of the "Display duration" setting.

Power saver mode

Displaying in Power Save Mode

You can set the backlight brightness of the display to the

lowest power saving level.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶

"Power saver mode" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Color theme

Setting a Color Theme for Display

You can select a color theme.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Color theme"

Select a color

•

[Preview]: The preview screen is displayed.

Kisekae Tool

Using Kisekae Tool

If you use "Kisekae Tool", items such as ring tone, Stand-by

display, icon menu can be changed at a time.

• Downloading Kisekae Tool→P195

• Available items vary depending on Kisekae Tool.

- Stand-by display

- Custom menu

- Incoming voice call image

- Incoming vt call image

- Mail sending image

- Mail receiving image

- Mail complete image

- Check new message (Image)

- Antenna icon

- Battery icon

- Color theme

- Voice call

- Video call

- Mail/Message/SMS

- MessageR

- MessageF

- SMS

- Alarm

• If the Menu screen design is changed by using Kisekae Tool, menu

structure may change, depending on menu types, according to the

frequency of use. In addition, numbers assigned to menu items

(item numbers) may not be applied.

• Pre-installed Kisekae Tool can display menu items in Japanese,

English, and Korean (except for "L04A-direct"). Downloaded Kisekae

Tool may not display menu items in English and Korean.

▶ "Data box" ▶ "Kisekae Tool"

Continued on next page

112

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

"i-mode"/"Preinstalled"

i-mode : Select from Kisekae Tool

downloaded from the site.

Preinstalled : Select from preinstalled

Kisekae Tool.

• Select "Search by i-mode" and connect to

the i-mode site to search Kisekae Tool.

Kisekae Tool

list screen

Select Kisekae Tool ▶

[Set all] ▶ "Yes"

•

[View]: View the contents of the selected Kisekae Tool by

item.

Resetting the settings

Press

[Menu] on the Kisekae Tool list screen ▶ "Reset screen

display / sound setting" ▶ enter the Terminal security code.

Kisekae Tool List Screen Sub Menu

Kisekae Tool list screen (P112) ▶ Move the

cursor to Kisekae Tool ▶

[Menu]

• The Kisekae Tool list screen sub menu is the same as for "Still

Image File List Screen Sub Menu" (P298) except for "Set all"

and "Reset screen display / sound setting". However, "Send

via", "Set as", and "Store in center" are not displayed.

Menu settings

Changing Display of Main Menu

You can switch between the following 2 types of the Main

menu.

• Custom menu: Menu items can be changed.

• Basic menu: Menu items cannot be changed, but icons or

background images can be changed.

Changing Menu Items of Custom Menu

You can change the menu items of the Custom menu

depending on Kisekae Tool.

You can call up the function with a few steps by changing

menu items to frequently used ones.

• Menu items cannot be changed from the default Custom menu.

▶ Move the cursor to the function to

change ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Assign function" ▶

Select a function ▶ "Yes"

Resetting the Custom Menu to the default

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reset function assignment" ▶ "Yes"

Deleting the Menu operation log

Depending on Kisekae Tool, Custom menu items are

automatically sorted according to the menu operation log.

Perform the following operations to delete menu operation log.

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reset menu operation log" ▶ "Yes"

113

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Changing Icons or Background Images of

Basic Menu

▶

[Basic]

Move the cursor to an icon to change ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Icon settings" ▶ Select a new

icon

• To select other folders, press

and then select an icon.

To change the background image

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Set background" ▶ select an

image.

Note

• JPEG or GIF images in 130×130 dots or smaller can be used

as an icon. The image size larger than this size is automatically

reduced. The image of the ﬁrst frame is displayed for an image

in animation GIF format.

Setting Preferentially Displayed Menu

You can set Menu displayed when pressing

in Stand-by.

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Menu priority" ▶

"Custom menu"/"Basic menu" ▶ "Yes"

Switching Menu

While displaying Menu, press

[Basic/Custom].

Lighting LED

Setting Incoming Lighting/

Blinking Colors or Patterns

You can set the incoming or alarm illumination to ON/OFF, or

set a combination of illumination colors for each item.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Lighting LED"

▶ Perform the following operations

•

[Preview]: Check the illumination set to the selected item.

[Lighting LED]

Set whether to light/blink the illumination light.

[Incoming voice call]*

Set an illumination pattern/color for an incoming voice call.

[Incoming video call]*

Set an illumination pattern/color for an incoming videophone call.

[New mail]*

Set an illumination pattern/color for incoming mail.

[Mail sending]*

Set an illumination pattern/color for outgoing mail.

[New MessageR/F]*

Set an illumination pattern/color for incoming MessageR/F.

[New SMS]*

Set an illumination pattern/color for incoming SMS.

Continued on next page

114

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[New Voice mail]*

Set an illumination pattern/color to indicate that a new message is

recorded at the Voice mail center.

• This option is valid only when "Tone/Vibration message notiﬁcation"

is set to "Yes".→P393

[New Record message]*

Set an illumination pattern/color to indicate that a new message is

recorded.

[Playing Music]*

Set an illumination pattern/color during music playback.

[Alarm]*

Set an illumination pattern/color at Alarm time.

[Schedule/To do]*

Set an illumination pattern/color on schedule events.

[Ir exchange]*

Set an illumination pattern/color during infrared communication.

[Barcode reading]*

Set an illumination pattern/color when reading a bar code.

[IC card(Felica)]*

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when using the IC card.

[Slide open/close]*

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when sliding the FOMA

terminal up/down.

[Lock release]*

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when releasing the lock.

[Key press]*

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when pressing keys.

[Unread message]*

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when unread mail, SMS,

or messages exist.

[Missed call]*

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when you missed a call.

[Low battery]*

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when the battery level

becomes low.

* Available when "Lighting LED" is set to "ON"

[Done]

Note

• The illuminations for "Missed call" and "Unread message"

light/blink for up to 1 hour at 10 seconds interval, and other

illuminations light/blink for up to 30 seconds.

115

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Date&Time format

Setting Clock Display

You can set the display format for date and time.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Date&Time" ▶ "Date&Time

format" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Date format]

Set the display format for the date.

[Time format]

Set the display format for the time.

[Done]

Note

• YYYY=year, MM=month, and DD=day in the display.

Calibration

Adjusting Touch Panel

You can set the display format for date and time.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Calibration"

Touch the center of "+" at the upper left, upper

right, lower left, lower right, and middle

"Yes" ▶ Check the calibration with the same

operation as Step 2 ▶ "OK"

• If "No" is selected, go to Step 4 without checking the

calibration.

"Yes"

117

Security Settings

Security Code

Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal ･･･････ 118

Changing Terminal Security Code

･･･････････････････････････････Change security code 120

Setting PIN Codes ････････････････････････ PIN code 120

Unblocking a Blocked PIN ･･･････････････････････････ 121

Restricting Operations and Functions

on Mobile Phone

Various Lock Functions ･････････････････････････････ 121

Restricting Others from Using ･･････････････Lock all 121

Restricting Making/Receiving Calls ･････････････････ 123

Restricting Display of Phonebook and Schedule etc.

････････････････････････････････････Data access lock 124

Restricting Display of Live Character Park

････････････････････････････Live Character Park lock 125

Preventing the Touch Panel/Key Misoperations

･･････････････････････････････････････････ Touch lock 125

Restricting Outgoing/Incoming Calls

and Messages

Automatically Setting Touch Lock

･････････････････････････････････････ Auto touch lock 126

Setting Display for Redial and Received Calls

･･･････････････････････････････ Display Call/Mail logs 126

Displaying Information Set as Secret

････････････････････････････････････････ Secret mode 127

Rejecting a Call from Speciﬁed Number

････････････････････････････････････････Reject on list 127

Rejecting All Incoming Calls ･････････Reject all calls 128

Setting Actions when Calls Arrive from Anonymous

Callers ･･･････････････････････････ Anonymous caller 129

Muting Ring Tone for a Caller Unset in Phonebook

･････････････････････････････････ Set mute ring(sec.) 130

Rejecting a Call from a Caller Unset in Phonebook

･････････････････････････････････････Reject unknown 130

Using Data Security Service

･･･････････････････････････････Data Security Service 131

Resetting Various Functions ････････ Reset Settings 132

Deleting Saved Data All at Once ･････ Clear memory 132

Other Security Settings

Other Security Settings ････････････････････････････ 133

118

Security Settings

Security Codes Used on the

FOMA Terminal

Some functions of the FOMA terminal require a password.

In addition to the Terminal security code, the Network

security code, the i-mode password, etc. are oﬀered. These

passwords help you utilize your FOMA terminal.

• The entered passwords such as the Terminal security code, Network

security code, and i-mode password are displayed as "＊".

Cautions on security codes

• Avoid setting a password using your birthday, part of your phone

number, your address or room number, "1111" or "1234", which

can be easily guessed by others. Be sure to write down the set

passwords and store them in a separate location.

• Do not reveal your passwords to others. DOCOMO is not

responsible for damage caused by misuse of your security codes

by others.

• If you forget your passwords, you need to bring your ID (driver's

license, etc.), the FOMA terminal and UIM to the docomo Shop.

For details, contact "General Inquiries" at the back of this manual.

Terminal Security Code

The Terminal security code is set to "0000" by default; you

can change the code yourself.→P120

If the Terminal security code entry screen

appears, enter the 4- to 8- digit code and

press

[OK].

Terminal security

code entry

screen

Network Security Code

The Network security code is a 4-digit number to be used for

conﬁrming subscriber's identity at an acceptance of order at

the docomo Shop, docomo Information Center, or "お客様サポー

ト (user support)" and accessing network services. You can

set any number at subscription, and can change the number

yourself.

If you have "docomo ID/Password" for "My docomo" which

is a total support site for a PC, you can change the Network

security code from a PC. From i-mode, you can change the

Network security code by accessing "お客様サポート (user

support)" then "各種設定(確認・変更・利用) (subscriptions &

procedures)".

• For "My docomo" and "お客様サポート (user support)", see the

backside of the back of this manual.

119

Security Settings

i-mode Password

The 4-digit "i-mode password" is required to register/remove

contents in My Menu, or subscribe to/cancel message

service, fee-based i-mode services. (Some other information

service providers may set individual passwords.)

The i-mode password is set to "0000" by default; you

can change it yourself. From i-mode, you can change the

password by accessing "iMenu" ▶ "English" ▶ "Options" ▶

"Change i-mode Password".

PIN1/PIN2 Codes

You can set PIN1 and PIN2 codes to the UIM. These

codes are set to "0000" by default. You can change them

yourself.→P120

The PIN1 code is a 4- to 8- digit number (code) required

to identify the user every time the UIM is inserted into the

FOMA terminal or the terminal power is turned on in order to

prevent unauthorized use.

The PIN1 code entry is required to make or receive calls, and

operate the terminal. The PIN2 code is a 4- to 8- digit number

used to reset accumulated call charges, etc.

If the PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen

appears, enter the 4- to 8- digit PIN1/

PIN2 code and press

[OK].

• Use the PIN1 and PIN2 codes you set

previously if you purchase a new FOMA

terminal and use the current UIM.

PIN1 code entry

screen (Ex.: For

PIN1 code)

PUK Code (PIN Unblock Code)

The PUK code is an 8-digit number used to unblock the PIN1

or PIN2 code.→P121

You cannot change it yourself.

• If you fail to enter the correct PUK code 10 times in a row, the UIM

is locked.

新規 PIN1 ／ PIN2

コードの設定

10 回連続

入力ミス

入力 OK

の場合

3 回連続

入力ミス PIN ロック解除

コードの入力

ドコモショップ窓口に

お問い合わせください。

PIN1 コード

の入力

PIN2 コード

の入力

Enter PUK

code (PIN

Unblock Code)

Enter

PIN1 code

Enter

PIN2 code

Set new

PIN1/PIN2 code

Contact the

docomo Shop

Failed 10

times in a row

Failed 3 times

in a row

120

Security Settings

Change security code

Changing Terminal Security Code

You can change the Terminal security code.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"Change security code"

Enter the current Terminal security code

The Change security code screen appears.

Enter a new Terminal security code

Re-enter the Terminal security code entered in

Step 3

PIN code

Setting PIN Codes

PIN1 code request

Requiring the PIN1 Code when the

Terminal is Turned On

Set to display the PIN1 code entry screen when the FOMA

terminal is turned on, and reject the use of the FOMA

terminal unless entering the PIN1 code.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"PIN code" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

▶ "PIN1 code request" ▶ "ON"/"OFF" ▶

Enter PIN1 code

Making emergency calls (110, 119, or 118) when the

PIN1 entry screen is open

You can make emergency calls (110, 119, or 118) even when

the PIN1 code entry screen appears right after the FOMA

terminal is turned on.

▶

[ER. call] ▶ Select an emergency number ▶

[OK]

Change PIN1/PIN2 code

Changing PIN1/PIN2 Code

• Set "PIN1 code request" to "ON" before changing the PIN1 code.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "PIN

code" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

"Change PIN1 code"/"Change PIN2 code" ▶

Enter the current PIN1/PIN2 code

The new PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen appears.

Enter the new PIN1/PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits)

The new PIN1/PIN2 code re-entry screen appears.

Re-enter the PIN1/PIN2 code entered in Step 3

121

Security Settings

Unblocking a Blocked PIN

If you enter an incorrect PIN1/PIN2 code 3 times in a row

and the PIN lock screen appears, enter the PUK code to

release the lock.

• You need to set a new PIN1/PIN2 code after unblocking the PIN

code.

PIN lock screen

▶

Enter the PUK code (8 digits)

The new PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen appears.

Enter the new PIN1/PIN2 (4 to 8 digits)

The re-entry screen for conﬁrmation appears.

Re-enter the PIN1/PIN2 code entered in Step 2

Various Lock Functions

Lock

function Description

Reference

Lock all You can lock the FOMA terminal to

prevent unauthorized use. P121

Omakase

Lock If you lost the FOMA terminal, you can

lock the terminal by remote control. P122

Call/Mail

lock To prevent unauthorized use of the FOMA

terminal, you can disable outgoing calls,

address entries with dial keys, incoming

calls or display of mail messages.

P123

Lock

function Description

Reference

Self mode You can disable all network functions,

such as making/receiving calls, using

i-mode, or sending/receiving mails.

P124

Data

access lock You can specify certain functions to lock. P124

Live

Character

Park lock

You can hide Live Character Park. P125

Auto touch

lock

You can set the FOMA terminal to

automatically lock the touch operations

and Keypad to avoid being used when you

close the FOMA terminal and leave it for a

certain seconds without any operations.

P126

Display Call/

Mail logs You can hide redialed call, received call,

sent mail, received mail logs. P126

Secret

mode You can hide secret Phonebook entries or

schedule events. P127

Lock all

Restricting Others from Using

You can lock the FOMA terminal to prevent anyone from

using it.

• When Lock all is activated, any operations other than turning power

ON/OFF, making emergency calls, answering incoming voice/

videophone calls, and canceling Lock all are disabled.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Lock" ▶

"Lock all" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶

"Yes"/"No"

Continued on next page

122

Security Settings

Note

• Even if mail or MessageR/F arrives while Lock all is activated,

the Receive results screen or icon is not displayed.

• While Lock all is activated, the i-Channel ticker does not appear.

Calling emergency numbers (110, 119, or 118) during

Lock all

Emergency numbers (110, 119, or 118) can be called during Lock all.

▶

[Emergency]

▶

Select an emergency number

▶

[OK]

Canceling Lock all

▶ Touch "Unlock"/Press any key ▶ Enter the Terminal security

code

If you fail to enter the correct Terminal security code 5 times in a

row, the terminal automatically turns power oﬀ.

Omakase Lock

Using Omakase Lock

You can lock your personal information such as Phonebook

entries and the IC card functions of Osaifu-Keitai by

contacting DOCOMO when you lost the FOMA terminal and

other cases. Your important privacy and Osaifu-Keitai will be

protected. If Omakase Lock cannot be set at the subscription

and communication becomes available within a year, the lock

is automatically activated. However if you cancel or halt the

contract, change your phone number, or issue a new UIM due

to loss (only when locked the terminal by specifying numbers),

the lock will not be automatically activated even within a year.

The FOMA terminal can be unlocked upon your request.

* If you are the docomo Premier Club member, no charges apply to

use this service as many times as you want. If you are not the

docomo Premier Club member, charges apply (however, if you

subscribe to this service upon or during suspension of the FOMA

terminal, no charges apply.) Also, if you subscribe to Keitai Anshin

Pack (Mobile Phone Security Package), you can use this service

within the Keitai Anshin Pack ﬂat rate fee.

Setting/canceling Omakase Lock

0120−524−360 Available 24 hours a day

(In Japanese only)

* Setting/canceling the lock is available from the My docomo site

using a PC.

* For details about Omakase Lock, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

When Omakase Lock is set, "Omakase Lock activated"

appears.

• During Omakase Lock, operations except answering voice/

videophone calls or turning power ON/OFF are unavailable and each

function (including the IC card functions) cannot be used.

• Receiving voice/videophone calls is available. However, only phone

number appears and the name or image saved in the Phonebook

does not appear.

• The received mails during Omakase Lock are stored in the i-mode

center.

• Turning power ON/OFF is available. However, turning power OFF

does not cancel the lock.

• The UIM or microSD card cannot be locked.

123

Security Settings

Note

• Even when other functions are activated, relevant functions are

ended and the lock is activated.

• Even while other lock function is set, Omakase Lock can be

used. However, if Omakase Lock is set during Public mode

(Drive mode), voice/videophone calls also cannot be received.

• When the FOMA terminal is out of service area, turned OFF, or

used overseas, the lock cannot be activated nor deactivated.

Also, depending on the usage status of the FOMA terminal, the

lock may not be activated.

• If you subscribe to Dual Network Service and the mova service

is in use, the lock cannot be activated.

• Even when the subscriber is diﬀerent from the user of the

FOMA terminal, the lock is activated upon the request from the

subscriber.

• Omakase Lock can be canceled only if the UIM phone number

that is the same as the one used when Omakase Lock is

activated is inserted in the FOMA terminal. If the lock cannot be

canceled, contact "General Inquiries" at the back of this manual.

Restricting Making/Receiving

Calls

Call/Mail lock

Disabling Outgoing or Incoming Communications

You can disable making calls, entering an address with dial

keys, answering calls, or displaying mails.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Lock" ▶

"Call/Mail lock" ▶ Enter the Terminal security

code ▶ Perform the following operations

[Call/Mail lock set]

Set whether to activate the Call/Mail lock.

[Dialing call]*

Disable the following operations.

• Making calls by entering numbers with dial keys

• Making calls via the received call logs

• Making calls to redial phone numbers (making a call to a number

saved in the Phonebook or an emergency number such as "110",

"119", or "118" is available)

• Saving, editing, or deleting a Phonebook entry (including

exchanging data via infrared communication, or copying/moving to

the microSD card)

[Send mail]*

Disable the following operations.

• Entering a mail address with dial keys.

• Sending mail to an address in the redial or received mail logs

(sending mails to an address saved in the Phonebook is available).

• Performing data communications connecting to a PC, etc.

• Saving, editing, or deleting a Phonebook entry (including

exchanging data via infrared communication, or copying/moving to

the microSD card).

[Incoming call]*

Disable incoming calls. While this function is activated, a missed call

icon does not appear and the received call log cannot be viewed.

[Rcv. mail display]*

Disable viewing sent/received mails and MessageR/F. While this

function is activated, an icon indicating incoming mail does not

appear, and mails and received mail log in the FOMA terminal cannot

be viewed.

* Can be set when "Call/Mail lock set" is set to "ON".

[Done]

124

Security Settings

Self mode

Stopping All Incoming/Outgoing

Transmissions

You can disable all network functions, such as making/

receiving calls, using i-mode, or sending/receiving mails.

Infrared data communication is also unavailable.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Self

mode" ▶ "Yes"/"No"

Note

• Self mode is deactivated if you call an emergency number

("110", "119", or "118").

• While Self mode is activated, callers will hear a message

indicating that the FOMA terminal is turned oﬀ or out of service

area.

• The Voice mail service and the Call forwarding service still work

in Self mode.

• All mails and MessageR/F received while in Self mode are

stored at the i-mode center and SMS is stored at the SMS

center. To receive them, deactivate Self mode and check new

messages/SMS.

• If a call arrives while Self mode is activated, a missed call icon

does not appear on the Stand-by display after the Self mode is

deactivated.

Data access lock

Restricting Display of

Phonebook and Schedule etc.

You can lock speciﬁed functions to reject the use unless the

Terminal security code is entered, or restrict the use of the

FOMA terminal.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Lock"

▶ "Data access lock" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Data access lock]

Set whether to activate the Data access lock.

[Phonebook]*

Set to disable the Phonebook until the Terminal security code is

entered.

• In the Redial list or logs, the phone number or mail address of the

caller/sender will be displayed instead of the name saved in the

Phonebook.

• Receiving Phonebook entries using infrared communication

becomes unavailable.

[Data box]*

Set to disable the ﬁles in Data box until the Terminal security code

is entered.

• Receiving data such as images or melodies to be saved in Data box

using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

[Record message]*

Set to disable the Record message until the Terminal security code

is entered.

• If the Record message is set to "ON" and locked, does not

appear in the Stand-by display even when a message is recorded.

125

Security Settings

[Schedule]*

Set to disable the Schedule function until the Terminal security code

is entered.

• An alarm set for a Schedule event does not sound.

• Receiving schedule events using infrared communication becomes

unavailable.

[i-mode]*

Set to disable the i-mode function until the Terminal security code is

entered.

• i-mode connections from other than the i-mode menu screen, such

as "Web To" become unavailable.

• i-Channel ticker is not displayed.

• Pattern deﬁnition for the scanning function becomes unavailable.

• Receiving bookmarks using infrared communication becomes

unavailable.

• Communication from i-αppli is available.

• i-αppli update is available from i-αppli menu.

[i-αppli]*

Set to disable the i-αppli until the Terminal security code is entered.

• Receiving i-αppli data using infrared communication becomes

unavailable.

• If i-αppli is set as the Stand-by display, it will disappear from the

Stand-by display.

* Can be set when "Data access lock" is set to "ON".

[Done]

Note

• You can access the functions by entering the Terminal security

code when:

- You access a function from the Main menu or Custom menu.

- You press a key assigned to access the function in Stand-by.

- You access a function from the New task screen (P349) or

Task list screen (P350).

Live Character Park lock

Restricting Display of Live

Character Park

You can restrict the display of Live Character Park unless

the Terminal security code is entered.

• Only available to display the Live Character Park screen from the

Stand-by display. If performed from the Live Character Park screen,

the screen returns straight to the Live Character Park screen.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Lock" ▶

"Live Character Park lock" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code

Perform this operation to switch ON and OFF.

Touch lock

Preventing the Touch Panel/Key

Misoperations

Disable the use by locking touch panel and keys at the time

of the FOMA terminal being closed.

Setting Touch Lock

While the FOMA terminal is closed ▶

Releasing Touch Lock

While the FOMA terminal is closed ▶ Touch

(for 1+ seconds)/ (for 1+ seconds)

• You can also release the Touch lock by opening the FOMA

terminal.

Continued on next page

126

Security Settings

Note

• While 1Seg, Camera, or music playback function (except BGM),

etc. is in use, Touch lock is not applied.

• If a call arrives during Touch lock, the Incoming call screen, etc.

appears and operations become available temporarily.

• During background playback, you can adjust the volume by

pressing

even if Touch lock is set.

• If Auto touch lock (P126) is set, Touch lock is applied

automatically after a certain period of time.

• Touch lock cannot be set in some occasions such as during a

call, while making a call, or communicating.

Auto touch lock

Automatically Setting Touch

Lock

You can automatically lock and disable touch operations and

keys if the FOMA terminal does not operate for a certain

period of time with the FOMA terminal closed.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Auto

touch lock" ▶ Select a lock method

OFF : Do not activate Auto touch lock.

After 15 sec. : Activate Touch lock 15 seconds after the

last operation of the FOMA terminal with the

terminal closed.

After 30 sec. : Activate Touch lock 30 seconds after the

last operation of the FOMA terminal with the

terminal closed.

After 60 sec. : Activate Touch lock 60 seconds after the

last operation of the FOMA terminal with the

terminal closed.

When LCD oﬀ : Activate Touch lock when the display turns oﬀ

with the FOMA terminal closed.

Display Call/Mail logs

Setting Display for Redial and

Received Calls

You can disable the display of redial, received call, sent mail,

and received mail logs.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"Display Call/Mail logs" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code

Move the cursor to an item to set ▶

[ON/OFF]

The items set to "OFF" cannot be displayed.

Redial logs : Set whether to display the redial logs.

Rcv. call logs : Set whether to display the received call logs.

Sent mail logs : Set whether to display the sent mail logs.

Rcv. Mail logs : Set whether to display the received mail logs.

Note

• If "Rcv. call logs" is set to "OFF", the recorded message list is

not displayed.

127

Security Settings

Secret mode

Displaying Information Set as

Secret

You can set whether to display secret Phonebook entries/

Schedule events.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Secret

mode" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶

Select a Secret mode setting

OFF : Display only general data other than secret

data.

Secret mode : Display secret and general data.

Secret data only

: Display only secret data.

Reject on list

Rejecting a Call from Speciﬁed

Number

You can reject calls from the speciﬁc parties saved on the

list.

• This function is available only when the caller sends caller ID.

• It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request service

concurrently.

Saving Phone Numbers to Reject

You can save and edit up to 20 phone numbers to reject.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Accept/Reject call" ▶ Enter

the Terminal security code ▶ "Edit reject list"

Reject list screen

Continued on next page

128

Security Settings

Select an empty list number ▶ Enter a phone

number to reject ▶ "Silent"/"Disconnect call"

Silent : Mute the ring tone.

Disconnect call : Incoming call actions are not performed.

•

[Search]: Invoke a phone number to reject from the

Phonebook.

Deleting a saved phone number

Select a number to delete on the Reject list screen ▶ select

"Delete".

Editing a saved phone number

Select a number to edit on the Reject list screen ▶ select "Edit".

Setting the Reject on List

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Accept/Reject call" ▶ Enter

the Terminal security code ▶ "Accept/Reject

set" ▶ "Reject on list"

To cancel the rejection

Select "Accept" on the screen after selecting "Accept/

Reject set".

Note

• When the Reject on list is activated, and a call from a party

saved as "Disconnect call" arrives, appears on the Stand-by

display and the call is recorded in the Received call log as a

missed call. The other party hears a busy signal.

• i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the

rejection settings.

Reject all calls

Rejecting All Incoming Calls

You can mute the ring tone for all incoming calls or

disconnect calls before incoming call actions are performed.

▶

"Settings"

▶

"Call/VT/Dialing"

▶

"Incoming

call"

▶

"Accept/Reject call"

▶

Enter the Terminal

security code

▶

"Accept/Reject set"

▶

"Reject all

calls"

▶

"Silent"/"Disconnect call"

Silent : Mute the ring tone for all incoming calls.

Disconnect call : Do not perform incoming call actions for all

incoming calls.

To cancel the rejection

Select "Accept" on the screen after selecting "Accept/

Reject set".

Note

• When a call arrives while "Disconnect call" is set, the call is not

notiﬁed and appears on the Stand-by display. The call is

recorded in the Received call log as a missed call. The other

party hears a busy signal.

• i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the

rejection settings.

129

Security Settings

Anonymous caller

Setting Actions when Calls

Arrive from Anonymous Callers

You can set whether to accept or reject calls without caller

ID per reason for anonymous call.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Anonymous caller" ▶

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Perform the

following operations

[User unset]

Set options for incoming calls without caller ID at the caller's will.

Response : Set response method for anonymous caller.

Disable : Cancel the setting.

Reject call : Reject incoming calls.

Silent alert : Mute the ring tone. You can select an image for the

incoming call from images saved in "My picture" of

"Data box".→P296

Alert setting : Select an image and ring tone for the incoming call

from data in "Data box".

Incoming call

image : Set an image for anonymous caller.

▶ "Terminal setting"/"Image"/"i-motion" ▶ Select an

image

Ring tone : Set ring tone for anonymous caller.

▶ "Terminal setting"/"MUSIC"/"i-motion"/"Melody" ▶

Select a ring tone

• If Chaku-Uta Full

saved in "MUSIC" is selected, go

to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a

Ring Tone" (P266).

[Pay phone]

Set options for calls made from payphones.

• Set items and operations are the same as in "User unset".

[Not support]

Set options for calls for which caller ID cannot be sent such as calls

made from overseas or from a land-line phone via forwarding services.

(Caller ID may be sent depending on the carrier.)

• Set items and operations are the same as in "User unset".

Note

• If an anonymous call set to "Reject call" arrives while the

Anonymous caller is activated, the call is not notiﬁed and

appears on the Stand-by display. The call is recorded in

Received call log as a missed call. The other party hears a

busy signal. Calls are rejected even when the Voice mail or

Call forwarding service is activated. However, if Ringing time is

set to 0 second or the FOMA terminal is out of service area or

turned power oﬀ, network services are activated.

• i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the

rejection settings.

• If "Select ring tone" (P100) or "Call & Mail image" (P109)

is set with a moving picture/i-motion with audio/video for a

speciﬁc caller and change either of them, the default sound or

image, even if the response method is set to "Alert setting", is

played for "Ring tone" or "Incoming call image" with the setting

unchanged.

• If a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound is set as either

"Incoming call image" or "Ring tone", the same moving picture/

i-motion is set for the other item.

• If the Caller ID request service is activated, it takes priority over

the settings of "Anonymous caller". The caller hears the voice

guidance for a Caller ID request.

130

Security Settings

Set mute ring(sec.)

Muting Ring Tone for a Caller

Unset in Phonebook

You can set the FOMA terminal not to ring immediately when

a call arrives from a caller not saved to the Phonebook or

without caller ID. This prevents nuisance calls such as "one-

ring call" that are disconnected after a short ringing time.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Set mute ring(sec.)" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Set mute ring time]

Set whether to enable the Set mute ring time.

[Mute time]*

Set the time for which the ring tone is muted before the ringing

action starts between 1 and 99 seconds.

[Missed call logs]*

Set whether to display the Received call logs for the call that was

terminated in the time speciﬁed in "Mute time".

* Can be set when "Set mute ring time" is set to "ON".

[Done]

Note

• When a relevant call arrives while this function is activated,

incoming call actions, such as sounding the ring tone, do not

take place for the set time; however, the Incoming call screen

appears.

• This function operates even when "Secret mode" is set to "OFF"

or a call from a operates Phonebook entry arrives.

• If this option is set longer than the response time of the Voice

mail/Call forwarding service, network services start without the

ringing action.

• If this option is set longer than "To answer" time of "Record

message", the Record message starts without the ringing

action.

• You cannot set "Set mute ring time" when "Reject unknown" is

set to "ON".

Reject unknown

Rejecting a Call from a Caller

Unset in Phonebook

You can set to reject calls from callers not saved to the

Phonebook or without caller ID.

• It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request service

concurrently.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Accept/Reject call" ▶ Enter

the Terminal security code ▶ Move the cursor

to "Reject unknown" ▶

[ON/OFF]

131

Security Settings

Note

• The FOMA terminal does not perform incoming call actions for

a rejected incoming call, however, the call is recorded in the

Received call log. The other party hears a busy signal.

• Calls are rejected even when the Voice mail or Call forwarding

service is activated. However, if the ringing time is set to 0

second, network services start.

• i-mode or SMS messages are received regardless of the

rejection settings.

• You cannot activate "Reject unknown" when "Set mute ring

time" is set to "ON" or "Data access lock" is set to "ON" with

"Phonebook" marked.

Data Security Service

Using Data Security Service

This service enables you to back up the Phonebook, images

and mails ("Saved data") at the DOCOMO's Data Center so

that the Saved data can be restored if you lose your FOMA

terminal or when changing models. Also, you can notify all

connected parties of your mail address change at a time. No

packet communication charges apply for sending the multi-

address notice mail. If you have a PC (My docomo), you can

use this service more conveniently.

• For details about the Data Security Service, see "Mobile Phone

User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

• The Data Security Service is a fee-based service requiring a

separate subscription (The i-mode contract is necessary for this

subscription).

Saving the FOMA Terminal Phonebook at

the Data Security Center

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Data security service" ▶

"Connect to center" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code ▶ "Yes"

Note

• You cannot save the UIM Phonebook.

• If another Phonebook is saved already, the data is updated.

• Note that if you use this service after deleting the Phonebook

entries in the FOMA terminal, the Phonebook entries saved at

the Data Center are deleted likewise.

• You can restore the Phonebook or use Set auto-update from ｉ

モードの電話帳お預かりサイト (i-mode's Data Security Service).

"iMenu" ▶ "English" ▶ "My Menu" ▶ select "電話帳お預かり (Data

Security Service)".

Displaying Exchanging History

Display exchanging history with the Data Center.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Data security service" ▶

"Exchanging history" ▶ Select an exchanging

history

• Move the cursor to an exchanging history and press

[Menu]

to select "Delete one" or "Delete all".

Setting whether to Send Images Set for the Phonebook

Set whether to save images set for the Phonebook entries to

the Data Center.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Data security service" ▶

Move the cursor to "Sndg img in phonebook" ▶

[ON/OFF]

132

Security Settings

Saving Images/Mails to the Data Center

Example: To save images saved in "My picture"

▶ "Data box" ▶ "My picture" ▶ Move the

cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

[Menu] ▶ "Store in center" ▶ Mark images

to save ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code ▶ "Yes"

Note

• Only images and mail saved in the FOMA terminal can be saved.

• SMS reports cannot be saved.

• An image larger than 100KB cannot be saved.

• Files attached to i-mode mail will not be saved.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved.

Reset Settings

Resetting Various Functions

You can reset settings of various functions to the defaults.

• For functions that can be reset to the defaults, refer to "Menu List"

(P430).

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶"Reset/Clear" ▶

"Reset Settings" ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code

Note

• Perform "Reset Settings" with the battery level suﬃcient.

• During "Reset Settings", functions/communication cannot be

used.

Clear memory

Deleting Saved Data All at Once

You can delete saved data.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Reset/Clear" ▶

"Clear memory"

Mark items to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶

Enter the Terminal security code

■ Data to be deleted

Item Data

Pre-installed

data Default data in "Data box"

User data All data other than pre-installed data in "Data box"

PIM data Data in "Phonebook"

/"Schedule"/"Text memo"/

"Sketch memo"/"To do list"/"Remembering

dates"/"1Seg", data in Inbox/Outbox

, data in

Bookmark, Screen memo, URL history, settings

in Additional service and Additional guide of the

network service

*1 Kisekae Tool data is not deleted.

*2 The total calls cost is not deleted.

*3 Inbox/Outbox folders, MessageR/F folders, and mail-connected

i-αppli folder are not deleted.

133

Security Settings

Deleting data saved on the microSD card

You can delete all data saved on the microSD card.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Reset/Clear" ▶ "Clear microSD"

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

Note

• Data saved on the UIM are not deleted.

• " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ動画 " are deleted.

<Pre-installed data>

• Some ﬁles that are used for default settings are not deleted.

• The use of WOW LG

If you deleted pre-installed i-αppli, Deco-mail pictures, Deco-

mail pictograms, wallpapers (the Stand-by display), frames,

stamps, melodies, or i-motion and want to restore it, visit site,

"WOW LG" in iMenu and you can download.*

"iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト (Menu list)" ▶ "ケータイ電話メーカー

(Mobile Phone Manufacturers)" ▶ "WOW LG"

* Packet communication charges apply for downloading.

Other Security Settings

In addition to the security settings described in this chapter,

the following functions/services are available.

Function name/Service name

Purpose

Reference

IC card lock

To prevent unauthorized

use of the IC card function

P292

Function name/Service name

Purpose

Reference

Nuisance call blocking

service To reject "nuisance call" P397

Caller ID request service To reject a call from a

caller without caller ID P398

Software Update To update software on

the FOMA terminal when

necessary

P459

Scanning function

To protect the FOMA

terminal from harmful data

P464

Receive option To accept only necessary

mails out of mass mails P149

i-mode Disaster Message

Board Service

See "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

Change your mail address

Spam Mail Prevention

(Reject Mail with URLs)

( Reject/Receive Mail

Settings)

(Kantan Mail Settings)

( Reject Mass i-mode Mail

Senders)

(SMS Rejection Settings)

( Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail)

( Conﬁrm Settings)

Suspending/reactivating

mail functions

Limiting mail size

Keitai-Osagashi Service

imadoco kantan search

(Location Search Service

Lite)

Continued on next page

134

Security Settings

Note

• The order of precedence when the function to prevent nuisance

calls is set concurrently is the following:

"Nuisance call blocking service"

"Reject on list"

"Reject unknown"

"Accept/Reject call"

"Anonymous caller"

135

Mail

Mail Functions of FOMA Terminal ･･･････････････････ 136

i-mode Mail ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 136

Displaying Mail Menu ････････････････････ Mail menu 137

Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-Mail

Composing and Sending i-mode Mail

･････････････････････････ Compose/Send i-mode mail 138

Creating and Sending Deco-mail ･･････････Deco-mail 141

Using a Template to Create Deco-mail ････ Template 144

Attaching a File ････････････････････････ Attachment 146

Receiving and Operating i-mode Mail

When You Receive i-mode Mail

･･････････････････････････Receive mail automatically 147

Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively ･･･ Receive option 149

Checking New i-mode Mail ･･･Check new messages 150

Replying to i-mode Mail ････････Reply to i-mode mail 151

Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other Address

･････････････････････････････････Forward i-mode mail 151

Adding Mail Addresses/Phone Numbers to

Phonebook ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 152

Playing/Saving an Attached File from i-mode Mail ･･･

152

Operating Mailbox

Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox or Unsent

Messages ･･････････Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message 154

Using Mail History

･･･････････ Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails 166

Conﬁguring Mail Settings

Setting Mail Functions of the FOMA Terminal

･････････････････････････････････････････ Mail setting 168

Using Message Services

When You Receive Message ･････ Receive Message 172

Checking New Message ･････Check new messages 173

Displaying New Message ････MessageR/MessageF 174

Using SMS

Composing and Sending SMS

････････････････････････････････ Compose/Send SMS 176

When You Receive SMS Messages ･･･Receive SMS 177

Checking New SMS Messages ････Check new SMS 177

Setting SMS ･････････････････････････ SMS Settings 178

136

Mail

Mail Functions of FOMA Terminal

The FOMA terminal provides 2 mail types: i-mode mail and

SMS.

• Using i-mode mail requires i-mode subscription.

• Using SMS requires no i-mode subscription.

• If you send i-mode mail or SMS containing some symbols

(, , etc.) or pictographs, they may not be displayed properly on

a mobile phone other than i-mode terminal or on a PC.

• Mail function in Korean is supported only by SMS. If you receive

e-mail in Korean via i-mode mail, text will not be displayed properly.

i-mode Mail

Upon subscription to i-mode, you can send and receive

e-mail via the Internet, as well as between i-mode terminals.

In addition to the message text, a total of 2MB in 10 ﬁles

(pictures or moving pictures, etc.) can be attached. Also,

Deco-mail is supported, in which you can change the color

and size of message text or background color. You can also

use Deco-mail pictogram to send expressive mail easily.

• For details about i-mode mail, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

SMS

You can send and receive text messages using only mobile

phone numbers without subscription to i-mode.

Sending→P176, Receiving→P177, Checking→P177

SMS Addresses

The SMS address is the "subscribed mobile phone number".

•

You can send and receive SMS to/from terminals that use international

carriers other than DOCOMO. Visit the DOCOMO International Services

website for available countries and international carriers.

Number of Characters that Can be Sent or Received

The number of characters that can be sent and received in

SMS is as follows:

Receiver 21 characters (including "+")

SMS text Japanese (70 characters), Korean (70 characters)

English (160 characters)

Sending and Receiving SMS in Korean

You can send and receive SMS in Korean to/from terminals

that support Korean.

•

Use L-01B to send and receive international SMS in Korean to/from

Korean-support terminals of Korea and other international carriers.

Visit the DOCOMO International Services website for international

carriers that support international SMS. The number of characters

that can be sent depends on the situation of each recipient carrier.

For details, contact recipient carriers.

• SMS texts in Korean sent to a terminal which does not support

Korean will not be displayed properly on the terminal.

• Switching input modes in SMS message to Korean→P178

• Entering in Korean→P382

137

Mail

When SMS Cannot be Received

SMS delivered to the SMS center will be immediately sent

to your FOMA terminal. However, when your FOMA terminal

is turned oﬀ or out of service area, the SMS is stored in the

SMS center.

Note

• The maximum storage period of SMS in the SMS center is 72

hours. You can specify the storage period from "SMS validity

period".→P178

• Expired SMS is automatically deleted.

• SMS stored in the SMS center can be received by "Check new

SMS".→P177

• When SMS stored in the SMS center is delivered, it is deleted

from the SMS center.

Mail menu

Displaying Mail Menu

Stand-by display ▶

Mail menu screen

Perform the following operations

[Inbox]

Display the Inbox list screen.→P154

[Compose message]

Create new i-mode mail.→P138

[Unsent message]

Display the Unsent mail list screen.→P155

[Outbox]

Display the Outbox list screen.→P155

[Check new messages]

Receive i-mode mail stored in the i-mode center by checking new

messages.→P150

[Receive option]

Check subjects of i-mode mail stored in the i-mode center, and select

mail to be received, or deleted without reception from the i-mode

center.→P149

[SMS]

Compose new SMS, or receive SMS stored in the SMS center by

checking new SMS.→P176, P177

[Template]

Display a list of saved templates.→P145

[Mail setting]

Set mail functions.→P168

138

Mail

Compose/Send i-mode mail

Composing and Sending i-mode

Mail

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Compose

message"

Compose

message screen

Receiver

Subject

Attachment

The total number of

bytes of characters

and decoration in

the message text

Message

Select ﬁeld ▶ "Direct input" ▶ Enter the

address

• Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered.

• The address can be selected from Sent message log, Received

message log, Phonebook, or Mail group.→P139

• Also, press

[Ph. book] to select an address from the

Phonebook.

Select ﬁeld ▶ Enter the subject

• Up to 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters can be entered.

Select [Message] ﬁeld ▶ Enter the message

• Up to 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000

half-pitch characters can be entered.

Message text

entry screen

[Send]

• T

[Save]: Save as unsent message.

Note

• To decorate message text→P141

• To send with attachments→P146

• You can insert a line feed in the message text. The line feed is

counted as 1 full-pitch character.

• A space inserted by pressing

is counted as 1 half-pitch

character.

• Characters may not be sent to the receiver depending on the

signal strength.

• Half-pitch katakana and pictographs except for mail exchanged

between i-mode terminals may not be displayed correctly.

• The secret code is added automatically when mail is sent with

the secret code set. However, the address of the sent mail

does not display the added secret code.

• Even if i-mode mail is sent successfully, an error message

indicating failure of sending mail may appear depending on the

signal strength.

139

Mail

• If you use Deco-mail pictogram (Picto. D) in mail, the mail is

automatically sent as Deco-mail.

• If you send a mail with pictographs added to the subject or

message text to the other carrier's mobile phone, they will

be automatically replaced with the similar pictographs that

the carrier/mobile phone supports. However, they may not be

displayed properly depending on the mobile phone type or its

functions.

• i-mode mail that is successfully sent will be saved in Outbox.

If the total number or total size of the stored sent mail exceeds

the limit, the oldest mail will be deleted ﬁrst. Protect sent mail

that you want to keep.

Compose Message Screen Sub Menu

Compose message screen (P138) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Send]

Send mail.

[Auto send]

Send i-mode mail that was composed in out of service area

automatically when the terminal moves to the place where signal can

be received.

[Save]

Save mail being created or edited in Unsent message.

[Address]

Add address : Send mail to multiple addresses (multi-address

transmission). Up to 5 addresses can be added.

Sent msg. log : Select an address from Sent message log.

Rcv. msg. log : Select an address from Received message log.

Phonebook : Select an address from Phonebook.

Mail group : Select an address from Mail group.

Direct input : Enter the receiver address directly.

Delete address : Delete a selected receiver address.

Change rcv. type : Change the selected receiver address type.

Change to To : Change the selected receiver to To. The mail

address entered in the To ﬁeld will be shown to

the recipient.

Change to Cc : Change the selected receiver to Cc. You can

specify additional addresses to send a copy of

the same mail to other recipients in addition to

the direct recipients. The mail address entered in

the Cc ﬁeld will be shown to other recipients.

• The mail address may not be displayed

depending on the recipient's mobile phone,

device or mail software.

Change to Bcc : Change the selected receiver to Bcc. You can

specify addresses to hide from other recipients.

The mail addresses entered in the Bcc ﬁeld will

not be shown to other recipients.

[Attachment]

Attach, view/play, or delete ﬁles.→P146

[Template]

Load template : Load a template to create Deco-mail.→P144

Save as template : Save the current Deco-mail as a template.

[Header/Sign.]

Attach header : Attach the set header.

Attach sign. : Attach the set signature.

Continued on next page

140

Mail

[Delete body]

Delete the message text.

Note

• When selecting a Phonebook entry with multiple mail addresses

saved, you need to further specify which addresses are to be

added for recipients.

• If the message text is already entered, a conﬁrmation whether

to delete the text appears. To load the template, select "Yes".

Message Text Entry Screen Sub Menu

Message text entry screen (P138) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Decorate mail]

Open the palette to select the decoration to Deco-mail.→P142

[Common phrases]

Enter or edit Common phrases.→P381

[Edit character]

Select a character or decoration in message text to copy, cut, or

paste. Undo the last entry or pasting of characters.→P385

[Edit user dict.]

Edit a dictionary stored in the FOMA terminal.→P387

[Quote]

Quote the contents of a Phonebook entry, etc.→P380

[Input setting]

Conﬁgure the character entry settings.→P380

[Special input]

Enter a space, line feed, or enter characters using Kuten code.

→P380

[Header/Sign.]

Header : Attach the set header.

Signature : Attach the set signature.

[Jump]

Top : Move to the top of the displayed message text.

Bottom : Move to the end of the displayed message text.

[Image info.]

Display detailed information about an image behind the cursor.

[Preview]

Open the preview screen of the message text.

141

Mail

Deco-mail

Creating and Sending Deco-mail

You can create your own designed mail by adding

decorations such as changing font size, font color or

background color, or inserting images while editing an i-mode

mail message.

• Deco-mail up to 100KB can be sent.

• Up to 20 images within 90KB can be inserted.

• Some i-mode terminals may receive Deco-mail that is larger than

10,000 bytes as mail containing a URL to browse.

Message text

entry screen

The set decoration

appears at the

cursor position.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Compose

message"

Enter the receiver and subject

• Entering the receiver and subject→P138

Select [Message] ﬁeld ▶

[Deco]

Palette display

screen

Use the palette to decorate the message text

• Decorating→P142

To specify a decoration before entering characters

For operations, refer to "Specifying a Decoration before

Entering Characters" (P143).

To enter characters before specifying a decoration

For operations, refer to "Entering Characters before

Specifying a Decoration" (P144).

[Close]

To view the Deco-mail message

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Preview".

[Set] ▶

[Send]

Continued on next page

142

Mail

Note

• If you exchange Deco-mail with Deco-mail incompatible i-mode

terminals, the decorations may not be displayed correctly.

• After decorated text is deleted, the decoration data may remain

and this may result in a reduction in the number of characters

available to enter in the text ﬁeld. Cancel any decoration before

deleting the text. When you delete the text by pressing

for 1+ seconds, the text including any decoration data will be

deleted.

• If a template contains an image that cannot be sent via mail,

the image may be deleted.

Decorating

Message text entry screen (P138) ▶

[Deco]

•

[Close]: Switch from palette functions

to character entry.

Perform the following operations

[ (Insert image)]

Data box : Insert an image saved in "My picture" to

the message text.

▶ Move the cursor to the folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Select an image

Still image photography : Capture and insert a still image.

▶ Capture an image ▶

[Save] (If

capturing with the FOMA terminal closed,

)

[ (Background color)]

Set a background color of the message text.

[ (Insert line)]

Insert a line in message text.

[ (Edit decoration)]

Specify the range of text to decorate.→P144

• This option cannot be selected when no text has been entered in

the message.

[ (Char decoration)]

Select decorations to apply to characters.→P143

[ (Cancel decoration)]

Delete decoration in the line at the cursor.

[ (My decoration)]

Apply My decoration : Apply a character decoration which is saved

beforehand.

Edit My decoration : Save your favorite character decoration.

→P143

[ (Undo)]

Restore a set decoration to the previous state.

[ (Reset all settings)]

Delete all set decorations.

143

Mail

Note

• When characters with "Telop" or "Swing" set are selected and

copied or cut, "Telop" or "Swing" will not take eﬀect.

• Up to 90KB or 20 images can be inserted. The number of

available attachments may be reduced depending on the ﬁle

size. If the maximum number of images or size is exceeded, a

warning message appears.

• By default, images are saved in the "Decomail picture" and

"Decomail picto" folders.

• If the same image is inserted more than once, it is considered

that one image is inserted.

Specifying a Decoration before Entering Characters

Message text entry screen (P138) ▶

[Deco] ▶ Select (Char decoration) ▶

Perform the following operations

[ (Font color)]

Set the color for characters.

• You can also select a color from the palette by pressing

[Palette].

[ (Font size)]

Set a font size.

[ (Blink)]

Set the text to blink.

• To cancel blinking, select (Blink).

[ (Move/Align)]

Set the display of the text.

• To cancel the setting, select (Move Align (Default)).

(Telop) : Set the text to display from right to left as a telop.

• Characters entered between and appear as

a telop.

(Swing) : Set the text to swing.

• Characters entered between and swing.

(Left) : Align characters to be entered or images to be

inserted to the left.

(Center) : Align characters to be entered or images to be

inserted to the center.

(Right) : Align characters to be entered or images to be

inserted to the right.

[Set] ▶ Enter characters

Note

• The size of Deco-mail pictogram cannot be changed.

• Pictographs are also displayed in the speciﬁed color. To

restore the default color, select on the right of (Text color

(Unchange)) from the color palette.

<Blink>

• When characters set to blink are displayed on the preview

screen or the Compose message screen, the characters stop

blinking after a certain period of time.

144

Mail

Entering Characters before Specifying a Decoration

Message text entry screen (P138) ▶

[Deco] ▶ Select (Edit decoration)

Use

to move the cursor to start point ▶

[Select]

•

[SelAll]: Select the entire message.

•

[Top]: Move to the top of the message text.

•

[End]: Move to the end of the message text.

Use

to move the cursor to end point ▶

[Select] ▶ Specify a decoration

• You can also decorate text by performing the following steps:

[Menu] (for 1+ seconds) ▶ Use

to move the cursor to

start point ▶

[Select] ▶ Use

to move the cursor to end

point ▶

[Select] ▶ "Decoration" ▶ Specify a Decoration

Selecting "Cancel decoration" deletes the decoration applied

to the text.

Template

Using a Template to Create

Deco-mail

Templates are form data for Deco-mail with decorations

such as the font size and image insertion already set. In

addition to the pre-installed templates, you can use templates

downloaded from sites.

Compose message screen (P138)

▶

[Menu]

▶

"Template"

▶

"Load template"

▶

"Yes"

• If the mail has entered message text, the entered text will be

deleted and the template will be loaded.

Select a template

The selected template is inserted in the message text.

• To select a template while viewing, press

[Preview] and

switch templates using

• You can edit the message text after inserting a template.

Creating a New Template

Create user-deﬁned templates. Created templates are saved

in "Template" of Mail menu.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Template" ▶

[Menu] ▶ "New Template"

Create templates

• Decorating→P142

Create a template ▶

[Set] ▶ Edit the title ▶

[Set] ▶ "Yes"

Note

• If message text in the mail is not decorated, a template cannot

be saved.

145

Mail

Editing Templates

You can edit user-deﬁned templates.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Template"

Template list

screen

Select a template ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit the

template

• Decorating→P142

[Set] ▶ "Overwrite save"/"New save"

Overwrite save : Save the edited template over the source

template.

New save : Save the edited template as a new template.

Edit the title ▶

[Set]

"Yes"

Template List Screen Sub Menu

Template list screen (P145) ▶ Move the

cursor to a template ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Compose mail]

Compose a new message with the selected template.

[New Template]

Create a new template.→P144

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected template.

Del. Selected : Select and delete templates.

▶ Mark templates to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or "Deselect

all".

Delete all : Delete all templates.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Edit title]

Edit the title of the selected template.→P145

[Detail info]

Display the properties of the selected template.

146

Mail

Attachment

Attaching a File

You can send i-mode mail with images or melodies attached.

• Up to 10 ﬁles, a total of 2MB, can be attached. The number of

available attachments may be reduced depending on the ﬁle size.

• The following ﬁle types can be attached:

- Images (JPEG, GIF)

- Moving picture/i-motion

- Motion Oekaki™ image

- Melody

- Phonebook

- Schedule event

- To do

- Bookmark

- Other ﬁles on microSD

• A ﬁle prohibited to be attached to mail or to be output from the

FOMA terminal cannot be attached.

Compose message screen (P138) ▶ Select

ﬁeld ▶ Perform the following operations

[Image]

My picture : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data

box".→P296

Start camera : Capture and attach a still image.

▶ Capture a still image ▶

[Save] (If capturing

with the FOMA terminal closed, )

[Movie]

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data box".

Start camera : Capture and attach a moving picture.

▶ Capture a moving picture ▶

[Save] (If

capturing with the FOMA terminal closed, )

[Motion Oekaki]

microSD : Select a Motion Oekaki™ image or Flash movie

saved in "OTHER" folder of microSD card.

Start drawing : Start Motion Oekaki™ and attach a created image.

[Melody]

Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data box".

▶ Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Select a melody

[Phonebook]

Select a Phonebook entry.

[Calendar]

Select a schedule event saved in the FOMA terminal.

▶ Select a date ▶ Select a Schedule event

[To do]

Select To do saved in the FOMA terminal.

[Bookmark]

i-mode : Attach a bookmark saved in "Bookmark" folder of

"i-mode".

Full browser : Attach a bookmark saved in "Bookmark" folder of "Full

browser".

147

Mail

[Others]

Attach a ﬁle saved in "OTHER" folder of a microSD card.

Note

• GIF images and attached melodies cannot be received with an

i-mode terminal using the mova service.

• A moving picture/i-motion larger than 2MB cannot be attached.

Reduce the size under "Clipping" to the available size before

attaching it.→P312

• Depending on the recipient terminal, a moving picture may

be displayed coarsely or as sequential still images. When

sending a moving picture/i-motion larger than 500KB to i-mode

terminals other than 2MB-compatible ones, a moving picture

captured with following setting is recommended.

Size restriction: 500KB, Select size: QCIF (176×144),

Quality: Super ﬁne

• Some i-motion may not be attached.

Playing/Displaying/Deleting an Attached File

Compose message screen (P138) ▶ Select a

desired attachment ﬁeld with a ﬁle attached ▶

Perform the following operations

[Select]: Play/display the selected attachment.

[Delete]: Delete the selected attachment.

Note

• To add another attachment, select an ﬁeld where no ﬁle is

attached.

Receive mail automatically

When You Receive i-mode Mail

When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, i-mode mail is

automatically sent from the i-mode center.

After the i-mode mail is received, appears

at the top of the screen

When the reception is completed, the

Receive results screen appears.

• The previous screen returns if no operation

is performed for approximately 30

seconds.

• Selecting "Mail" displays the Inbox list

screen.

• Until the detail screen of received i-mode

mail is displayed, appears at the top of

the screen and (the number indicates

the number of messages) appears in

Stand-by.

Receive results

screen

Note

• When new i-mode mail is delivered, other i-mode mail and

MessageR/F stored in the i-mode center are received at the

same time.

• When receive option for i-mode mail has been set, sent i-mode

mail is stored in the i-mode center. You can check the subject

of i-mode mail stored in the center before selecting and

receiving the mail.→P149

• If received mail was sent from a terminal that is capable

of setting To, Cc, or Bcc, you can check how the mail was

addressed to you on the FOMA terminal.→P156

• Melodies, moving pictures, and still images can be received

as attachments to i-mode mail. Incompatible ﬁles may be

automatically deleted at the i-mode center. If an attached ﬁle is

deleted, "添付ファイル削除 (Attached ﬁle deleted)" is added below

the subject.

Continued on next page

148

Mail

• Files attached to a mail cannot be saved in the FOMA terminal

when the FOMA terminal does not support the ﬁle type. Those

ﬁles can be saved to a microSD card or forwarded.→P151

• Up to 100KB of i-mode mail including attachments can be

automatically downloaded. Attachments larger than 100KB can

be manually downloaded from the i-mode center.→P152

• You can set whether to receive attached melodies or images

under "Receive attach ﬁle".→P168

• If the size of a received mail exceeds the number of characters

(data capacity) set under "iMenu" ▶ "English" ▶ "Options" ▶

"Mail Settings" ▶ "Other Settings" ▶ "Limit Mail Size", you can

select and download the attached ﬁle or the data whose name

appears in the message text.→P152

• If the total number or total size of the received mail (i-mode mail

and SMS) stored in the FOMA terminal exceeds the limit, the

oldest read message will be deleted ﬁrst. Protect the received

messages you want to keep.

• Incoming mail is saved at the i-mode center when:

- Power is oﬀ - A videophone call in progress

- Self mode is activated - The terminal is out of service area

- Omakase Lock

- "Receive option set" is set to "ON"

- Inbox is full with protected or unread mail

• When mail is kept at the i-mode center, or appears.

When the terminal power is oﬀ or the terminal is out of service

area, these icons may not be displayed even there is i-mode

mail at the i-mode center.

• If multiple i-mode mail messages or MessageR/F are received

concurrently, the ring tone set to the last received i-mode mail

or MessageR/F sounds.

• By default, " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ動画 "

are saved in Inbox. No communication charge applied for this

mail.

• You cannot reply to " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコ

モ動画 ".

Displaying New i-mode Mail

Receive results screen (P147) ▶ "Mail" ▶

Select a folder

Select mail to be displayed

• Displaying/playing/saving/deleting an

attached ﬁle→P153

Received mail

detail screen

Note

• Selecting mail icon in Stand-by also display mail.

• Images attached to i-mode mail may not be properly displayed.

• Attachments incompatible with the FOMA terminal cannot be

saved to "Data box", however, they can be forwarded or saved to

a microSD card (when saving in a microSD card, the ﬁle name

will be changed to "OTHER001" to "OTHER999").

149

Mail

Receive option

Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively

You can check the subject of i-mode mail stored in the

i-mode center, and select mail to receive or delete at the

i-mode center before downloading new messages. To use the

Receive option, set "Receive option set" to "ON" in advance.

Setting Receive Option

After setting "Receive option set" to "ON", perform the

following to receive selected i-mode mail.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Receive option" ▶

[Select] ▶ "ON"

After this option is set, i-mode mail will not be received automatically.

Note

• To set "Receive option" to "OFF", perform from "Receive option

set" (P168).

When You Receive Mail

Notiﬁcation of received mail screen appears

Press

[OK] or

to close the

notiﬁcation screen.

Notiﬁcation of

received mail

screen

Note

• or indicating the incoming i-mode mail will not be

displayed, and the mail ring tone will not sound.

• The i-Channel ticker stops while the Notiﬁcation of received

mail screen is displayed.

150

Mail

Setting Receive Option for Mail

After "Receive option set" is set to "ON", perform the

following steps to select and receive i-mode mail.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Receive option"

For subsequent steps, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

Icons displayed on the Receive option screen indicating

attachments

Icon File type

An image is attached.

i-motion is attached.

A melody is attached.

Another type of ﬁle is attached.

Note

• Even if "Receive option set" is set to "ON", all messages will

be received when "Check new messages" is used. If you do

not want to receive mail, exclude "Mail" from the items to be

checked.→P168

• Receive option can also be performed from "iMenu". Select

"iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト (Menu List)" ▶ "メール選択受信 (Receive

option)".

• If the total number or total size of the received mail (i-mode mail

and SMS) stored in the FOMA terminal exceeds the limit, the

oldest read message will be deleted ﬁrst. Protect the received

messages you want to keep.

Check new messages

Checking New i-mode Mail

i-mode mails that could not be received for a reason, such

as because the FOMA terminal was out of service area, are

stored in the i-mode center. You can receive stored i-mode

mail by checking the i-mode center.

• appears at the top of the screen when mail is kept at the

i-mode center.

• You can select items to check (mail or MessageR/F) under "Check

new messages" (P168).

• You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of

service area.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Check new

messages"

When checking is completed, the Check results screen appears.

Note

• Even when i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode center, may not

appear on the screen if mail arrived while the FOMA terminal

power was turned oﬀ.

151

Mail

Reply to i-mode mail

Replying to i-mode Mail

You can reply to the sender of i-mode mail. Replying can be

made by entering new text or quoting the text of received

i-mode mail.

Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reply/Forward" ▶ "Reply"/"Reply

with quote"

• You can reply to mail also by pressing

[Reply] on the

Received mail detail screen.

• If the mail is sent to multiple receivers, you can select "Sender"

to reply only to the sender or select "All" to reply the sender

and all other receivers.

Enter the subject and the message text

• "Re:" is added to the subject.

• When replying with quotation, ">" is added at the beginning of

the quoted message.

• Editing the subject and message→P138

[Send]

Note

• After exceeding the storage capacity of Outbox, you cannot

send a reply. Delete mail saved in Outbox before replying.

• The reply to received Deco-mail with quotation has original

decoration and images entered in the message text. However,

images restricted to be output from the FOMA terminal will not

be entered.

Forward i-mode mail

Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other

Address

You can forward received i-mode mail to other addresses.

Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reply/Forward" ▶ "Forward"

Enter the receiver

• "Fw:" is added to the subject.

• Editing the receiver and message text→P138

[Send]

Note

• When a ﬁle prohibited to be attached to mail or to be output

from the FOMA terminal is attached or pasted to an i-mode mail

to be forwarded, the ﬁle will be deleted.

• After exceeding the storage capacity of Outbox, you cannot

forward mail. Delete mail saved in Outbox before forwarding.

• If you forward a received Deco-mail, the original decoration and

images remain entered in the message text. However, images

restricted to be output from the FOMA terminal will not be

entered.

152

Mail

Adding Mail Addresses/Phone

Numbers to Phonebook

You can save mail addresses and phone numbers in received

mail to the Phonebook.

Saving an Address/Phone Number from the

Message Text

Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶ Move

the cursor to the address/number to save ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶ "No./addr. in body"

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89).

Saving a Receiver, Sender Address, or Phone

Number

Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶ "Address"

If there are multiple recipients/senders, further select the

addresses/phone numbers to save.

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89).

Playing/Saving an Attached File

from i-mode Mail

You can play or save an image, melody, moving picture, or

i-motion attached or pasted to i-mode mail.

Retrieving Selected Attached File

When the size of a received message including attachments

larger than 100KB, you will need to download the

attachments from the i-mode center.

• All the attached ﬁles selected are downloaded regardless of the

setting of "Receive attach ﬁle" option in "Communication" of "Mail

setting".

• Expired ﬁles cannot be downloaded.

Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶ Select a

ﬁle name

Note

• When available space for Inbox is less than the ﬁle size, the

attachment cannot be retrieved.

153

Mail

Displaying/Playing/Saving/Deleting an

Attached File

Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶ Move the

cursor to the attached ﬁle

•

[Select]: Display/play the selected attachment.

[Menu] ▶ "Attach ﬁle" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Save]

Save the selected attachment.

• In addition, select the destination when a microSD card is inserted

on the terminal.

[Delete]

Delete the selected attachment.

Savable ﬁle type and saving destination

File type Destination

Image

"i-mode" folder of "My picture" in "Data box"

Image available

as Deco-mail

pictogram

"Decomail picto" of "My picture" of "Data box"

Moving picture/

i-motion "i-mode" folder of "i-motion" in "Data box"

Melody "i-mode" folder of "Melody" in "Data box"

Phonebook Phonebook

Schedule Schedule

To do To do list

File type Destination

Bookmark "Bookmark" in "i-mode" or "Full browser"

Others

―

*1 Images other than ones available as Deco-mail pictogram and

Flash movie

*2 Other ﬁles, such as Flash movies, are saved only on a microSD

card. However, depending on attachment, ﬁles cannot be saved.

Note

• Large i-mode mail may be rejected by the i-mode center, and an

error message may be returned to the source address.

• i-mode mail that is 100KB (with attachments included) or

smaller can be automatically downloaded. Attachments larger

than 100KB can be manually downloaded from the i-mode

center.

• You can set a size limit for i-mode mail messages.

• When the image size is larger than the screen, it is shrunk and

displayed.

• Some images and moving pictures/i-motion may not be

displayed or played.

• When "Melody auto play" is set to "ON", an attached melody is

played automatically when you open a received i-mode mail.

• A software that supports i-motion is required to play an i-motion

mail on a PC.

154

Mail

Saving Inline Images

Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶ "Inline image"

Select an image ▶ "Yes"

• To set as Stand-by display, select "Yes".

Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message

Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox

or Unsent Messages

• To display contents of a folder with security set, enter the Terminal

security code.

Displaying Received Mail

• Up to 1,000 incoming i-mode mail and SMS messages can be

saved in Inbox. However, the savable number depends on the

amount of data.

• By default, " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ動画 " are

saved. No communication charge applied for this mail.

• You cannot reply to " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ動

画".

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Inbox"

•

[ShowAll]: Display all received mail in list.

•

[Outbox]: Display the Outbox list

screen.→P155

Inbox list screen

Select a folder

•

[Reply]: Reply to the sender and

multiple recipients.→P151

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected mail.

•

[Search]: Search from the Phonebook,

Schedule, Address (Sent msg. log/Rcv.

msg. log/Phonebook/Direct input), or

Subject.

Received mail list

screen

Select a message

•

: Display the previous or next mail.

•

[Reply]: Reply to the sender and

multiple recipients.→P151

Received mail

detail screen

155

Mail

Displaying Sent Mail

• Up to 500 i-mode mail, SMS, and unsent messages can be saved

in Outbox. However, the savable number depends on the amount of

data.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Outbox"

•

[ShowAll]: Display all sent mail in list.

•

[Inbox]: Display the Inbox list screen.

→P154

Outbox list

screen

Select a folder

•

[Edit]: Display the Compose message

screen or the Compose SMS screen.

→P138, P176

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected mail.

•

[Search]: Search from the Phonebook,

Schedule, Address (Sent msg. log/Rcv.

msg. log/Phonebook/Direct input), or

Subject.

Sent mail list

screen

Select a message

•

: Display the previous or next mail.

•

[Edit]: Display the Compose message

or SMS screen.→P138, P176

Sent mail detail

screen

Displaying Unsent Messages

• The number of messages saved in Unsent message are included in

the maximum number of savable messages in Outbox.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Unsent message"

•

[Send]: Send the selected mail.

•

[Delete]: Delete i-mode mail, or SMS.

Unsent message

list screen

Select a message

The Compose message/SMS screen appears depending on the

type of the selected mail. You can edit unsent mail.

156

Mail

Received/Sent/Unsent Mail Screen Components

Inbox/Outbox List Screen

Ex.: Inbox list

screen

Folder name

Number of unread messages/total number of messages in

the folder

Appear on the Inbox list screen. For Outbox, only the total

number of messages in the folder is displayed.

Icons displayed on the Inbox/Outbox screen

Icon Description

"Inbox"/"MessageR"/"MessageF"/"Outbox"

(Default folders)

No messages

Security set

No unread mail

*Standard i-αppli

*i-α ppliDX

* Created automatically when mail-connected i-αppli is received.

Received Mail List Screen/Received Mail Detail

Screen

Received mail list

screen Received mail

detail screen

Displayed folder name

Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message.

Received date and time

On the Received mail list screen, the date is displayed for

messages received before today, and the time is displayed

for messages received today.

Sender's phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in the

Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.

Address types and multiple recipients

If mail is sent to multiple addresses, their address types

(To or Cc) are displayed. If the mail address is saved in the

Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.

157

Mail

Icons displayed on the Received mail list screen/Received

mail detail screen

Icon Description

/ / Unread i-mode mail/SMS/SMS report request

/ / Read i-mode mail/SMS/SMS report

Replied

Forwarded

The message is protected.

Saved in the UIM.

Mail-connected i-αppli (Standard i-αppli)

Mail-connected i-αppli (i-α ppliDX)

Received date and time

( ) Diﬀerent Time zone SMS received

Melody is attached.

i-αppli can be started from the message text.

( / / /

/ / / /

)

Melody (SMF)/melody (MFi)/still Image/moving

pictures/Phonebook entry/Schedule event/

bookmark/other ﬁle is attached.

Multiple ﬁles attached

Damaged ﬁle (Example: For a still image)

(Gray) Deleted attachment (Example: For a still image)

Attached ﬁle un-retrieved

Attached ﬁle deleted without retrieving

Attached ﬁle interrupted while retrieving

Acquisition failed.

Attached ﬁle with the UIM security function

activated

Subject

Icon Description

/ / The message sent with the address as To, Cc,

or Bcc

/Multiple recipient address types other than own

address (To/Cc)

/ / Sender mail address to which the reply cannot

be sent

/Multiple recipient addresses to which the reply

cannot be sent

* Diﬀerent icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen.

Sent Mail List Screen/Outbox Detail Screen

Sent mail list

screen Sent mail detail

screen

Displayed folder name

Sent date and time

On the Sent mail list screen, the date is displayed for

messages sent before today, and the time is displayed for

messages sent today.

Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message.

Recipient phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in the

Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.

Receiver type

Indicate the receiver type of the sent mail (To, Cc, or Bcc).

Continued on next page

158

Mail

Icons displayed on the Sent mail list screen/Sent mail

detail screen

Icon Description

/Sent i-mode mail/SMS

i-mode mail sent to multiple recipients

Failed to be sent

The message is protected.

SMS saved in the UIM

Mail-connected i-αppli (Standard i-αppli)

Mail-connected i-αppli (i-α ppliDX)

Sent date and time

Melody is attached.

i-αppli can be started from the message text.

( / / /

/ / / /

)

Melody (SMF)/melody (MFi)/still image/moving

pictures/Phonebook entry/Schedule event/

Bookmark/other ﬁle is attached.

Multiple ﬁles attached

File with UIM security function attached

Subject

/ / Sent as To/Cc/Bcc

/ / Failed to send as To/Cc/Bcc

* Diﬀerent icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen.

Unsent Mail List Screen

Unsent mail list

screen

Saved date and time

The date is displayed for messages saved before today, and

the time is displayed for messages saved today.

Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message.

Recipient phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in the

Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.

■ Icons displayed on the Unsent mail list screen

Icon Description

/Unsent i-mode mail/SMS

i-mode mail with auto send reserved

Auto send failed

* Other than the above, same icons as for sent mail are used.

159

Mail

Inbox/Outbox List Screen Sub Menu

Inbox list screen (P154)/Outbox list screen

(P155) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Manage folders]

New folder : Add a folder.

Delete folder : Delete the selected folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Edit folder name : Change the name of the selected folder.

Reorder folder : Select the display position of the selected folder

and sort.

Folder lock : Set or release security to the selected folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code

[Delete message]

Read in folder*: Delete all read messages in the Inbox folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

All without Protected : Delete all messages in the Inbox/Outbox

folders. (Except the protected messages)

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

All with Protected : Delete all messages in the Inbox folder.

(Including the protected messages)

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Send all Ir data]

Send all mail in Inbox/Outbox via infrared communication.→P329

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the authentication

password ▶ "Yes"

[Copy all microSD]

Copy all messages in Inbox/Outbox to the microSD card.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display number of messages in Inbox/Outbox and Unsent message

folders.

[Clear inbox]*

Delete the user-deﬁned folders and mail saved in "Inbox" and

"user-deﬁned" folder. (Except the protected messages and folders

containing the protected messages)

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

* Not displayed for sent mail list screen.

Note

• This option is not available for the default "Inbox", "Outbox",

"MessageR", and "MessageF" folders. However, "Auto sort" is

available for the "MessageR" and "MessageF" folders.

• A folder containing protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Protected mail and SMS saved in the UIM are not deleted.

• When unread mail exists, or when "Delete folder" is selected

for a folder containing mail, a conﬁrmation for deletion appears.

Select "Yes" to delete.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent, the

attached ﬁle is deleted.

Continued on next page

160

Mail

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is copied,

the attached ﬁle is deleted.

Received Mail List Screen Sub Menu

Received mail list screen (P154)▶ Move the

cursor to mail ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Reply/Forward]

Reply : Reply to the selected mail.→P151

Reply with quote : Reply to the selected mail by quoting the

received message text.→P151

Forward : Forward the received mail to another receiver.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected mail.

Delete selected : Select and delete mail.

▶ Mark mail to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Delete all read : Delete all read mail in the folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Delete all : Delete all mail in the folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Move]

Move one : Move the selected mail to another folder.

Move selected : Select and move mail to another folder.

▶ Mark mail to move ▶

[Done] ▶ Select a

destination folder

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Move all : Move all mail in the folder to another folder.

[Protect]

Protect :

Protect one : Protect the selected mail.

Protect selected : Select and protect mail.

▶ Mark mail to protect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Protect all : Protect all mail in a folder.

Clear :

Clear one : Unprotect the selected mail.

Clear selected : Select and unprotect mail.

▶ Mark mail to unprotect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Clear all : Unprotect all mail in a folder.

161

Mail

[Store in center]

Save mail at the Data Center.

Save one : Save the selected mail.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Save selected : Select and save mail.

▶ Mark mail to save ▶

[Done]

• If the number of saved mail is less than 10, press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort mail.

[Filter]

Display messages that meet certain conditions.

Unread : Display only unread mail.

Read : Display only read mail.

Protected : Display only protected mail.

With attach ﬁle : Display only mail with a ﬁle attached.

Mail : Display only i-mode mail.

SMS : Display only SMS and SMS reports.

All : Display all mail in the folder.

[Export]

Ir exchange : Send the selected mail or all mail in the selected

folder via infrared communication.→P328

Copy to microSD : Copy the selected mail or all mail in the selected

folder to the microSD card. Copying all mail in

the folder requires you to enter the Terminal

security code.

UIM : Copy or move the selected SMS to the FOMA

terminal or the UIM.

[Search]

With phonebook : Search mail by the Phonebook group search.

With scheduler : Select date from the Schedule to search

received mail on the selected date.

Address :

Sent msg. log : Search mail by recipients' address in Sent mails.

Rcv. msg. log : Search mail by sender address in Received mails.

Phonebook : Search mail by searching all Phonebook entries.

Direct input : Enter address to search mail.

Subject : Enter subject to search mail.

Note

• If there are unread messages, a conﬁrmation for deletion

appears. Select "Yes" to delete.

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 1,000 mail can be protected.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

Continued on next page

162

Mail

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent via

infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD

("Copy to microSD"), the attached ﬁle is deleted.

Received Mail Detail Screen Sub Menu

Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Reply/Forward]

Reply or forward the displayed mail to another receiver.→P151

[Delete]

Delete the displayed mail.

[Move]

Move the displayed mail to another folder.

[Protect]

Protect or unprotect the displayed mail.

[Save]

Address : Save the mail address of the sender or multiple

recipients to the Phonebook.→P152

No./addr. in body : Save the phone numbers or mail addresses in

the displayed mail to the Phonebook.→P152

Inline image : Save images contained in the displayed mail.

→P154

Template : Save Deco-mail as a template.

▶ Edit the title ▶ "Yes"

[Copy]

Copy contents of the displayed mail.

Body : Select and copy contents of message text.→P385

Subject : Copy the subject.

Address : Copy address. If there are multiple addresses, select

an address from the Mail address list screen.

[Attach ﬁle]

Save or delete ﬁles attached to the displayed i-mode mail.→P153

[Export]

Ir exchange : Send the displayed mail via infrared

communication.

Copy to microSD : Copy the displayed mail to the microSD card.

UIM : Copy or move the displayed SMS to the FOMA

terminal or the UIM.

[Store in center]

Save the displayed mail at the Data Center.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Font size]

Set a font size for the message text on the Mail display screen.

Note

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 1,000 mail can be protected.

163

Mail

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent via

infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD

("Copy to microSD"), the attached ﬁle is deleted.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

Sent Mail List Screen Sub Menu

Sent mail list screen (P155)▶ Move the cursor

to mail ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Edit]

Edit and send sent mail.→P138, P176

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected mail.

Delete selected : Select and delete mail.

▶ Mark mail to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Delete all : Delete all mail in the folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Move]

Move one : Move the selected mail to another folder.

Move selected : Select and move mail to another folder.

▶ Mark mail to move ▶

[Done] ▶ Select a

destination folder

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Move all : Move all mail in the folder to another folder.

[Protect]

Protect :

Protect one : Protect the selected mail.

Protect selected : Select and protect mail.

▶ Mark mail to protect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Protect all : Protect all mail in a folder.

Clear :

Cancel one : Unprotect the selected mail.

Cancel selected : Select and unprotect mail.

• The operations are the same as "Protect

selected".

Cancel all : Unprotect all mail in the folder.

[Store in center]

Save mail at the Data Center.

Save one : Save a selected mail.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Save selected : Select and save mail.

▶ Mark mail to save ▶

[Done]

• If the number of saved mail is less than 10, press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort mail.

Continued on next page

164

Mail

[Filter]

Display mail that meet certain conditions.

Protected : Display only protected mail.

With attach ﬁle : Display only mail with a ﬁle attached.

Mail : Display only i-mode mail.

SMS : Display only SMS.

All : Display all mail in the folder.

[Export]

Ir exchange : Send the selected mail or all mail in the selected

folder via infrared communication.→P328

Copy to microSD : Copy the selected mail or all mail in the selected

folder to the microSD card. Copying all mail in

the folder requires you to enter the Terminal

security code.

UIM : Copy or move the selected SMS to the FOMA

terminal or the UIM.

[Search]

With phonebook : Search mail by the Phonebook group search.

With scheduler : Select date from the Schedule to search mail

received on the selected date.

Address :

Sent msg. log : Search mail by recipients' address in Sent mails.

Rcv. msg. log : Search mail by sender address in Received mails.

Phonebook : Search mail by searching all Phonebook entries.

Direct input : Enter address to search mail.

Subject : Enter subject to search mail.

Note

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 500 mail can be protected.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent via

infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD

("Copy to microSD"), the attached ﬁle is deleted.

Sent Mail Detail Screen Sub Menu

Sent mail detail screen (P155) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Edit]

Edit and send sent mail.→P138, P176

[Delete]

Delete the displayed mail.

[Move]

Move the displayed mail to another folder.

[Protect]

Protect or unprotect the displayed mail.

165

Mail

[Save]

Address : Save the mail address to the Phonebook.→P152

No./addr. in body : Save the phone numbers or e-mail addresses in

the displayed mail to the Phonebook.→P152

Inline image : Save images contained in the displayed mail.

→P154

Template : Save Deco-mail as a template.

▶ Edit the title ▶ "Yes"

[Copy]

Copy contents of the displayed mail.

Body : Select and copy contents of message text.→P385

Subject : Copy the subject.

Address : Copy the address. If there are multiple recipients, select

addresses to copy.

[Attach ﬁle]

Save or delete ﬁles attached to the displayed i-mode mail.→P153

[Export]

Ir exchange : Send the displayed mail via infrared

communication.

Copy to microSD : Copy the displayed mail to the microSD card.

UIM : Copy or move the displayed SMS to the FOMA

terminal or the UIM.

[Store in center]

Save the displayed mail at the Data Center.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Font size]

Set a font size for the message text on the Mail display screen.

Note

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 500 mail can be protected.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent via

infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD

("Copy to microSD"), the attached ﬁle is deleted.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

Unsent Mail List Screen Sub Menu

Unsent mail list screen (P155) ▶ Move the

cursor to mail ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected mail.

Delete selected : Select and delete mail.

▶ Mark mail to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Delete all : Delete all unsent mail.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Continued on next page

166

Mail

[Store in center]

Save mail at the Data Center.

Save one : Save the selected mail.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Save selected : Select and save mail.

▶ Mark mail to save ▶

[Done]

• If the number of saved mail is less than 10,

press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort mail.

[Filter]

Display mail that meet certain conditions.

Mail : Display only i-mode mail.

SMS : Display only SMS.

All : Display all unsent messages.

[Ir exchange]

Send the selected mail or all unsent mail via infrared

communication.→P328

[Copy microSD]

Copy the selected mail or all unsent mail to the microSD card.

Copying all unsent mail requires you to enter the Terminal security

code.

[Cancel auto send]

Cancel the auto send setting.

[Auto send fail reason]

Display the reason for auto send failure.

Note

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent, the

attached ﬁle is deleted.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is copied,

the attached ﬁle is deleted.

Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails

Using Mail History

Up to 30 entries will be saved in each the Received mail logs

and Sent mail log. Also, up to 60 entries of sent/received

mail will be saved in "Recent". These logs can be used to

compose mail and save addresses to the Phonebook.

• If the maximum number of recordable entries has been exceeded,

the oldest entry will be deleted ﬁrst.

167

Mail

Example: To display the Received mails

Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

To display the Sent mails

Stand-by display ▶ press

(for 1+ seconds).

To display the Recent mails

Press

on the Received mail list

screen/Sent mail list screen.

•

[Mail]: Create mail to the receiver or

sender of the selected log entry.

•

[V. phone]: Make a videophone call to the

phone number of the selected log entry.

•

[Call]: Make a voice call to the phone

number of the selected log entry.

Ex.: Received mail

list screen

Select an entry in the log

•

[Call]: Make a call to the selected

number in the log.

•

[Mail]: Create mail to the receiver or

sender of the selected entry.

•

[V. phone]: Make a videophone call

to the phone number of the selected

log entry.

•

[Add]: Add the selected mail

address in the log to the Phonebook.

Go to Step 2 in Adding Phonebook

Entries from Dialed/Received Calls

etc." (P89).

Only unsaved mail addresses can be

saved.

The name saved in the Phonebook

Other party's mail address

Receive/sent date & time

Ex.: Received mail

detail screen

Icons displayed on the Received mails/Sent mails/Recent

mails

Icon Description

Received mail

Sent mail

Received SMS

Sent SMS

Mail and SMS that were received/sent while roaming*

* The received/sent date and time is shown in the local time.

Received Mails/Sent Mails/Recent Mails Sub Menu

Use

to move the cursor to a log entry to use

▶

[Menu]

▶

Perform the following operations

[Call function]

Voicecall : Make a voice call to the phone number of the

selected log entry.

Videophone call : Make a videophone call to the phone number of

the selected log entry.

Customize call : Edit the phone number of the selected log entry

and dial.

[Mail]

Compose mail : Create mail to the receiver or sender of the

selected log entry.

Go to Step 3 in "Composing and Sending i-mode

Mail" (P138).

Compose SMS : Create SMS to the receiver or sender of the

selected log entry. Go to Step 3 in "Composing

and Sending SMS" (P176).

[Add to phonebook]

Save the mail address of the selected log entry to the Phonebook.

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89).

• Only unsaved mail addresses can be saved.

Continued on next page

168

Mail

[Change list]

Recent calls : Display recent call log entries.

Recent mails : Display recent mail log entries.

Received calls : Display incoming call log entries.

Received mails : Display received mail log entries.

Redial : Display phone redial log entries.

Sent mails : Display sent mail log entries.

• The item for the currently displayed log is not displayed.

[Delete]

Delete the selected log entry.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected log entry.

Selected : Select and delete log entries.

▶ Mark mail to delete ▶

[Delete]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all : Delete all log entries.

*1 On the detail screen of Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails,

"Compose mail" is displayed instead.

*2 Not displayed on the detail screen of Received mails/Sent mails/

Recent mails.

*3 Displayed only on the detail screen of Received mails/Sent

mails/Recent mails.

Mail setting

Setting Mail Functions of the

FOMA Terminal

Communication

Conﬁguring Communication Settings

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting"

▶ "Communication" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Receive option set]

To enable/disable the Receive option (P149), set whether to receive

i-mode mail automatically.

ON : Do not receive mail automatically.

OFF : Receive mail automatically.

[Receive attach ﬁle]

Specify attached ﬁles to be retrieved when i-mode mail is received.

▶ Mark items to download ▶

[Done]

[Check new messages]

Specify request items when using "Check new messages".

▶ Mark items to check ▶

[Done]

Note

• When this option is set to "ON", i-mode mail cannot be received

automatically. Incoming i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode

center, and the Notiﬁcation of received mail screen (P149)

appears.

• If the attached ﬁle set not to be received arrives, the ﬁle

name is displayed in the message text and you can receive by

selecting it.→P152

169

Mail

Display

Conﬁguring Display Settings

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Display" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Font size]

Set a font size for text on the Mail detail screen.

• Pressing

, or

on the Received mail detail screen also

changes the font size.

[Folder lock]

Set security for Inbox/Outbox and Unsent message in Mail menu.

To display security-activated mail, the Terminal security code must

be entered.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Mark items to set ▶

[Done]

[Melody auto play]

Set whether to automatically play attached or pasted melodies on

the Mail display screen.

[Receiving display]

Set whether to notify with a ring tone or Receive results screen when

i-mode mail or MessageR/F is received while operating the FOMA

terminal (displaying other than Stand-by display).

Alarm mode : Notify with a ring tone or the Receive results

screen.

• The Receive results screen is not displayed

depending on the function in use such as while

calling or activating Camera.

Operation mode : Prioritize the FOMA terminal operation and does

not notify with a ring tone or the Receive results

screen, etc.

• When receiving i-mode message or MessageR/F

while the display is turned oﬀ, the display does

not light up.

Mail group

Registering Mail Group

easily specify a certain group of multiple recipients.

Up to 20 mail groups can be created. Up to 5 recipients can

be registered to a mail group.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Mail group"

Mail group list

screen

[Add] ▶ Enter a mail group name

Select a registered mail group ▶ Move the

cursor to a receiver ﬁeld ▶

[Add] ▶ Select

a registration method ▶

[Done]

Sent msg. log : Select an address from Sent mails.

Rcv. msg. log : Select an address from Received mails.

Phonebook : Select an address from the Phonebook.

Direct input : Enter an address directly.

170

Mail

Mail Group List Screen Sub Menu

Mail group list screen (P169) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Delete group]

Delete the selected mail group.

[Add group]

Create a new mail group.

[Rename group]

Edit the selected mail group name.

[Write Mail]

Create i-mode mail addressed to the selected mail group.→P138

Auto sort

Sorting Mail Automatically to Folders

Set conditions to automatically save mail in speciﬁed folders.

Setting Auto Sort Rule

Set conditions to sort mail to folders automatically.

• Create folders in "Inbox" or "Outbox" for sorting beforehand.

• Up to 30 sorting conditions can be saved.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Auto sort"

Auto sort screen

"Sort inbox"/"Sort outbox" ▶ Select a Sort rule

ﬁeld

Select the Sorting criteria ﬁeld ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Address]

Set mail address or phone numbers as a condition to sort.

▶ "Direct input" ▶ Enter a mail address/phone number

• Select an address from Recent msg log, Recent dial log, or

Phonebook.→P139

[Phonebook Group]

Set a phonebook group as a condition to sort.

[Subject]

Set mail subject as a condition to sort.

Select the Folder to sort into ﬁeld ▶ Select a

folder to sort into ▶

[Done]

171

Mail

Note

• To edit the sorting condition, select a sorting condition to edit

and set a rule again.

• The same sorting conditions as ones set to another folder

cannot be set.

• When setting a mail address as a sorting condition, the domain

name (the string after @) should be included. For example, when

setting from the Sent message log, or the Received message

log, if the mail is exchanged based on their phone numbers, the

address does not include the domain name. In this case, the

mail address is not recognized as a sorting condition.

• When setting a sorting condition to SMS, enter a phone number

for "Address". You cannot set "Phonebook Group"/"Subject" as a

sorting condition.

Re-sorting Mail

Re-sort saved mail according to a sorting condition.

Auto sort screen (P170) ▶ "Re-sort" ▶

"Inbox"/"Outbox"

Mark folders to re-sort ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll] to select all.

Deleting Auto Sort Rule

Auto sort screen (P170) ▶ "Sort inbox"/"Sort

outbox" ▶ Move the cursor to the Sort rule

ﬁeld ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected sorting rule.

Delete selected : Select and delete the sorting rules.

▶ Mark sorting rules to delete ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll] to select all.

Delete all : Delete all sorting rules.

Re-ordering Auto Sort Rule

The execution priority of the auto sort rule follows the display

sequence of the rules on the screen. Re-ordering the auto

sort rules changes the execution priority.

Auto sort screen (P170) ▶ "Sort inbox"/"Sort

outbox"

Move the cursor to the Sort rule ﬁeld to re-

order ▶

[Reorder] ▶ Use

to move a

sort rule ▶

[Select]

172

Mail

Edit

Editing Header/Signature/Quotation

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Edit" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Edit header]

Set a header to be inserted to i-mode mail text.

▶

[Edit] ▶ Enter a header

[Edit signature]

Set a signature to be inserted to i-mode mail text.

▶

[Edit] ▶ Enter a signature

[Edit quotation]

Set a symbol indicating that a text is quoted from received mail when

replying with quoting.

▶

[Select] ▶ Enter a quotation mark ▶

[Done]

[Auto attach]

Set whether to automatically attach a header or signature when

composing i-mode mail.

▶ Mark items to be attached ▶

[Done]

Others

Conﬁguring Other Settings

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Others" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Check settings]

Check the contents set in "Mail setting".

[Reset settings]

Reset the contents set in "Mail setting" to the default.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Receive Message

When You Receive Message

When the FOMA terminal is in service area, MessageR/F is

sent automatically from the i-mode center. When MessageR/F

arrives, the display, ring tone, or vibration notiﬁes you of new

messages.

• Up to 100 MessageR/F can be saved respectively. However, the

number of savable messages varies depending on the message

size.

Viewing New Message

When MessageR/F arrives, the latest message appears

automatically.

• "Auto-display setting" can be conﬁgured to allow the detail screen

to automatically open after receiving a MessageR/F.→P173

Automatically receive MessageR/F when it

arrives

• After receiving MessageR/F, the Receive results screen is

displayed.

• The previous screen returns if no operation is performed for

approximately 30 seconds.

173

Mail

Auto-display setting

Displaying Message Automatically

Set automatic display method of MessageR/F.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Image&Eﬀect set." ▶ "Auto-display setting"

▶ Perform the following operations

MessageR preferred : Display MessageR automatically

when MessageR and MessageF arrive

simultaneously.

MessageR only : Display

only MessageR automatically.

MessageF preferred : Display MessageF automatically

when MessageR and MessageF arrive

simultaneously.

MessageF only : Display

only MessageF automatically.

Auto-display OFF : Do not display

MessageR/F

automatically.

Melody auto play

Playing a Melody Automatically when

Message is Displayed

Set whether to automatically play a melody when

MessageR/F is displayed.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Image&Eﬀect set." ▶ "Melody auto play"

Switch between ON and OFF each time "Melody auto play" is

selected.

Check new messages

Checking New Message

MessageR/F that was not received because the FOMA

terminal was out of service area is stored at the i-mode

center, and , , or appears at the top on the screen.

Checking new messages downloads the stored MessageR/F.

• You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of

service area.

• Set items to check (mail and MessageR/F) in "Check new

messages" (P168).

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Check new

messages"

When checking is completed, the Check results screen appears.

"MessageR"/"MessageF"

Note

• Incoming MessageR/F is stored at the i-mode center when:

- Power is OFF

- A videophone call in progress

- Self mode is activated

- The FOMA terminal is out of service area

- Omakase Lock is activated

- MessageR/F on the FOMA terminal is full

174

Mail

MessageR/MessageF

Displaying New Message

When MessageR/F arrives from the i-mode center, or

appears at the top of the screen.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "MessageR/F"

▶ "MessageR"/"MessageF"

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected

MessageR/F

Subject

Received date and time

On the MessageR/F list screen,

the messages received before

today are displayed with date and

ones received today are displayed

with time. Ex.: MessageR

list screen

Select MessageR/F

Received date and time

Subject

Ex.: MessageR

detail screen

Icons displayed on the MessageR/F list/detail screen

Icon Description

/Unread MessageR/F

/Read MessageR/F

* Icons other than above are the same as for Received mail.→P157

MessageR/F List Screen Sub Menu

MessageR/F list screen (P174) ▶ Move the

cursor to a message ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected MessageR/F.

Delete selected : Select and delete MessageR/F.

▶

Mark MessageR/F to delete

▶

[Done]

▶

"Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Delete all read : Delete all read MessageR/F.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Delete all : Delete all MessageR/F.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

175

Mail

[Protect]

Protect :

Protect one : Protect the selected MessageR/F.

Protect selected : Select and protect MessageR/F.

▶ Mark MessageR/F to protect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Protect all : Protect all MessageR/F.

Clear :

Clear one : Unprotect the selected MessageR/F.

Clear selected : Select and unprotect MessageR/F.

• The operation is the same as "Protect

selected".

Clear all : Unprotect all MessageR/F.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort MessageR/F.

[Filter]

Display only the MessageR/F that meet sorting conditions.

Unread : Display only the unread MessageR/F.

Read : Display only the read MessageR/F.

Protected : Display only the protected MessageR/F.

All : Display all MessageR/F.

Note

• If there are unread MessageR/F, a conﬁrmation for deletion

appears. Select "Yes" to delete.

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 100 MessageR/F can be protected respectively.

MessageR/F Detail Screen Sub Menu

MessageR/F detail screen (P174) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Delete]

Delete the displayed MessageR/F.

[Protect]

Protect or unprotect the displayed MessageR/F.

[Save]

No./addr. in body : Save the mail address or phone numbers in

the

currently

displayed MessageR/F to the

Phonebook.→P152

Inline image :

Save or check information about an image

inserted in the currently displayed MessageR/F.

Background image : Save the background image used in the

currently

displayed MessageR/F.

[Attach ﬁle]

Save : Save an attached ﬁle of the currently displayed

MessageR/F.

Delete : Delete an attached ﬁle of the currently displayed

MessageR/F.

Note

• Protected message cannot be deleted.

• Up to 100 MessageR/F can be protected respectively.

176

Mail

Compose/Send SMS

Composing and Sending SMS

•

You can send and receive SMS to/from terminals that use international

carriers other then DOCOMO. Visit the DOCOMO International Services

website for available countries and international carriers.

•

You can send and receive SMS in Korean to/from terminals that

support Korean.

•

Use L-01B to send and receive international SMS in Korean to/from

Korean-support terminals of Korea and other international carriers. Visit

the DOCOMO International Services website for international carriers

that support international SMS. The number of characters that can

be sent depends on the situation of each recipient carrier. For details,

contact recipient carriers.

•

Switching input modes in SMS message to Korean→P178

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "SMS" ▶

"Compose SMS"

•

[Ph. book]: Select a recipient from the

Phonebook.

Compose SMS

screen

Select ﬁeld ▶ "Direct input" ▶ Enter the

phone number

• Up to 21 digits (including "+") can be entered.

• On the Phone number entry screen, press

[Menu] to select

"Int. call", "Select preﬁx", or "Cancel". To cancel the entry, press

[Cancel].

• The address can be selected from Sent message log or

Received message log, or Phonebook.→P139

Select ﬁeld ▶ Enter the message

• The number of characters that can be entered diﬀers

depending on the settings in "SMS input character".→P178

[Send]

Note

• For a destination of an international carrier other than

DOCOMO, enter in the order of "+" (press

for 1+ seconds),

"Country Code", and "other party's mobile phone number". For the

mobile phone number starting with "0", enter the phone number

excluding "0". Numbers may be entered in the order of "010",

"Country Code", and the "other party's mobile phone number" (to

reply to overseas SMS received, enter "010").

• Characters may not be sent correctly on receiver's side

depending on the signal strength, etc.

• When you send an SMS to a receiver who uses an international

carrier and some of the characters you send are not supported

by the carrier, those characters may not be displayed correctly.

• Even if you set "Caller ID notiﬁcation" to "Not notify", your caller

ID is sent to the other party.

• You cannot reply to SMS sent with unknown ID or from a public

phone.

• When sending SMS, "Pictographs" and "Pictograph idioms" other

than and are displayed as half-pitch space in receiver's

screen.

• SMS texts in Korean sent to a terminal which does not support

Korean will not be displayed correctly on the terminal.

Compose SMS Screen Sub Menu

Compose SMS screen (P176) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Send]

Send SMS.

177

Mail

[Save]

Save SMS being created or edited as an unsent message.

[Report request]

Set whether to request an SMS report when SMS is delivered.

→

P178

[Validity period]

Set the period of time that a sent SMS can be kept undelivered at

the SMS center.→

P178

Receive SMS

When You Receive SMS Messages

When the FOMA terminal is in service area, SMS is

automatically received.

• Up to 1,000 received SMS messages including i-mode mail can be

saved. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the

data.

When SMS is received appears at the top of

the screen

When the reception is completed, the

Receive results screen appears.

• The previous screen returns if no operation

is performed for approximately 30

seconds.

• Selecting "SMS" opens the Inbox list

screen.

• Until the detail screen of received SMS

opens, appears at the top of the screen

and (the number indicates the

number of messages) appears in Stand-by. Receive results

screen

Note

• When Stand-by i-αppli is set, the Receive results screen for

SMS does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS

do not work.

Viewing New SMS

Receive results screen (P177) ▶ "SMS" ▶

Select a folder

Select an SMS message to display

Received mail

detail screen

Check new SMS

Checking New SMS Messages

SMS that could not be received for a reason such as because

the FOMA terminal was out of service area, are stored at the

SMS center. You can receive stored SMS by checking the

SMS center.

• You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of

service area.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "SMS" ▶

"Check new SMS"

When the reception is completed, the Check results screen

appears.

178

Mail

SMS Settings

Setting SMS

SMS Report Request

Set whether to request an SMS report after the SMS is

delivered. If set to "ON", an SMS report indicating that the

SMS has been delivered to the receiver will be sent to you.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"SMS" ▶ "SMS report request" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Note

• An SMS report includes the sent time and the phone number of

the receiver.

SMS Validity Period

Set the period of time that a sent SMS will be kept

undelivered at the SMS center because the recipient terminal

is out of service area, etc.

• If "0 day" is selected, sending the SMS message is retried after a

while, then the message is deleted from the SMS center.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"SMS" ▶ "SMS validity period" ▶ Select the

period

SMS Input Character

Set the SMS input mode.

Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"SMS" ▶ "SMS input character" ▶ Select an

item to set

JP(70Chara) : Enter Japanese text. Up to 70 characters

can be entered.

JP/KR(70Chara) : Enter Japanese and Korean text. Up to

70 characters can be entered.

English(160Chara) : Enter English text. Up to 160 characters

can be entered.

SMS Center

* You usually do not need to change this setting.

Set the SMS center settings.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming"

▶ "Network" ▶ "SMS center" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[SMS Center]

DOCOMO : Set DOCOMO as the SMS center.

Others : Set a carrier other than DOCOMO as the SMS center.

[Address]

When "Others" is selected for "SMS Center", enter connection

address.

179

Mail

[Type of number]

Set this option when "Others" is selected for "SMS Center".

International : If the SMS center phone number is for international

calls, select this option.

Unknown : If you do not know whether the SMS center phone

number is for international calls, select this option.

[Done]

181

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-mode ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 182

Displaying the i-mode Menu ････････････i-mode Menu 182

Displaying a Site

Displaying a Site ････････････････････････････････････ 183

Viewing and Operating Sites ････････････････････････ 186

Subscribing to a Site in My Menu ･････････ My Menu 187

Changing i-mode Password

･･･････････････････････････ Change i-mode Password 188

Displaying Internet Web Pages ････Internet Access 188

Saving Web Pages or Sites for Quick Access

･･･････････････････････････････････････････ Bookmark 190

Saving Site Contents ････････････････ Screen memo 192

Downloading Images, Melodies etc.

from Sites

Downloading Data from Sites ･･･････････････････････ 194

Useful Functions of i-mode

Using Phone To/Mail To/Web To/ Media To/i-αppli

To Function ･･････ Phone To/Mail To/Web To/Media

To/i-αppli To function 196

Setting i-mode

Setting i-mode ･･･････････････････････i-mode setting 197

Using Certiﬁcates

Operating SSL Certiﬁcate ･････ SSL Certiﬁcate Info 200

Using i-motion

i-motion ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 201

Downloading i-motion from Sites

･･･････････････････････････････････i-motion Download 201

Using i-Channel

i-Channel ････････････････････････････････････････････ 203

Displaying i-Channel ････････････････････････････････ 203

Setting i-Channel ･･････････････････i-Channel Setting 204

182

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-mode

i-mode makes use of the display of the FOMA terminal

supporting i-mode (i-mode terminal) to use online services

such as sites access, Internet access and i-mode mail.

• i-mode is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription.

• For details about i-mode, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

Before using i-mode

• Contents of sites and Internet web sites (web pages) are

generally protected by copyright law. Data, such as text or

images you download to the i-mode terminal from sites or

web pages, can be used only for personal entertainment, and

the data cannot be used, in whole or in part, as it is or after

modiﬁcation, for sale or redistribution, without the consent of

the copyright holders.

• If you insert another UIM or turn the FOMA terminal power on

without the UIM, depending on the model of the FOMA terminal,

still images, moving pictures, melodies downloaded from sites,

mail attachments (still images, moving pictures or melodies),

screen memos, and MessageR/F cannot be viewed or played.

• When a ﬁle with UIM restrictions is set as the Stand-by display

or ring tone, the setting will revert to its default if a diﬀerent UIM

is inserted or the terminal power is turned on without a UIM.

i-mode Menu

Displaying the i-mode Menu

You can use i-mode functions from the i-mode menu.

Stand-by display ▶

i-mode menu

screen

Perform the following operations

[iMenu]

Connect to the i-mode center.→P183

[Bookmark]

Display the Bookmark folder list screen.→P190

[Screen memo]

Display the Screen memo list screen.→P193

[Last URL]

Open the last viewed i-mode site or web page.→P185

[Go to location]

Enter a URL to connect to the Internet.→P188

[i-Channel]

Display the i-Channel menu screen.→P204

183

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[MessageR/F]

Display a list of MessageR/F.→P174

[Check new messages]

Check whether i-mode mail or MessageR/F is stored at the i-mode

center.→P174

[i-mode setting]

Conﬁgure the FOMA terminal i-mode functions.→P197

[Full browser]

Display the Full browser menu screen.→P206

Displaying a Site

You can use various services oﬀered by IP (Information

Providers).

• Services vary depending on the IP (Information Providers). Some

sites require a separate subscription.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "iMenu" ▶

"English" ▶ "Menu List"

appears at the top of the screen during i-mode

communication.

[Select]

• Press

[Stop] to cancel a page download.

Select an item (link)

•

[Reload]: If the current site is updated, reload the page.

•

[∧]: Scroll the screen up.

•

[∨]: Scroll the screen down.

•

: Exit i-mode. Select "Yes".

Note

• When a number appears in front of a link item, press the

corresponding dial key to access the linked site. Some sites

may not be possible to connect.

• Some sites may require "Phone/Terminal and UIM ID" to be sent

in order to gain access.

The "Phone/Terminal and UIM ID" is sent to the IP (Information

Provider) so that the IP can recognize you and provide

customized information or judge whether the contents that the

IP provides can be used on your mobile phone. The "Phone/

Terminal and UIM ID" is sent via the Internet to the IP and

may be seen by a third party. This action does not reveal your

address, age, or sex to the IP.

• Images that can be displayed are in JPEG, GIF, and SWF

formats.

184

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Site Display Screen Sub Menu

While viewing a site ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Bookmark]

Save : Save the URL of the displayed site as a Bookmark. Go to

Step 2 in "Adding to Bookmark" (P190).

List : Display the Bookmark folder list screen.→P190

[Screen memo]

Save : Save the displayed page as a Screen memo.→P192

List : Display the Screen memo list screen.→P193

[Save image]

Save images or background images contained in the displayed page.

→P194

[Show properties]

URL : Display the URL of the displayed page.

Page properties : Display the URL and title of the displayed page.

Certiﬁcates : If the displayed page supports SSL, the SSL

certiﬁcate is displayed.

[Go to location]

Enter URL : Enter a URL to access the web page. Go to Step 2 in

"Displaying Internet Web Pages" (P188).

Home : Connect to the URL set as "Home".

URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access the web

page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History"(P189).

[Reload]

If the displayed site is updated, reload the page.

[Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the displayed page pasted in the

message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail"

(P138).

Select from the following options when a linked item is selected.

This page : Paste the URL on the displayed page.

Link page : Paste the URL of the link.

[Add to Phonebook]

Save a phone number or mail address displayed on the site to the

Phonebook.→P187

[Display]

Change char code : If characters are not displayed correctly,

change the character encoding and display.

Retry : Play Flash movie/an animation contained in the

displayed page from the beginning.

[Settings]

Image display : Set whether to display images contained on the

displayed page.

Sound eﬀect : Set whether to play sound eﬀects of the Flash

movie contained in the displayed page.

i-motion type : Specify the i-motion type to download.→P202

[Switch to Full Browser]

Switch to Full browser.→P213

185

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Note

• If characters are not displayed correctly, repeat the steps.

However, after the character code is changed 4 times, the

default character encoding returns.

• Characters may not be displayed correctly even after repeatedly

changing the encoding.

• The new character encoding is valid only for the displayed page.

• Images may not be displayed correctly even when this option is

set to "ON". In this case, appears.

Downloading an SSL page

The screen shown on the right appears when

you access an SSL site. When accessed, the

SSL page opens and appears on the top of

the screen.

Returning to a normal site

The screen shown on the right appears when

you return to a non-SSL site. Select "Yes" to

return to a normal site, and disappears.

Note

• If the SSL certiﬁcate has already expired or the site does not

support SSL, a warning indicating that this site may not be

secure may appear. To connect, select "Yes". However, note

that your personal information (credit card number or contact

address) may not be sent safely.

Last URL

Opening the Last Viewed Web Page

After i-mode is terminated, the URL of the last opened page is

saved in "Last URL". You can re-connect to the last accessed

page using Last URL.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Last URL" ▶

[Connect]

186

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Viewing and Operating Sites

This section describes basic operations on sites.

Going Back to Previous Page/Going to

Next Page The FOMA Terminal

The FOMA terminal temporarily saves the displayed sites

data in a cache.

Data saved in the cache can be displayed, without revisiting

the site, by using

• However, communication is established if the data is larger than

the cache size, or if the site requires the latest information always

be loaded.

• Characters or settings entered at the site will not be stored in the

cache.

• Terminating i-mode deletes data from the cache.

Example: When pages are displayed in the order of Screen

"A" → "B" → "C" → "B" → "D"

If the pages are opened in the order "A"→"B"→"C", then returning to

"B", and opening "D", "C" is deleted from the cache. Pressing

displays "B"⇔"D".

… Display order of pages

… The order when displaying the

previous page from Screen "D"

Note

• Touch operation is not available on sites which use Flash

movies.

• Operation on sites may diﬀer when a Flash movie is displayed.

Selecting Links or Items

You may need to perform operations using the following

items while connecting to i-mode. For details, see "Mobile

Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

Name Display example Details

Radio button

(Not selected) Select only 1 item.

(Selected)

Check box

(Not selected) Select multiple items.

(Selected)

Text box Enter text. Select a text

box to display the text entry

screen.

Pull down

menu Select an item from an

option list. Click pull-down

menu to display the option

list.

187

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Note

• Perform the following operations to quote and enter information

saved in the FOMA terminal, such as Phonebook entries, your

own number, or data scanned with the bar code reader.

[Menu] ▶ "Quote" ▶ "Phonebook"/"Own number"/"Bar code"

Displaying Flash Movies

The FOMA terminal supports Flash movies, an animation

technology using images and sounds. You can access

sites that provide various kinds of animations. You can also

download a Flash movie and set it for the Stand-by display.

Note

• Even if a Flash movie is displayed, the animation may not work

correctly.

• Some Flash movies use data about your FOMA terminal. To

allow Flash movies to use the data, set "Use phone info." to

"ON".

• If the Flash movie contains audio, it will be played at the volume

set for "Incoming call". To mute sound eﬀects, set "Sound

eﬀect" to "OFF".→P198

• If you play a Flash movie with vibration set, the FOMA terminal

vibrates regardless of "Vibrator" (P102) settings on the FOMA

terminal.

• Flash movies are not displayed if "Images" is set to "OFF".

• Flash movies which are saved in Data box, microSD card, or

Screen memo may appear diﬀerently depending on the saved

part.

• Flash sound eﬀect or vibration does not work if they are set to

the Stand-by display/incoming call screen, etc.

Adding a Mail Address/Phone Number to

Phonebook

You can save a phone number or mail address displayed at a

site to the Phonebook.

While viewing a site ▶ Move the cursor to a

phone number/mail address ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Add to Phonebook" ▶ "Yes"

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89).

My Menu

Subscribing to a Site in My Menu

Frequently accessed sites can be saved in My Menu for quick

access.

• Up to 45 entries can be saved in My Menu.

• Some sites cannot be saved in My Menu.

Display a site to save ▶ "マイメニュー登録 (Save

in My Menu)"

• Item names may vary depending on the site.

Select i-mode password text box ▶ Enter the

i-mode password ▶ "決定 (OK)"

• The entered i-mode password is masked by asterisks "＊".

• i-mode password→P188

Note

• When you subscribe to a fee-based site in "Menu List", the site

is automatically added to My Menu.

188

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Accessing a Site from My Menu

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "iMenu" ▶

"English" ▶ "My Menu" ▶ Select the site to

access

Change i-mode Password

Changing i-mode Password

"i-mode Password" (4 digits) is required to save to/delete

from My Menu, subscribe to/unsubscribe from message

services or fee-based i-mode sites, or conﬁgure mail settings.

The password is set to "0000" by default.

Change it to a number of your own choice for safety. Do not

reveal your i-mode password to others.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "iMenu" ▶

"English" ▶ "Options" ▶ "Change i-mode

Password"

Select the "Current Password" text box ▶

Enter the i-mode password (4 digits)

Select the "New Password" text box ▶ Enter a

new i-mode password (4 digits)

Select the "New Password (Conﬁrmation)"

text box ▶ Enter the new i-mode password

(4 digits)

"Select"

Note

• If you forget the i-mode password, you need to bring a picture

ID such as your driver's license to the docomo Shop to have the

i-mode password reset to "0000".

Internet Access

Displaying Internet Web Pages

You can view a web page by entering its URL. Use half-pitch

alphanumeric characters and symbols to enter a URL.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Go to location"

▶ "Enter URL"

Enter the URL

• Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered.

Note

• Web pages that do not support i-mode may not be displayed

correctly.

• When the same URL as a history entry is accessed, the old

URL is overwritten and the entry is displayed at the top of the

URL history as the latest URL.

189

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Using URL History

Up to 10 previously entered URLs are stored in the URL

history. You can access a web page by using the URL

history.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Go to location"

▶ "URL history"

URL history list

screen

Select the URL to access

Note

• If more than 10 URLs are saved in the history, the oldest URL

will be overwritten ﬁrst.

• The visited URL is displayed at the top of the URL history.

URL History List Screen Sub Menu

URL history list screen (P189) ▶ Move the

cursor to a URL history entry ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Connect]

Connect to the selected site in the URL history.

[Edit URL]

Edit and connect to the URL of the selected history.

▶ Edit URL ▶

[Set]

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete a selected URL history entry.

Del. selected : Select and delete entries in the URL history.

▶ Mark the URL history entries to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all : Delete all entries in the URL history.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the selected history entry pasted

in the message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode

Mail" (P138).

190

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Bookmark

Saving Web Pages or Sites for

Quick Access

Save frequently accessed sites or web pages in Bookmark to

quickly display the pages.

Adding to Bookmark

• Up to 100 URLs can be saved in the Bookmark folders.

While viewing a site ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Bookmark" ▶ "Save"

[Select] ▶ Edit a title ▶

[Set] ▶

[Add] ▶ Select a destination folder

• If there is already the same URL saved, a conﬁrmation to

overwrite appears. Select "Yes".

Note

• Up to 256 half-pitch characters can be entered for a URL

saved as a Bookmark.

• Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters can be saved for

a Bookmark title.

• If the maximum number of Bookmarks has been saved, a

conﬁrmation whether to select items to delete appears. To

select, "Yes" ▶ select a folder ▶ select Bookmark to delete ▶

select a destination folder.

Accessing a Homepage/Site from

Bookmark

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Bookmark"

•

[Add]: Add a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch or

32 half-pitch characters can be entered for

a folder name.

•

[Edit]: Edit the folder name of the

selected user-deﬁned folder.

Bookmark folder

list screen

■ Icons displayed on the Bookmark folder list screen

Icon Description

(Gray) "Bookmark" (pre-installed folder)

(Yellow) User-deﬁned folder

191

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Select a folder

•

[URL]: Display the URL.

•

[Edit]: Edit the title.

Bookmark list

screen

Select the Bookmark URL to access

Bookmark Folder List Screen Sub Menu

Bookmark folder list screen (P190) ▶ Move

the cursor to a folder ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Manage folder]

Create folder : Add a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch

characters can be entered for a folder name.

Rename folder : Edit the selected folder name.

Sort folder : Sort the selected folder.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Delete all : Delete all Bookmarks.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Send all Ir data]

Send all Bookmarks via infrared communication.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the authentication

password ▶ "Yes"

[Copy all microSD]

Copy all Bookmarks to a microSD card.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display the number of saved Bookmarks in the entire folder.

Note

• The pre-installed "Bookmark" folder cannot be renamed, moved,

or deleted.

• If there is a bookmark in the folder, a conﬁrmation to delete

appears. Select "Yes" to delete in the entire folder.

Bookmark List Screen Sub Menu

Bookmark list screen (P191) ▶ Move the

cursor to a bookmark ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Connect]

Connect to the selected Bookmark site.

[Edit title]

Edit the title or URL of the selected Bookmark.

▶ Edit the title or URL ▶

[Set]

Continued on next page

192

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[Move]

Move this : Move the selected Bookmark to another folder.

Move selected : Select and move Bookmarks.

▶ Mark the Bookmarks to move ▶

[Move] ▶

Select a destination folder

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Move all : Move all Bookmarks in the folder to another folder.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected Bookmark.

Del. selected : Select and delete Bookmarks.

▶ Mark the Bookmarks to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶

"Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all : Delete all Bookmarks.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[URL Info]

Display the URL of the selected Bookmark.

[Copy URL]

Copy the URL of the selected Bookmark.

[Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the selected Bookmark attached. Go to Step

2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

[Ir exchange]

Send : Send the selected Bookmark via infrared communication.

Send all : Send all bookmarks in the folder via infrared

communication.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the

authentication password ▶ "Yes"

[Copy microSD]

Copy one : Copy selected Bookmark to microSD card.

Copy all : Copy all Bookmarks in the folder to microSD card.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display the number of saved Bookmarks in the folder.

Screen memo

Saving Site Contents

You can save the displayed page as a Screen memo. Pages

saved as Screen memo can be opened without connecting to

i-mode.

Saving Screen Memos

• Up to 50 Screen memos can be saved. However, the actual number

of savable pages may be reduced depending on the saved data

size.

• Up to approximately 100KB per page can be saved.

While viewing a site ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Screen

memo" ▶ "Save" ▶ "Yes"

Note

• If the maximum number of Screen memos have already been

saved, a conﬁrmation whether to select a screen memo to

delete appears. To select, "Yes" ▶ select a screen memo to

delete.

193

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Viewing Screen Memos

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Screen memo"

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected Screen

memo.

•

[URL]: Display the URL.

Screen memo list

screen

Select the Screen memo to display

The Screen memo detail screen is displayed.

Note

• The page saved as a Screen memo has the information at the

time it was saved. The Screen memo may not contain the latest

information.

Screen Memo List Screen Sub Menu

Screen memo list screen ▶ Move the cursor to

the Screen memo ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Display]

Display the selected Screen memo.

[Edit title]

Edit the title of the selected Screen memo. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24

half-pitch characters can be entered for a title.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected Screen memo.

Del. selected : Select and delete Screen memos.

▶ Mark the Screen memos to delete ▶

[Delete]

▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all : Delete all Screen memos.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[URL Info]

Display the URL of the selected Screen memo.

[Protect on/oﬀ]

One ON/OFF : Disable/Enable protection for the selected Screen

memo.

Select ON/OFF : Select and protect or unprotect a Screen memo.

▶ Mark Screen memos to protect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Unprotect all : Unprotect all Screen memos.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code

[Memory status]

Display the number of Screen memos.

194

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Screen Memo Detail Screen Sub Menu

Screen memo detail screen ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Save image]

Save an image or background image contained in the current Screen

memo. Go to Step 2 in "Downloading Images from Sites or Screen

Memos" (P195).

[Show properties]

URL : Display the URL of the displayed Screen memo.

Page properties : Display the title and the URL of the displayed

Screen memo.

Certiﬁcates : If the displayed Screen memo supports SSL, the

SSL certiﬁcate is displayed.

[Add to Phonebook]

Save a phone number or mail address on the site to the Phonebook.

→P187

[Retry]

Play a Flash movie or an animation contained in the Screen memo

from the beginning.

[Sound eﬀect]

Set whether to play sound eﬀects of the Flash movie contained in

the displayed Screen memo.

ON : Play the Flash movie sound eﬀects.

OFF : Do not play the Flash movie sound eﬀects.

[Edit title]

Edit the title of the displayed Screen memo. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24

half-pitch characters can be entered for a title.

[Delete]

Delete the displayed Screen memo.

[Protect ON/OFF]

Protect or unprotect the displayed Screen memo.

Note

• Protected Screen memos cannot be deleted. Unprotect them

before deleting.

• Up to 10 Screen memos can be protected. The number of

protectable Screen memos may vary depending on the data

size.

Downloading Data from Sites

You can download ﬁles or data such as images or melodies

from sites and save them to the FOMA terminal or microSD

card.

• Savable data (ﬁle) type and maximum savable size per ﬁle are as

follows:

- Image (JPEG, GIF, or SWF format), i-melody, template: 100KB

- Kisekae Tool: 2MB

- Dictionary: 32KB

Save image

Downloading Images from Sites or Screen

Memos

Save images on the displayed site or contained in Screen

memo to the FOMA terminal or a microSD card.

• Obtained images are saved in the "i-mode" folder in "My picture" of

"Data box" or microSD card.

195

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Example: To save the image displayed on a site

While viewing a site ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save

image"

"Select image" ▶ Select an image to save

To save the background image from a site

Select "Save backgnd".

A savable image

is framed by a

dotted border.

"Yes"

• Further select the destination when a microSD card is inserted

on the FOMA terminal. However, images in SWF format is

automatically saved to the FOMA terminal.

• If you saved the image on the FOMA terminal, a conﬁrmation

appears asking whether to set the saved image as Stand-by

display. Select "Yes" to set it.

Note

• Images cannot be saved if "Images" is set to "OFF".

• Some images saved on the FOMA terminal may not be

displayed properly even if they are displayed on the site.

• Some obtained images may not be displayed correctly.

• Image ﬁles in JPEG, GIF, or Progressive JPEG* formats

cannot be displayed after they are saved with the size (pixels)

exceeding the following. However, they can be output to

external devices such as by attaching to mail.

- JPEG or Progressive JPEG image ﬁles that exceed 2592×

1944 dots

- GIF image ﬁles that exceed 800×600 dots

* Progressive JPEG is an image format that is used on

the Internet. The image looks coarse at the beginning of

the download and the image sharpness improves as the

download progresses.

Downloading Data from a Site

Savable data type and the saving destination are as follows.

Data (ﬁle) type Destination

i-melody "i-mode" folder in "Melody" of "Data box" or

microSD card

Template "Template" in Mail menu (P144)

Kisekae Tool "i-mode" folder in "Kisekae Tool" of "Data box"

Dictionary "Download dictionary" (P389)

While viewing a site ▶ Select data

When download completes, a conﬁrmation appears.

Continued on next page

196

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

"Save"

• To cancel saving, select "Back".

• You can check data by selecting "View", "Play", or "Preview"

depending on the data type.

To save i-melody

Further select the destination if a microSD card is

inserted on the FOMA terminal.

To save a template

Select "Save" ▶ change the ﬁle name ▶ "Yes".

To save a dictionary

Select the destination.

Note

＜i-melody＞

• Download may not be possible depending on the site.

• Some downloaded melodies may not be played correctly.

• In some downloaded melodies, playback part may be speciﬁed.

Those melodies will be played entirely at playback, however,

when the melody is set for a ring tone etc., only the speciﬁed

part is played.

• When downloading templates, select "Compose mail" to create

Deco-mail using downloaded template.

＜Dictionary＞

• Using downloaded dictionaries→P389

Phone To/Mail To/Web To/Media To/i-αppli To function

Using Phone To/Mail To/Web

To/ Media To/i-αppli To Function

When a phone number, mail address or URL is highlighted

on a site or in mail, you can use it to easily make a call,

send i-mode mail, or access the web page. Also, when 1Seg

information is highlighted, you can watch 1Seg or set timer

for starting 1Seg.

• Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To, or Media To function in

mail sent from a PC may not be available.

Phone To/AV Phone To Function

Make a voice call (Phone To)/videophone call (AV Phone To)

to the highlighted phone number on a site or in mail.

Select a phone number ▶ Perform the following

operations

Voice call : Make a voice call.

Video call : Make a videophone call.

SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the

selected phone number.

Add phonebook : Add the selected phone number to the

Phonebook.

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook

Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc."

(P88).

Copy : Copy the selected phone number.

Note

• The Phone To/AV Phone To function may not be available

depending on the site.

• For mail, the order of displayed items varies.

197

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Mail To Function

You can send a mail to an i-mode mail address highlighted on

a site page or in mail.

Select a mail address

Go to Step 3 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

Note

• The Mail To function may not be available depending on the

site.

Web To Function

Access a URL highlighted on a site or in mail.

Select a URL

• For mail, further press

[Connect].

Note

• The Web To function may not be available depending on the

site.

• The appearance of the URL varies depending on the site.

• The Web To function may be available using a highlighted item

other than a URL.

Media To Function

You can watch 1Seg or set timer for starting 1Seg.

Select 1Seg information ▶ "Yes"

Note

• The Media To function may not be available when other

functions are running.

i-αppli To Function

You can start i-αppli from a URL highlighted on a site or in

i-mode mail.

• If "Set i-αppli To" (P285) or "Mail i-αppli To" in "Set i-αppli To" is not

marked, the i-αppli will not start.

Select i-αppli information ▶ "Yes"

Note

• Some i-αppli, which immediately start directly from the site

using the i-αppli To function, may not be saved.

i-mode setting

Setting i-mode

Set functions of i-mode or MessageR/F.

Communication

Conﬁguring Communication Settings

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Communication" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Connection timeout]

Set the timeout duration until the connection is automatically

terminated if there is no response due to network traﬃc.→P199

[Check new messages]

Specify request items when using "Check new messages".

▶ Mark the items to check ▶

[Done]

198

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Image&Eﬀect set.

Conﬁguring Image and Eﬀect Settings

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Image&Eﬀect set." ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Images]

Set whether to display images or Flash movies contained on sites or

in Screen memos.

[Sound eﬀect]

Set whether to play sound eﬀects of Flash movies contained on sites

or in Screen memos.

[Font size]

Set the font size for sites or Screen memos.

[Scroll]

Set the number of lines to scroll with each press of

on sites or

Screen memos.

[Use phone info.]

When a Flash movie is displayed on a site or in a Screen memo,

information saved on the FOMA terminal may be required. Set

whether to use the information from the FOMA terminal then.

[Auto-display setting]

Set how MessageR/F is displayed automatically.→P173

[Melody auto play]

Set whether to automatically play a melody when MessageR/F is

displayed.→P173

Note

• Images may not be displayed correctly even when "Images" is

set to "ON". In this case, appears.

• Even if "Sound eﬀect" is set to "ON", some sound eﬀects may

not sound depending on the Flash movie.

• If set to "ON", the battery level, signal strength, Date & Time,

Ring Volume, Language, and terminal model information may

be sent to IP (Information Provider) via the Internet, and a third

party may intercept the information.

Home

Conﬁguring Home Setting

Set the home URL by selecting "Home" from the Site display

screen sub menu.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Home"

Select "Enable" ▶ "http://" ﬁeld ▶ Enter the

URL ▶

[Done]

Note

• If set to "Disable", selecting "Home" does not open the speciﬁed

page. The URL entered in the "http://" ﬁeld will remain intact.

199

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Others

Conﬁguring Other Settings

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Others" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Check settings]

Check the options set in "i-mode setting".

[Reset settings]

Reset the options set in "i-mode setting" to the default.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Connection timeout

Setting Connection Timeout

Set the timeout duration until the connection is automatically

terminated if there is no response due to network traﬃc.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Communication" ▶ "Connection timeout" ▶

"60 seconds"/"90 seconds"/"Unlimited"

• If set to "Unlimited", the connection will not be automatically

terminated.

Note

• Even if set to "Unlimited", the connection attempt may be

terminated depending on the signal strength etc.

Host selection

Changing Access Point from i-mode

* If you use the DOCOMO i-mode service, changing the

access point is not required.

Set an Access Point Name (APN) used when you use services

other than i-mode (DOCOMO). i-mode and i-mode mail become

unavailable when you connect to an APN other than DOCOMO.

Adding Access Points

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Network" ▶ "Host selection"

Host selection

screen

[Add] ▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶

Perform the following operations

[Host name]

Enter the access point name within 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters.

[Host number]

Enter the number of the access point within 99 half-pitch alphanumeric

characters.

[Host address]

Enter the access point address within 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.

Continued on next page

200

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[Host address 2]

Enter the access point address for i-Channel within 30 half-pitch

alphanumeric characters.

[Done]

Changing Access Point

Host selection screen (P199) ▶ Select the

access point to change

Host Selection Screen Sub Menu

Host selection screen (P199) ▶ Move the

cursor to the access point ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

• Not available while "i-mode" is selected.

[Add new]

Add a new access point.→P199

[Edit]

Edit the access point settings.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Edit the access point settings

▶

[Done]

[Delete]

Delete the selected access point.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

[View]

Display the selected access point settings.

•

[Edit]: Edit the access point settings.

Note

• When an access point is changed, the i-Channel ticker does not

appear. When the information is auto-updated or you download

the latest information by pressing

in Stand-by, the ticker

will appear automatically.

• If the set access point is deleted, "imode" will be set as the

default host.

SSL Certiﬁcate Info

Operating SSL Certiﬁcate

You can view an SSL certiﬁcate, or set a certiﬁcate valid or

invalid.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Certiﬁcates"

•

[Select]: Display the contents of the selected certiﬁcate.

Move the cursor to the certiﬁcate ▶

[Invalid/Valid]

• Press

[Menu] and select "Certiﬁcate Info" or "Valid/Invalid".

Icon Description

Valid certiﬁcate

Invalid certiﬁcate

Certiﬁcates used for SSL communication

These certiﬁcates are issued by an authentication company, and

are saved on the FOMA terminal by default.

201

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-motion

i-motion is a moving picture with video and sound. They can

be obtained from i-motion sites, played, saved, and set as the

Stand-by display or a ring tone, etc.

i-motion Types

There are 2 types of i-motion.

Standard type

There are 2 formats of the Standard type.

The format in which an i-motion can be played after

download (Up to10MB)

The format in which an i-motion can be played during

the download (Up to 10MB)

• Some standard type i-motion cannot be saved.

Streaming type

This type allows you to play i-motion while downloading

data. Up to 10MB of i-motion can be played. The data is

deleted after playback. It cannot be saved on the FOMA

terminal.

Note

• i-motion that can be downloaded and played are in MP4 (Mobile

MP4) format. i-motion in ASF format cannot be downloaded or

played.

i-motion Download

Downloading i-motion from Sites

Up to 2,000 i-motion can be saved. However, the savable

number depends on the amount of the data.

• Downloaded i-motion is saved in the "i-mode" folder in "i-motion" of

"Data box" or microSD card.

While viewing a site ▶ Select i-motion

• When "Auto-replay setting" is set to "ON", i-motion is played

automatically after downloaded.

Operations during playback→P308

Streaming-type i-motion

• The Playback conﬁrmation screen appears. Select "Yes" to

play i-motion during the download.

• When "i-motion type" is set to "Standard type", you cannot

play i-motion. Switch to "Std/Streaming", then download

i-motion again.→P202

After download,

▶ "Save"

Play : Play downloaded i-motion.

File property : Display information about downloaded i-motion.

Back : Return to the Site display screen without saving

i-motion.

• Further select the destination when a microSD card is inserted

on the FOMA terminal.

Continued on next page

202

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Note

• Depending on the connected site or i-motion, some i-motion

may not be downloaded or played during the download.

• If you play i-motion while downloading data, i-motion may stop

playing or the image may become distorted due to signal

strength etc.

• Some i-motion cannot be saved on the FOMA terminal.

• Some i-motion have playback restrictions. appears for

i-motion with playback count. appears for i-motion with

playback period or playback limit. i-motion which has restricted

term for playback cannot be played before/after the term.

• Some downloaded i-motion may not be played correctly.

When a Link is Set in Ticker

When a ticker is set in i-motion, the ticker is displayed during

playback. If a phone number, a mail address, or a URL is set

in the ticker, you can use Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, or

Web To functions after the i-motion playback is ﬁnished.

i-motion playback ends ▶ Select an item

Auto-replay setting

Setting whether to Play i-motion

Automatically

Set whether to play i-motion automatically when downloading

from a site or mail.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "i-motion setting" ▶ "Auto-replay setting"

Switch between ON and OFF each time "Auto-replay setting" is

selected.

i-motion type

Specifying Type of Downloading i-motion

Set the type of the new i-motion to download from a site.

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "i-motion setting" ▶ "i-motion type" ▶ Select

a type

Standard type : Download only standard-type i-motion.

Std/Streaming : Download standard or streaming-type i-motion.

Note

• To download streaming-type i-motion, "Std/Streaming" must be

set.

203

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-Channel

i-Channel is a service which provides information such as

news or weather forecasts to i-Channel compatible terminals.

Automatically received latest information is displayed and

runs as a ticker on the Stand-by display. Also, pressing

displays the latest information in the channel list. (Display

channel list→P203)

• i-Channel is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription

(The i-mode contract is required for this subscription).

i-Channel has 2 types of channel: "Basic channels" provided

by DOCOMO and "Favorite channels" provided by IP

(Information Provider). Packet communication charge does

not apply to automatic update of information delivered to

"Basic channels". You can register your favorite channels on

"Favorite channels". For this channel, packet communication

charge applies for automatic update of information. Note

that packet communication charges apply to view detailed

information for both channels. To use International roaming

service, packet communication charges apply for both

automatic updating and viewing detailed information.

• For details about i-Channel, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

• The i-Channel service is provided in Japanese only.

Displaying i-Channel

If you subscribe to i-Channel, information appears as a ticker

on the Stand-by display as the information is received.

• To automatically display the ticker, set "Ticker display" to "ON".

→P204

• When Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the ticker is not displayed.

Stand-by display ▶

Ticker

Channel list

screen

Select a channel item

Connect to the site and detailed information is displayed.

•

: Return to the Channel list screen.

Continued on next page

204

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Note

• While information is being received, blinks.

• Even when the information arrives, a ring tone does not sound

nor does the terminal vibrate. The illumination does not light/

blink either.

• Information may not be received when the FOMA terminal power

is turned oﬀ, while the FOMA terminal is out of service area,

or when the signal reception is weak. Press

in Stand-

by to receive information, then the obtained information is

displayed automatically as the ticker on the Stand-by display.

Also, information may not be received if the default settings

are kept. In this case, press

in Stand-by to receive and

automatically display the information as the ticker on the

Stand-by display.

• In some conditions, information may be received only when a

channel list is displayed.

• If you change the access point in "Host selection", the access

point of i-Channel is also changed (normally, you do not need to

change these settings).

• The ticker will not appear after i-Channel is unsubscribed.

• When i-motion is set to the Stand-by display, the ticker will not

appear during playback.

• There may be a message notifying of failure to acquire channel

information if:

- the i-Channel access point has been changed

- the UIM has been replaced

• Touch operation is not available on i-Channel screen.

i-Channel Setting

Setting i-Channel

You can set whether to display the ticker on the Stand-by

display or to set the ticker display speed. Also you can delete

all i-Channel information on the FOMA terminal.

Stand-by display ▶

▶ "i-Channel" ▶

Perform the following operations

[i-Channel list]

Display the Channel list screen.→P203

[Ticker setting]

Ticker display : Set whether to display a ticker on the Stand-by

display.

Ticker speed : Set the ticker display speed.

Font size : Set the ticker font size.

Font color : Set the ticker font color.

[Reset i-Channel]

Delete i-Channel data downloaded on the FOMA terminal and restore

Ticker setting to defaults.

Note

• If you unsubscribe the i-mode service before unsubscribing

i-Channel, the "Ticker display" setting remains.

205

Full Browser

Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC

･････････････････････････････････････････ Full browser 206

Setting Full Browser ･････････ Full Browser Settings 214

206

Full Browser

Full browser

Displaying Web Pages Designed

for PC

With Full browser, FOMA terminal can display web pages

designed for PC.

• Some pages may not be displayed correctly.

• Up to approximately 500KB per page can be displayed.

• Note that accessing web pages containing lots of images or

performing communication with large amount of data such as data

download makes communication charge high. For details about

packet communication and billing plan, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

Displaying Full Browser Menu

i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Full browser"

Full browser

menu screen

Perform the following operations

[Home]

Display a web page which URL is set as "Home".

[Bookmark]

Display the Bookmark folder list screen.

[Last URL]

Display the last accessed web page.

[Go to location]

Input address : Enter a URL to access a web page.→P207

URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access a web

page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History" (P189).

[Full Browser Settings]

Set Full browser functions.→P214

Note

• SSL/TLS-supporting web pages can be displayed with Full

browser.

• SSL/TLS are methods to protect privacy and communicate

safely with authentication/encryption technologies. SSL/TLS

pages prevent others from eavesdropping, spooﬁng, and

altering information during communication by exchanging

encrypted data, and enable you to exchange your personal

information such as credit card number and address safer.

207

Full Browser

Displaying a Web Page by Entering URL

Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶ "Go to

location"

"Input address" ▶

[Select] ▶ Enter the URL

▶

[Connect]

• When "Access Setting" (P214) of Full browser is set to "Not

Use", the Access setting screen is displayed to conﬁrm

whether to use Full browser when activating Full browser.

Selecting "Yes" sets the Access setting to "Use" and displays

a web page. This setting is valid even after Full browser is quit.

Some web pages may take a while to be displayed.

• Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered.

• During Full browser communication, appears at the top of

the screen.

• To cancel the page retrieval while retrieving, press

[Stop].

• Once a URL is input, you can use the URL history to open its

web page by selecting on the Full browser menu screen (P206)

▶ "Go to location" ▶ "URL history". For details, refer to "Using

URL History" (P189) in i-mode section.

• To close a web page, press

▶ "Yes".

Note

• Some web pages automatically establish communication. When

starting communication, a conﬁrmation appears.

Select a communication method on a conﬁrmation screen.

Yes (once) : Connect this time only.

Yes (permanently) : After this, connect automatically without

conﬁrmation.

No : Do not connect.

Full Browser Screen

XXXXXX XXXXX

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸ

XXXXXX XXXXX ＸＸＸＸＸ

Displaying a web page

(horizontal)

Displaying a web page

(vertical)

Display mode

: Displayed only in PC layout mode→P215

Key operations while viewing a web page

Operation Description

(In Keitai mode),

(In PC layout mode),

Scroll the screen to the direction of the

key press

[∧]*Scroll the screen up

[∨]*Scroll the screen down

[Menu]*Display sub menu

[Action]*Display action menu

Select a link

Dial keys,

*Shortcut Operations→P208

* Available only in a vertical screen.

208

Full Browser

Shortcut Operations

Some operations can be done directly by pressing dial keys

while displaying a web page. The following operations are

assigned to each key by default. The assigned operations

can also be modiﬁed.

Shortcut operations

Operation Description

(Zoom out) Minify the view

(Scroll up) Scroll up on the screen

(Zoom in) Magnify the view

(Scroll left) Scroll left on the screen

(PagePilot) Display the whole page→P210

(Scroll right) Scroll right on the screen

(Back to previous page) Display the previous page

(Scroll down) Scroll down on the screen

(Go to next page) Display the next page

(Bookmark list) Display the list of saved

Bookmarks

(Switch to the left widow) Display the left window while

displaying multiple windows.

(Switch to the right widow) Display the right window while

displaying multiple windows.

Changing operations assigned to shortcuts

a While viewing a web page ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Shortcut List"

The Shortcut list screen appears.

b Move the cursor to a shortcut to change its assigned

operation ▶

[Edit] ▶ Move the cursor to an operation to

assign ▶

[Done]

Note

• Images that can be displayed are in JPEG, GIF, BMP, and PNG

formats.

• The following functions are not supported.

- Displaying Flash movies - Plug-ins - Playing sound

- Saving Screen memo - Phone To (AV Phone To)

• When user certiﬁcate stored in FOMA terminal is required for

SSL/TLS communication, certiﬁcate selection screen appears.

• Tilting the FOMA terminal to the left automatically switches to

the horizontal screen.

209

Full Browser

Displaying a Framed Web Page

A web page composed of multiple frames can be displayed.

Display a web page composed of multiple

frames

Frame page

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸ

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸ

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸ

△△△△

All frames

screen

Select a frame to display as full frame

• To return to the All frames screen,

press

Frame page

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

Full frame

screen

Note

• For a web page composed of many frames, all frames may not

be displayed.

Displaying in Multiple Windows

You can open multiple windows at a time and display those

by switching.

• Up to 5 windows can be opened. The maximum number of window

may not be opened depending on frame numbers or contents of the

pages.

While viewing a web page ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Window Operat." ▶ "New Window" ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Open]

Display the Bookmark folder list screen.

[Go to location]

Input address : Enter a URL to access a web page.→P207

URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access a web

page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History" (P189).

[Home]

Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home".

[Link]

Display a linked page

Continued on next page

210

Full Browser

Note

• Tabs are displayed on the top of the

screen.

To switch windows, press

[Menu] ▶ "Window Operat." ▶

"Change Window" ▶ select a window

name to display. The tab of the

displayed web page appears to the

front.

XX XX XX

ＸＸＸＸＸＸ

X XXX XXX

Tab

Operations in Full Browser

The operations in Full browser is basically same as those on

sites accessed from Go to location menu of i-mode (P186).

Here describes diﬀerent parts of the operation.

Full Browser Screen Sub Menu

While viewing a web page ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Goto Page]

Back : Display the previously accessed web pages.

Forward : When displaying web pages backwards, display next

page of the displayed web page.

Visit History : Access a web page by using the URL history.

Home : Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home".

[Reload]

Reload the displayed web page.

[Bookmark]

Bookmark folder.

[Go to location]

Input address : Enter a URL to access a web page.→P207

Home : Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home".

URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access a web

page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History" (P189).

[Display]

Set display settings for web pages.

Zoom :

Zoom In : Magnify the view of the web page.

Zoom Out : Minify the view of the web page.

Zoom : Set zoom factor for web page display.

Display Mode : Change display mode of a web page.→P215

PagePilot : Minify the whole view of the displayed web page and

select a range to display.

▶ Move the cursor to the part to display ▶

[Select]

All frames : Display the All frames screen when the Full frame

screen is displayed.

Goto on Page : Display the top/end of the web page.

Go to Top : Go to the top of the displayed web page.

Go to End : Go to the end of the displayed web page.

211

Full Browser

Search : Search text in the displayed web page. When

the search text is found, the matched text is

highlighted.

▶ Select the Search text ﬁeld ▶ Enter the text to

search ▶

[Done]

To search the exact match word only, mark

"Whole Words Only".

To search a word distinguishing upper case from

lower case, mark "Case Sensitive".

To display search result in sequence, press

[Prev]/

[Next].

Press

to quit the search.

Character code : Change character code of the displayed web

page.

Every time you change the character code, the

code switches in order of Shift-JIS → EUC → JIS

→ UTF-8.

Play animation : Play GIF animation displayed from the beginning

frame.

Title Info : Display the title of the displayed web page.

URL Info :

URL Info : Display the URL of the displayed web page.

• To copy the URL, press

[Menu] ▶ "Copy".

Link Info : Display the URL of the selected link.

• To copy the URL, press

[Menu] ▶ "Copy".

SSL Info : Display the certiﬁcate of the web page.

[Window Operat.]

New Window : Open another web page loaded from the Open/Go

to location/Home/Link in a new window.→P209

Open as Back : Open another web page loaded from the Open/Go

to location/Home/Link in a background window.

→P209

Open Link : Display the selected link in a new window.

• If a moving picture is linked, a new window is

closed and a moving picture application starts.

Close Window : Close the displayed web site.

Change Window : Select a web page from the list of pages

displayed in multi windows.

[Save Image]

Save images on a web page to the FOMA terminal or microSD card.

▶ Select an image to save ▶ "Yes"

• If microSD card is inserted, further select save location.

[Text]

Text Copy : Copy text on a web page.

Select start point of a range including text to copy ▶

Select end point ▶ Select start point ▶ Select end

point

• Press

[SelAll] to copy all text.

Text Paste : Paste copied text to the selected text box.

Continued on next page

212

Full Browser

[Compose msg]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the displayed web page in the

message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail"

(P138).

Select from the following options when a linked item is selected.

This page : Paste the URL of the displayed web page.

Link page : Paste the URL link on the selected web page.

[Setting]

Image display : Set whether to display images.

Set as Home : Set the displayed web page as "Home".

TLS : Set whether to use TLS. Normally, changing this

setting is not necessary.

[Shortcut List]

Check operations assigned to the dial keys in list. The assigned

operations can be modiﬁed as well.→P208

Note

• For some web pages, characters may not appear correctly or

their view may diﬀer from the web pages displayed on PC. When

characters appear incorrectly, "Character code" (P211) may ﬁx

the problem.

• When no data is obtained for a web page due to communication

error etc., may appear on the screen. In this case, reloading

the web page (P210) may ﬁx the problem.

• Images that can be saved are in JPEG, GIF, BMP, PNG formats

and up to 100KB.

• For BMP and PNG formats, images are automatically saved in

"OTHER" folder of microSD card. These images cannot be saved

in the FOMA terminal.

• Images may not be saved depending on the site.

<Text>

• In some pages, text cannot be copied.

Full Browser Screen Action Menu

While viewing a web page ▶

[Action] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Open Link]

Display a linked page

[Link Info]

Display the URL of selected link.

[Save Image]

Save the selected image to the FOMA terminal or microSD card.

→P211

[Text Paste]

Paste copied text to the selected text box.

[Zoom In]

Magnify the view of the web page.

[Zoom Out]

Minify the view of the web page.

[Display Mode]

Change display mode of a web page.→P215

213

Full Browser

[PagePilot]

Minify the whole view of the displayed web page and select a range

to display.→P210

[Go to Top]

Go to the top of the displayed web page.

[Go to End]

Go to the end of the displayed web page.

[Text Copy]

Copy text on a web page.→P211

Note

• Some menu items may not appear depending on the operating

condition.

Uploading Images

You can upload JPEG/GIF images saved in the FOMA

terminal to a web page.

• Upload method varies depending on web pages. Follow the

instructions on the screen.

Note

• Up to 80KB of an image can be uploaded. However, when

multiple images and characters are included, the maximum size

is 100KB altogether.

• Uploading may not be available on some web pages.

• Images which are restricted to be transferred from the FOMA

terminal cannot be uploaded.

Bookmark

Adding to Bookmark

While viewing a web page ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Bookmark" ▶ "Add"

Select the Title ﬁeld ▶ Edit a title ▶

[Add]

▶ Select the folder to save

Note

• The operations available for Bookmark folder list or Bookmark

list are the same as for i-mode.→P190

Switching to Full Browser from i-mode

You can switch i-mode view to Full browser.

• Some web pages may not appear or may not appear correctly.

• Note that the billing system for Full browser is diﬀerent from the

one for i-mode, and accessing web pages containing lots of images

or performing communication with large amount of data such as

data download makes communication charge high. For details about

packet communication charges and billing plan, see "Mobile Phone

User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

While viewing an i-mode site ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Switch to Full Browser" ▶ "OK"

214

Full Browser

Full Browser Settings

Setting Full Browser

Set browser functions.

Communication

Conﬁguring Communication Settings

Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶ "Full

Browser Settings" ▶ "Communication" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Access Setting]

Check the information about using Full browser.

• When you use Full browser changing settings, please read the

information in the Access Setting carefully.

[Cookie Setting]

Set whether to validate Cookie. Cookie is the scheme to store

information such as user name, access date, or number of accesses

in the FOMA terminal temporarily when accessing web pages and

use those data when accessing the same page next time.

• DOCOMO is not responsible if your information is passed to a third

party by validating Cookie.

• When selected "Valid (notify)", you can select the option from

"Sending", "Receiving", or "Sending/receiving".

[Delete Cookie]

Delete Cookie.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Referer Setting]

Set whether to send Referer (information that where a page is linked

from) when accessing a web page by selecting a link.

• DOCOMO is not responsible if your information is passed to a third

party by sending Referer.

[TLS]

TLS is a method to protect privacy and communicate safely with

authentication/encryption technologies. Set whether to use TLS.

Normally, changing this setting is not necessary.

Note

• If inserting another UIM, Access Setting becomes invalid.

• If inserting another UIM, Cookie Setting becomes "Invalid".

• If changing the setting from "Invalid" to "Valid"/"Valid (notify)",

and if UIM information does not match, the Terminal security

code is required.

215

Full Browser

Image&Eﬀect set.

Conﬁguring Image and Eﬀect Settings

Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶ "Full

Browser Settings" ▶ "Image&Eﬀect set." ▶

Perform the following operations

[Zoom]

Set zoom factor for a web page display.

[Display Mode Setting]

Set display method of a web page.

PC layout mode : Display a web page in the same way as you view

on PC. Scrolling up/down, or to the right/left is

available.

Keitai mode : Display a web page ﬁt to the display width.

Scrolling up and down is available.

[Set Image display]

Set whether to display images.

[Bookmark Display]

Set display method for saved Bookmark folder.

[Window Open Guard Setting]

Set the action when getting an instruction to open a new window

from JavaScript on a web page.

Valid : A new window does not open.

Invalid : A conﬁrmation appears when opening a new window.

[Script Setting]

Set whether to validate JavaScript. JavaScript is a program which

works on web pages.

• Some web pages may not appear correctly with "Invalid" set.

Home URL

Conﬁguring the Home Setting

Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶

"Full Browser Settings" ▶ "Home URL"

[Select] ▶ Enter URL ▶

[Done]

• Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered.

Others

Conﬁguring Other Settings

Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶ "Full

Browser Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Check Settings]

Display the list of Full browser settings.

[Reset Settings]

Reset the Full browser settings.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

217

Camera

Copyrights and Portrait Rights

You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute contents

such as text, image, music, or software downloaded from

web sites on the Internet, or images captured with this

product without permission from the copyright holder except

when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed

under copyright laws. Note that it may be prohibited to

capture or record live performances or exhibitions even for

personal use. Refrain from taking portraits of other people

and uploading such portraits to web sites without their

consent, as this violates portrait rights.

Please be considerate of other people's privacy

when capturing and sending pictures using camera-

equipped mobile phones.

Before Using Camera ･･･････････････････････････････ 218

Capturing Still Images ･････････････････ Photo-mode 222

Capturing Moving Pictures ････････････ Movie-mode 227

Changing Settings for Shooting ････････････････････ 230

Changing Camera Settings ･･･････ Camera settings 232

Using Bar Code Reader ････････････Bar code reader 234

218

Camera

Before Using Camera

Notes for Capturing Images

• The camera employs high-precision technology, but some pixels

or lines may seem brighter or darker than others. Also, when you

capture images in places with insuﬃcient lighting, noises such as

white lines increase. This is not a malfunction.

• Clean the lens with a soft cloth before capturing. If the lens is

stained with ﬁngerprints or oil, the captured image may be out of

focus or blurred.

• Do not leave the FOMA terminal in a warm place or under a direct

sunlight for a long period of time. The image or video to capture

may deteriorate.

• If you capture under a ﬂuorescent light, mercury lamp, or sodium

lamp ﬂickering at high speed, ﬂickering such as stripes may

appear. The color tone of still images or moving pictures may vary

depending on the capturing timing.

• Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight for a long period of time

and do not point at the sun or a bright light directly. The image may

become discolored or the camera may malfunction.

• Do not cover the lens with your ﬁnger, hair, or the strap when

capturing.

• Capturing a fast moving object may result in an image slightly oﬀ

from the image displayed on the screen at the time of capturing, or

the image may be blurred.

• When the battery level is low, you may not be able to save captured

still images or moving pictures. Check the battery level before using

the camera.

• Captured still images or moving pictures may diﬀer from the actual

subjects in brightness or color tone.

• Even in Manner mode, the shutter tone sounds at a ﬁxed volume.

The shutter tone sounds from the speaker even when a Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected to the

FOMA terminal.

Using Camera

You can use camera with the terminal closed or opened.

This manual describes operations in horizontal capture mode

(with the FOMA terminal closed) as a priority.

Also, you can select the Inner or the Outer camera,

depending on the situation.

Outer camera

Useful for taking pictures of scenery or other people. The

screen output is similar to what you see (normal image).

The Auto focus adjusts the focus of still image capturing

with the Outer camera.→P225 Outer camera

Photo light/Light

Inner camera

Useful for taking pictures of yourself. Inverted (mirrored)

images are shown in the frame. Captured image can be

saved as either mirrored image or normal image.→P224

Inner Camera

219

Camera

Note

• Photo light turns orange or blinks when capturing a still image/

moving picture.

• The light can only be used for the Outer camera.

Capture Screen Components

The meanings of marks (icons and others) on the Still image/

Moving picture capture screen are as follows:

Still image capture screen

(horizontal capture mode)

Still image capture screen

(vertical capture mode)

Moving picture capture screen

(horizontal capture mode)

Continued on next page

220

Camera

Moving picture capture screen

(vertical capture mode)

Camera-mode→P223, P228

Photo-mode

Movie-mode

Funny face shot

Image size→P232, P233

5.1M (2560×1920)

3M (2048×1536)

2M (1600×1200)

1M (1280×960)

VGA (640×480) (Outer camera)

VGA (480×640) (Inner camera)

CIF (352×288)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF (128×96)

Wallpaper (800×480)

* Numbers in parentheses of still image ﬁles indicate as in

horizontal capture mode. The right and left numbers switch

when capturing in vertical capture mode.

Quality→P233, P234

Super ﬁne

Fine

Normal

White balance

Auto

Incandescent

Sunny

Fluorescent

Cloudy

Light→P222, P227

OFF

When capturing

Always ON

AUTO

Shake reduction

Receiving mail→P34

Continuous mode→P232

Auto Manual

Scene mode→P232

Auto

Night scene

• Set this mode when capturing in a dark place, etc.

Portrait

Landscape

Sports

Sunset

221

Camera

Macro→P233

Battery level→P50

Auto timer→P232

3sec 10sec 15sec

Memory in use→P233, P234

Handset memory

External memory (microSD card)

Number of available shots→P468, P469

Focus frame→P225

The frame color changes to indicate status when the Auto

focus is in operation.

Zoom bar→P230

Exit key

Return to the previous screen.

Camera-mode

Photo-mode

Movie-mode

Bar code reader

Funny face shot

Album

CameraSW→P223, P227

Light

OFF

When capturing

Always ON

AUTO

Brightness→P231

Display key operation guide

Capturing→P223

Task status→P34

Size restriction→P234

No restriction For mail long For mail short

Type→P234

Sound+Video Movie only Sound only

Total recordable time

Start recording button→P227

Recording→P228

Note

•

In horizontal capture mode, items

, and

disappear in approximately 3 seconds after the Still image

capture screen/Moving picture capture screen is displayed. Touch

the screen to display.

222

Camera

Save Format of Still Images and Moving

Pictures

Still image ﬁle Moving picture ﬁle

File format JPEG MP4 (Mobile MP4)

Resolution*Outer

camera 5.1M (2560×1920)

3M (2048×1536)

2M (1600×1200)

1M (1280×960)

VGA (640×480)

CIF (352×288)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF (128×96)

Wallpaper

(800×480)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Inner

camera VGA (480×640)

CIF (352×288)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF (128×96)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Encoding

Format − Video: MPEG-4

Sound: AMR

File

Extension .jpg .3gp

* Numbers in parentheses of still image ﬁles indicate as in horizontal

capture mode. The right and left numbers switch when capturing in

vertical capture mode.

Still image ﬁle Moving picture ﬁle

Display

name of the

ﬁle

The year, month, date, hour, and minute at the time

of capture are added automatically.

Example: If taken at 10:10:10 on 2009/8/1

Photo-mode: "P2009_0801_101010"

Movie-mode: "V2009_0801_1010_X" (X is a

sequential number)

* If memory in use is "External memory" (microSD

card) and type is "Sound+Video" or "Movie

only", the ﬁle is named as "MOLXXX" (XXX is a

sequential number). If the type is "Sound only", the

ﬁle is named as "MMFXXXX" (XXXX is a sequential

number).

Maximum

ﬁle size Approx. 5.1MB QCIF: Approx. 58MB

Photo-mode

Capturing Still Images

• Captured still images are saved in the "Camera" folder in "My

picture" of "Data box" on the FOMA terminal. To change the saving

destination to a microSD card, set in "Memory in use" (P233).

Stand-by display ▶

Still image capture screen

223

Camera

Touch/Key operations on the Still image capture screen

(horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Shutter

Zoom bar,

Zoom

"Menu" Display setting menu

Exit Photo-mode

(Camera-mode) Change Camera-mode

(Switch camera) Switch between the Inner camera and the

Outer camera

(Light) Set lighting condition

(Brightness) Display the Brightness adjustment bar

Key operations on the Still image capture screen (vertical

capture mode)

Operation Description

[Take],

Shutter

Zoom

Adjust brightness

[Mode] Change Camera-mode

[Menu] Display setting menu

[Light] Set lighting condition

Exit Photo-mode

[CameraSW] Switch between the Inner camera and the

Outer camera

Display key operation guide

Select size→P232

Shot mode→P232

Scene mode→P232

Operation Description

Eﬀect→P232

White balance→P232

Funny face shot→P226

Macro→P233

Auto timer→P233

Memory in use→P233

Display captured images in "My picture" of

"Data box"

Auto focus→P233

Point the camera to a subject ▶

The shutter tone sounds and the

still image is captured.

The Conﬁrm save screen appears,

and you can select whether to

save the image.

Conﬁrm save screen

(Ex.: Outer camera)

Continued on next page

224

Camera

Touch operations on the Still image conﬁrm save screen

(horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Create an i-mode mail with captured image

attached

Return to the Still image capture screen without

saving the captured image

Save the captured image

Save the captured image as a mirror image

Check the captured image by switching to

normal/mirror image

Save all continuous pictures captured

Delete the selected image

*1 Appear only with the Inner camera.

*2 Appear only in the Continuous mode.

Key operations on the Still image conﬁrm save screen

(vertical capture mode)

Operation Description

[Mail] Create an i-mode mail with captured image

attached

[Save] Save the captured image

[New]

Return to the Still image capture screen without

saving the captured image

[Menu]

Save the captured image as a mirror image

Check the captured image by switching to

normal image

[Save all]

Save all continuous pictures captured

[Delete]

Delete the selected image

*1 Appear only with the Inner camera.

*2 Appear only in the Continuous mode.

The captured image is

automatically saved in the

destination speciﬁed under

"Memory in use" (P233) and the

Complete save screen will be

displayed.

• When using the Inner camera,

images on the capture screen

and the Conﬁrm save screen

are displayed as a mirror image,

however, the image will be saved

as a normal image. To save the

image as a mirror image, set

"Auto Saving" to "OFF" and touch

on the Conﬁrm save screen.

Complete save screen

(Ex.: Outer camera)

Touch/Key operations on the Still image complete save

screen (horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Create an i-mode mail with captured image attached

Return to the Still image capture screen

Display captured images in "My picture" of "Data box"

Set the captured image as wallpaper, etc. to the

Stand-by display

Edit the captured image

Delete the captured image

225

Camera

Key operations on the Still image complete save screen

(vertical capture mode)

Operation Description

[Mail] Create an i-mode mail with captured image

attached

[New] Return to the Still image capture screen

[Menu] <Use as>

Set the captured image as wallpaper, etc. to the

Stand-by display

<Edit>

Edit the captured image

Delete the captured image

<Album>

Display captured images in "My picture" of "Data

box"

Auto focus

When you capture images with the Outer camera, Auto focus

operates and the subject in the center of the screen can be

automatically focused on. When

is pressed on the Still image

capture screen, auto adjustment starts, then the focus frame

turns red. The focus frame turns green when focused, and

shutter clicks.

For images captured with "Continuous mode"

• The captured image is displayed on the left side and the

touched image is displayed in the center of the screen.

• To save all captured images, touch .

• To select and send images via mail, touch images to send ▶

• To select and delete images, touch images to delete ▶ .

When "Auto Saving" (P233) is set to "ON"

Pressing

captures a still image and automatically saves it in

the destination speciﬁed under "Memory in use" (P233).

After the Complete save screen appears, the Still image capture

screen returns. However, in the Continuous mode, the screen that

notiﬁes of saving appears instead.

Note

• Even when Manner mode is activated, the shutter tone sounds

when capturing.

• If capturing with "Select size" set to "5.1M (2560×1920)" or

capturing using the Inner camera, the zoom feature cannot be

used.

226

Camera

Panorama Shot

You can create a panoramic image from 3 captured still

images taken by moving the FOMA terminal rightward.

• This option is available when the image size is "VGA (640×840)" to

"Sub-QCIF (128×96)"

• This option is not available for the Inner camera.

Stand-by display ▶

"Menu" ▶ "Preview" ▶ "Shot mode" ▶

"Panorama shot"

Panorama shot screen

Indicate where the

current frame is

Move the FOMA terminal rightward ▶

A panoramic image made up of the 3 images is displayed.

Note

• The right edge of the previously taken image is displayed at the

left edge of the current capture screen, helping you to frame for

the next shot.

• Touching while capturing starts over capturing.

Funny Face Shot

If you point the camera to a subject, the camera recognizes

faces and you can convert them into various funny faces.

• About image size, you can select for the Inner camera from "VGA

(480×640)" to "QVGA (320×240)", for the Outer camera from

"Wallpaper (800×480)" to "QVGA (320×240)".

Stand-by display ▶

▶ (Camera-mode) ▶

"Funny face shot"

Select a funny face type

227

Camera

Funny face type

Type Description

(OFF) Cancel Funny face shot mode.

(Bighead) Change shape of head as enlarged.

(Mosaic) Apply mosaic to face.

(Animal mask) If this type is selected, animal mask type is

displayed. Select a mask type to cover face

with the selected animal mask.

(Snow) Apply eﬀect as if the snow is falling on the

entire image.

(Monotone) Apply black-and-white eﬀect.

(Facial color) Apply eﬀect to make face look like beautiful

skin.

(Outfocus) Blur face outline.

(Radialblur) Blur face outline radially.

(Fisheye) Apply eﬀect as if captured with Fisheye

lends.

(Concave) Apply face to look shrunk.

Point the camera to the subject ▶

Once your face is recognized, the eﬀect is displayed on the

screen.

Movie-mode

Capturing Moving Pictures

• Captured moving pictures are saved in the "Camera" folder in

"i-motion" of "Data box" on the FOMA terminal. To change the saving

destination to a microSD card, set in "Memory in use" (P234).

Stand-by display ▶

▶ (Camera-mode) ▶

"Movie-mode"

Moving picture capture

screen

Touch/Key operations on the Moving picture capture

screen (horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Start recording

Zoom bar,

Zoom (available while capturing)

"Menu" Display setting menu

Exit Movie-mode

(Camera-mode) Change Camera-mode

(Switch camera) Switch between the Inner camera and the

Outer camera

(Brightness) Display the Brightness adjustment bar

(Light) Set lighting condition

Continued on next page

228

Camera

Key operations on the Moving picture capture screen

(vertical capture mode)

Operation Description

[Rec.],

Start recording

Zoom (available while capturing)

Adjust brightness

[Mode] Change Camera-mode

[Menu] Display setting menu

[Light] Set lighting condition

Exit Movie-mode

[CameraSW] Switch between the Inner camera and the

Outer camera

Display the key operation guide

Select size→P233

Auto Saving→P234

Video quality→P234

Eﬀect→P233

White balance→P234

Type→P234

Common mode→P234

Flicker tuning→P234

Memory in use→P234

Display captured images in "My picture" of

"Data box"

Point the camera to the subject ▶

The tone sounds and capturing

moving picture starts.

• / : Pause/resume the

recording.

* Pause is not available when

"Type" is "Sound only".

Capturing moving picture

screen

Key operations while capturing moving pictures (vertical

capture mode)

Operation Description

[Pause] Pause/Resume capturing

[Stop] Stop capturing

[Cancel] Cancel capturing

The tone sounds and capturing

moving picture ends. The photo

light turns oﬀ. After a moving

picture is captured, the Conﬁrm

save screen appears, and you can

select whether to save the moving

picture.

Conﬁrm save screen

229

Camera

Touch operations on the Moving picture conﬁrm save

screen (horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Preview the captured moving picture

"New" Return to the Moving picture capture screen without

saving the captured moving picture

Save the captured moving picture

Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture

attached

Key operations on the Moving picture conﬁrm save screen

(vertical capture mode)

Operation

Description

[Save] Save the captured moving picture

[Play] Preview the captured moving picture

[Mail] Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture

attached

Return to the Moving picture capture screen without

saving the captured moving picture

The captured moving picture is

automatically saved in the save

location speciﬁed under "Memory

in use" (P234) and the Complete

save screen appears.

• When using the Inner camera,

images on the capture screen

are displayed as a mirror image,

however, images will be saved as

a normal image. Complete save screen

Touch/Key operations on the Moving picture complete

save screen (horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Preview the captured moving picture

"New",

Return to the Moving picture capture screen

Display captured moving pictures in "i-motion" of "Data

box"

Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture

attached

Set the captured moving picture as wallpaper, etc. to

the Stand-by display

Delete the captured moving picture

Key operations on the Moving picture complete save

screen (vertical capture mode)

Operation Description

[New] Return to the Moving picture capture screen

[Album] Display captured moving pictures in "i-motion"

of "Data box"

[Delete] Delete the captured moving picture

[Use as] Set the captured moving picture as wallpaper,

etc. to the Stand-by display

[Mail] Create an i-mode mail with captured moving

picture attached

When "Auto Saving" (P234) is set to "On"

Pressing /

stops the recording and automatically saves it in

the destination speciﬁed under "Memory in use" (P234).

The Complete save screen appears and the Moving picture capture

screen returns.

Continued on next page

230

Camera

Note

•

Even when Manner mode is activated, the shutter tone sounds

when capturing starts and ends.

•

Moving picture capturing will be terminated when it is interrupted by

a call arrival. After the call is terminated, the Conﬁrm save screen

appears, and you can save the moving picture recorded until the

interruption.

•

Playing moving pictures on a PC.→P447

Changing Settings for Shooting

Set the Camera functions according to the capturing

conditions.

Using Zoom

Set the image zoom magniﬁcation.

• When capturing a still image, if capturing with "Select size" set to

"5.1M (2560×1920)" or capturing using the Inner camera, the

zoom feature cannot be used.

Still image capture screen (P222)/Moving

picture capture screen (P227) ▶ Slide the

Zoom bar to adjust zoom magniﬁcation

• Move the Zoom bar pressing

, or with your ﬁnger

touching the touch panel.

For vertical capture mode, using

also slides the zoom bar.

Zoom setting

(Ex.: Still image capture screen)

Zoom bar

231

Camera

Outer camera maximum magniﬁcation

Camera

-mode Image size*Zoom Maximum

magniﬁcation

Photo-mode

5.1M (2560×1920) − −

3M (2048×1536)

10 steps

Approx. 1.2 times

2M (1600×1200) Approx. 1.6 times

1M (1280×960)

Approx. 2.0 times

VGA (640×480)

CIF (352×288)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF (128×96)

Wallpaper

(800×480) Approx. 1.6 times

Movie-mode QVGA (320×240) Approx. 2.0 times

QCIF (176×144) Approx. 3.6 times

Sub-QCIF (128×96) Approx. 5.0 times

* Numbers in parentheses indicate as in horizontal capture mode.

The right and left numbers switch when capturing in vertical

capture mode.

Inner camera maximum magniﬁcation

Camera

-mode Image size*Zoom Maximum

magniﬁcation

Movie-mode QVGA (320×240) 10 steps Approx. 2.0 times

QCIF (176×144) Approx. 3.3 times

Sub-QCIF (128×96) Approx. 5.0 times

* Numbers in parentheses indicate as in horizontal capture mode.

The right and left numbers switch when capturing in vertical

capture mode.

Adjusting Brightness

Adjust the image brightness (exposure). You can adjust

brightness in 9 steps.

Still image capture screen (P222)/Moving

picture capture screen (P227)

Display the Brightness adjustment bar

Horizontal capture mode

Touch .

Vertical capture mode

Press

Slide the Brightness adjustment bar to adjust

brightness

• Move the Brightness

adjustment bar with your ﬁnger

touching the touch panel.

In horizontal capture mode,

pressing

also allows to

slide.

For vertical capture mode, using

also slides the brightness

adjustment bar.

Brightness setting

(Ex.: Still image capture screen)

Brightness adjustment bar

232

Camera

Setting Auto Timer

Set the number of seconds from the time the shutter is

pressed until an image is captured.

• The Auto timer is not available for moving picture capturing.

Still image capture screen (P222) ▶ "Menu" ▶

"Preview" ▶ "Auto timer"

"3sec"/"10sec"/"15sec"

(the number indicates the number of seconds) appears at the

top of the screen.

• To release Auto timer, set to "OFF".

Auto timer starts. An image is captured automatically after the

set number of seconds.

After the shutter key is pressed, photo light blinks in orange and

the timer sound rings until the image is captured.

Camera settings

Changing Camera Settings

Still Image Capture Screen Setting Menu

Still image capture screen (P222) ▶ "Menu"

▶ "Preview"/"Others" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Select size]

Set the image size to capture.

[Shot mode]

Normal : Capture one still image.

Continuous mode : Press the shutter key to capture images

continuously.

• You can capture up to 6 continuous images

smaller than "CIF (352×288)", or up to

4 images of "CIF (352 ×288)".

• When "Auto" is selected, you can capture

continuous images by pressing the shutter

key once. When "Manual" is selected, you can

capture continuous images by pressing the

shutter key repeatedly.

Shoot with frame : Add a frame to the subject when capturing an

image. Select a frame from "My picture".

▶ Move the cursor to a folder ▶ [Open] ▶

Select a frame

Panorama shot*: Capture a panoramic image.→P226

[Scene mode]*

Capture a still image suitable for the capturing conditions.

[Eﬀect]

Add an eﬀect when capturing a still image.

[White balance]

Set hue/tint for the image. When set according to the capturing

conditions, a naturally colored image can be produced.

233

Camera

[Macro]*

Set close-up capturing.

• Become focused when distance between the Camera and subject is

approximately 10cm.

[Auto timer]

Select the number of seconds from the time the shutter is pressed

until an image is captured.

[Image quality]

Select the image quality used when saving the still image.

[Auto Saving]

Set whether to save the still image automatically.

[Memory in use]

Set the save location for the still image.

[Shake reduction]*

Set whether to enable the shake reduction function.

[Auto focus]*

Set the Auto focus.

• When "Face tracking" is selected, a face is recognized and focused

automatically. Up to 3 faces can be detected.

[Shutter sound]

Set the shutter tone.

[Flicker tuning]

The ﬂicker on the screen under a ﬂuorescent light, etc. may be

reduced.

Auto : Suppress the ﬂicker automatically.

50Hz : Select this option in an area where the frequency of the

power is 50Hz.

60Hz : Select this option in an area where the frequency of the

power is 60Hz.

[Reset settings]

Restore the still image capture settings to default.

* Not available for the Inner camera.

Note

• This option is available when the image size is "CIF (352×288)"

or smaller.

• When "Auto" is selected, the Outer camera captures at intervals

of approximately 0.7 seconds, and the Inner camera at intervals

of approximately 0.2 seconds.

• When "Continuous mode" is set, "Auto timer" is disabled.

• If you press while capturing, you can end capturing and the

Conﬁrm save screen appears.

• This option is available when the image size is "CIF (352×288)"

to "Sub-QCIF (128×96)" and "Wallpaper (800×480)" (Available

only for the Outer camera).

• When "Manual" is selected, the focus adjustment bar appears

on the Still image capture screen in horizontal capture mode.

Move the bar with your ﬁnger touching the touch panel. When

capturing in vertical capture mode, use

to display/adjust

the focus adjustment bar.

Moving Picture Capture Screen Setting Menu

Moving picture capture screen (P227) ▶

"Menu" ▶ "Preview"/"Others" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Select size]

Set the moving picture size to capture.

[Eﬀect]

Add an eﬀect when capturing moving pictures.

Continued on next page

234

Camera

[White balance]

Set hue/tint for the image. When set according to the capturing

conditions, a naturally colored moving picture can be produced.

[Video quality]

Set the image quality used when saving the moving picture.

[Size restriction]

Restrict the ﬁle size of a moving picture.

[Memory in use]

Set the save location for a moving picture.

[Auto Saving]

Set whether to save the moving picture automatically.

[Type]

Set whether video and sound are to be included in a moving picture.

[Common mode]

Set ﬁle size suitable for attaching to i-mode mail (up to 500KB).

• If set to "On", you can select image size from "QCIF (176×144)" or

"Sub-QCIF (128×96)" and the Image quality is set to "Super ﬁne"

and the Size restriction is set to "For mail short".

[Flicker tuning]

The ﬂicker on the screen under a ﬂuorescent light, etc. may be

reduced.

Auto : Suppress the ﬂicker automatically.

50Hz : Select this option in the location where the frequency of the

power is 50Hz.

60Hz : Select this option in the location where the frequency of the

power is 60Hz.

[Reset settings]

Restore the moving picture capture settings to default.

Note

• If you record the moving picture in the size of "QVGA

(320×240)" in a room where 50Hz ﬂuorescent light is used,

ﬂicker may not be reduced.

Bar code reader

Using Bar Code Reader

You can scan information embedded in a JAN code or QR

code using the Outer camera. You can create i-mode mail

or connect to the Internet using the scanned information.

You can also save or play the scanned information, image or

melody.

• UP to 5 pieces of scanned information can be saved.

• Scan the code when the entire code is displayed on the screen.

• Hold the camera parallel to the code.

JAN codes

JAN code is a bar code representing numbers using

vertical bars in diﬀerent thickness and spaces. 8-digit

(JAN8) or 13-digit (JAN13) bar code can be scanned.

• The scanned result of the following JAN code is

"4942857123456".

235

Camera

QR codes

QR code is one of the 2 dimensional codes that express

text including alphanumeric characters, Kanji, Kana, or

pictographs in the vertical and horizontal patterns. Some

QR codes have an image or melody embedded, and some

are split QR codes where multiple images contain 1 larger

piece of information.

• The scanned result of the following QR code is "株式会社NTTドコ

モ (NTT DOCOMO, INC.)".

Scanning Codes

• When scanning bar cords, use the Outer camera and hold the FOMA

terminal approximately 10cm away from the code to scan.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Bar code reader"

Scan screen

Key operations on the Scan screen

Operation Description

[Scan] Start Auto focus

[Mode] Change Camera-mode

[List] List the saved scanned data

[Light] Light ON/OFF

[ ],

Exit Bar code reader

Display the code to scan within the screen ▶

[Scan]

After the auto focusing, scan the code.

When scanning completes, a tone sounds

and the scanned data appears.

• When the bar code reader is activated,

scanning starts automatically. When

focused, scan the code automatically

without pressing

[Scan].

• If you can not scan the code with auto

focus, press

[Retry] to scan the code

again.

• When Manner mode is activated, the tone

does not sound.

Scanned data

screen (Ex.: For a

melody)

Depending on the type of scanned data,

performs the following operations

• Depending on the scanned data, the screen or operation may

diﬀer.

• Always save the scanned data if you want to use it later.

• Up to 16 split QR codes can be continuously scanned and

combined.→P237

Continued on next page

236

Camera

For phone number

Select the displayed phone number to open the Phone

number entry screen with the scanned phone number

already entered.

If "Add to phonebook", etc. appears, select it to save to

the Phonebook.

For mail address

Select the displayed mail address to create i-mode mail

with the scanned mail address already entered.

If "Compose message", etc. appears, select it to create

i-mode mail with the scanned mail address or subject

already entered .

If "Add to phonebook", etc. appears, select it to save to

the Phonebook.

For URL

Select the displayed URL to access the URL.

If "Add bookmark", etc. appears, select it to save as

Bookmark.

For text

The scanned characters are displayed.

For image

The scanned image is displayed.

For melody

Press

[Play] to play the scanned melody.

If you press

[Stop] during a playback, the melody

stops.

For i-αppli

If "Start iappli", etc. appears, select it to launch.

Note

• Bar codes other than JAN codes, QR codes, and 2 dimensional

codes cannot be scanned.

• Bar codes may not be correctly scanned because of scratch,

smudge, damage, printing quality, or reﬂection of light.

• Some codes may not be scanned depending on the type, size,

or QR code version.

• If trying to save more than 5 pieces of data, a conﬁrmation

asking whether to delete older data ﬁrst appears. To save the

new data, select "Yes" ▶ select data to delete ▶ select "Yes".

• If Bar code reader cannot scan the code within approximately

30 seconds after being activated, a message indicating that

scanning failed appears. If the Bar code reader cannot scan the

code after a certain period of time, it automatically terminates.

• If the address has invalid characters, nothing is entered in the

address.

• Valid characters are numbers and symbols [#,

, +, −, P,

(, and )]. If the phone number contains characters other than

these, the call cannot be made.

• If "Set i-αppli To" is not set, you cannot start an i-αppli from

scanned data.

237

Camera

Scanned Data Screen Sub Menu

• Displayed items vary depending on the type of scanned data.

Scanned data screen (P235) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Copy]

Copy selected URL, phone number, or address on the scanned result

screen.

[Play]

Play the scanned data.

[Save to list]

Save the scanned data in a list.

[Save to Databox]

Save the scanned image or melody to "Data box".

[Add to phonebook]

Save the scanned name, phone number, URL, or mail address to

Phonebook.

[Add bookmark]

Save the scanned URL to "Bookmark".

[Retry]

Scan the code again.

Scanning split QR codes

Perform Steps 1 and 2 in "Scanning Codes" (P235)

After the message "Scan next bar code" appears, scan the

next code

Repeat Step

• Press

to cancel scanning or

[Retry] to readjust the

Auto focus.

File name of the scanned data

The scanned data is automatically named using the year, month,

date, hour, and minute. The ﬁle cannot be renamed.

Example: If taken at 10:10 on 2009/8/1

JAN code:

"P2009_0801_1010_X.JAN" (X is a sequential number)

QR code:

"P2009_0801_1010_X.QR" (X is a sequential number)

Using/Deleting Saved Data

Scan screen (P235) ▶

[List]

To activate scan screen

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Scan".

To delete 1 item of saved scanned data

Move the cursor to data to delete ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Delete one" ▶ "Yes".

To delete all saved scanned data

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Delete all" ▶ enter the Terminal

security code ▶ "Yes".

Select the scanned data

For further operations, refer to Step 3 in "Scanning Codes"

(P235) depending on the type of data.

239

1Seg

1Seg ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 240

Before Using 1Seg ･･････････････････････････････････ 242

Setting Channels ･････････････････Channel settings 243

Watching 1Seg ･････････････････････ Activate 1Seg 245

Using i-αppli Program Guide ････････ Program guide 248

Setting Timer for Watching 1Seg Program

････････････････････････････････････････ TV timer list 248

Using Data Broadcasting ･･･････ Data broadcasting 250

Using TVlink ･････････････････････････････････ TVlink 251

Setting 1Seg ････････････････････････1Seg settings 252

240

1Seg

1Seg is a digital terrestrial broadcasting service for mobile

devices and provides data broadcasting as well as video

and sound broadcasting. Use i-mode to acquire the detail

information on TV programs, join panel shows, or enjoy TV

shopping.

• For details about "1Seg" service, visit the web site below.

The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting

PC: http://www.dpa.or.jp/english/

i-mode: http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (Japanese only)

Using 1Seg

• 1Seg is a service provided by TV broadcasters (broadcast

stations). Communication charge does not apply to receive video

and sound. For viewing fee of NHK, contact NHK.

• The information displayed on a data broadcasting domain has 2

types; "data broadcasting" and "data broadcasting site". "Data

broadcasting" is displayed on broadcast wave together with video

and sound, and "data broadcasting site" is accessed by connecting

to a site provided by TV broadcasters (broadcast stations) from

data broadcasting information. And it may be connected to "i-mode

site". Accessing to a site requires a separate i-mode subscription.

• Packet communication charges apply to view a "data broadcasting

site" or "i-mode site". Some sites (fee-based i-mode sites) require an

information fee for use.

About Signal

1Seg is one of the broadcasting services, and receives

a signal (broadcast wave) diﬀerent from FOMA service.

Therefore, regardless of whether the FOMA terminal is

in/out of service are, you cannot receive 1Seg broadcasting

in place the signal cannot reach or during the hours the

broadcasting is out of service.

Also, in the following places, the signal status may become

weak or the signal may not be received even if the FOMA

terminal is within a digital terrestrial broadcasting service

area.

• Place that is far from the tower which sends the broadcast wave

• Place where the signal is interrupted due to the landscape or

buildings such as mountain areas or behind a building

• Place where the signal is weak or does not reach such as a tunnel,

basement, or recess of a building

To improve the reception status, fully extend the 1Seg

antenna. Changing the direction of antenna, holding the

FOMA terminal apart from or close to your body or moving to

another place may also improve the reception status.

241

1Seg

Display when Using 1Seg for the First Time

When 1Seg is activated for the ﬁrst time after purchase, a

conﬁrmation of disclaimer appears.

Conﬁrm each term and press

[OK]. After this, the

conﬁrmation does not appear.

About Broadcast Storage Area

Broadcast storage area is a storage area in the terminal

speciﬁc for 1Seg. Information you entered following the data

broadcasting instruction is stored on the broadcast storage

area based on the TV broadcasters (broadcast stations)

setting. The stored information may include personal data

such as your answer results of quizzes, membership number,

gender, age, and occupation. The saved information may be

displayed on a data broadcasting site when viewing, or may

be sent to the TV broadcasters (broadcast stations) without

you re-entering it.

• To erase broadcast storage area→P252

• When you replaced or removed the UIM, a conﬁrmation asking

whether to initialize the broadcast storage area appears. Select

"Yes" to initialize the broadcast storage area. Selecting "No"

disables services using the broadcast storage area.

■ Display when reading the broadcast storage area

If you use the information saved in the broadcast storage

area while watching a program, a conﬁrmation "Use saved

information? It may include information used by the same

broadcasting group" appears. Select "Yes" to disable the

subsequent conﬁrmation on reading the saved information

performed while watching the same program. Select "Yes

(permanently)" to disable the subsequent conﬁrmation on

any program.

242

1Seg

Before Using 1Seg

Procedures for Watching 1Seg

Example: When watching 1Seg for the ﬁrst time

Step 1 : Channel settings→P243

Save channel lists corresponding to your area.

Step 2 : Activate 1Seg→P245

Save channel lists corresponding to your area.

1Seg Antenna

Fully extend the 1Seg antenna when watching 1Seg.

To extend the 1Seg antenna

Pinch the head of the 1Seg antenna

, and pull it out in the direction of the

arrow

Fully extend the 1Seg antenna

Hold the lower part of the 1Seg

antenna to change direction

• Forcibly trying to change the

direction of the 1Seg antenna could

deform or damage it.

To put the 1Seg antenna back

Hold the lower part of the 1Seg

antenna and pull it down straight

• Forcibly trying to put the 1Seg

antenna in could deform or damage

it.

Rotate the head of the 1Seg

antenna to ﬁt the depression

243

1Seg

Receiving a Call or Message while Watching 1Seg

While watching 1Seg, the FOMA terminal suspends 1Seg

program when following events occur. After the other task is

terminated, the FOMA terminal resumes the 1Seg program.

• The operations suspended with sound and video are the following:

- Receiving a voice/videophone call

- Receiving mail/SMS (when "Receiving display" is set to "Alarm

mode")

- Sounding an Alarm, or alarms set for Schedule event, To do task,

or Booked program

Note

• If 1Seg is used for a long time while charging, the battery life

may become shorter than estimated.

• Put the 1Seg antenna back in when 1Seg is not used.

Channel settings

Setting Channels

Conﬁguration of Channel settings beforehand to save a

channel list is required to watch 1Seg.

• Up to 10 channel list items can be saved. If you set a channel list

for other areas where you visit, you can watch the local TV program

there.

• Up to 62 channels can be saved in 1 channel list.

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "Channel settings"

If there is no channel list saved

The New channel creation screen appears.

If there is more than 1 channel list is saved

Move the cursor to "Not registered" ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Add new"

Perform the following operations

[Select area]

Select an area from area list registered in the FOMA terminal.

▶ Select a region to register ▶ Select a prefecture ▶

[Select]

▶ "Yes"

[Auto channel set]

Automatically set channels which can be received in your area.

▶ "Yes" ▶

[Save] ▶ "Yes"

• To cancel, press

[Cancel] ▶ "Yes".

• Press

[Retry] before saving to retry the setting.

Note

• "Select area" may not be conﬁgured properly depending on your

area. In this case, perform "Auto channel set".

• Make sure to perform the setting of "Auto channel set" within a

digital terrestrial broadcasting service area.

244

1Seg

Selecting a Channel List to Use

When multiple channel lists are saved, switch channel lists to

be used from those saved.

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "Channel settings"

The channel list in use is marked.

•

[Detail]: Display the detail screen of

the selected channel list.

Channel list

screen

Select a channel list to use

Channel List Screen Sub Menu

Channel list screen (P244) ▶ Move the cursor

to a channel list ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Add new]

Add a channel to the selected channel list.→P243

[Detail]

Display the detail screen of the selected channel list.

[Rename]

Change name of the selected channel list.

[Delete]

Delete the selected channel list.

• Currently used channel list cannot be deleted.

[Delete all]

Delete the all channel lists.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Channel List Detail Screen Sub Menu

Channel list screen (P244) ▶ Move the cursor

to a channel list ▶

[Detail] ▶

[Menu]

•

[Watch]: Display the selected channel.

Perform the following operations

[Replace remote no.]

Replace the remote controller number of the selected channel.

▶ Select a channel to change ▶ Select a new remote controller

number ▶ "Yes"

• If a destination number has a channel saved, the channel is

replaced with the target channel.

[Delete]

Delete the selected channel.

245

1Seg

Activate 1Seg

Watching 1Seg

• Perform channel settings before watching 1Seg.→P243

(for 1+ seconds)

• The conﬁrmation of disclaimer is displayed only at the ﬁrst

time. Read through the agreement and press

[OK].

• To terminate 1Seg, select

▶ "Yes".

1Seg Watch Screen Components

1Seg watch screen

(Vertical screen) Data broadcasting

(Full screen)

1Seg watch screen

(Horizontal screen (Standard))

Video

• Touch here to display Volume adjustment and Channel

selection icons.

Subtitles

Data broadcasting

Remote control no.

Strength of broadcast wave

Strong Weak

Operation mode

: TV : Data broadcasting

Channel name and program name

Volume

: Mute

In Multiple sound broadcasting

Main/Sub sound display

: Main+Sub sound : Main sound

: Sub sound

Continued on next page

246

1Seg

Key operations on the 1Seg screen

Operation Description

(Vertical) TV

(Horizontal)

Data

broadcasting

ーAdjust volume

(1+ seconds)

Mute

ーSelect a channel

Dial key,

(1+ seconds)

ーSearch receivable

channels→P246

ー

ーShow/hide program

name, etc.

[Disp] Switch vertical/

horizontal (Standard)/

horizontal (Full screen)

ー

Switch TV and data

broadcasting

ーー

▶

Select a data

broadcasting item

[Disp]

(1+ seconds)

ー

[Disp]

(1+ seconds)

Switch normal screen/

full screen of data

broadcasting

ーDisplay program guide

▶ "Yes" Terminate 1Seg

Note

• You can activate 1Seg from a link of 1Seg information

displayed in a site or mail (Media To).→P196

• Intermittent sound or image may be heard or seen due to

broadcast wave receptions. Also, a block-shaped noise may be

displayed or the image may not be displayed.

• The screen orientation automatically switches to horizontal by

tilting the FOMA terminal to the left.

• Placing the position of the FOMA terminal in horizontal direction

while data broadcasting is displayed, only video is displayed.

Searching Available Channels <Channel Search>

Search available channels in order of frequency and display

them.

1Seg watch screen (P245) ▶

(for 1+

seconds in vertical),

(for 1+ seconds in

horizontal)

Display available channels if any.

[Menu] ▶ select "Add to

channel list" to add to the channel list.

To cancel the channel search

Press

[Cancel]/

▶ "Yes".

Note

• When "Tuning..." is displayed for a long time in an area where

broadcast wave is weak, the channel search allows you to

search available channels.

• When moving to other area, the terminal may receive a channel

which is not saved in the Channel settings.

247

1Seg

1Seg Watch Screen Sub Menu

1Seg watch screen (P245) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Channel settings]

Display the Channel list screen.→ P244

[TVlink]

Display a TVlink list.

[DBC]

Make data broadcasting setting.

Image display : Set Image display ON/OFF.

Eﬀect sound : This option is not available.

Certiﬁcate info : Display certiﬁcate at SSL communication.

Reload : Reload and display image.

Back to DBC : Return to data broadcasting.

[Switch TV/DBC]

Switch TV and data broadcasting.

[Display settings]

Set the display of the screen.

TV disp. Mode : Set the display of the screen.

DBC disp. Mode : Set the display of the data broadcasting.

Subtitles : Switch subtitle ON/OFF.

• Even if set to ON, subtitle may not be displayed

depending on a program.

Backlight : Set the backlight level of the display.

[Sound settings]

Set sound.

Mute(Unmute) : Mute/unmute the sound.

Main/Sub sound : Set main/sub sound.

Switch sound : Change the sound of multi sound broadcasting

program.

[Program guide]

Display program guide.→P248

[Recom. channel mail]

You can create a mail with the channel information you are watching.

If the destination FOMA terminal supports Media To function, the

information can be selected to activate 1Seg.

[Add to channel list]

Add the currently watching channel to the channel list.→P246

[Select service]

You can switch programs if these programs are in the same channel.

[Program info.]

Display the detail information about the program you are watching.

248

1Seg

Program guide

Using i-αppli Program Guide

By using i-αppli Program guide, you can select a program

from the program guide to start 1Seg or set timer for

starting 1Seg.

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "Program guide"

Press

[TV] to watch the program which is being broadcast

on the selected channel.

For further operations, refer to "Gガイド番組表リモコン (G-GUIDE

Program List Remote Controller)" (P283).

Note

• Pressing

on the 1Seg watch screen (in vertical) also

displays program guide.

• You can set i-αppli Program guide in "Program guide key

setting" in "Software set".→P278

TV timer list

Setting Timer for Watching

1Seg Program

Setting Timer to Start a 1Seg Program

Set "Announce on" to notify you of a program start by alarm

1 minute before the program starts.

• You can set or view timer from Schedule (P352).

• Up to 20 entries can be set.

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "TV timer list"

TV timer list

screen

[New] ▶ Perform the following operations

•

[Cancel]: Cancel adding a new booking.

[ (Set date)]

Specify the booking date.

[ (Set time)]

Specify the start time of the booking program.

[ (Channel)]

Select a channel.

[ Program title]

Up to 120 full-pitch or 240 half-pitch characters can be entered.

249

1Seg

[ (Announce on/oﬀ)]

Set whether to notify by alarm 1 minute before the program start.

If set to "Announce on", perform the following steps to select the

alarm tone.

▶

[List] on the ﬁeld ▶ Select a type of the alarm tone

Music : Select a music data saved in "Music" of "Data box".

→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data box".→P307

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data box".→P314

[ (Set repeat)]

Set repeat booking of a program that is broadcasted regularly. Select

"None" for not to repeat.

If "Weekdays" is selected, perform the following steps to specify the

day of the week.

▶

[List] on the ﬁeld ▶ Mark days of the week ▶

[Done]

You can set period if other than "None" is selected.

▶

[List] on the ﬁeld ▶ "Set expiration" ▶ Use

select the date setting ﬁeld ▶ Select expiration date

[Done]

Note

• You cannot book a 1Seg program that starts now or within

1 minute.

• You can book a 1Seg program from a link of 1Seg information

displayed in a site or mail (Media To).→P196

• If "Announce on/oﬀ" is set to "Announce oﬀ", an alarm will not

sound. And 1Seg will not be activated.

When the alarm reaches the booked time

If "Announce on" is set, you will be notiﬁed by alarm 1 minute

before the starting time. The Alarm screen appears, the alarm

tone sounds, and the illumination lights up.

Press

[Watch] to start the 1Seg program. After started,

select

▶ "Yes" to terminate 1Seg.

• Press

[OFF] to stop the alarm (1Seg will not be activated at

the speciﬁed time.).

When multiple timer are set for the same time

Press

[Detail] on the Alarm screen ▶ select a program to

watch.

Checking Booking Information

TV timer list screen (P248) ▶ Select a booked

program to check

Booking program detail screen appears.

To edit the booking information

Press

[Edit].→P248

To delete the booking

Press

[Delete].

To add a new booking

Press

[New].→P248

250

1Seg

TV Timer List/Detail Screen Sub Menu

TV timer list screen (P248)/detail screen ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Add new]

Book a new 1Seg program to watch.

[Edit]

Edit the selected timer.→P248

[Delete]

Delete the selected booked program.

You can select followings on the TV timer list screen.

One : Delete the selected booked program.

Selected : Select and delete booked programs.

▶ Mark booked programs to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶

"Yes"

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all booked programs.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

Data broadcasting

Using Data Broadcasting

1Seg provides data broadcasting in addition to video and

sound. You can use various information containing images or

moving pictures such as a site connected with a program.

• You cannot watch data broadcasting in horizontal screen.

on 1Seg watch screen

appears and you can operate data broadcasting items.

• Press

to switch TV and data broadcasting.

• You can also switch TV and data broadcasting by touching

video/data broadcasting display area.

• Press

[Disp] for 1+ seconds to switch full screen and

normal screen of data broadcasting.

Select an item

• Some items connect to a data broadcasting site or an i-mode

site.

• Select "Yes" or "Yes (permanently)" if a conﬁrmation whether

to establish i-mode connection appears. Selecting "Yes

(permanently)" disables the subsequent conﬁrmations on the

same function, and the information of data broadcasting and

data broadcasting site may automatically be updated. Note

that packet communication charges may apply in such cases.

Note

• Even if you switch to data broadcasting from TV, the sound of

1Seg streams.

251

1Seg

TVlink

Using TVlink

Depending on a data broadcasting or data broadcasting site,

a URL or memo information can be saved as TVlink. If saved,

you can display the target information from a TVlink list.

Saving as a TVlink

Select an item that can be saved as a TVlink in

data broadcasting ▶ "Yes"

Displaying Saved TVlink

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "TVlink"

The TVlink list screen appears.

• You can also display a TVlink list by pressing

[Menu] ▶

"TVlink" on 1Seg watch screen.

Select a TVlink ▶ "Yes"

TVlink List Sub Menu

TVlink list screen ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[TVlink info]

Display the TVlink detail information.

[Delete]

Delete a selected TVlink.

[Delete all]

Delete all saved TVlinks.

Note

• The URL or memo information saved as a TVlink is available

only from 1Seg. Not available from i-mode or Full browser.

252

1Seg

1Seg settings

Setting 1Seg

[Menu] ▶ "1Seg" ▶ "1Seg settings" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Subtitles]

Show/hide subtitles.

[Backlight]

Set the backlight level of the Display.

[Set image display]

Set the display of the data broadcasting site.

[Set eﬀect sound]

This option is not available.

[Main/Sub sound]

Set Main/Sub sound.

[Reset permission display]

Set to display the hidden conﬁrmation.

[Reset 1Seg settings]

Restore the settings in "Subtitles", "Backlight", "Set image display",

"Set eﬀect sound" and "Main/Sub sound" to their defaults.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Erase storage area]

Delete the storage area.

▶ Move the cursor to a broadcast station to delete the storage

area ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Delete"/"Delete all"

• The Terminal security code is required to delete all.

[1Seg settings status]

You can check 1Seg settings.

253

Music

Precautions for Music Data

• In this manual, Chaku-Uta Full

songs, WMA (Windows Media Audio)

ﬁles, and SD-Audio data (music data compatible with SD-Audio

standard) are collectively referred to as "music data".

• This FOMA terminal can play WMA ﬁles, protected by copyright

protection technology, Chaku-Uta Full

songs, and SD-Audio data.

• Before downloading music data from web sites, read the license

agreement (license and prohibited activities, etc.) carefully.

• Information unique to your FOMA terminal is used to play WMA

ﬁles, protected by copyright protection technology. If the

information unique to your FOMA terminal is changed due to failure,

repair, or changing model, WMA ﬁles saved before the change was

made may not play.

• Music data saved in the FOMA terminal or on a microSD card can

be played for personal use only. When playing music, do not violate

a third party's intellectual property rights such as copyright, and

other rights. Do not copy or move music data saved in the FOMA

terminal or on a microSD card to other media, such as a PC.

• DOCOMO assumes no responsibility for handling CCCD (copy

controlled CD) materials, or cases you cannot convert music data

to SD-Audio data.

• Precautions for Using or Handling a microSD Card→P317

Music&Video Channel

Music&Video Channel ･･･････････････････････････････ 254

Setting Programs ･･･････････････････････････････････ 254

Playing Programs ･･･････････････････････････････････ 256

Operating the Music&Video Channel from Data Box

･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 259

Music Player

Playing Music ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 260

Music Player ････････････････････････････････････････ 261

Saving Music Data ･･････････････････････････････････ 261

Playing Music Data ･･････････････････ MUSIC player 263

Using Playlist ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 267

Managing Music Data ･･･････････････････････････････ 270

Using Other Functions while Listening to Music

･･････････････････････････････････Play in background 272

254

Music

Music&Video Channel

Music&Video Channel is a service that automatically

downloads set music programs of up to approximately 1 hour

at night. Also, you can enjoy high-deﬁnition moving picture

programs of up to 30 minutes. The programs are updated

regularly. You can enjoy the programs at any time, such as

while commuting.

Before Using Music&Video Channel

• Music&Video Channel is a fee-based service requiring a separate

subscription. (The i-mode and Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full, or Pake-

hodai double contracts are required for the subscription. The usage

fee may reach the upper limit if using Pake-hodai double, even if you

use the service only several times.)

• In addition to the usage fee for the Music&Video Channel, some

programs may require additional information fees.

• After subscribing to the Music&Video Channel, if you insert the

UIM into a FOMA terminal that does not support the Music&Video

Channel, the service becomes unavailable. However, service

charges still apply unless you cancel the Music&Video Channel

subscription.

• You cannot set or download programs while using the international

roaming service*. If you go overseas, deactivate the program

download before leaving Japan. When you come back to Japan,

activate the program download.

* Packet communication charges apply if setting or downloading

programs during international roaming.

• You can use mail or access an i-mode site while listening to a

Music&Video Channel program (Background playback).

Multitask Combinations→P445

• For details about Music&Video Channel, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

Setting Programs

Set programs are automatically downloaded at night.

• Up to 2 programs can be set.

• You need to register a site to My Menu that provides Music&Video

Channel programs.→P187

▶ "MUSIC" ▶ "Music&Video Ch"

Music&Video

Channel screen

"Set program"

• No programs are set by default.

After programs are set, the program titles appear.

Follow on-screen instructions to set programs

• For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA

version".

255

Music

Note

• In order to set programs with another UIM inserted, start with

conﬁrming the program setting information from Program setting. If

checking the program setting information the programs that have

not been moved from "Distributed program" folder may be deleted.

• This is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. If you

have not subscribed to the service, a message indicating that you

have not subscribed to the Music&Video Channel appears.

• Selecting "Program list" on the Music&Video Channel screen

displays the list of all programs oﬀered for the Music&Video

Channel.

Selecting "About this service" displays how to use the service and

any special cautions. Also, you can subscribe to the service from

here.

Viewing or Canceling Program Setting

Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶

"Set program"

Follow on-screen instructions

• For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA

version".

Note

• Canceling programs does not remove the My Menu registration.

After Specifying Programs

• appears on the Stand-by display 12 hours prior to the program

download.

• Programs are automatically downloaded at the designated

download time.

• Programs are downloaded automatically at night. appears on

the Stand-by display if the download has been successful, and

appears on the Stand-by display if the download has failed. Once

the Music&Video Channel screen is displayed, the icon disappears.

Note

• If the download is interrupted because the FOMA terminal is

out of service area or the communication is disconnected, the

download resumes automatically after 3 minutes. The attempts

will be made up to 5 times.

• If the programs are not downloaded at the download time

because the FOMA terminal is not turned on, the FOMA terminal

is out of service area, or the signal is weak, the programs will be

downloaded again at the same time on the following night.

• You cannot download the program except when the battery

is indicated as (When you attempt to download the

program, a message will appear to notify that you cannot start

downloading because of lower battery level).

• It may take a while to download programs. Make sure that the

battery level is suﬃcient and signal reception is strong when

downloading.

• Programs cannot be automatically downloaded in the

following cases. In each case, set the programs again on the

Music&Video Channel screen.

- If a diﬀerent UIM is inserted after programs were set

- If the UIM that programs were set with is inserted in another

Music&Video Channel compatible FOMA terminal

- If the memory in the FOMA terminal is cleared

• If the download is interrupted because the signal is weak etc.,

the programs will not be automatically downloaded again until

next time. Download programs manually.

• Downloaded programs are temporarily stored in the "Distributed

program" folder in "Music&Video Ch" of "Data box". If the channel

to which the downloaded programs belong is updated, the

programs stored in the "Distributed program" folder are deleted

and the programs can no longer be playable. The programs you

want to keep should be moved to another folder.→P259

However, some programs may not be moved.

• If you set new programs, cancel a program, or cancel the

subscription to My Menu, Music&Video Channel, or i-mode, the

programs that have not been moved from "Distributed program"

folder are deleted.

• The ring tone does not sound and the terminal does not

vibrate when the program download starts or completes. The

illumination does not light/blink either.

256

Music

Downloading Programs Manually

If the download fails, download remaining programs manually.

Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶ Select

a program ▶ "Yes"

• appears to a program that was failed in downloading.

Note

• If you operate on the Music&Video Channel program list in Data

box, move the cursor to a program that failed in downloading ▶

[Play] ▶ select "Yes".

• Even if the download was interrupted, the program can be

played up to the chapter downloaded before the interruption.

• Programs exceeding the playback count, playback period, or

playback limit cannot be resumed downloading.

• Depending on the time, manual download may not be possible.

Playing Programs

Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶ Select

a program

Music&Video

Channel player

screen

Chapter title/artist name

Equalizer setting

Not displayed for moving picture programs.

Program title

Playback progress bar/elapsed time/total time

Display the playback elapsed time using a bar.

Currently-playing chapter number/Total chapter numbers

Repeat setting

OFF

Chapter image/moving picture or program image

Volume

Control key

Display available navigation keys.

Key operations on the Music&Video Channel player screen

Operation Description

[Pause/Play] Pause/play

(1+ seconds) Go to the beginning of the current program

and pause

Adjust the volume

Play from the beginning of the current chapter

or play previous/next chapter

(Hold down) Rewind/fast forward while being held down

Switch the Repeat setting

Switch the Equalizer setting*

If multiple images are saved, display the

previous/next image*

Show/hide the chapter/program image* (If

both chapter image and program image are

saved, those images can be switched.)

[List] Display the Chapter list

[Web to] Access sites

257

Music

Operation Description

Quit the Music&Video Channel player

* Not available for moving picture programs.

Note

• Playback is paused in the following cases. The playback will

resume automatically after the operation completes.

- When a voice or videophone call arrives

- When i-mode mail or SMS is received (If "Receiving display" is

set to "Alarm mode")

- When an alarm sounds

• A program with playback restrictions cannot be played after the

playback count, playback limit, or playback period is exceeded.

You can check the playback count, playback limit, or playback

period in the Program information.

• Some programs cannot be played other than in a set period

time. Broadcasting time follows the FOMA terminal time set

with auto time adjustment.

• When you attempt to play a partially downloaded program, a

conﬁrmation asking whether to download the remaining data

appears. Select "Yes" to start downloading. Select "Play" to play

up to the downloaded chapters.

• When you play the program data overseas, the actual playback

limit expiration date may be earlier or later than the displayed

date.

Music&Video Channel Screen Sub Menu

Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶ Move

to the cursor to a program ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Move program]

Move the selected program from the "Distributed program" folder.

→P259

[Delete]

Delete the selected program.

[Program info.]

Display information about the selected program.

[Chapter list]

Display chapter list of the selected program.→P258

[Connect to URL]

Access a site if the selected program contains a URL.

Note

• Deleting programs does not cancel the program setting.

Programs are automatically updated until you access the

Music&Video Channel site and cancel the setting.

Music&Video Channel Player Screen Sub Menu

Music&Video Channel screen (P256) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[BGM]

Play in background.→P272

[Expand]

Display an enlarged moving picture.

[Chapter list]

Display a chapter list.

[Chapter info.]

Display information about the chapter in playback.

[Program info.]

Display information about the program in playback.

Continued on next page

258

Music

[Set repeat]

ON : Play program in playback repeatedly.

OFF : The program will not be repeated.

[Equalizer]

Control tones at program playback.

[Chapter Image]

Display the chapter image/program image. →P267

[Connect to URL]

Access a site if the program in playback contains a URL.

*1 Appear only for music programs.

*2 Appear only for moving picture programs.

Displaying Chapter List of Program

Select and play a chapter, or display the information.

Music&Video Channel player screen (P256) ▶

[List]

• appears for the chapter in playback.

•

[Play]: Play the selected chapter.

•

[Info.]: Display information about the selected chapter.

Program icons on the Music&Video Channel screen

The following icons which indicate a state of program download

or the category are displayed at the Music&Video Channel screen

or a Program list screen.

Icon Description

/ Downloaded program/Partially downloaded program

• "" is added for a played program.

• " " is added for a program than can be played only

at the set playback start time.

• "" is added for a program with playback

count/playback limit/playback period or operation

restriction at playback.

/ Downloaded chapter/Chapter which failed to

download

Program which failed to update

Program to be downloaded (Not downloaded)

Downloading a program

259

Music

Moving to Save Program Folder

Downloaded programs can be moved from "Distributed

program" folder to another folder so that they will not

be overwritten. Moved programs can be played from

"Music&Video Ch" of "Data box".

• To move a program, create a destination folder in the "Music&Video

Ch" folder beforehand.→P260

• Some programs cannot be moved.

Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶ Move

to the cursor to a program ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Move program"

Select a folder ▶

[Move]

• Select a folder other than the "Distributed program" folder.

Note

• Downloaded programs cannot be copied.

• Partially downloaded programs cannot be moved.

• Programs can be moved only within the FOMA terminal. They

cannot be moved to a microSD card.

Operating the Music&Video

Channel from Data Box

You can play or move the distributed programs from

"Music&Video Ch" of "Data box", or edit the program titles.

Playing a Program from Data Box

▶ "Data box" ▶ "Music&Video Ch"

•

[New]: Create a new folder.

Folder list screen

Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

Program list

screen

Move the cursor to a program ▶

[Play]

260

Music

Folder List Screen Sub Menu

Folder list screen (P259) ▶ Move the cursor to

a folder ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[New folder]

Create a new folder.

• You cannot create a sub folder in a user-deﬁned folder.

[Rename]

Change the selected folder name.

[Delete]

Delete the selected folder.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

Note

• The "Distributed program" folder cannot be renamed or deleted.

Program List Screen Sub Menu

Program list screen (P259) ▶ Move the cursor

to a program ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected program.

[Play]

Play the selected program.

[Move program]

Move the selected program from the "Distributed program" folder.

[Rename]

Change the title of the selected program.

[Delete]

This item : Delete a selected ﬁle.

Selected item : Select and delete ﬁles.

▶ Mark ﬁles to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All items : Delete all ﬁles in a folder.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

[Program info.]

Display information about the selected program.

[Chapter list]

Open the chapter list.→P258

[New folder]

This option is not available.

Playing Music

You can play music with the FOMA terminal in one of the

following 2 ways:

• Playing music with MUSIC player

Play Chaku-Uta Full

songs downloaded from a site, WMA ﬁles or

SD-Audio data saved to a microSD card using a PC.

• Playing as i-motion

Play audio-only i-motion downloaded using i-mode and saved in Data

box.→P307

You can use mail or access an i-mode site while listening to

music (Play in background).→P272

261

Music

Music Player

Available Chaku-Uta Full

ﬁle format

File Format MP4

Bit rate 8 to 128kbps

Savable capacity (FOMA

terminal) Up to approx. 150MB

The number of playlists that

can be created Up to 10 songs

Available SD-Audio ﬁle format

File Format MPEG-2 AAC

Bit rate (stereo) 16 to 72kbps

The number of savable songs Up to 999 songs

The number of playlists that

can be created Up to 99 songs

Available WMA ﬁle format

File format WMA (Windows Media Audio 9

Standard, Windows Media Audio 10

Professional)

Bit rate 8 to 192kbps

The number of savable songs Up to 1,000 songs

Saving Music Data

Downloading a Chaku-Uta Full

Song

• Up to approximately 150MB of Chaku-Uta Full

songs of up to 5MB

each can be saved.

• Downloaded Chaku-Uta Full

song is saved in the "i-mode" folder in

"Music" of "Data box" or a microSD card.

Access a site that provides Chaku-Uta Full

songs ▶ Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song to

download

After the download completes, a conﬁrmation appears.

"Save" ▶ Select save location

Play : Play the downloaded Chaku-Uta Full

song.

File property : Display information about the downloaded

Chaku-Uta Full

song.

Back : Return to the web site without saving the

Chaku-Uta Full

song.

• In addition, select the destination when a microSD card is

inserted on the terminal.

262

Music

Saving WMA Files in microSD Card

The following items are required to play WMA ﬁles with the

FOMA terminal:

• L-01B terminal

• FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional)

• PC (Windows Vista, Windows XP Service Pack 2 and later

(Japanese versions))

• Windows Media Player 10/11

• microSD card

* For Windows Vista, use Windows Media Player 11.

Insert microSD card into the FOMA terminal

• How to insert a microSD card→P318

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "USB mode

setting" ▶ "MTP mode"

Connect to a PC

• For details, refer to Step 2 and 3 in "Using the FOMA Terminal

as a microSD Card Reader/Writer" (P326).

Start Windows Media Player 10/11 and save

music data into a microSD card

• For operations of Windows Media Player 10/11, see Help for

Windows Media Player 10/11.

• After music data is saved, remove FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA terminal and PC.

Napster󰙽application

You can use Napster

application to save music data.

• Napster

application is available for download from the following

web site (in Japanese only).

http://www.napster.jp/

• If you have any question on Napster

application, visit the

following web site (in Japanese only).

http://www.napster.jp/support/

Note

• L-01B may not display or play some WMA ﬁles saved by

another FOMA terminal into a microSD card.

• If a microSD card that WMA ﬁles are transferred to using

another FOMA terminal, a PC may not recognize it even in MTP

mode. In that case, it is recommended to delete "WM" folder

and "WM_SYSTEM" folder on a microSD card using PC, etc., or

format the microSD card with L-01B. Note that if you format

microSD card, all data including music data is deleted.

Saving SD-Audio Data in microSD Card

The following items are required to play SD-Audio data with

the FOMA terminal:

• L-01B terminal

• FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional)

• PC (Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 2000 (Japanese

versions))

• SD-Jukebox

• An audio CD that contains music you want to save

• microSD card

263

Music

SD-Jukebox

SD-Jukebox can be purchased from the following URL:

http://club.panasonic.co.jp/mall/sense/open/

(Japanese only)

SD-Jukebox works under Windows Vista, Windows XP, and

Windows 2000 (Japanese versions).

For details about the operating environment, visit the

following URL:

http://panasonic.jp/support/software/sdjb/

(Japanese only)

Insert L-01B CD-ROM (bundled with your FOMA

terminal) to a PC

Click "エンターテイメントツール (Entertainment

tools)"

Follow on-screen instructions to purchase "SD-Jukebox".

Install SD-Jukebox to a PC

For installing SD-Jukebox, see the instruction manual for

SD-Jukebox.

Insert microSD card into your FOMA terminal,

then connect to the PC

• How to insert a microSD card→P318

• Connecting to your PC→P326

Start SD-Jukebox to save music data to

microSD card

• On how to operate SD-Jukebox, see Help for SD-Jukebox.

• After music data is saved, remove the FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA terminal and PC.

MUSIC player

Playing Music Data

You can continuously play all songs saved in the FOMA

terminal and the microSD card, or only play songs speciﬁed

by artist name, genre, or album title.

Example: To play music in "All songs"

▶ "MUSIC" ▶ "MUSIC player"

Music screen

"All songs"

Playlists : Display, create, or play a

playlist.→P267

Artist : Sort and display music data

by artist.

Genre : Sort and display music data

by genre.

Album : Sort and display music data

by album.

Resume play : Play last played song/

playlist. (if a song is currently

played, "Now playing" is

displayed and select to

display the play screen.)

• : Music data saved in the FOMA terminal

Music data list

screen (song list)

Continued on next page

264

Music

• : Music data saved in a microSD card

Move the cursor to a music data ▶

[Play]

Play the selected music data in the displayed order in the music

data list.

MUSIC player

screen

Song title, artist name

Equalizer setting

Album name

Elapsed time/playback progress bar/total time

Display the playback elapsed time using a bar.

Repeat setting

None

Current song

Play all

Jacket image/lyrics

Volume

Control key

Display available navigation keys.

Shuﬄe

Shuﬄe Oﬀ

Shuﬄe On

Key operations on the MUSIC player screen

Operation Description

[Pause/Play] Pause/play

(1+ seconds) Go to the beginning of the current song and

pause

Adjust the volume

Play from the beginning of the current song or

play the previous/next song

(Hold down) Rewind/fast forward while being held down

Switch the Shuﬄe setting

Switch the Repeat setting

Switch the Equalizer setting

Display the previous/next image

Show/hide jacket image/lyrics

[List] Display the Music data list screen

While the list screen is displayed, appears to

the right of the song title in playback.

Quit MUSIC player

Note

• Playback is paused in the following cases. The playback will

resume automatically after the operation completes.

- When a voice or videophone call arrives

- When i-mode mail or SMS is received (If "Receiving display" is

set to "Alarm mode")

- When an alarm sounds

• Sound eﬀects such as the key tone do not sound during music

data playback.

• Sorting conditions for artists, genre, and album is in accordance

with the detailed information about the music data. "Unknown" is

displayed, however, in the "Genre" ﬁeld because SD-Audio does

not support "Genre" information.

• When you play the music data overseas, the actual playback limit

expiration date may be earlier or later than the displayed date.

265

Music

Music Data List Screen Sub Menu

Music data list screen (P263) ▶ Move the

cursor to a music data ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

•

[Play]: Play the selected music data.

•

[Playlist]: Add the selected music data to a playlist.→P270

[Play]

Play the selected music data.

[Add to playlist]

Add the selected music data to a playlist.→P270

[Multiple choice]

Select and play multiple music data. Operations during playback are

the same with for a playlist.→P268

▶ Mark music data to play ▶

[Play]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Play", "Add to playlist", "Sort", "Select all"

or "Clear all".

You can add marked music data to a playlist by selecting "Add to

playlist".

[Search]

Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year"

to search music

data.

▶ Select an item ▶ Enter the item ▶

[Search]

• All music data that match all speciﬁed conditions are displayed.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort music data.

[File property]

View or edit information about the selected music data.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit the item

• Some items are not editable.

• WMA ﬁle/SD-Audio data information is not editable.

*1 Music data in Artist/Genre/Album will not be displayed in the

Music data list screen.

*2 Cannot search in SD-Audio data by "Year".

MUSIC Player Screen Sub Menu

Music/SD-Audio player screen ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Go to MUSIC]

Display the Music screen while playing music data.→P263

[BGM]

Play music data in background.→P270

[List]

Display the Music data list screen.→P263

[File property]

View or edit information about the music data in playback.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit the item

• Some items are not editable.

• The properties of WMA ﬁles/SD-Audio data are not editable.

[Shuﬄe On/Shuﬄe Oﬀ]

Enable or disable shuﬄe play.

Continued on next page

266

Music

[Set repeat]

None : The program will not be repeated.

Current song : Play music data in playback repeatedly.

Play all : Play all music data on the Music data list screen

repeatedly.

[Equalizer]

Control tones at the music playback.

[Jacket image]*

Display the jacket image or save it to Data box.→P267

[Lyric]*

Display the lyrics or save it to Data box.→P267

[Set as tone]*

Set the music data in playback as a ring tone.→P266

[Connect to URL]*

Access a site if the music data in playback contains a URL.

* Not available for WMA ﬁles/SD-Audio data.

Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone

MUSIC player screen (P264) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Set as tone"

Select a ring tone type

Select a range to set as the ring tone

• Depending on a Chaku-Uta Full

song, some items cannot be

selected.

[Full song ring tone]

Set the entire Chaku-Uta Full

song in playback as a ring tone.

[Point ring tone]

If the Chaku-Uta Full

song in playback has already a range speciﬁed,

this option is available.

[Free point ring tone]

Specify and set start and end points as a range for the ring tone.

▶ Use

to ﬁnd a starting point ▶

[Start] ▶ Use

to ﬁnd an

ending point ▶

[End]

Note

• If selecting "Alarm tone", further select an alarm to set. (Only

alarms set to "ON" in advance can be selected.)

• Some Chaku-Uta Full

songs cannot be set as a ring tone.

• Music data on a microSD card cannot be set as a ring tone.

267

Music

Viewing Images or Lyrics Contained in a

Music Data

You can view and save jacket images, lyrics, chapter image

etc. contained in music data.

MUSIC player screen (P264) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "Jacket image"/"Lyric"/"Chapter image" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Next image]

View the next image/lyrics.

[Prev. image]

View the previous image/lyrics.

[Full view]

View an image/lyrics in full screen.

[Display On/Oﬀ]

Show/hide jacket image/chapter image or lyrics.

[Save in Databox]*

Save the displayed image/lyrics to "i-mode" folder in "My picture" of

"Data box".

• Not available for WMA ﬁles/SD-Audio data.

* Do not appear for "Chapter image".

Using Playlist

You can specify the order of music data to play in a playlist.

You can play any songs in the order of your choice from all

songs saved in the FOMA terminal and on the microSD card.

Creating a Playlist

Up to 10 of All songs playlist and up to 99 of SD-Audio

playlist can be saved. Up to 99 music data for each playlist

can be saved.

▶ "MUSIC" ▶ "MUSIC player" ▶ "Playlists"

▶ Select an item

All songs playlist : Display playlists created

on the FOMA terminal.

WMA playlist : Display WMA ﬁles

playlists.

• Playlist transferred from

PC. This playlist cannot

be created or edited on

the FOMA terminal.

SD-Audio playlist : Display SD-Audio data

playlists. Playlist list

screen

[New] ▶ Enter a playlist name

• Up to 30 full-pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.

Select a playlist ▶

[Add] ▶ Select a folder

Continued on next page

268

Music

Mark music data to save to the playlist ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Sort", "File property", "Select all", or

"Clear all".

Playing a Playlist

Playlist list screen (P267) ▶ Select a playlist

Playlist music

data list screen

Move the cursor to a music data ▶

[Play]

Play the selected music data in the order of displayed in the

music data list.

Playlist List Screen Sub Menu

Playlist list screen (P267) ▶ Move the cursor

to a playlist ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Play]

Play the selected playlist.

[New playlist]

Create a playlist.→P267

[Rename]

Change the playlist name.

[Copy playlist]*

Copy the selected playlist and create a new playlist.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the name of a new playlist

[Delete playlist]

Delete the selected playlist.

[Multiple choice]

Select and delete playlists.

▶ Mark a playlist to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Delete", "Select all", or "Clear all".

* Not available for SD-Audio playlist.

Note

• WMA playlist list screen contains no sub menu items.

• These options are unavailable for "Quick playlist".

269

Music

Playlist Music Data List Screen Sub Menu

Playlist music data list screen (P268) ▶ Move

the cursor to a music data ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

•

[Add]: Add the music data to the displayed playlist.

[Play]

Play the selected music data.

[Add songs]

Add music data to the displayed playlist.

Select a folder ▶ Mark music data to add ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Sort", "File property", "Select all", or

"Clear all".

[Multiple choice]

Select and play multiple music data. Operations during playback are

the same with for a playlist.

▶ Mark music data to play ▶

[Play]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Play", "Delete from list"

, "Sort", "Select

all" or "Clear all".

[Move]

Change the order of the selected music data.

[Delete from list]

Delete the selected music data from the playlist.

[Search]

Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year"

to search music

data.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶ Enter the item ▶

[Search]

• Music data that match all speciﬁed conditions are displayed.

• On Search result screen, press

[Menu] to select "Play", "Add

to playlist"

, "Multiple choice", "Save"

, "Sort" or "File property".

Selecting "Save" deletes music data that were not found from the

playlist.

[Sort]

Sort music data by the saved information.

[File property]

View or edit information about the selected music data.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit the item

• Some items are not editable.

• The properties of WMA ﬁles/SD-Audio data are not editable.

*1 Not available for WMA playlist.

*2 Cannot search in SD-Audio data by "Year".

*3 Do not appear for WMA playlist/SD-Audio playlist.

270

Music

Adding Music Data to a Playlist

▶ "MUSIC" ▶ "MUSIC player" ▶ "All songs"

Move the cursor to a music data to save ▶

[Playlist] ▶ Select a playlist

The music data is added to the selected playlist.

•

[New]: Create a new playlist with the selected music data.

To save multiple music data

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Multiple choice" ▶ mark music

data to save ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Add to playlist" ▶ select

a playlist.

Saving Music Data to Quick Playlist

For the music data you often listen to, you can save them to

"Quick playlist" by easy steps.

• To play the saved music data, select "Quick playlist" on the Playlist

list screen.

Music data list screen (P263) ▶ Move the

cursor to a music data to save ▶

(for 1+

seconds)

• With the FOMA terminal closed, touch a music data to save for

1+ seconds.

Managing Music Data

Music data are saved in the "Music" of "Data box".

Delete or move a Chaku-Uta Full

songs from Data box.

• WMA ﬁles cannot be deleted or edited on the FOMA terminal. Use

PC for the operations.

• SD-Audio data cannot be deleted using the FOMA terminal. Use

SD-Jukebox to delete it.

▶ "Data box" ▶ "Music"

Move the cursor to "i-mode"/"Movablecontents"/a

user-deﬁned folder

▶

[Open] ▶ Move the

cursor to a Chaku-Uta Full

song ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

•

[Switch]: Switch between List view and Grid view.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected music data.

• If "WMA" or "SD-Audio" folder is selected, the operation is the

same as for music data playback.→P263

[Files]

Play : Play the selected Chaku-Uta Full

song.

Rename : Change the selected Chaku-Uta Full

song name.

Reset name : Reset the display name of the selected ﬁle to "Title"

- "Artist'.

File property : View or edit information about the selected Chaku-

Uta Full

song.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit

the item

• Some items are not editable.

• Move the cursor to the edited item and press

[Init.] ▶ "Yes" to undo the edit.

Jacket image : Save images contained in a Chaku-Uta Full

song.

→P267

Lyric : Save lyrics contained in a Chaku-Uta Full

song.

→P267

271

Music

[Delete]

One : Delete a selected Chaku-Uta Full

song.

Selected : Select and delete Chaku-Uta Full

songs.

▶ Mark Chaku-Uta Full

songs to delete ▶

[Done]

▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all Chaku-Uta Full

songs in a folder.

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Move]

One : Move a selected Chaku-Uta Full

song.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and move Chaku-Uta Full

songs.

Select a destination folder ▶ Mark Chaku-Uta Full

songs to move ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Move all Chaku-Uta Full

songs in a folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Copy]

This option is not available.

[Set as tone]

Set the selected Chaku-Uta Full

song as a ring tone.→P266

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort Chaku-Uta Full

songs.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

Create a new folder.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch between List view and Grid view.

Note

• If the music data saved in a playlist is deleted or moved

between the FOMA terminal and a microSD card, the music

data is deleted from the playlist.

• Sub menu available when a folder is selected is the same as

"My Picture Screen Sub Menu" (P297).

• You cannot create a sub folder in a user-deﬁned folder. (Up

to 2 levels of folder hierarchy can be created only in "Movable

contents" folder.)

Icons for Chaku-Uta Full

songs in "Data box"

Icon Description

/ Playback count is limited (Playable)/reached

the playback count limit (Not playable)

/ Not expired (Playable)/expired (Not playable)

Files on the microSD card

272

Music

Play in background

Using Other Functions while

Listening to Music

During a music playback,

[Menu] ▶ "BGM"

Display the Stand-by

display during music

playback.

or appears at the

top of the screen and

music information such as

song/artist names appears

on the Stand-by display.

Icon indicating

BGM playback

Information such

as song title,

artist name

Note

• During the background playback, press

to adjust the

volume.

• To return to the MUSIC player screen during background

playback, press

▶ (MUSIC player).

• To stop the background playback, press

▶ "Yes".

• During background playback, i-motion set for the Stand-by

display will not be played. The default Stand-by display is

displayed instead.

• While music data on the microSD card is played in background,

the other functions may not be able to access the microSD

card. In this case, stop the background playback.

273

i-αppli

i-αppli ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 274

Downloading i-αppli from Sites ･････････････････････ 274

Starting i-αppli ･･････････････････････････････････････ 275

Starting i-αppli Automatically ･･････････････････････ 284

Starting i-αppli from a Site or Mail ･･･ Set i-αppli To 285

Setting i-αppli Stand-by Display

･････････････････････････････ i-αppli Stand-by display 285

Viewing Various Information ･････････････i-αppli info 286

Deleting i-αppli ･････････････････････････････････････ 287

Using Various i-αppli Functions ･････････････････････ 287

274

i-αppli

"i-αppli" is software for i-mode compatible mobile phones.

Downloading various software from i-mode sites allows

updating stock price or weather information automatically,

playing games without connecting to a network, or using the

FOMA terminal more conveniently.

• Packet communication charges apply.

• When using overseas, packet communication charges diﬀer from

domestic charges.→P408

• For details about i-αppli, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

Downloading i-αppli from Sites

You can download software from a site and save it to the

FOMA terminal.

• Up to 1MB of software can be downloaded.

• Up to100 downloaded software can be saved. However, the savable

number may be reduced by the software data size.

• i-αppli does not support touch operation.

While viewing a site ▶ Select a software ▶

"Yes"

•

[Cancel]: Cancel downloading.

When "Display SW info" is set to "Display"

Software information is displayed. Press

[OK] ▶

"Yes" to download the software.

Download complete ▶ "Yes"

The downloaded software starts.

• Depending on the software, after the software is downloaded,

a screen to set operating condition may be displayed. The

settings can be changed later from "Software set".→P277

Note

• During download, a conﬁrmation may appear notifying you

that the software will use the terminal data (stored data

and serial number of the terminal/UIM). Select "Yes" to start

downloading. Press

[Detail] to check the details of the

terminal data to be used. In this case, the terminal data is sent

to the IP (Information provider) via the Internet, and it could

be intercepted by a third party. However, this action does not

reveal your phone number, postal address, age, or gender to the

IP or others.

• If you attempt to re-download software that has already been

downloaded with a diﬀerent UIM, a conﬁrmation asking whether

to overwrite the downloaded software appears. Select "Yes" to

overwrite.

• If the maximum number of software which can be saved is

reached or if there is not enough memory space, a conﬁrmation

for deletion of other i-αppli appears.

If there is not enough memory space, you can select i-αppli

to delete, checking the required memory space to store a new

application.

To delete i-αppli, select "Yes" ▶ mark software to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes" to delete the marked software and to start

downloading.

• For Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli, some i-αppli may not be

downloaded depending on the IC card data capacity even if

software storage space is available. Follow the conﬁrmation

screen and delete the software displayed on the screen to start

download again. (Some software may not be the deletion target

depending on the type of software to download.) Some software

deletes the software itself after you start the software and

delete data in the IC card.

275

i-αppli

• If the software download fails due to weak signal reception, the

software may be saved partly. If you download again or select

the partly saved i-αppli on the Software list, the rest of the ﬁle

will be downloaded together.

• Even if the software download fails due to weak signal reception

after old software was deleted to increase the available space

on the FOMA terminal, the old software cannot be restored.

• Some software that starts immediately after being downloaded

cannot be saved.

Downloading a Mail-Connected i-αppli

Note the followings if you download a mail-connected i-αppli.

• If you download a mail-connected i-αppli, a folder for the mail-

connected i-αppli is automatically created in Inbox and Outbox.

A 0created folder takes the downloaded mail-connected i-αppli

name and it cannot be changed.

• Up to 17 (100 including all other i-αppli) mail-connected i-αppli

can be saved.

• If you attempt to download a mail-connected i-αppli, which will use

an existing folder for a mail-connected i-αppli saved in the FOMA

terminal, the attempt will be denied.

• If only a folder for a mail-connected i-αppli is left in the FOMA

terminal, and you attempt to download a mail-connected i-αppli

again which uses the same folder, the folder can be used. If the

folder is not used, you can delete it and create a new folder. A

mail-connected i-αppli cannot be downloaded if you do not create

a folder for it.

• The folder for the compatible mail-connected i-αppli cannot be

deleted with the mail-connected i-αppli left in the FOMA terminal.

The folder can be deleted when a mail-connected i-αppli is not in

the folder. In this case, folders created in both Inbox and Outbox are

deleted at a time.

• When you delete an mail-connected i-αppli, you can select whether

to delete the automatically created folder at once. However, if

protected mails are in the folder, the folder cannot be deleted.

Display SW info

Viewing i-αppli Information at Download Time

Set whether to display software information when

downloading the software.

▶ "i-αppli" ▶ "i-αppli settings" ▶ "Display

SW info" ▶ "Display"/"Not display"

Starting i-αppli

Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

•

[Switch]: Switch the view of the

Software list screen.

•

[

▲

[

▼

]: Scroll to the screen to

previous/next page.

Software list

screen

Icons on the Software list screen

Icon Description

Standard i-αppli

i-α ppliDX

Auto start set i-αppli

i-αppli downloaded via SSL communication

i-αppli set to Stand-by display

Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli

Continued on next page

276

i-αppli

Icon Description

The iC transfer service is used yet i-αppli is

not downloaded→P290

Partly saved i-αppli

Select a software

• If "Network set" of "Software set" is set to "Conﬁrm every

session", a conﬁrmation whether to allow the communication

appears. Select "Yes"/"No".

To exit an i-αppli

Press

▶ "Yes".

Starting software from other software

Some software can start a speciﬁed i-αppli without returning to

the Software list screen.

• If the software to be started is not saved in the FOMA terminal,

you need to download it.

• If the software to be started is not speciﬁed, follow on-screen

instructions to select a software.

If a security error occurs

If you attempt to perform operations that are not permitted for

the software, a security error is indicated and the error content is

logged in "Security error history".→P286

If a problem occurs with software

If a problem occurs with the software, you can check the

contents using the Trace info.→P286

To i-αppli creators

If software does not work as expected at creation process, you

may use the Trace info for your reference.

Note

• Some software performs communication while running. You can

change the settings in "Network set" of "Software set" not to

automatically perform communication.→P277

• If an incoming voice or videophone call arrives when the

software is running, you can answer the call pausing the

software. After the call is terminated, the previous screen

returns.

• Even when the software is running, you can receive mail or

MessageR/F. The software keeps running, and , , or ,

etc. appears at the top of the screen. To view the received mail

or MessageR/F, terminate the software.

• Images used by an i-αppli* or data you entered may be

automatically sent to the server via the Internet.

* Images used by the i-αppli include: images captured with

Camera that is started from a Camera-linked (connected)

application, images obtained using infrared communication

function of the i-αppli, images downloaded from a site or web

site, and images the i-αppli obtained from Data box.

• You cannot start software downloaded using a diﬀerent UIM.

• Depending on i-αppli, the tone may not sound.

• Depending on the software, the IP (Information provider) can

access programs saved on your FOMA terminal and directly

disable their use. In this case, the software cannot be run or

updated, however, it can still be deleted, and the software

information can still be viewed. To use the software again, the

software needs to perform communication for the software

suspend cancelation. Contact your IP.

• Depending on the software, the IP may send data to a software

saved on your FOMA terminal.

• In the event that the IP disables/re-enables the software or

sends data, your terminal performs communication and blinks.

No packet communication charges apply in this case.

277

i-αppli

Software List Screen Sub Menu

Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Set i-αppli To]

Set conditions to start the selected software.→P285

[Auto start time]

Set whether to start the selected software automatically, and set

the date and time to start if the auto start is speciﬁed.→P284

[Software set]

Set the selected software settings.→P277

[Software info]

Display the selected software information such as a name and

version of the i-αppli. The displayed items diﬀer depending on the

software.

[Upgrade]

Upgrade the selected software.

[Delete]

Delete a software.→P287

Note

• During an update, a conﬁrmation may appear notifying you

that the upgrading will use terminal data (stored data or

serial number of the terminal/UIM). Select "Yes" to start

downloading. Press

[Detail] to check the details of the

terminal data to be used. In this case, the terminal data is sent

to the IP (Information provider) via the Internet, and it could

be intercepted by a third party. However, this action does not

reveal your phone number, postal address, age, or gender to the

IP or others.

Setting i-αppli Operating Conditions

Set operating conditions for each software program. You can

set a software to automatically perform communication while

it is running or set separately whether to allow to browse

icon information, Phonebook, etc.

• Some items may not be changed depending on the software.

aSoftware list screen (P275) ▶ Move cursor

to the software ▶ M[Menu] ▶ "Software

set" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Stand-by display]

Set the selected software as the Stand-by display.→P285

[Network set]

Set whether to allow communications while software is running.

[Stand-by network set]

Set whether to allow communications while i-αppli is set as the

Stand-by display.

Continued on next page

278

i-αppli

[Icon info]

Set whether to allow software to use the icons of mail, MessageR/F,

in/out of service area, battery level, or Manner mode.

[View P. book/call records]

Set whether to allow software to browse the Phonebook, redial, and

call history when the software is started.

[Change ring tone/image]

Set whether to allow software to automatically change an image or

melody set for a ring tone or the Stand-by display when the software

is started.

[Program guide key setting]

Set whether to set as i-αppli Program guide that activates from

1Seg.

• Only 1 i-αppli can be set.

Note

• Depending on the settings, the software may not connect

to the network, or Icon info (unread mail or battery level, etc.)

becomes unavailable.

• When set to "No", the software may not start, or real-time

information may not be provided.

• When set to "Yes", the software automatically connects to

the network. While connected, packet communication charges

apply.

• When set to "Yes", information about the status of the

terminal as indicated by the presence of icons for unread mail,

messages, battery level, Manner mode, within the service area,

and out of service area may be sent to IP (Information provider)

via the Internet in the same manner as the "Phone/Terminal and

UIM ID" is sent. The icon information could be intercepted by a

third party. Software that needs icon data may not function if

set to "No".

Pre-installed i-αppli

To use the deleted pre-installed i-αppli, visit site, "WOW LG"

in iMenu for download.→P133

• i-αppli does not support touch operation.

Mingle Mangle

This is a game you set out 3 mingles (characters) of the

same type in crosswise or lengthwise direction swapping

adjacent mingles.

Software list screen (P275) ▶ "Mingle Mangle"

Press any key (Dial keys,

, or

)

▶ Perform the following

operations

[オリジナル (Original)]

Play game by selecting a square of "7×7" or "8×8".

[探検 (Exploration)]

Save out mingles by clearing instructions set to each exploration

course. If you clear, the information is automatically saved.

[ランキング (Ranking)]

Display the ranking.

[セットアップ (Setup)]

Set sound on/oﬀ or vibrator on/oﬀ.

[ヘルプ (Help)]

Display the description of the game and how to play.

[終了 (Exit)]

Terminate the i-αppli.

279

i-αppli

Sudoku Cafe

Enter a number from 1 to 9 in an empty cell. However, the

same number cannot be entered more than once for each

vertical or horizontal row, or for a block of 3×3 cells framed

with a thick line.

Software list screen (P275) ▶ "Sudoku Cafe"

The title screen of the game appears.

Press any key (Dial keys,

)

The menu screen appears.

Perform the following operations

[チュートリアル (Tutorial)]

Learn how to play the game through practice.

[レコードモード (Record mode)]

Compete how fast you can solve a puzzle.

[カスタムモード (Custom mode)]

Create a new puzzle and play it.

[環境設定 (Environment settings)]

Choose which function to use, スキャン機能 (Scanning function) or ラ

イン機能 (Line function), サウンド (Sound) オン (ON)/ オフ (OFF), 振動

(Vibration) オン (ON)/ オフ (OFF), or set 背景設定 (Background).

[ランキング確認 (Ranking)]

Display the ranking.

[ヘルプ (Help)]

Display the description of the game and how to play.

[ゲーム終了 (Exit)]

Terminate the i-αppli.

マクドナルドトクするアプリ (McDonald's TOKUSURU

KEITAI Application)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

You can download the discount coupon "かざすクーポン" to be

used at McDonald's.

To use "かざすクーポン", subscribe to "トクするケータイサイ

ト", then select and set a coupon of your choice from the

application and hold the terminal up to a scanning device

placed at McDonald's.

•

For information about "McDonald's TOKUSURU KEITAI application",

visit the McDonald's oﬃcial site, "マクドナルドトクするケータイサイト".

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト" ▶ "グルメ/レシピ" ▶ "マクドナ

ルドトクする"

• "かざすクーポン" may not be used at some McDonald's restaurants.

Use "見せるクーポン" in an area where " かざすクーポン" cannot be

used.

• Functions or service contents for "McDonald's TOKUSURU KEITAI

application" may be changed.

• Packet communication charges apply.

Continued on next page

280

i-αppli

To use "かざすクーポン"

Activate this application

▼

Select a coupon and number to use

▼

Press "決定" to complete setting for the coupon information

▼

Order by holding the terminal on a scanning

function in a restaurants.

楽オク出品アプリ2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

"楽オク出品アプリ2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)" is a

convenient application to enable you to easily exhibit your

goods on Rakuoku at anytime and from anywhere.

With the instruction guide, even a ﬁrst-time exhibitor can

use it easily. Using convenient functions such as capturing/

editing pictures, saving records, you can exhibit your goods

in shorter time than you do on a site.

• When using for the ﬁrst time, you need to agree to "利用規約 (terms

of service)".

• Packet communication charges apply to use this service.

• For details about Rakuoku, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

• To exhibit your goods on Rakuoku, you need to subscribe to

Rakuten membership and exhibitor membership.

• For information about Rakuoku, visit the i-mode site.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "オークション"

QR code to access the site

ｉアプリバンキング (i-αppli Banking)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

ｉアプリバンキング (i-αppli banking) is an i-αppli for

conveniently using mobile banking (check the balance or

activity statement of your account, deposit or transfer

money, etc.) on the FOMA terminal. By entering password

you set when activating the i-αppli, mobile banking of up to

2 ﬁnancial institutions can be used. Making a payment for

invoice or payment notice by the Pay-easy service is also

possible.

• To use mobile banking by i-αppli banking, you need to have an

account of the ﬁnancial institution and subscribe to the Internet

banking service of the ﬁnancial institution.

• Packet communication charges apply to use this service.

• For details about i-αppli banking, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

• For information about i-αppli banking, visit the i-mode site.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト" ▶ "モバイルバンキング" ▶

"ｉアプリバンキング"

281

i-αppli

QR code to access the site

モバイルSuica登録用ｉアプリ (Mobile Suica Setup

i-αppli)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

"モバイルSuica登録用ｉアプリ (Mobile Suica Setup i-αppli)"

is an i-αppli provided by NTT DOCOMO. This application

enables you to make necessary initial settings before using

Osaifu-Keitai compatible service "Mobile Suica" provided by

East Japan Railway Company. After making initial settings

by this application, follow on-screen instructions to download

the Mobile Suica application from the East Japan Railway

Company site and sign up as a member.

• When using for the ﬁrst time, you need to agree to "ご注意事項(必読)".

• Packet communication charges apply to use this service.

• This application can be deleted after initial settings are complete,

but the set area in the IC card remains occupied. Reset all data in

the IC card (hereafter referred to as the full format) to use the area.

• To perform the full format, visit the docomo Shop.

• If the full format is performed, all data in the IC card are deleted.

• To use the Mobile Suica service after performing the full format,

make initial settings again by this application.

• For information about Mobile Suica, visit the i-mode site.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト" ▶ "おサイフケータイ" ▶ "モバイ

ルSuica"

• "Mobile Suica" is a registered trademark of East Japan Railway

Company.

モバイルGoogleマップ (Mobile Google Map)

Display a map and easily search area information, shop

information, or user-created contents. In addition, switch

to the aerial photo mode or see Street View images. Also,

search transportations to the destination by searching the

route and navigate to the destination.

Map screen

Key operations on the Map screen

Operation Description

Display the menu

Search (shop or service information in the area,

search location and display on the map)

Continued on next page

282

i-αppli

Operation Description

Move a cursor

Context menu (address of the present location,

route to/from the location, Street View, save to

favorites, search surrounding area)

Zoom out

Switch to map/aerial photo mode

Zoom in

Display the present location

Save to favorites/display favorites

• When using for the ﬁrst time, agree to the terms of service.

• Packet communication charges apply to use this service.

Subscription to Pake-hodai/Pake-hodai full/Pake-hodai double is

recommended.

• For details, refer to "ヘルプ (Help)" of the menu.

DCMXクレジットアプリ (DCMX Credit Appli)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

"DCMX" is a credit service supporting "iD", provided by NTT

DOCOMO. DCMX includes DCMX mini that provides up to

10,000 yen/month credit and DCMX/DCMX GOLD services

that provide more credit and DOCOMO points than DCMX

mini.

You can use mobile phone credit of DCMX mini right now by

simply sign-up from this application.

Application functions

Membership registration/Screening

▼

Card information settings

▼

Use

No need to charge.

Enjoy shopping

without signature

only by holding the

terminal with card

information settings

on the scanning

device at stores with

the following iD mark.

Check

Check DCMX service

contents, available

balance

, and usage

from application.

Change

Make the model

change setting or

update the valid period

from application.

*1 The online screening is conducted at the time of subscription

for DCMX mini. For subscriptions other than DCMX mini, the

terminal is connected to the i-mode subscription page.

*2 Under certain conditions, a security code may be required.

*3 Available only for DCMX mini.

• For details on service contents or subscription procedures, visit the

i-mode site for DCMX.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "DCMX iD"

QR code to access the site

283

i-αppli

Note

• When activating this application for the ﬁrst time, agree to "ご利

用上の注意 (precautions for use)" before use.

• Packet communication charges apply for settings/operations.

iD 設定アプリ (iD Appli)

iD appli

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

"iD" is convenient electronic money using credit settlement

system. Simply by holding Osaifu-Keitai with the credit card

information set or iD compatible card on the scanning device

at stores, you can easily and conveniently do shopping.

You can register up to 2 types of credit card information on

Osaifu-Keitai, so use them according to privileges or stores.

Depending on the card issuer, cashing is also supported.

• To use iD on Osaifu-Keitai, besides subscribing to the iD compatible

card issuer, it is necessary to make the settings on iD appli or Card

application provided by a card issuer. Depending on the card, it

is necessary to ﬁnish the settings on iD appli and then make the

settings on Card application.

• The cost for iD service (annual fee, etc.) varies depending on the

card issuer.

• For information about iD, visit the i-mode site for iD.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト" ▶ "iD"

QR code to access the site

Cautions on Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli

DOCOMO assumes no responsibility for information set on

the IC card.

Gガイド番組表リモコン (G-GUIDE Program List

Remote Controller)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen. An applicable channel to your

location appears.

This is a convenient application which combines a TV

program list and a Audio/Video remote controller, and is free

of monthly usage charges.

You can easily obtain the program information on the

digital or analogue terrestrial broadcasting, or BS digital

broadcasting whenever, anywhere you want. You can check

the titles, contents, as well as start/end time of the desired

program. You can activate 1Seg from the program list, and

vice versa.

Programming your DVD hard disc recorder to record your

favorite program via the Internet is available. (The recorder

must support remote programming. And the initial setting has

to be made to enable this application function.)

Continued on next page

284

i-αppli

You can search your desired programs by keyword such

as genre or your favorite actor/actress names or pick-

up-keyword on top of the main screen. You can use this

application as remote controllers for televisions, video

players, or DVD players. (Not all devices are supported.)

• For the ﬁrst time use, you need to conﬁgure the settings and agree

to the license agreement.

• Packet communication charges apply.

• For overseas use, set "Set Date&Time" of the FOMA terminal to

Japan time.

•

For details about G-GUIDE Program List Remote Controller, see

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

Setting a timer for watching 1Seg program

You can select a program to watch from the program list of

this application and set a timer for watching the program.

Setting a timer for watching a program:

Activate this application, select a program to set a timer for,

and select "予約実行 (Set)" from "視聴予約 (Set timer)" of the

menu. After the timer setting screen appears, follow on-screen

instructions to set a timer.

Setting recording schedule function remotely

If your DVD recorder supports remote programming, you can

use this application via the Internet to set the recorder timer

remotely to record a TV program from the TV program time

table of this application.

The initial setting is required to enable the remote

programming function.

Making the initial setting:

Setup your DVD recorder for the Internet connection (Refer to the

instruction manual of your DVD recorder for the setting procedure).

Activate this application, select "リモート録画予約 (Remote record

schedule)" from the menu. Follow the displayed guidance to

complete the initial setting.

Setting TV program recording schedule:

Select a program to be recorded from the TV program

schedule, and select "リモート録画予約 (Remote record

schedule)" from the menu. Your DVD recorder designated

by the initial setting can be programmed via the Internet to

schedule recording the selected program.

• Packet communication charges apply.

Starting i-αppli Automatically

• Date and Time have to be set in advance to start an i-αppli

automatically.→P53

Auto start set

Setting Software Auto-start

You can set whether to start a software automatically.

▶ "i-αppli" ▶ "i-αppli settings" ▶

"Auto start set" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Auto start time

Setting Start Date/Time

Set the date and time when the software starts

automatically. This option can be set for up to 3 software.

Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Auto start time"

▶ Perform the following operations

[Time interval set]

Start a software automatically with set intervals.

[Start time set]

Mark this if you set the time when an i-αppli automatically start.

[Time]*

Set the time and date for auto start.

285

i-αppli

[Repeat]*

Select a repeating pattern for auto start.

1 Time : The software starts automatically only once at the set

date and time.

Daily : The software starts automatically at the set time every

day.

Weekly : The software starts automatically at the set time on the

speciﬁed days of the week every week.

▶ Mark days to start automatically every week ▶

[Done]

* Available when "Start time set" is marked.

[Done]

Note

• The software will not automatically start in the following:

- The FOMA terminal power is oﬀ

- A call or communication is in progress

- Other functions are running

- Lock all (even while Terminal security code entry screen

is displayed) is set

- Omakase Lock is set

- "i-αppli" in "Data access lock" is "ON" (even while

Terminal security code entry screen is displayed)

- The Auto start time is the same as the scheduled time

for software update, an alarm, Schedule event, or To do alarm

- The i-αppli was downloaded using another UIM

- The i-αppli has "Network set" to "Conﬁrm every session"

- The same i-αppli has a set time interval to start within

10 minutes

• Software will not start at the set time if other software is

running at that time. Also, the software may not start while

other functions are running.

• If auto start fails, appears on the Stand-by display. Selecting

the icon displays the Auto start info (P286). disappears

after the Auto start info is viewed.

Set i-αppli To

Starting i-αppli from a Site or Mail

Set whether to start a software from a site, mail, infrared

communication, bar code reader, or 1Seg data broadcasting

sites. Also, you can make settings for when holding the

FOMA terminal on the scanning device supporting the IC card

functions.

Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Set i-αppli To"

▶ Mark items to allow to start a software ▶

[Done]

i-αppli Stand-by display

Setting i-αppli Stand-by Display

Set a software of the selected i-αppli as the Stand-by

display.

Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Software set" ▶

"Stand-by display" ▶ "ON"

Continued on next page

286

i-αppli

Note

• Only 1 i-αppli can be set as Stand-by display.

• Some i-αppli cannot be set as Stand-by display.

• While on i-αppli Stand-by display, / appears on top of the

display

• Turning the FOMA terminal's power on while i-αppli Stand-by

display is set, a conﬁrmation whether to start the i-αppli Stand-

by display appears. Selecting "No" releases the i-αppli Stand-by

display.

• If an i-αppli that performs communication is set as Stand-by

display, the i-αppli may not work correctly due to weak signal

reception.

• While Lock all is activated or i-αppli is restricted its use in Data

access lock, i-αppli Stand-by display is not displayed.

• When Stand-by i-αppli is set, the Receive results screen for

SMS does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS

do not work.

Operating i-αppli Set as Stand-by Display

as a Regular i-αppli

on i-αppli Stand-by display

i-αppli starts and becomes available to perform.

i-αppli Stand-by display release

Releasing i-αppli Stand-by Display

i-αppli running ▶

▶ "Cancel" ▶ "Yes"

Selecting "End" returns to the i-αppli Stand-by display.

Note

• You can also release the i-αppli Stand-by display by following:

Press

in Stand-by ▶ "i-αppli" ▶ "i-αppli settings" ▶ "End

stand-by display" ▶ "Cancel" ▶ "Yes"

i-αppli info

Viewing Various Information

▶ "i-αppli" ▶ "i-αppli info" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Security error history]

Display the error history of the software that were terminated due to

security errors.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected error history entry.

[Auto start info]

Check if software succeeded in auto start. You can view the

information and the latest date and time when the software started

for up to 3 software set for auto start.

Start ○ : The software automatically started successfully

Start × : The software failed to start automatically

Start ─ : The software has not started because the set time has

not come

[Trace info]

Display trace information on a software.

•

[Delete]: Delete trace information on a software.

[Standby error info]

Display error information of an i-αppli Stand-by display that did not

terminate properly.

•

[Delete]: Delete error information.

Note

• Untraced history or information will not be displayed.

287

i-αppli

Deleting i-αppli

Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Delete]

This item : Delete the selected software.

Selected items : Select and delete software.

▶ Mark software to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

All items : Delete all software.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Note

• When the i-αppli to delete is set for auto start or Stand-by

display, a conﬁrmation whether to delete the software appears.

Select "Yes" to delete.

• Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli delete data on the IC

card or require to delete data on IC card starting i-αppli before

the deletion, etc.

• Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli cannot be deleted.

Using Various i-αppli Functions

You can connect to a site or use the FOMA terminal functions

while an i-αppli is running.

• You need to download the supported i-αppli in advance.

• Some i-αppli may operate the functions diﬀerently, or may be

unavailable to use some functions.

Using Camera

• When the camera is activated by i-αppli, captured images will not

be saved in "My picture" of "Data box", however, they are saved and

used as a component of the i-αppli.

Use i-αppli to capture an image with the

camera

Using Bar Code Reader

• The camera can be used via an i-αppli to read a QR code and Japan

Article Number code.

• The read result can be used and saved by the software.

Use i-αppli to read a code

Using Infrared Communication

Use i-αppli to

perform infrared communication

Note

• You may not be able to exchange data with some devices even

if they have the infrared communication capability.

• You can also start an i-αppli by receiving i-αppli activation data

via infrared communication.

• When performing infrared communication, any connection with

sites or mail transfer will be canceled.

289

Osaifu-Keitai

Osaifu-Keitai ････････････････････････････････････････ 290

Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-αppli ･･･････････ 291

Locking IC Card Function ･･････････････ IC card lock 292

290

Osaifu-Keitai

Osaifu-Keitai is equipped with the IC card and enables you to

pay by holding the FOMA terminal on the scanning device at

shops, etc.

In addition, with this function, you can deposit electronic

money and check your balance or view usage history using

transmission. In order to use safely, security

is fully secure.

For details about Osaifu-Keitai, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

• To use Osaifu-Keitai compatible services, you need to download

Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli from Osaifu-Keitai compatible

sites

and make the setting.

*1 Omakase Lock (P122) and the IC card lock (P292) can be

used.

*2 "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト (Menu List)" ▶ "おサイフケータイ

(Osaifu-Keitai)"

• Data (including electronic money, points, etc.) saved in the IC card

may be lost or altered due to the FOMA terminal malfunction (Note

that you will be asked to delete data if you leave the FOMA terminal

for repairs, etc.). For the service such as reissue, restoration,

temporary storage, or transfer of data except for the transfer by iC

transfer service, contact the provider of Osaifu-Keitai compatible

service. Make sure to use a service that provides a backup service

for important data.

• DOCOMO shall not be liable for any loss or alteration of data saved

in the IC card, or damage related to Osaifu-Keitai service caused by

any reason such as malfunction or model change.

• If the FOMA terminal is stolen or lost, immediately contact your

provider of Osaifu-Keitai compatible service about handling the

trouble.

iC Transfer Service

iC transfer service

enables you to transfer

data on the IC

card of Osaifu-Keitai to new Osaifu-Keitai collectively

when

replacing Osaifu-Keitai such as model change or repairing.

After transferring data on the IC card, you can easily use

Osaifu-Keitai compatible services again just by downloading

Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli. Use the iC transfer service

at your nearby docomo Shop, etc.

For details about the iC transfer service, see "Mobile Phone

User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

*1 Both the transfer source and destination mobile phone must be

the iC transfer service compatible FOMA terminals. Go to your

nearby docomo Shop, etc. for using this service.

*2 This service does not "copy" but "transfer" data. Therefore, data

on the IC card does not remain in the FOMA terminal of the

replacing source. In some cases, the iC transfer service cannot

be used. Use the backup service for Osaifu-Keitai compatible

service.

*3 Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible services are not supported by the

iC transfer service. Only the data on the IC card of the Osaifu-

Keitai compatible service that is supported by the iC transfer

service can be transferred.

*4 Packet communication charges apply for downloading i-αppli or

various settings.

291

Osaifu-Keitai

Starting Osaifu-Keitai

Compatible i-αppli

• When starting or downloading Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli for

the ﬁrst time, the UIM in use is registered as a owner of the IC card.

After the second time, the IC card function cannot be used without

inserting the UIM registered as the IC owner.

If you use the IC card function with another UIM, insert the UIM

that is compatible with the IC card and delete all Osaifu-Keitai

compatible i-αppli to use the IC card function.

▶ "Osaifu-Keitai" ▶ "IC card content"

List of Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli appears. Select i-αppli

to start.

• Software list screen→P275

Note

• You can connect to i-mode and search for Osaifu-Keitai

compatible i-αppli by performing

▶ "Osaifu-Keitai" ▶

"Search by i-mode" ▶ "Yes".

• You can activate the DCMX credit appli by performing

▶

"Osaifu-Keitai" ▶ "DCMX".

Using Osaifu-Keitai

Hold the mark of the FOMA terminal on the scanning

device to use as electronic money for payment or traﬃc

ticket. This function can be used without starting the

software.

• The sticker is attached at the back side of the Back cover to keep

the performance of FeliCa function. Do not remove the sticker.

• Hold the mark on the center of the scanning part.

mark

Scanning part of

the scanning device

Continued on next page

292

Osaifu-Keitai

Note

• Do not subject the FOMA terminal to severe shocks when

holding the mark on the scanning device.

• If the mark held on the scanning device is not recognized, try

moving the FOMA terminal around.

• You can use Osaifu-Keitai functions by holding the mark on

the scanning device even during a call or i-mode connection, or

when the FOMA terminal is turned oﬀ (Osaifu-Keitai compatible

i-αppli cannot be activated). However, when the battery pack is

not inserted or the battery pack is not used for a long time even

if it is inserted, or the FOMA terminal is left without charging

after sounding the battery alarm, this function may be disabled.

Charge the battery pack.

• When the mark is held on the scanning device, Osaifu-Keitai

compatible i-αppli may be activated.

•

You can set the FOMA terminal to light or blink the illumination

when the scanning device recognizes the FOMA terminal.

→

P113

IC card lock

Locking IC Card Function

This function allows you to prevent the IC card functions

from being used by others.

Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

When the IC card lock is set, appears on the Stand-by display.

Canceling the lock

Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds) ▶ enter the Terminal

security code.

IC card lock set

Locking IC Card Functions when Turning

Power On/Oﬀ

▶ "Osaifu-Keitai" ▶ "IC card lock set" ▶

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Perform the

following operations

[IC card lock(Power ON)]

Set whether to lock the IC card functions when the FOMA terminal is

turned on.

[IC card lock(Power OFF)]

Set whether to lock the IC card functions when the FOMA terminal is

turned oﬀ.

Note

• When removing the battery pack, the IC card function is

disabled regardless of the IC card lock setting.

• While the IC card lock is activated, downloading, upgrading, or

deleting operation may be unavailable depending on Osaifu-

Keitai compatible i-αppli.

293

Data Management

Data Box ････････････････････････････････････････････ 294

Making Full Use of Images

Displaying Images ･･･････････････････Picture viewer 296

Editing Still Images ･･････････････････････Edit image 302

Creating Slideshows ････････････････････ Slide show 305

Making Full Use of Moving Pictures

Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion

･･････････････････････Moving picture/i-motion player 307

Editing Moving Pictures/i-motion

･･･････････････････････ Edit moving pictures/i-motion 312

Using a Playlist ･････････････････････････････････････ 313

Making Full Use of Melody

Playing a Melody ･････････････････････ Melody player 314

Making Full Use of Memory Card

microSD Cards ･･････････････････････････････････････ 317

Using a microSD Card ･･････････････････････････････ 321

Exchanging Personal Information between the

FOMA Terminal and a microSD Card ････････････････ 322

Managing a microSD Card ･･････････････････････････ 325

Using the FOMA Terminal as a microSD Card

Reader/Writer ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 326

Exchanging Data via Infrared

Communication

Using Infrared Communication

･････････････････････････････ Infrared communication 327

Sending and Receiving Data One by One

･･････････ Send/Receive via infrared communication 328

Sending and Receiving All Data

･･･････ Send/Receive all via infrared communication 329

Using Infrared Remote Control Function ････････････ 330

Making Full Use of Document Viewer

Viewing a Document ････････････････････････････････ 330

294

Data Management

Data Box

Data box contains the items and folders shown in the

following tables. Data obtained from sites or i-mode mail are

saved to folders by category.

• Up to 18 folders each can be added to My picture, Music, i-motion,

Melody, and Kisekae Tool. Up to 10 folders can be added to

Music&Video Channel.

• Data saved in My picture, Music, i-motion, and Melody (except for

data in the "Decomail picto" folder) can be moved to other folders

within the category. Data saved in the Music&Video Channel can

be moved from the "Distributed program" folder to another folder

within the category, or can be moved among the folders other than

"Distributed program".

• Deco-mail pictograms obtained from sites or mail are directly saved

to the "Decomail picto" folder.

• Only Deco-mail pictograms can be saved in the "Deco-mail picto"

folder.

My picture

i-mode Still images, etc. obtained from sites or mails

Camera Still images captured by the Camera

Decomail picture Pre-installed pictures for Deco-mail, etc

Decomail picto Deco-mail pictograms pre-installed or

downloaded from sites or mail

Preinstalled Pre-installed still images

Item Still images that can be used for frames or

stamps

Data transfer Still images, etc. obtained via infrared

communication

Slide show User-deﬁned slideshows, etc.

My picture

microSD Still images saved on the microSD card

Camera images Still images captured

by the Camera

Other images Still images, etc.

Decomail picto Deco-mail pictograms

that are copied from

the FOMA terminal

Search by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Music

i-mode Chaku-Uta Full

songs downloaded from sites

Playlists Playlists created with the FOMA terminal

or created with Windows Media Player and

forwarded from a PC

Movablecontents Chaku-Uta Full

saved on the microSD card

Resume play Playback of the last played music/playlist

WMA WMA ﬁles saved on the microSD card

SD-Audio SD-Audio data saved on the microSD card

Searcy by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Music&Video Ch

Distributed

program Music programs distributed from Music&Video

Channel

i-motion

i-mode Moving pictures/i-motion downloaded from

sites or mails

Camera Moving pictures captured by the Video Camera

Preinstalled Pre-installed moving pictures

Playlists Playlists created with the FOMA terminal

295

Data Management

i-motion

Data transfer Moving pictures, etc. obtained via infrared

communication

microSD Moving pictures or i-motion saved on the

microSD card

Movablecontents Copyright protected

moving pictures or

i-motion moved from

the FOMA terminal

Audio Sound-only i-motion

Video Moving pictures

captured by the Video

Camera

Searcy by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Melody

i-mode Melodies, etc. downloaded from sites or mails

Preinstalled Pre-installed melodies

Data transfer Melodies, etc. obtained via infrared

communication

microSD Melody Melodies saved on the

microSD card

Searcy by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Kisekae Tool

i-mode Kisekae Tool acquired from sites

Preinstalled Pre-installed Kisekae Tool

Searcy by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Motion Oekaki

Diﬀerences on display name, ﬁle name, and title

Still images, Flash movies, moving pictures/i-motion, and

melodies saved in the FOMA terminal have multiple names.

Display name Names that appear on list screens in Data box

or on the Display/playback screens

File name Names that appear on a PC or other mobile

phones

Title*Names for management of L-01B (cannot be

edited)

* Still images and Flash movies do not have titles.

Icons displayed on the ﬁle list screen

Icon Description

/ Files that can be sent, or moved/cannot be

moved to a microSD card

File restricted

Files with the UIM security function activated

Files on the microSD card

Files banned from being redistributed

* / / /

// / / File types (JPEG/GIF/Flash/MP4 (extension:

mp4)/MP4 (extension: 3gp)/SMF/MFi/Others

(unsupported ﬁles))

* Icons that appear on the screen vary depending on the list

screen type.

296

Data Management

Picture viewer

Displaying Images

You can display still images you captured, or obtained from

sites or i-mode mails.

Available ﬁle formats

File format*JPEG, GIF

Pixels JPEG, Progressive JPEG: Up to 2592×1944

dots

GIF: Up to 800×600 dots

File size Up to 5MB

File extension jpg, gif

* Some ﬁles in a compatible format may not be displayed.

▶ "Data box" ▶ "My picture"

•

[New]: Create a folder.

My picture

screen

Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

•

[Mail]: Display the Compose

message screen with the selected ﬁle

attached.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected ﬁle.

•

[Switch]: Switch between List view

and Grid view.

• Icons displayed on the list screen

→P295

Still image ﬁle list

screen

Display name of the selected ﬁle

Type of the selected ﬁle

Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[View]

Still image

display screen

Sequential number/number of saved ﬁles

Display the sequential number of the current ﬁle and the total

number of saved ﬁles in the folder.

Display name of the ﬁle

297

Data Management

Key operations on the Still image display screen

Operation Description

Display the previous/next ﬁle

[Full] Hide the soft keys and display a full image/

restore to the original display size

[Mail] Send the displayed image via mail→P138

Enlarge the image/restore to the previous ratio

[Zoom] Use

[＋] to enlarge the image and

[−] to

restore to the previous ratio

Move the display position when the image is

enlarged

• The entire image and the displayed area appear

at the edge of the screen.

[Delete] Delete the selected ﬁle

Note

• Some images that are not captured with L-01B may not be

displayed on the Still image ﬁle list screen.

My Picture Screen Sub Menu

My picture screen (P296) ▶ Move the cursor

to a folder ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Rename]

Change the name of the selected folder. Up to 30 full-pitch or half-

pitch characters can be entered.

[New folder]

Create a new folder.

• You cannot create a sub folder in the created folder.

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected folder.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

Selected : Select and delete folders.

▶ Mark folders to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter

the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all user-deﬁned folders

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Grid view]

This option is not available.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles in a folder.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[Folder property]

Display the size of the selected folder and the number of ﬁles in the

folder.

298

Data Management

Still Image File List Screen Sub Menu

Still image ﬁle list screen (P296) ▶ Move the

cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Files]

View : Display the selected ﬁle.

Edit : Edit the selected ﬁle.→P302

Rename : Change the display name of the selected ﬁle.

File property : Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the

selected ﬁle.→P301

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected ﬁle.

Selected : Select and delete ﬁles.

▶ Mark ﬁles to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all ﬁles in the folder.

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Move]

One : Move the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and move ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to move ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Move all ﬁles in the folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Copy]

One : Copy the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and copy ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to copy ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Copy all ﬁles in the folder

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Send via]*

Mail : Create i-mode mail with the selected ﬁle attached. Go to

Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

IrDA : Send a ﬁle via infrared communication.

[Set as]

Set the selected ﬁle as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

This option is not available.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch the ﬁle display format.

299

Data Management

[Store in center]

Save ﬁles at the Data Center.→P132

* Not available for Flash movies.

Still Image Display Screen Sub Menu

Still image display screen (P296) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Edit image]*

Edit the displayed ﬁle.→P302

[Delete]

Delete the displayed ﬁle.

[Edit title]

Edit the display name of the displayed ﬁle.

[File property]

Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the selected ﬁle.→P301

[Send via]*

Mail : Create i-mode mail with the selected ﬁle attached. Go to

Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

IrDA : Send a ﬁle via infrared communication.

[Full screen]

View the image in Full screen. In Full screen view, the following

operations are available.

•

: Return the full screen view to the original view.

•

: Display the previous/next image.

[Zoom]*

Display an enlarged image. While zooming in, the following operations

are available.

•

[＋]: Enlarge the image

•

[−]: Return to the previous zoom ratio

•

: Move the display position

•

: Return the enlarged display to the original display

• The entire image and the displayed area appear at the edge of the

screen.

[Set as]

Set the displayed ﬁle as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.

[Store in center]

Save the displayed ﬁle at the Data Center.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Motion Oekaki]

Edit the displayed ﬁle with Motion Oekaki™.→P340

[View settings]

Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between

slideshow frames.→P301

* Not available for Flash movies.

300

Data Management

Viewing Flash Movies

You can view Flash movies downloaded from sites, etc.

Available ﬁle formats

File format*Flash

File size Up to 100KB

File extension swf

* Some ﬁles in a compatible ﬁle format may not be played.

▶ "Data box" ▶ "My picture"

Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[View]

Flash movie

playback screen

Sequential number/number of saved ﬁles

Display the sequential number of the current ﬁle and the total

number of saved ﬁles in the folder.

Display name of the ﬁle

Key operations on the Flash movie playback screen

Operation Description

Display the previous/next ﬁle

[Full] Hide the soft keys and display a full image/

restore to the original display size

[Mail] Send the displayed image by mail→P138

[Retry] Play the Flash movie from the beginning

Enlarge the image/restore to the previous ratio

Move the display position when the image is

enlarged

• The entire image and the displayed area appear

at the edge of the screen.

[Delete] Delete the selected ﬁle

Flash Movie Playback Screen Sub Menu

Flash movie playback screen (P300) ▶

[Menu]

• The Flash movie playback screen sub menu is the same as

"Still Image Display Screen Sub Menu" (P299). However, "Edit

image", "Send via", and "Zoom" are not available.

301

Data Management

Viewing Image Properties

Still image display screen (P296)/Flash movie

playback screen (P300) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "File

property"

•

[Edit]: Edit properties.

Properties displayed on the File property screen

Item Description

File name Display the ﬁle name

File size Display the ﬁle size

File type

Display the ﬁle format

Date & Time (Saved) Display the saved date and time

Display size

Display the resolution

File restriction Display whether the ﬁle is restricted

Source Display the source

Move to the microSD

Display whether the ﬁle can be moved to a

microSD card

*1 Not displayed for Flash movies.

*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display

whether data can be moved to the phone.

Setting View of a Still Image

Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between

slideshow frames.

Still image display screen (P296)/Flash movie

playback screen (P300)/Slideshow list screen

(P305) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "View settings" ▶

Perform the following operations

[View type]

Normal : Display the image in its original size.

Fit to screen : Display the image enlarged to ﬁt the screen.

[Zoom type]

Normal : Zoom in the image enlarged to ﬁt the screen.

Same magniﬁcation : Zoom in the image displayed in its original

size.

[SlideShow interval]

Set the interval between slideshow frames.

[Auto rotating]

Set whether to display the image in a direction when you captured it

with this FOMA terminal.

[Done]

302

Data Management

Setting File Restriction

You can set the ﬁle restriction. The restricted ﬁle attached to

mail cannot be sent or forwarded from the recipient's FOMA

terminal.

Display a ﬁle to restrict ▶

[Menu] ▶

"File property"

The File property screen appears.

Move the cursor to the "File restriction" ﬁeld ▶

[Edit] ▶ "File restricted"

Note

• This option cannot be changed for a ﬁle downloaded from a site.

Edit image

Editing Still Images

You can edit still images. The edited still image is saved to

the same folder as the source ﬁle.

• Only JPEG ﬁles can be edited. However, some ﬁles may not be

edited.

• Editing a still image repeatedly may reduce the image quality or

increase the ﬁle size.

Still image display screen (P296) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "Edit image"

Still image

edit screen

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Save]

Save the edited still image. Go to Step 5.

[Rotate]

Left : Rotate the image 90 degrees counterclockwise.

Right : Rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.

180 : Rotate the image 180 degrees.

[Mirror]

Left/Right : Flip the image horizontally.

Up/Down : Flip the image vertically.

[Resize]

Change the image size.→P303

[Crop]

Cut out a part of the image.→P304

303

Data Management

[Sketch]

Draw lines or characters.

• Press

[Menu] to change "Pen/Eraser height" or "Pen color".

Select "Eraser height" from "Pen/Eraser height" to erase a drawing

where traced with a ﬁnger, etc.

[Insert]

Add a frame, stamp, or text.

Frame : Add a frame to an image.

▶ Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Select a

frame

• After selecting a frame, press

[Menu] to select

"Change frame" or "Rotate".

Stamp : Add a stamp to an image.→P304

Text : Add text to an image.→P305

[Retouch]

Change the brightness, contrast, or color tone of an image.

▶ Use

to switch to the item to retouch ▶

[Select]

• Adjust the item with

• If selecting "Auto level" or "Auto enhance", the image is adjusted

automatically.

• If selecting "Color adjust" or "Level adjust", adjust each color with

• Pressing

[List] also enables you to select the item to retouch.

[Eﬀect]

Set special eﬀects to an image.

▶ Use

to switch to the item to retouch ▶

[Select]

• Depending on items, adjust with

• If selecting "Rotation" or "Spotlight", adjust each item with

• Pressing

[List] also enables you to select the item to set.

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the edited image attached.

[Undo]

Cancel the performed edit operation and restore the previous state.

[OK]

• Press

[Cancel] to cancel editing.

[Save]

• Press

[Undo] to return to the state before editing.

"New ﬁle"/"Original ﬁle"

New ﬁle : Save the edited image as a new image.

Original ﬁle : Save the edited image over the source image.

Note

<Frame>

• Available frame size: CIF (352×288), Wallpaper (800×480),

Wallpaper (400×240), QVGA (320×240), QCIF (176×144),

and Sub-QCIF (128×96).

• Only the frame size that is same as the source image size can

be set.

Changing Image Size

Still image edit screen (P302) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Resize"

Select an image size

[OK]

Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303).

Continued on next page

304

Data Management

Note

• The size of a source image with vertical or horizontal side

smaller than 8 dots cannot be changed.

• If a size with diﬀerent proportions than the source is selected,

the original proportions will be retained for the resized image.

Cropping an Image

Still image edit screen (P302) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Crop"

Select a cropping size ▶ Use

to move the

frame to the area to be cropped ▶

[Select]

When "User deﬁne" is selected

Use

to move the cursor to start point ▶

[Select] ▶ use

to move the cursor to end

point ▶

[Select] to set the area to crop.

[OK]

Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303).

Note

• The size of a source image with vertical or horizontal side

smaller than 8 dots cannot be changed.

Adding a Stamp

Still image edit screen (P302) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Insert" ▶ "Stamp"

Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶

Select a stamp ▶ Use

to move the stamp

to the position ▶

[OK]

To add another stamp

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Change stamp" ▶ move the cursor

to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ select a stamp ▶ use

move the stamp to the position ▶

[OK].

To rotate the stamp

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Rotate" ▶ select from "Left"/

"Right"/"180".

[Done]

Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303).

Note

• A stamp cannot be added to a source image with vertical or

horizontal side smaller than 24 dots or larger than 640×480

dots.

305

Data Management

Adding Text

Add text to an image. You can also change the font size or

color, rotate the text, or add speech bubbles.

Still image edit screen (P302) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Insert" ▶ "Text"

Enter the text to add

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Edit text]

Edit the pasted text.

[Font size]

Set the font size.

[Font color]

Change the added text color.

[Rotate]

Rotate the added text.

[Comic]

Add a speech bubble.

• Some speech bubbles cannot be set depending on the image size.

Use

to move the cursor to the position ▶

[OK]

[Done]

Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303).

Note

• Text cannot be added to a source image with vertical or

horizontal side smaller than 24 dots or larger than 640×480

dots.

Slide show

Creating Slideshows

You can create slideshows with up to 20 frames using saved

still images.

• Up to 30 slideshows can be created.

• Up to 480×800 dots of still images can be used for creating the

slideshows.

▶ "Data box" ▶ "My picture" ▶ Move the

cursor to "Slide show" ▶

[Open]

Slideshow list

screen

[New] ▶ Enter the display name of the ﬁle

Continued on next page

306

Data Management

[Add] ▶ Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Move the cursor to an image ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

•

[View]: The selected image is displayed.

•

[Switch]: Switch between List view and Grid view.

[Select]

Add the selected ﬁle to the slideshow.

[View]

Display the selected ﬁle.

[File property]

Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the selected ﬁle.→P301

[List view/Grid view]

Switch the ﬁle display format.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

This option is not available.

Repeat Step 3 to save images ▶

[Done]

To delete the saved image

Move the cursor to an image to delete and press

[Delete] ▶ "Yes".

Displaying Slideshow

Slideshow list screen (P305) ▶ Move the

cursor to a slideshow ▶

[View]

Slideshow display

screen

Key operations while viewing a slideshow

Operation Description

Play the previous/next slideshow

[Full] Hide the soft keys and display a full slideshow/

restore to the original display size

307

Data Management

Slideshow List Screen Sub Menu

Slideshow list screen (P305) ▶ Move the

cursor to a slideshow ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Add images]

Add images to the selected slideshow.

[Delete]

Delete the selected slideshow.

[Edit title]

Change the display name of the selected slideshow. Up to 30 full-

pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.

[Set as stand-by]

Set the selected slideshow as the Stand-by display.

[View settings]

Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between

slideshow frames.→P301

Slideshow Display Screen Sub Menu

Slideshow display screen (P306) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Delete]

Delete the displayed slideshow.

[Edit title]

Change the display name of the displayed slideshow. Up to 30 full-

pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.

[Full screen]

View the slideshow in Full screen. (In Full screen view, the following

operations are available.)

•

: Return the full screen view to the original view.

•

: Display the previous/next slideshow.

[Set as stand-by]

Set the displayed slideshow as the Stand-by display.

[View settings]

Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between

slideshow frames.→P301

Moving picture/i-motion player

Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion

You can play moving pictures you captured, or i-motion

obtained from sites or i-mode mails.

Available ﬁle formats

File format*MP4 (Mobile MP4)

Encoding method MP4 ﬁle

Video: MPEG-4, H.263, and H.264

Audio: AMR, AAC, HE-AAC, and Enhanced

aacPlus

File extension mp4, 3gp

* Some ﬁles in a compatible ﬁle format may not be played.

Continued on next page

308

Data Management

▶ "Data box" ▶ "i-motion"

•

[New]: Create a folder.

i-motion screen

Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

•

[Mail]: Display the Compose message

screen with the selected ﬁle attached.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected ﬁle.

•

[Switch]: Switch between List view and

Grid view.

• Icons displayed on the list screen.→P295

i-motion ﬁle list

screen

Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Play]

•

[Mail]: Display the Compose

message screen with the ﬁle in

playback attached.

i-motion playback

screen

Display name of the ﬁle

Volume

Playback progress bar

Display the playback elapsed time.

Elapsed time/total time

Control keys

Display available navigation keys.

Key operations on the i-motion playback screen

Operation Description

[Pause/Play] Pause/Play

[Stop] Stop

Play the previous/next ﬁle

(Hold down) While being pressed, rewind the video/sound

(Hold down) While being pressed, fast forward the video/

sound

Adjust the volume

309

Data Management

When Link is set in ticker

After i-motion playback ends, a conﬁrmation appears asking

whether to use Phone To/AV Phone To/Web To/Mail To. To use

the function, select an item and operate.

Note

• Some ﬁles may not be fast forwarded and rewound during

playback.

• When you fast forward or rewind i-motion during playback,

i-motion is paused.

i-motion Screen Sub Menu

i-motion screen (P308) ▶ Move the cursor to a

folder ▶

[Menu]

• The i-motion screen sub menu is the same as "My Picture

Screen Sub Menu" (P297).

i-motion File List Screen Sub Menu

i-motion ﬁle list screen (P308) ▶ Move the

cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Files]

Play : Play the selected ﬁle.

Rename : Change the display name of the selected ﬁle.

Reset name : Reset the display name of the selected ﬁle to its

default title. If no title is set, "No title" is displayed.

File property : Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the

selected ﬁle.→P311

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected ﬁle.

Selected : Select and delete ﬁles.

▶ Mark ﬁles to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all ﬁles in the folder.

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Move]

One : Move the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and move ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to move ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Move all ﬁles in the folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Copy]

One : Copy the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and copy ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to copy ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Copy all ﬁles in the folder

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Continued on next page

310

Data Management

[Send via]

Mail : Create i-mode mail with the selected ﬁle attached. Go to

Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

IrDA : Send a ﬁle via infrared communication.

[Set as tone]

Set the selected ﬁle as a ring tone, etc.

[Set as display]

Set the selected ﬁle as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

This option is not available.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch the ﬁle display format.

i-motion Playback Screen Sub Menu

i-motion playback screen (P308) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the selected ﬁle attached. Go to Step 2 in

"Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

[Set as tone]

Set the ﬁle in playback as a ring tone, etc.

[Set as display]

Set the selected ﬁle as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.

[Expand]*

Enlarge moving pictures/i-motion in the horizontal view.

• Press

to restore to the original display size.

[Screen setting]*

Normal Play : Set to play a ﬁle in the vertical view.

Full screen play (hor.) : Set to enlarge and play a ﬁle in the

horizontal view.

[Chapter list]

Display the chapter list.

[Edit]

Edit the moving picture/i-motion in playback.→P312

[File property]

Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the ﬁle in playback.

→P311

* Cannot select after playback ends.

311

Data Management

Note

• During the sub menu operation, the moving picture/i-motion is

paused.

• The following moving pictures/i-motion cannot be set as a

Chaku-motion or incoming call screen:

- Files that were transferred to a PC or another FOMA terminal

via infrared communication or DOCOMO keitai datalink and

transferred back to the FOMA terminal

- Files that were copied or moved from the microSD card to

the FOMA terminal, including those copied or moved from the

terminal to the microSD card and copied or moved back to

the FOMA terminal (Except i-motion that supports contents

migration)

Viewing Moving Pictures/i-motion Properties

i-motion playback screen (P308) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "File property"

•

[Edit]: Edit properties.

Properties displayed on the File detail screen

Item Description

File name Display the ﬁle name

File size Display the ﬁle size

File type Display the ﬁle format

Date & Time (Saved)

Display the saved date and time

Play time Display the ﬁle playback time

Display size Display the resolution

Video Display the video format

Audio Display the sound format

• HE-AAC and Enhanced aacPlus are

displayed as AAC.

File restriction

Display whether the ﬁle is restricted→P302

Ringtone Display whether the ﬁle can be set as a

ring tone

Receive display Display whether the ﬁle can be set as the

Stand-by display or incoming call screen

Title Display the default title of the ﬁle

Creator Display creator information

Description Display the ﬁle description

Source Display the source

Move to the microSD

Display whether the ﬁle can be moved to a

microSD card

*1 Appear only for data in the FOMA terminal memory.

*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display

whether data can be moved to the phone.

312

Data Management

Edit moving pictures/i-motion

Editing Moving Pictures/i-motion

You can edit moving pictures/i-motion.

• The pre-installed ﬁles cannot be edited.

• Some ﬁles may not be edited.

• The ticker displayed on i-motion cannot be edited.

Clipping a Frame of a Moving Picture as a

Still Image

You can clip a still image from a moving picture/i-motion.

The clipped image is saved to the "Camera" folder in "My

picture" of "Data box".

i-motion playback screen (P308) ▶ Display the

image to be clipped as a still image

• Operations during i-motion playback→P308

[Menu] ▶ "Edit" ▶ "Capture"

Clipping a Frame of a Moving Picture

You can clip a part of a moving picture/i-motion.

The clipped moving picture/i-motion is saved to the same

folder as the source ﬁle.

i-motion playback screen (P308) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "Edit" ▶ "Clipping" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[For mail short]

Clip the video from the selected start point to 500KB or smaller and

save it. This option can be selected when the video size exceeds

500KB.

[For mail long]

Clip the video from the selected start point to 2MB or smaller and

save it. This option can be selected when the video size exceeds

2MB.

[Bound]

Clip the video from the selected start point to the selected end point

and save it.

▶ Press

[Play] to play a moving picture/i-motion ▶ At start

point to clip,

[Start] ▶ At end point to clip,

[End]

313

Data Management

Using a Playlist

The playback order of moving pictures/i-motion can be

speciﬁed in a playlist. Select your favorite moving pictures/

i-motion saved on the FOMA terminal and microSD card and

play them in your favorite order.

Creating a Playlist

Up to 10 playlists can be saved. Up to 99 moving pictures/

i-motion can be saved per playlist.

▶ "Data box" ▶ "i-motion" ▶ Move the

cursor to "Playlists" ▶

[Open]

Playlist list screen

[New] ▶ Enter a playlist name

• Up to 255 full-pitch/half-pitch characters can be entered.

[Add] ▶ Mark moving pictures/i-motion to

save to a playlist ▶

[Done]

Saved moving

picture/i-motion

list screen

[Done]

Playing a Playlist

Playlist list screen (P313) ▶ Move the cursor

to a playlist to play ▶

[Play]

Playlist List Screen Sub Menu

Playlist list screen (P313) ▶ Move the cursor

to a playlist ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Add i-motion to playlist]

Add moving pictures/i-motion to the selected playlist.

▶ Mark moving pictures/i-motion to add to the playlist ▶

[Done]

▶

[Done]

Continued on next page

314

Data Management

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected playlist.

Select : Select and delete playlists.

▶ Mark playlists to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Mark all" or "Unmark all".

All : Delete all playlists.

[Edit title]

Edit the selected playlist name.

Saved Moving Picture/i-motion List Screen Sub

Playlist list screen (P313) ▶ Move the cursor

to a playlist ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Add i-motion to

playlist" ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Play]

Play from the selected moving picture/i-motion.

[Change order]

Change the order of the selected moving picture/i-motion.

▶ Select a moving picture/i-motion to move ▶ Select a destination

▶ "Yes"

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected moving picture/i-motion.

Select : Select and delete moving pictures/i-motion.

▶ Mark moving pictures/i-motion to delete ▶

[Delete]

▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Mark all" or "Unmark all".

All : Delete all moving pictures/i-motion.

Melody player

Playing a Melody

You can play pre-installed melodies or melodies downloaded

from sites.

Available ﬁle formats

File Format*SMF, MFi

File extension mid, mld

* Some ﬁles in a compatible ﬁle format may not be played.

▶ "Data box" ▶ "Melody"

•

[New]: Create a folder.

Melody screen

315

Data Management

Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

•

[Mail]: Display the Compose message

screen with the selected ﬁle attached.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected ﬁle.

• Icons displayed on the list screen→P295

Melody ﬁle

list screen

Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Play]

• T[Mail]: Display the Compose

message screen with the ﬁle in

playback attached.

Melody playback

screen

Display name of the ﬁle

Volume

Playback progress bar

Display the playback elapsed time.

Elapsed time/total time

Control keys

Display available navigation keys.

Key operations on the Melody playback screen

Operation Description

[Pause/Play] Pause/Play

[Stop] Stop

Play the previous/next ﬁle

Adjust the volume

Melody Screen Sub Menu

Melody screen (P314) ▶ Move the cursor to a

folder ▶

[Menu]

• The Melody screen sub menu is the same as the "My Picture

Screen Sub Menu" (P297). However, "Grid view" is not available.

Melody File List Screen Sub Menu

aMelody ﬁle list screen (P315) ▶ Move the

cursor to a ﬁle ▶ M[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Files]

Play : Play the selected ﬁle.

Rename : Change the display name of the selected ﬁle.

Reset name : Reset the display name of the selected ﬁle to its

default name.

File property : Display the name, size, and type, etc. of the selected

melody.→P317

Continued on next page

316

Data Management

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected ﬁle.

Selected : Select and delete ﬁles.

▶ Mark ﬁles to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all ﬁles in the folder.

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Move]

One : Move the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and move ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to move ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Move all ﬁles in the folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Copy]

One : Copy the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and copy ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to copy ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Copy all ﬁles in the folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Send via]

Mail : Create i-mode mail with the selected melody attached. Go to

Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

IrDA : Send a ﬁle via infrared communication.

[Set as]

Set the selected melody as a ring tone, etc.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

This option is not available.

Melody Playback Screen Sub Menu

Melody playback screen (P315) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the melody in playback attached. Go to Step

2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

[Set as tone]

Set the melody in playback as a ring tone, etc.

[File property]

Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the melody in playback.

→P317

317

Data Management

Note

• During the sub menu operation, the melody playback is paused.

Viewing Melody Properties

Melody playback screen (P315) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "File property"

•

[Edit]: Edit properties.

Properties displayed on the File detail screen

Item Description

File name Display the ﬁle name

File size Display the ﬁle size

File type Display the ﬁle format

Date & Time (Saved)

Display the saved date and time

Play time Display the ﬁle playback duration

File restriction

Display whether the ﬁle is restricted→P302

Ringtone Display whether the ﬁle can be set as a

ring tone

Title Display the default title of the ﬁle

Source Display the source

Move to the microSD

Display whether the ﬁle can be moved to a

microSD card

*1 Appear only for data in the FOMA terminal memory.

*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display

whether data can be moved to the phone.

microSD Cards

You can save data on the FOMA terminal such as Phonebook

entries, mail, or Bookmarks to a microSD card, or can load

data on a microSD card to the FOMA terminal. Also, you can

browse data on a microSD card from the FOMA terminal.

• L-01B supports a microSD card of up to 2GB and a microSDHC

card of up to 8GB (commercially available) (as of June, 2009). For

the latest information on operations of microSD cards, including

manufacturers and capacity of cards, visit the following site

(in Japanese only). A microSD card not listed at the site may not

function.

- From i-mode "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト (Menu list)" ▶ "ケータイ電話

メーカー (Mobile Phone Manufacturers)" ▶ "WOW LG"

- From a PC http://jp.lgmobile.com/

Note that the information on the site shows

results of compatibility checks and the results

are not guaranteed.

• You can purchase microSD memory cards and

microSD card adapters from electric appliance

stores, etc.

QR code to

access the site

318

Data Management

Precautions on Using microSD Cards

• microSD cards formatted by another device such as a PC may not

be usable on the FOMA terminal. Use microSD cards formatted by

L-01B. Note that when formatting a microSD card, all data on the

card is deleted.→P325

• microSD cards may lose data or deform due to an accident or

failure. It is recommended that you make a copy of important data

and keep it in a separate place. DOCOMO is not responsible for loss

or alteration of any data.

• It may take a while to communicate depending on the amount of

data to transfer. Also, data may not be copied.

• Do not turn the FOMA terminal power oﬀ while data is being read or

written.

• Do not unplug the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02

(optional) while data is being read or written, or a microSD is being

formatted. This may result in data loss.

• Never remove the microSD card while the card is being accessed

such as when data on the card is being displayed or the storage

capacity of the card is being checked.

• Do not attach labels or stickers on microSD cards. Even the

thickness of labels may cause contact failure or data corruption.

• Do not touch the contacts with your hand or metal objects.

• Do not apply strong force, do not bend or drop, and do not let the

card wet.

• Do not leave a removed microSD card within the reach of infants.

Accidental swallowing or injury may result.

• When inserting/removing a microSD card, do not place your face

close to the card because the card may eject when you suddenly

release your ﬁngers oﬀ. Also, do not let small children touch the

card. Injury may result.

Inserting/Removing a microSD Card

Before inserting/removing a microSD card, make sure to turn

the FOMA terminal power oﬀ.

Inserting

Open the microSD card slot cover (

) and

rotate in the direction of the allow

Slowly insert a microSD card with the metal

contacts side up until it clicks

319

Data Management

Close the microSD card slot cover

Note

• Insert a microSD card properly. If the card is not inserted

properly, the card cannot be used.

Removing

Follow Step 1 in "Inserting" to open the cover

and softly push the microSD card in the

direction of the allow

The microSD card pops out slightly.

Remove the microSD card

Folder Structure on a microSD Card

When you move or copy ﬁles from the FOMA terminal to the

microSD card, or save still images or moving pictures captured

with Camera directly to the microSD card, a folder compatible

with the ﬁle type is automatically created on the microSD card.

• When you write data to the microSD card from a PC, a folder

structure and ﬁle name like the following are required:

L-01B

DCIM (Captured image, DCF-compliant JPEG, GIF other

than animation)

△△△

LGDCF

L04Aaaaa.JPG/.GIF

LGeDB (Song (WMA ﬁle) management information)

PRIVATE

DOCOMO

TABLE (Management information)

STILL (non-DCF-compliant JPEG, GIF animation)

STILaaaa.JPG/.GIF

SUDaaa

STILaaaa.JPG/.GIF

RINGER(Melody)

RINGaaaa.MLD/.MID

RUDaaa

RINGaaaa.MLD/.MID

MMFILE (Sound-only moving picture/i-motion)

ＭＭFaaaa.3GP

MUDaaa

MMFaaaa.3GP

Continued on next page

320

Data Management

WM (WMA ﬁle)

WM_SYSTEM (WMA ﬁle management information

and license information)

DECOIMG (Deco-mail pictogram)

DIMGaaaa.JPG/.GIF

DUDaaa

DIMGaaaa.JPG/.GIF

OTHER (Others)

OTHERaaa.xxxx

OUDaaa

OTHERaaa.xxxx

SD_VIDEO (Moving picture/i-motion)

PRLaaa

MOLaaa.3GP

SD_BIND (Data supporting content migration)

SVC00001 (Moving picture/i-motion)

SVC00002 (Chaku-Uta Full

song)

SD_PIM (Personal data)

SD_AUDIO (SD-Audio-compliant music data)

xxxx : Extension (3- to 4-digit, half-pitch alphanumeric characters)

△△△

: 3-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 100 and 999

(Use the same number for a folder name and ﬁle name saved

in the folder.)

aaa : 3-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 001 and 999

aaaa : 4-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 0001 and

0999

*1 The "TABLE" folder has sub folders that store additional

information for "DCIM", "STILL", "RINGER", "MMFILE", "DECOIMG",

"SD_VIDEO", and "OTHER".

*2 Data is encrypted and may not be viewed directly on a PC, etc.

If you delete, edit, or add ﬁles under these folders, ﬁles may not

work properly on L-01B.

Number of savable ﬁles on a microSD card

• The number of savable ﬁles on the microSD card varies

depending on the capacity of the microSD card.

• You can check available space on the microSD card by

accessing "Memory info." or "Memory status".→P325, P373

File Folder Number of savable items

Still image (DCF-

compliant JPEG, GIF

other than animation)

DCIM Up to 900 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Still image (non-DCF-

compliant JPEG, GIF

animation)

STILL Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Melody RINGER Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Sound-only moving

picture/i-motion MMFILE Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

WMA ﬁle WM Up to 1,000 ﬁles

Deco-mail pictogram DECOIMG Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Moving picture/i-motion SD_VIDEO Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Personal data SD_PIM 1 folder/65,535 ﬁles

Others OTHER Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Note

• In some cases, a microSD card used with this FOMA terminal

cannot be used with other microSD-compatible FOMA terminals

because the folder structure is diﬀerent.

• Mails that contain Korean texts in a microSD card are not

displayed correctly on the Korean-incompatible terminal.

321

Data Management

• Depending on the PC in use, folder/ﬁle names may appear

in lower case. Also, ﬁle extensions or certain folders (hidden

folders), etc. may not appear.

• Do not delete or move folders on the microSD card using a PC.

If you do so, the folders may no longer be readable by L-01B.

Using a microSD Card

You can move or copy ﬁles saved in Data box on the FOMA

terminal, such as still images, moving pictures or i-motion, to

the microSD card, and you can view ﬁles saved from a PC to

the microSD card on the FOMA terminal.

Viewing/Playing Files on a microSD Card

You can view/play ﬁles on the microSD card in the same way

as ones on the FOMA terminal from "Data box".

▶ "Data box" ▶ "My picture"/"Music"/

"i-motion"/"Melody" ▶ Move the cursor to

"microSD" ▶

[Open]

• "Displaying Images"→P296

• "Managing Music Data"→P270

• "Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion"→P307

• "Playing a Melody"→P314

Note

• Some ﬁles may not be viewed/played.

• The folder/ﬁle list screen sub menu for a microSD card is the

same as one for the FOMA terminal. However, the ﬁles cannot

be set to the Stand-by display or ring tone, sent via infrared

communication, and saved at the Data Center.

Copying/Moving Files between the FOMA

Terminal and a microSD Card

You can copy or move ﬁles between the FOMA terminal

and a microSD card by copying or moving ﬁles between the

"microSD" folder and other folders in Data box.

Example: To move a camera image saved on the FOMA

terminal to a microSD card

▶ "Data box" ▶ "My picture"

Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

• Select a folder other than "microSD".

Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Move" ▶ "One"

"External memory"

Move the cursor to the destination folder ▶

[Open] ▶

[Select]

Continued on next page

322

Data Management

Note

• Files which can be copied/moved are JPEG/GIF image ﬁles

excluding pre-installed data, and moving pictures whose size is

QCIF or smaller, and melodies.

• Chaku-Uta Full

songs, or i-motion downloaded from sites

cannot be copied to a microSD card.

• Some ﬁles may not be copied/moved depending on ﬁle type or

size.

• Flash movies saved on this FOMA terminal cannot be copied/

moved to a microSD card.

• You can move transferable copyright protected i-motion or

music data saved in the FOMA terminal to a "Movablecontents"

folder in each "microSD" folder.

Exchanging Personal

Information between the FOMA

Terminal and a microSD Card

You can copy personal information between the FOMA

terminal and a microSD card, and you can back up your data

in the FOMA terminal to a microSD card.

Personal information includes the following:

- Phonebook

- Schedule

- Text memo

- To do list

- Inbox

- Outbox

- Unsent message

- Bookmark

Copying Personal Information on the FOMA

Terminal to a microSD Card

You can copy personal information saved on the FOMA

terminal to a microSD card.

Copying Data One Piece at a Time

Example: To copy a Phonebook entry

Stand-by display ▶

▶ Select a Phonebook

entry to copy ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Copy" ▶

"to microSD"

Selecting Data Type to Make Copy at a Time

(Backup)

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "PIM"

[Backup] ▶ Select a data type to copy

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

For Phonebook

A conﬁrmation asking whether to copy data in "Own

Number" appears.

323

Data Management

Copying/Overwriting Personal Information

on a microSD Card to the FOMA Terminal

You can copy/overwrite personal information saved on a

microSD card to the FOMA terminal.

Copying Data One by One

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "PIM"

Select a data type

Data saved on the microSD card is displayed.

Personal data list

screen

(Ex.: Phonebook)

Icons displayed on the Personal data list screen

Icon Description

/ / /

Individual data (one piece of data)

Phonebook/Schedule/Memo/

To do list/Inbox/Outbox/

Unsent message/Bookmark

/ / /

///

Backup data (multiple data)

Phonebook/Schedule/Memo/

To do list/Inbox/Outbox/

Unsent message/Bookmark

Move the cursor to data ▶

[Menu]

•

[Select]: Display details about data.

"Copy to phone" ▶ "Yes"

For backup data

Select "Copy to phone" ▶ enter the Terminal security

code ▶ "Yes".

Note

• In Step 3, you can select backup data ▶ move the cursor to

data ▶ press

[Menu] to select "Copy to phone" or "Overwrite

to phone".

If you select "Copy to phone", you can further select "Selected

data" or "All data".

• The maximum number of data that can be saved on the FOMA

terminal can be displayed for individual data in backup data.

324

Data Management

Personal Data List Screen Sub Menu

Personal data list screen (P323) ▶ Move the

cursor to data ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Rename]*

Change the display name of the selected ﬁle.

[Copy to microSD]

Copy (backup) all data of the displayed data type from the FOMA

terminal to a microSD card at a time.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

• For Phonebook entries, a conﬁrmation asking whether to copy

saved data in "Own Number" appears.

[Copy to phone]*

Copy the selected data to the FOMA terminal.

• For backup data, select "Copy to phone" ▶ enter the Terminal

security code ▶ "Yes".

[Overwrite to phone]*

Overwrite the data on the FOMA terminal with the selected data.

→P324

[Multiple choice]*

Select and delete data.

▶ Mark data to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Delete", "Copy to phone", or "Select all"

or "Clear all" from "Select/Clear".

[Delete]*

Delete the selected data.

[Memory info.]

Display the status of storage space, etc. of the microSD card.

* Not displayed if there is no data on the microSD card.

Overwriting with Backup Data

You can overwrite the data on the FOMA terminal with data

backed up in advance.

• Note that selecting "Overwrite to phone" deletes all saved data on

the FOMA terminal and replaces it with the selected data from the

microSD card.

Make sure important data is not saved before selecting "Overwrite

to phone".

Personal data list screen (P323) ▶ Move

the cursor to backup data ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Overwrite to phone"

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

For Phonebook

A conﬁrmation asking whether to copy data in "Own

Number" appears.

325

Data Management

Managing a microSD Card

Formatting a microSD Card

Format (initialize) a microSD card so that it can be used on

the FOMA terminal.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "Reset microSD"

A message indicating all data will be deleted appears. Select

whether you want to continue to format.

"Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

Note

• Use this FOMA terminal to format the card.

• Note that when formatting a microSD card, all data on the card

is deleted.

Updating Data on a microSD Card

Update data on the microSD card if data cannot be displayed

correctly on the FOMA terminal after changing, adding, or

deleting data on the microSD card using another device.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "Data update"

Mark data types to update ▶

[Done]

Note

• Updating data may take a while if a large amount of data is

saved on the microSD card.

• If you use another device to save data on the microSD card, the

data saved on the card may not be displayed correctly on the

FOMA terminal due to insuﬃcient available memory space for

creating management information on the FOMA terminal.

Checking Usage Status on a microSD

Card

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "Memory info."

Note

• If the used space is not shown as "0KB" when no data is saved

on the microSD card, format the card.

• The actual available space on a microSD card is smaller than

the space printed on the card.

• Data may not be saved if there is not suﬃcient memory space

on the microSD card. Delete unnecessary data or insert a

microSD card with suﬃcient memory space to save data.

326

Data Management

Using the FOMA Terminal as a

microSD Card Reader/Writer

Connect this FOMA terminal with a microSD card inserted to

a PC and read/write data on a microSD card.

• To use a microSD card, you need a microSD card separately.

• Only a PC with Windows Vista, XP, or Windows 2000 (Japanese

versions) can be used to read/write data on a microSD card.

Operation with other OS is not guaranteed.

• To use the FOMA terminal as a microSD card reader/writer, set up

the USB mode. Before setting the USB mode, disconnect the FOMA

USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional).

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "USB mode

setting" ▶ "microSD mode"

Open the External Connector Terminal cover of

the FOMA terminal (

) and insert the external

connector of the FOMA USB Cable with Charge

Function 01/02 with the front side (indicated

by a mark, label, etc.) up until it clicks (

)

Connect the USB connector of the FOMA USB

Cable with Charge Function 01/02 to a USB

port on a PC (

)

USB connector

Release button

External connector

(label side up)

Release button

Note

• When removing a microSD card or the FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 from a PC, be sure to perform the

procedure on safe removal for hardware from the task tray of

the PC. Removing the memory card or FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 without performing the proper steps

may result in data loss.

• When switching USB mode setting, disconnect the FOMA USB

Cable with Charge Function 01/02 ﬁrst. When the FOMA USB

Cable with Charge Function 01/02 is connected, the USB

mode cannot be switched.

• If the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 is

disconnected, the USB mode setting automatically returns to

"Communication mode".

Important

Make sure that the FOMA terminal is correctly connected to a

PC. If it is not connected correctly, data may not only fail to be

exchanged but also be lost.

327

Data Management

Infrared communication

Using Infrared Communication

You can exchange Phonebook entries, schedule events or

bookmarks with a device supporting infrared communication.

Available data for transfer

Data type

Receiving

capability Sending

capability Number of

savable items

One All

items One All

items

Phonebook (Personal

information)

〇〇〇〇

Refer to P84

Schedule

〇〇〇〇

Up to 200

To Do

*1 〇〇〇〇

Up to 50

Received mail

〇〇〇〇

Up to 1,000

Sent mail

〇〇〇〇

Up to 500

Unsent mail

〇〇〇〇

Image ﬁle

*2 〇×〇×

Up to 2,000

Moving picture ﬁle

*3 〇×〇×

Up to 1,000

Melody

*4 〇×〇×

Up to 1,000

Bookmark

*5 〇〇〇〇

Up to 200

Memo

〇〇〇〇

Up to 50

*1 If To Do tasks with alarm set are received prior to the set time,

they may not be correctly saved.

*2 Up to 5MB of data per ﬁle can be sent/received.

*3 Up to 10MB of data per ﬁle can be sent/received.

*4 Up to 100KB of data per ﬁle can be sent/received.

*5 Sent/received bookmarks may not be ﬁltered depending on the

other party's terminal model.

*6 Up to 100 for i-mode and 100 for Full browser can be saved.

Save location of data received via infrared communication

Data type Save location

Phonebook Phonebook

Schedule Schedule

To Do To do list

Received mail Inbox

Sent mail Outbox

Unsent mail Unsent message

Still image "Data transfer" folder in "My picture" of "Data box"

Moving picture "Data transfer" folder in "i-motion" of "Data box"

Melody "Data transfer" folder in "Melody" of "Data box"

Bookmark "Bookmark" folder in "i-mode"

"Bookmark" folder in "Full browser"

Memo Text memo

328

Data Management

Performing Infrared Communication

• Use infrared devices within a distance of approximately 20cm.

• Do not move the FOMA terminal until the data exchange completes.

• If you hold the FOMA terminal in your hand at infrared

communication, be sure to hold it securely so that it is not shaken.

Infrared port

Within approx. 20cm

15 degrees

Cautions on Data Transfer

• Calls, i-mode, and data communication are not available during

infrared communication because the FOMA terminal turns in the

same status as out of service area.

• Data may not be transferred depending on the other party's FOMA

terminal conditions. Depending on the other party's mobile phone

model, the ﬁlter setting of received mail or bookmarks, or group

setting of Phonebook entries may not be reﬂected, or the content

of Deco-mail may not be saved correctly.

• Infrared communication with infrared devices other than L-01B may

result in data not being received or displayed correctly.

• Communication may take a while depending on the amount of data

to be transferred. Also, data may not be received.

• Infrared communication may not be performed successfully under

direct sunlight or ﬂuorescent light, or near another infrared device,

due to the possible interference.

• Attachments to i-mode mail are also forwarded. However, some

types of attachments may not be forwarded.

• If a message text contains pictographs or symbols, they may not

be displayed correctly on a recipient mobile phone or PC which is

incompatible with pictographs.

• Depending on the recipient terminal, mail subject may be received

partially.

• Infrared communication is not available when Lock all, Data access

lock is set, or when Self mode is activated.

• Mails in large size may not be sent correctly.

• When mail is forwarded, only downloaded attachments are

forwarded.

Send/Receive via infrared communication

Sending and Receiving Data One

by One

Sending a Piece of Data

• Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before

sending data.

Example: To send a Phonebook entry

Stand-by display ▶

▶ Move the cursor to a

Phonebook entry ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Send Ir data"

▶ "Focused data" ▶ "Yes"

Note

• A message appears if the destination device cannot be found.

Check the distance and angle with the other party again.

329

Data Management

Receiving a Piece of Data

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Receive Ir data" ▶ "Receive"

▶ "Yes"

Perform infrared transmission operations on

the sending device

Infrared communication starts.

"Yes"

Send/Receive all via infrared communication

Sending and Receiving All Data

You can exchange all data with a PC or another FOMA

terminal at a time.

• To exchange all data, an authentication password is used to

identify the FOMA terminals of both sender and receiver correctly.

An authentication password is any 4-digit number that you selected

before infrared communication and should be entered both on the

sending and receiving devices.

Sending All Data

• Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before

sending data.

Example: To send all Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal

Stand-by display ▶

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Send Ir

data" ▶ "all in phone"

• If an image is set to a Phonebook entry, a warning indicating

that it may take a while to send appears. Select "Yes" to send.

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the

authentication password ▶ "Yes"

Infrared communication starts.

Note

• A message appears if the destination device cannot be found.

Check the distance and angle with the other party again.

• Files in "My picture" cannot be sent at a time (one ﬁle can be

sent at a time).

Receiving All Data

•

Receiving all data overwrites over the data on the FOMA terminal

and deletes all saved data including protected mails. Make sure that

important data is not saved before sending or receiving all data.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Receive Ir data" ▶

"Receive all" ▶ "Yes"

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the

authentication password

Perform infrared transmission operations on

the sending device

Infrared communication starts.

"Yes"

330

Data Management

Using Infrared Remote Control

Function

You can use the FOMA terminal as a remote controller of an

infrared remote controlled device. An i-αppli can send remote

control signals using infrared rays.

• To use the remote controller function, download software that supports the

device. Key operations for remote control vary depending on the software.

• Some devices may not be controlled.

• Depending on the controlled device or ambient brightness, communication

may not be possible.

• While Self mode is activated, the infrared remote controller cannot be used.

Infrared Remote Control Operations

Point the Infrared port of the FOMA terminal at the remote

control sensor on a TV, etc. and operate the FOMA terminal

within approximately 4m away from the device. Depending on

the controlled device and ambient brightness, remote control

may not be possible.

Within the range of

±15 degrees

Within approx. 4m

Infrared port

Viewing a Document

Display a document ﬁle saved on microSD card.

• Save document ﬁles in "OTHER" folder or "OUDxxx (xxx are half-pitch

numbers from 0 to 9)" folder of a microSD card.→ P319

Available ﬁle formats

File type*Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft

PowerPoint, PDF

Extension doc, xls, ppt, pdf

* Files for Word 2007, Excel 2007, and PowerPoint 2007 cannot

be displayed. Also, some ﬁles in a compatible ﬁle format may not

be displayed.

▶ "Media" ▶ "Document viewer" ▶ Select a

document

During zoom display,

the entire document

and the display area

are shown.

Page number/total number of pages

Display magniﬁcation

331

Data Management

Operation while viewing a document

Operation Description

/ / Zoom/restore the previous zoom ratio

J*1

, / Display previous/next page

K*2

, Slide an image Move the display position

*1 Available only in normal view.

*2 Available only in enlarged view.

Note

• Tilting the FOMA terminal to the left automatically switches

display to the horizontal view.

333

Convenient Functions

Using Live Character Park ･････Live Character Park 334

Using Muvee Studio ･････････････････ Muvee Studio 338

Motion Oekaki™ ･････････････････････････････････････ 340

Conﬁrming if the FOMA Terminal is in a FOMA

HIGH-SPEED Area ･･･Check FOMA HIGH-SPEED area

342

M-Toy ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 342

Touch Game ････････････････････････････････････････ 343

Dictionary ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 344

Multiaccess ････････････････････････････ Multiaccess 347

Multitask ･･････････････････････････････････ Multitask 349

Ringing Alarm at Speciﬁed Time ･･････････････Alarm 350

Managing Schedules ･･････････････････････ Schedule 352

Managing To Do Tasks ･･･････････････････ To do list 357

Managing Anniversaries ･･･････Remembering dates 359

Saving Your Own Name and Image ･･･ Own Number 360

Checking Call Duration/Charge ･････････････････････ 361

Setting and Notifying Call Charge Upper Limit

････････････････････････････････････Set call cost limit 363

Using World Time ････････････････････････World time 363

Using Stopwatch ･･･････････････････････ Stopwatch 364

Using Unit Converter ････････････････Unit converter 364

Using the FOMA Terminal as Calculator

･･･････････････････････････････････････････ Calculator 366

Using Sketch Memos ････････････････ Sketch memo 367

Using Text Memos ･･････････････････････ Text memo 369

Using Earphone/Microphone with Switch

･･････････････････Earphone/Microphone with Switch 371

Receiving a Call Automatically when an Earphone/

Microphone with Switch is Connected

････････････････････････････････････････ Auto answer 372

Chiming Hour ･･･････････････････････ Hour indication 373

Checking Status of Memory Usage

･･････････････････････････････････････Memory status 373

334

Convenient Functions

Live Character Park

Using Live Character Park

Display call log entries and the Recent msg log by characters

visually. The third parties you exchange calls and mail

are displayed on the Stand-by display as characters (Live

Character) and animals gathers around the Live Character

depending on the number of calls and mail. Also, when the

Live Character, "Me" is displayed, a greeting message is

displayed or the schedule of the day can be viewed.

• The Live Character Park screen is described with the character type

set to "Animal".

• The Live Character, "Me"→P337

Displaying Live Character Park Screen

• On the Live Character Park screen, only touch operation is available.

Stand-by display ▶ Touch

• : Switch between Live Character Park

screen and Stand-by display.

Live Character

Park screen

Display the Log screen.→P336

Note

• If any item of Display Call/Mail logs (P126) is set to OFF, the

Live Character Park screen does not appear.

• You can change the Live Character Park screen and Live

Character type.→P337

Live Character

• The Live Character can be set to each entry saved in the

Phonebook.→P86

• Random Live Character is displayed each time for the following

entries;

- Entries saved in the UIM Phonebook.

- The Phonebook entries copied to the FOMA terminal due to model

change, etc.

Saving them to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook again (or editing

their entries) displays the set Live Characters.

• The other party that is not saved in the Phonebook is displayed

with "? (question mark)".

• Up to 9 Live Characters can be displayed.

• Live Characters are reset at 4AM everyday. The Live Characters

displayed before today disappear from the Live Character Park

screen.

335

Convenient Functions

Live Character Park fun features!

• For seasonal events such as New Year or the Festival of the

Weaver, or Christmas, etc. the background, etc. changes.

• Depending on the number of calls or mail of a day, animals

gather around a Live Character.

• If there are missed calls or unread mail, Live Character notiﬁes

you by a speech bubble. (Example: For a missed call )

• Occasionally 2 secret Live Characters appear.

Note

•

For calls from anonymous callers, a Live Character is not

displayed.

•

The name saved on the Phonebook entry is displayed under Live

Character. If the Phonebook is locked by "Data access lock", the

phone number appears instead of the name. Also, you can set to

require the Terminal security code to display the Live Character

Park screen from the Stand-by display.→P125

•

If large amount of spam mail arrives and the Live Characters

displayed consists mostly of the spam mail, prevent spam mail. For

details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

•

The total number of missed calls/unread mail displayed on the Live

Character Park screen is the total number for the Live Characters

displayed on the screen. The total number may diﬀer from the total

number displayed on the Stand-by display.

Operating Live Character

Operate Live Character to make a call, send mail, or add

entries to the Phonebook easily.

• Only touch operation is available.

Making a Call

Touch a Live Character of the other party to

call ▶ Touch

• You can make a call by sliding the Live Character, you once

touched and selected, over .

•

If multiple Live Characters are selected, you cannot make a call.

Sending Mail

Select a Live Character and send mail. You can send mail to

up to 5 people at a time.

If more than 5 Live Characters are selected, you cannot send

mail.

Touch Live Character of the other party to send

mail

To select multiple people

Slide the screen to display the area to select. The Live

Characters within the area are selected. (Underneath

of the selected Live Characters is colored.)

• If you touch background, all selections are cleared.

Continued on next page

336

Convenient Functions

Touch

• You can send mail by sliding the Live Character, you once

touched and selected, over .

Adding Entries to the Phonebook

Touch Live Character of the other party to add

▶ Touch

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89)

• You can add to the Phonebook by sliding the Live Character,

you once touched and selected, over .

•

For already added Phonebook entries, you can edit the entry only.

Changing the Position of a Live Character

Move a Live Character to a position of your preference.

Slide a Live Character

Deleting Live Character

Touch and hold any of Live Characters for

1+ seconds

Turn to Live Character edit mode and is displayed for each

Live Character.

Touch of the Live Character to delete

• Touch background: Cancel edit mode.

Note

• Even if a Live Character is deleted, making/receiving calls or

sending/receiving mail redisplay the Live Character.

• Even if Live Characters are deleted, the record of the Log

screen (P336) remains.

Displaying Logs

• Top 3 people with calls and mail each you exchanged the most are

recorded in order of descending number of calls and mail.

Touch on the Live Character Park screen

(P334)

Display the previous logs

When the date list appears, touch

a date to view a record.

The log and the number of calls

The log and the number of mail

Close the Log screen

Log screen

Note

• The logs of the last 30 days are recorded.

• If you exchanged calls/mail with more than 20 people a day,

the older records are deleted. Therefore, the logs may not be

recorded in correct order.

• Slide a Live Character displayed on log over a hot key enables

the following operations.

: Make a call

: Send mail

: Add to the Phonebook (The third party of unregistered

phone number and mail can be added.)

337

Convenient Functions

"Me" Live Character

Your Live Character, "Me" appears when:

• The Live Character Park screen is displayed for the ﬁrst time after

purchasing this FOMA terminal without exchanging any calls and

mail

• All displayed Live Characters are deleted

• Between when the Live Character Park screen is reset and mail and

calls are exchanged

Changing your Live Character

If you touch Live Character, "Me" for 1+ seconds, you can make

settings of your Live Character.

• To select a character type, set

in "Setting Live Character Park

Theme"→P337

• Only touch operation is

available.

• Available to change only when

the Live Character, "Me" is

displayed.

Save changes of the Live Character

Selected Live Character

Live Character list

Scroll bar

Slide to scroll the Live Character list display.

Cancel changes of the Live Character

Change color to the one displayed on the Live

Character list

Restore the changed color of Live Character.

Change color

Change the color of the clothes (or hair) of the selected Live

Character in random order each time this item is touched.

Viewing Schedule Events

If scheduled event is saved and the Live Character, "Me" is

displayed, the content of the event can be viewed.

A message and are displayed

Touch

A schedule event is displayed.

• You can touch / to view other schedule events.

Touch

Exit the schedule event display.

Setting Live Character Park Theme

Set the Live Character Park screen and a character type.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Live Character

Park theme" ▶ Perform the following operations

[WallPaper]

Select the Stand-by display theme from "Zoo", "Park", or "Image".

• If "Image" is selected, select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data

box". In this case, background according to the seasonal events is

not displayed.→P296

[Live Character]

Select a Live Character character type from "Animal" or "Human".

If changing this setting, all Live Characters displayed on the Live

Character Park are switched.

[Done]

338

Convenient Functions

Muvee Studio

Using Muvee Studio

Use prepared muvee style (view switch eﬀect) and music to

create a slideshow with your favorite still images and moving

pictures easily.

• A created slideshow is saved as a moving picture/i-motion (.3gp

format) in "Camera" folder of "i-motion" of "Data box".

▶ "Media" ▶ "Muvee Studio"

File display area

Display the added images and

moving pictures, and the set

title and credit.

Muvee style

Display the selected muvee

style.

Title

Display title set in "Set title".

→P339

Credit

Display a message set in "Set

credit".→P339

Muvee Studio

screen

[Menu] ▶ "Select muvee style" ▶ Select a

muvee style

[Add] ▶ "Image"/"Video" ▶ Select a folder

Use

to move the cursor to a ﬁle to add ▶

[Select] ▶ Repeat the operation to select a

ﬁle ▶

[Done]

•

[Menu] ▶ "Select", and use

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear

all (Select ﬁles to add for up to the maximum number set for a

muvee style).

[Preview]

[Save]

339

Convenient Functions

Note

• BGM, the number of savable ﬁles, and view switch method are

set for each muvee style in advance. You can change BGM.

• If the muvee style is selected or changed and the number of the

saved ﬁles exceeds the maximum number of the savable ﬁles,

menu appears. Select "Change style" and change the muvee

style to adjust with the number of ﬁles or select "Reduce image"

and delete ﬁles to adjust with the selected muvee style.

Deleting an added ﬁle

Use

to move the cursor to a ﬁle to delete and press

[Delete].

Changing the order of ﬁles

Touch and hold a ﬁle for 1+ seconds to enlarge an image and

slide it to a position of your preference. You can also perform the

operation from the Muvee Studio screen sub menu (P338).

Muvee Studio Screen Sub Menu

Muvee Studio screen (P338) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Play order]

Select muvee play order from "Sequential" or "Random".

[Change Order]

Change the order of images.

Select an image to move ▶ "Change Order" from Menu ▶ Use

select the destination location ▶

[Change]

[Save Location]

Select muvee save location from "Handset memory" or "External

memory" (microSD card).

[Duration]

Select playback time duration from "Long" or "Short".

[Delete]

Select and delete a ﬁle.

Select a ﬁle to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"/"No"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Select muvee style]

Select a muvee style.

[Select muvee music]

Change BGM.

[Set title]

Set title displayed in opening.

[Set credit]

Set a streaming message played in ending.

340

Convenient Functions

Motion Oekaki™

You can draw pictures, add stamps, or write texts on a still

image. Also, you can create Flash movies by adding motion to

the drawing.

• The microSD card is required to use Motion Oekaki™.

• Saved as a Flash movie (SWF format) in "OTHER" folder of microSD

card.

To review the data, select "Motion Oekaki" in "Data box".

• A ﬁle larger than 100KB cannot be created (saved).

▶ "Media" ▶ "Motion Oekaki"

Canvas screen

Cancel the previous

operation. Up to the

last 20 operations

can be canceled.

Selected tool

Perform the following operations for drawing

• Only touch operation is available.

[Canvas]

Image canvas : Use an image as canvas to draw on.

• Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data

box".

• A large image is automatically resized maintaining

the aspect ratio.

• Images of 480×800 cannot be resized.

• If horizontal size exceeds 480 pixels or vertical

size exceeds 800 pixels, either the exceeding

size is resized to 480 pixels in horizontal, or 800

pixels in vertical width.

Color canvas : Draw pictures on colored canvas.

[Tool]

(Pen) : Slide your ﬁnger to draw lines and ﬁgures. Slide like

you draw diagonal line to draw a ﬁgure.

• If you touch the selected tool, the type of pen

can be changed.

• Lines and ﬁgures cannot be moved.

(Free line) : Draw a free line.

(Curved line) : Draw an arc between start point and end point.

(Linear line) : Draw a linear line.

(Circle) : Draw a circle.

(Box) : Draw a box.

(Stamp) : Touch and add a stamp.

▶ Select a stamp ▶ Touch the canvas

• Touching the selected tool displays a stamp list

to select another stamp.

• Touch a stamp added on the canvas to display a

frame to move the stamp by sliding. If motion is

added to a stamp, the stamp can not be moved.

• Up to 20 stamps can be added.

341

Convenient Functions

(Text) : Write text.

New : Write new text.

▶ "New" ▶ Enter text ▶ "OK"

• Up to 8 full-pitch characters or 16 half-pitch characters

can be entered.

• After entering text, you can go on to edit the text.

Edit : Edit text.

▶ "Edit" ▶ Touch text to edit ▶ Edit ▶ "OK"

"KEY PAD" : Change text.

"Text size" : Touch (reduce)/ (Enlarge), or slide of

the size bar.

"Text color" : Select a color.

• Touch text to display a frame and slide to move the text.

(Size) : Change the text size.*

Touch (reduce)/ (Enlarge), or slide of the

size bar.

(Color) : Change the text color.*

▶ Select a color

* Appear if (Text) is selected.

(Thickness) : Change pen thickness.

▶ Select a kind of thickness

(Color) : Change the color of pen or ﬁll color.

▶ "Outline color"/"Fill color" ▶ Select a color

• If the selected tool is free line, curved line, or

linear line, "Fill color" is not available.

(Delete) : Delete text, ﬁgures, or lines drawn on canvas.

▶ Touch text or stamp/Slide to enclose lines and

ﬁgures within a frame ▶ (Delete) ▶ "OK"

• Slide like you draw a diagonal line to select all

lines and ﬁgures enclosed within a frame. Text or

stamp included in the enclosed within a frame are

not deleted.

• Use "Select all" to select all texts and stamps. To

delete the lines and ﬁgures with motion added,

select "Select all".

• Use to cancel deletion and return to canvas.

[Motion]

Add motion to the drawing.

▶ Touch a stamp/Slide to enclose lines and ﬁgures ▶ "OK" ▶

"Preset motion"/"Motion line"

Preset motion : Select a preset motion type.

▶ Select a preset motion type ▶ Conﬁrm the

preview ▶ "OK"

• If you select a stamp or a ﬁgure with motion

added and select , the motion is set to "None".

Motion line : Draw a trace line. Along with the line, the selected

stamp and ﬁgures move.

▶ Draw a line ▶ "Preview" ▶ Conﬁrm the preview

▶ "OK"

• Touch "Retry" to re-draw a line.

• If you select a stamp or a ﬁgure with motion

added and select "Oﬀ", the motion is set to

"None".

• Text cannot be added motion.

• Up to 5 motions can be added for a canvas.

• Use to cancel the motion and return to canvas.

• If a stamp with motion added is selected, a tag (Ex.: ) is

displayed. The tag changes depending on a motion type.

• If motion is added to a stamp or a ﬁgure with motion already added,

the newly added motion is applied.

"Menu" ▶ "Preview" ▶ "OK"

Preview motion image.

• "Send": Attach image to mail.

• "Save": Save image.

If saved while is displayed, the drawing order is also

saved. If is displayed, the drawing order is not saved.

Touch operation switches ON and OFF.

Continued on next page

342

Convenient Functions

"Menu" ▶ "Save" ▶ "Yes"

• Saved as a Flash movie (SWF format) in "OTHER" folder of

microSD card.

Note

• The ﬁle created with Motion Oekaki™ is saved as a Flash

movie. You can send the ﬁle to terminals that support receiving

Flash movies. (The Flash movies created by other than Motion

Oekaki™ cannot be attached to mail.)

• The image sent by mail can be viewed only with models that

support Decome-Anime and some models of 905i series or

later. For the intended models, go to LG Mobile web site (http://

jp.lgmobile.com/) from a PC. (Japanese only)

• You can display Motion Oekaki™ ﬁles saved on a microSD card

by performing

▶ "Data box" ▶ "Motion Oekaki". For the sub

menu operations, refer to the case with still images. However

the some items are not available.

•

To reset the drawing on canvas, select "Menu" ▶ "Reset" ▶ "Yes".

Check FOMA HIGH-SPEED area

Conﬁrming if the FOMA Terminal

is in a FOMA HIGH-SPEED Area

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Check FOMA HIGH-SPEED

area" ▶ "Yes"

Note

• Depending on the condition (weather, signal strength, or

network congestion, etc.) when you are using the FOMA

terminal, even if you use the FOMA terminal at same place,

same time, the diagnostic result may diﬀer or the result that

the terminal is out of service area may be displayed.

M-Toy

You can enjoy 5 games by tilting or shaking the FOMA

terminal.

• On the M-Toy screen, only touch operation is available.

▶ "Media" ▶ "M-Toy" ▶ Select a game

▶ Touch the screen ▶ Follow on-screen

instructions

• is displayed when the game starts. You can change the

environment of sound or vibration, or terminate the game, etc.

Kind of games and how to play

Title How to play

FISHING Make a cast and ﬁsh up when catching ﬁsh.

DART Throw 3 darts and compete for gaining sores.

HOMERUN

DERBY When pitched, swing a bat at a right timing and

compete for the number of home-runs.

TOWER Drop a circus man from a balloon to make another

circus man below to carry it on its shoulder to build

a tower. Pile up in a balanced manner not to fall

apart the tower.

APPLE TREE Drop apples from apple trees. Play with others by

rotation and the one who dropped a rotten apple

(in blue purple) loses this game.

WARNING

You play these games by tilting or shaking the FOMA

terminal. Shaking the FOMA terminal too much may hit

people or object, causing accident or malfunction. Make

sure that you grip ﬁrmly the FOMA terminal, do not shake

it more than needs and make sure the safety of your

surroundings while playing.

343

Convenient Functions

Touch Game

Enjoy 2 games you can play using the touch panel.

Touch Golf

You can enjoy golf games such in League mode, Stroke

mode, or Mini game.

▶ "Media" ▶ "Touch game" ▶ "Touch Golf"

Touch the screen ▶ "Empty" ▶ Select a

character

• "Help" provides how to play or screen

instructions.

Animal Town

You can enjoy this game using touch and slide operations.

You can challenge a bonus game depending on your score.

▶ "Media" ▶ "Touch game" ▶ "Animal

Town" ▶ Touch the screen

• "Help" provides instructions on how to play.

"Game Start" ▶ Select a game

344

Convenient Functions

Dictionary

Using Dictionary

Japanese, English-Japanese, and Japanese-English

dictionaries are available.

▶ "Media" ▶ "Dictionary"

Dictionary screen

"JPN dict."/"ENG-JPN dict."/"JPN-ENG dict."

• "Search history": Display search history.

• "Dictionary info.": Display company information providing

dictionaries.

Enter word to search

•

[Input]: Input another word.

•

[▲Page]/

[▼Page]: Display a list page

by page.

Search result list

screen

(Ex.: JPN dict.)

Use

to select a word

The Search result detail screen is displayed.

• For English-Japanese dictionary, press

[Pron.] to listen to

the pronunciation.

• To add to a wordbook, press

[Store].

345

Convenient Functions

Search Result List/Detail Screen Sub Menu

Search result list screen (P344)/detail

screen ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Range select]*

Select a part of search result to copy or search in another dictionary.

▶ Select start point of a range ▶ Select end point ▶ "Copy"/"Srch

other dict"

[Srch other dict]

Change to another dictionary and search.

[Search history]

Display search history.

[Help]

Display description on dictionaries.

* Not displayed on the Search result list screen.

Using Wordbook

Searched words can be added (P344) up to 200 to a

wordbook of each dictionary. Using a workbook, you can

carry out memory training.

• If a word is not added to a wordbook, you cannot select wordbook.

Viewing Wordbook

▶ "Media" ▶ "Dictionary" ▶ "Wordbook" ▶

"JPN dict."/"ENG-JPN dict."/"JPN-ENG dict."

To mark words

Only marked words can be the target

to be at the questioning of memory

training.

Use

to move the cursor to a word

▶

[Unmark/Mark]

Wordbook list

screen

Select words

The Wordbook detail screen is displayed.

• Use

[Mark/Unmark] to unmark or mark.

346

Convenient Functions

Wordbook List Screen Sub Menu

Wordbook list screen (P345) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Sort]

Chronologi. ↑ : Sort by the newest word entry.

Chronologi. ↓ : Sort by the oldest word entry.

Word name ↑ : Sort by alphabetical order or the Japanese syllabary

order.

Word name ↓ : Sort by alphabetical reverse order or the Japanese

syllabary reverse order.

[Delete]

One : Delete a selected word.

Selected : Select and delete multiple words.

▶ Mark words to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all words.

[Mark]

Mark all : Mark all words.

Unmark all : Unmark all words.

[Srch other dict]

Change to another dictionary and search.

[Search history]

Display search history.

[Help]

Display description on dictionaries.

Note

• The wordbook detail screen sub menu is the same as "Search

Result List/Detail Screen Sub Menu" (P345) except "Delete".

Memory Training

Use wordbook for self-grading memory training.

Dictionary screen (P344) ▶ "Wordbook" ▶

"Memory training" ▶ "JPN dict."/"ENG-JPN

dict."/"JPN-ENG dict."

• "Help": Display operation description.

To change the questioning method

"Settings" ▶ set each item.

[Answer]

•

[Skip]: Skip a question.

Check the answer ▶

[NG]/

[Next]/

[OK]

• Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the training ﬁnishes.

• Press

[Menu] to mark words on the Wordbook list screen

(P345). Also, press

[OK] to unmark words on the Wordbook

list screen.

347

Convenient Functions

Multiaccess

Multiaccess is a function that allows you to use 3 lines (voice

call, packet communication, and SMS) concurrently.

Communication type Available line

Voice call 1 line

i-mode, i-αppli, i-mode mail, and packet

communication via a PC 1 line

SMS 1 line

Note

• Multiaccess combinations→P444

• During Multiaccess, communication charges apply to each

communication.

• During a videophone call, Multiaccess is disabled except for

receiving SMS.

Making a Voice Call during Packet

Communication

By launching the New task screen (P349), a voice call can

be made during packet communication such as i-mode.

Example: To make a voice call during i-mode communication

i-mode screen (P183) ▶

(for 1+ seconds) ▶

"Dialing"

The Phone number entry screen appears.

Enter a phone number ▶

Note

• To return to the i-mode communication screen from the Voice

call screen, press

and select "i-mode".

Receiving a Voice Call during Packet Communication

A voice call can be received during packet communication

such as i-mode.

Example: To receive a voice call during i-mode communication

A call arrives

The Incoming call screen appears.

Note

• To return to the i-mode communication screen from the Voice

call screen, press

and select "i-mode".

348

Convenient Functions

Using Other Communications during a Voice Call

During a voice call, you can perform operations such as

sending/receiving mail or connecting to i-mode.

Sending Mails

Voice call screen ▶

(for 1+ seconds) ▶ "Mail"

Create and send a mail

Note

• Creating and sending a mail→P138, P176

Receiving Mails

An icon (P34) notifying of incoming mail appears at the top

of the screen.

Voice call screen

Connecting to i-mode

Voice call screen ▶

(for 1+ seconds) ▶

"i-mode" ▶ "iMenu"

Note

• To return to the Voice call screen, press

▶ "Yes".

349

Convenient Functions

Multitask

This FOMA terminal provides Multitask function that allows

you to start and operate multiple applications concurrently.

Task manager

Launching a New Function

To launch a new function while another function is running,

display the New task screen (Task manager).

While using an application ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

• Unavailable functions are grayed out.

New task screen

Select an application to run

• Available applications vary depending on the currently running

application and its operating status.

[ Dialing]

The Phone number entry screen appears.→P56

[ Mail]

The Mail menu screen appears.→P137

[ i-mode]

The i-mode menu screen appears.→P182

[ i-αppli]

The Software list screen appears.→P275

[ 1Seg]

The 1Seg view screen appears.→P245

[ Search phonebook]

The Search phonebook screen appears.→P92

[ Music]

The Music screen appears.→P263

[ Music&Video Ch]

Display the Music&Video Channel screen.→P254

[ Camera]

The Still image capture screen appears.→P222

[ Kisekae Tool]

Display the Kisekae Tool screen.

[ Schedule]

The Calendar screen appears.→P352

[ To do list]

The To do list screen appears.→P358

Continued on next page

350

Convenient Functions

[ Text memo]

The Text memo list screen appears.→P370

[ Calculator]

The Calculator screen appears.→P366

[ Own number]

The Own number screen appears.→P54

Note

• Pressing

in Stand-by while running a function also displays

the New task screen.

• Multitask combinations→P445

Switching/Viewing Applications

To switch or view applications, display the Task list screen.

While running an application ▶

• Select "New task" on the Task

list screen to display the

New task screen (P349) that

allows you to launch another

application.

Select "Stand-by screen" to

display the Stand-by display.

Task list screen

The running

applications

are listed

Select a function

The screen for the selected application appears.

Terminating an Application

Terminate the currently displayed application and display the

previously displayed application.

While running an application ▶

• Display the application to terminate ﬁrst.

• Repeat these steps to terminate all applications.

Alarm

Ringing Alarm at Speciﬁed Time

The FOMA terminal can be used as an alarm clock. Up to 10

alarms can be registered.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Alarm"

• Press

to set the selected alarm ON/OFF.

Alarm list screen

Icons displayed on the Alarm list screen

Icon Description

Alarm set to "ON".

Alarms with "Set repeat" set

351

Convenient Functions

Move the cursor to an alarm to edit ▶

[Edit]

▶ Perform the following operations

[ (ON/OFF list)]

Set whether to enable the alarm.

[(Set time)]

Set the time the alarm sounds.

[ (Set repeat)]

Select a repetition type.

• If you select "Except holiday", the alarm does not sound on Sundays

and holidays set in "Set holiday" (P355).

If "Weekdays" is selected, perform the following operations to specify

the days of the week for the alarm to sound:

▶

[List] on ﬁeld ▶ Mark days of a week ▶

[Done]

[ (Select type)]

Select an alarm tone.

Music : Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song saved in "Music" of "Data

box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data box".→P307

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data box".→P314

[ (Memo)]

Up to 7 full-pitch or 15 half-pitch characters can be entered. The

entered text is displayed on the Alarm screen that appears when the

alarm sounds.

[ (Turbo Alarm)]

Set whether to enable the Turbo alarm that increases its volume

levels up to the maximum volume by phase and vibrates the terminal.

[ (Snooze interval)]

Select a snooze interval. To deactivate Snooze, select "OFF".

[Done]

Alarm List Screen Sub Menu

Alarm list screen (P350) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Edit]

Edit the selected alarm setting.→P350

[Turn ON/Turn OFF]

Set the selected alarm "ON"/"OFF".

[Multiple choice]

Select alarms and set whether to enable them.

▶ Mark alarms ▶

[ON/OFF]

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

When an "Alarm" or "Schedule"/"To do" alarm reaches the

speciﬁed time

Each function performs as follows.

Alarm

The Alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds and the

illumination lights up.

•

[OFF]: Cancel the alarm. If the snooze is set, it is also

canceled.

•

[Snooze]: Stop the alarm temporarily. When the snooze

interval time is up, the alarm starts sounding again.

•

: Cancel the alarm. If the snooze is set, it continues.

Continued on next page

352

Convenient Functions

• If you leave the FOMA terminal for approximately 1 minute

without any operations, alarm tone stops. If the snooze is set,

the alarm tone repeatedly sounds 12 times at approximately

5-minute intervals. (5 minutes regardless of the setting of the

snooze interval time)

Schedule

The Schedule alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds and

the illumination lights up.

• To stop the alarm, press

[OFF] and then

[OFF] on the

Schedule detail screen. (Perform the same when Snooze is set)

• To sound the alarm tone again, select

[Snooze] ▶ select a

snooze interval.

• If you leave the FOMA terminal for approximately 1 minute

without any operations, alarm tone stops. Then, the alarm tone

repeatedly sounds 12 times at approximately 5-minute interval.

• If you press

or close the FOMA terminal, the alarm tone

will stop temporarily. Then, the alarm tone repeatedly sounds at

approximately 5-minute interval.

To do

The To do alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds, and the

illumination lights up.

• To stop the alarm, press

[OFF] and then

[OFF] on the To

do detail screen.

• If you leave the FOMA terminal for approximately 1 minute

without any operations, alarm tone stops. Then, the alarm tone

repeatedly sounds 12 times at approximately 5-minute interval.

• If you press

or close the FOMA terminal, the alarm tone

will stop temporarily. Then, the alarm tone repeatedly sounds at

approximately 5-minute interval.

When the Alarm and Schedule/To do alarms are set at the same

time

The priority order for the alarms is Alarm → Schedule alarm → To

do alarm.

Schedule

Managing Schedules

Registering Schedule Events

You can register schedule events such as a meeting or

appointment. Up to 200 schedule events can be saved.

Stand-by display ▶

▶ Move the cursor to

the day to save in Schedule ▶

[New] ▶

"General"* ▶ Perform the following operations

* If the 1Seg channel setting is not made, you do not perform

the operation to select "General".

• Select "1Seg Booking" to set time for starting 1Seg.→P248

• When the cursor is on the date and time setting ﬁeld, you can

cancel creating a schedule event by pressing

[Cancel] ▶

"Yes".

[ Subject]

Up to 25 full-pitch or 50 half-pitch characters can be entered. Up to

2 subjects are displayed at the bottom of the Monthly view screen.

Subject is required to register a schedule event. The subject is also

displayed on the Alarm screen that appears when the alarm sounds.

[ (Time)]

Set the date and time to start/end the schedule event.

All day : Register the schedule event for a whole day without

specifying time.

Set time : After setting, use

to move the cursor to the date and

time ﬁeld and enter the start and end date and time of

the schedule event.

• The end time cannot be set earlier than the start time.

353

Convenient Functions

[ Details]

Up to 300 full-pitch or 600 half-pitch characters can be entered.

[ Place]

Up to 25 full-pitch or 50 half-pitch characters can be entered.

[ (Set alarm)]

Set whether to notify of the set starting date and time by alarm.

If you set other than "No alarm", perform the following operations to

select an alarm tone.

▶

[List] on the ﬁeld ▶ Select a type of the alarm tone

Music : Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song saved in "Music" of "Data

box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data box".→P307

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data box".→P314

[ (Set repeat)]

You can set a regular event repeatedly. Perform the following

operations to set the expiration.

▶

[List] on ﬁeld ▶ "Set expiration" ▶ Move the cursor

to the Expire date ﬁeld to set expire date

If "Weekdays" is selected, perform the following steps to specify the

day of the week:

▶

[List] on ﬁeld ▶ Mark days of a week ▶

[Done]

[ (Category)]

Select a category of the schedule event. Icons vary depending on the

selected category.

[ (Secret)]

This option appears when "Secret mode" (P127) is set to "ON". If you

save the created schedule event as secret data, select "ON".

[Done]

Note

• The image displayed when an alarm is notiﬁed does not display

the date when the alarm is set.

• When a schedule event is set start/end time that straddle a

day, repeat "Daily" cannot be set.

• The schedule event is also saved as secret data when "Secret

mode" (P127) is set to "Secret data only".

• The schedule saved as secret data is displayed when "Secret

mode" is set to "ON" or "Secret data only".

• At the set time of a schedule saved as secret data while

"Secret mode" is set to "OFF", the alarm tone sounds, however,

the description of the event does not appear, and "Secret"

appears on the Alarm screen.

354

Convenient Functions

Viewing Scheduled Events

You can view scheduled events from the Calendar screen.

Stand-by display ▶

Calendar screen

(Monthly view)

Highlighted date

The date when an event is scheduled

An event scheduled on the highlighted day

Up to 2 events are displayed. Scheduled events with the

start time passed are not displayed.

•

: Switch the view to yearly.

•

[Prev.]/

[Next]: Switch the view to

monthly.

•

: Return to the current date.

• Numbers in blue indicate Saturdays, and in red indicates

Sundays and holidays.

• You can switch the Calendar screen between Monthly and

Weekly view.→P355

Select a day to view

•

: Switch to the previous/next day.

Schedule list

screen

Date

"Category" icon

Start time to end time, subject

Event scheduled in an area at other than Japan time

Appears for an event scheduled while "Local time zone" (P53)

is set to other than "GMT+9:00".

Alarm icon

Appears when the alarm is set.

Select the event to view

The Schedule detail screen appears.

•

[Mail]: Send the displayed schedule as an attachment of

i-mode mail.

Note

• National holidays are based on "国民の祝日に関する法律及び老人

福祉法の一部を改正する法律 (平成17年法律第43号までのもの) (the

Public Holiday Law and Welfare Law for the Aged, as amended

(Law No. 43, 2005))". Spring Equinox Day and Autumnal

Equinox Day are released in an oﬃcial gazette on February 1st

and may not be exact (as of June, 2009).

355

Convenient Functions

Switching the Calendar screen

The Calendar screen can be viewed on monthly basis or weekly

basis.

Perform the following operations to switch views temporarily.

▶

[Menu] on the Calendar screen ▶ "Weekly view"/"Monthly

view"

Perform the following operations to switch the default display.

▶

[Menu] on the Calendar screen ▶ "Settings" ▶

[List]

on Default view ﬁeld ▶ "Month view"/"Week view" ▶

[Done]

An "All day" schedule event

is set for the day

Set time for the schedule event

•

[Prev.]/

[Next]: Display weekly

schedules of the previous week or next week. Weekly view

screen

Calendar Screen Sub Menu

Monthly view (P354)/Weekly view (P355) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Add new]

[Set holiday/Clear holiday]

Set or clear a selected day as a holiday. Up to 100 days including

holidays can be set.

To set a day as a holiday, move the cursor to the "Holiday" ﬁeld ▶

[Edit] ▶ edit holiday name ▶ move the cursor to the Set repeat

ﬁeld and select an item from the following ▶

[Done].

On the day : Set the highlighted date as a holiday.

Weekly : Set day of the highlighted date as a weekly holiday.

Monthly : Set the highlighted date as a monthly holiday.

Annually : Set the highlighted date as an annual holiday.

Duration(2~31)

: Set a speciﬁed period after the highlighted day

between 2 to 31 days as holidays. Set the period of

days in the "Duration(2~31)" ﬁeld.

If you select "Weekly", "Monthly", or "Annually", perform the following

operations to set the expiration of repeat.

▶

[Select] on ﬁeld ▶ "Set expiration" ▶ Move the

cursor to the Expire date ﬁeld to set expire date

To cancel holiday setting, select "Clear holiday" ▶ "Yes". For a holiday

set as "Weekly", "Monthly", "Annually", or "Duration(2~31)", select "Yes"

on the conﬁrmation of repeat deletion.

[Weekly view/Monthly view]

Switch the calendar view between weekly and monthly.→P355

Continued on next page

356

Convenient Functions

[Go to date]

The Calendar screen for the speciﬁed day appears. Use

to move

the cursor to the position in the "Enter date you Want to go to" ﬁeld,

and use dial keys to enter the date and time.

[Delete]

Previous entries : Delete all events scheduled prior to today.

Delete all : Delete all scheduled events.

[Send all via IrDA]

Send all scheduled events via infrared communication.→P329

[Memory info.]

The status of scheduled events and holidays is displayed.

[Reset holiday]

Delete the holidays set in "Set holiday".

[Settings]

Set the calendar display format. After setting, press

[Done].

Default view

: Set display format of the calendar which appears when

activating the Schedule.

Monthly view type

: Select a start day of the week from Sunday or Monday.

Schedule List Screen/Detail Screen Sub Menu

Schedule list screen (P354)/detail screen ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Add new]

[Send via]

Send the selected schedule event as an attachment of i-mode mail

or via infrared communication.

[Edit]

Edit the selected schedule event.→P352

[Go to date]

The schedule list for the speciﬁed day appears. Use

to move the

cursor to the position in the "Enter date you Want to go to" ﬁeld, and

use dial keys to enter the date and time.

[Delete]

Delete the selected schedule event and holiday.

• On the Schedule list screen, you can select and delete multiple

schedule events.

▶ Mark schedule events to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

[Copy to microSD]

Copy the selected schedule events to a microSD card.

*1 Not available when the default holidays or settings in "Set

holiday" is selected.

*2 Not available if a holiday set as the default is selected.

*3 Not displayed on the Schedule detail screen.

357

Convenient Functions

To do list

Managing To Do Tasks

Registering To Do Tasks

Up to 50 tasks can be registered.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "To do list" ▶

[New] ▶

Perform the following operations

• When the cursor is in Set Date&Time ﬁeld, you can cancel

creating a To do task by pressing

[Cancel] ▶ "Yes".

[ (Category)]

Select the category of the task. Icons vary depending on the

selected category.

[ Subject]

Up to 200 full-pitch or 400 half-pitch characters can be entered.

Subject is displayed on the To do list screen. Subject is required to

that appears when the alarm sounds.

[ Details]

Up to 20 full-pitch or 40 half-pitch characters can be entered.

[ (Set Date&Time)]

Set the due date of the To do task.

[ (Priority)]

Select a priority of the task. Icons vary depending on the selected

priority.

[ (Status)]

Select the task status. Icons vary depending on the selected status.

When "Completed" is selected, you can move the cursor to

Completion date ﬁeld to edit the date and time of completion.

• When "Completed" is selected, the due date and the subject are

crossed out, and the task is listed below tasks with status other

than "Completed" on the To do list screen.

[ (Set alarm)]

Set whether to notify of the due date and time with an alarm tone.

If you set other than "No alarm", perform the following operations to

select an alarm tone.

▶

[Select] on the ﬁeld ▶ Select a type of the alarm tone

Music : Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song saved in "Music" of "Data

box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data box".→P307

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data box".→P314

[Done]

358

Convenient Functions

Viewing To Do Tasks

You can view the registered tasks in list.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "To do list"

• Registered tasks are listed in the order of High → Low → No

priority. When two or more tasks have the same priority level,

the task with earlier due date is listed ﬁrst.

When due dates are the same, the one with earlier registered

date is listed ﬁrst.

• For tasks with "Status" set to "Completed", the due date and

the subject are crossed out and the task appears below tasks

with status other than "Completed".

To do list screen

"Status" icon

Due date and subject

Priority

/ / High/Low/No priority

Tasks with the alarm set

Task registered in an area at other than Japan time

Appears for a task registered while "Local time zone" (P53) is

set to other than "GMT+9:00".

Select a task to view

The To do detail screen appears.

•

[Mail]: Send the displayed To do task as an attachment of

i-mode mail.

To Do List Screen/Detail Screen Sub Menu

To do list screen (P358)/detail screen ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Add new]

Create a new task.→P357

[Send via]

Send the selected tasks as an attachment of i-mode mail or via

infrared communication. You can also send all tasks via infrared

communication.

[Edit]

Edit the selected task.→P357

[Change status]

Change "Status" of the selected task.→P357

[Delete]

Delete the selected To do task.

• On the To do list screen, you can select and delete multiple To do

tasks.

▶ Mark To do tasks to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

[Copy to microSD]

Copy the selected tasks to a microSD card.

[View calendar]

Display the current date of the calendar.

359

Convenient Functions

Remembering dates

Managing Anniversaries

You can use Date counter to ﬁnd the remaining days until an

important event quickly. Also, use Date search to search the

date when speciﬁed days from a certain day elapsed.

Date counter

Registering in Date Counter

The remaining days of up to 30 important events can be

saved.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Remembering

dates" ▶ "Date counter" ▶

[Add] ▶

Performs the following operations

[ (Set date)]

Set the date of an event.

[ Memo]

Up to 40 full-pitch or 80 half-pitch characters can be entered. Memo

is displayed on the Date counter list screen. Memo is required to

[ (Category)]

Select the event category. Icons vary depending on the selected

category. Press

[List] to select a category and an icon from the

Icon list screen.

[Done]

Viewing on Date Counter

You can view the remaining days before the registered event.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Remembering

dates" ▶ "Date counter"

Date counter list

screen

Counter

Display with − : Display the elapsed days from the set date

to today.

Display with + : Display the remaining days from today to

the set date.

Select an event to ﬁnd the days

The Event detail screen appears.

•

[Edit]: Edit the event.

•

[Delete]: Delete the event.

360

Convenient Functions

Date Counter List/Detail Screen Sub Menu

Date counter list screen (P359)/detail screen

▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Add new]

Save a new event.→P359

[Edit]

Edit the selected event.→P359

[Delete]

Delete the selected event.

• On the Date counter list screen, you can select and delete multiple

events.

▶ Mark events to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

Using Date Search

You can check the date after speciﬁed days passed from a

speciﬁed date. For example, you can easily ﬁnd the date 100

days after today. You can check the date up to 9,999 days

after a speciﬁed date.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Remembering

dates" ▶ "Date search" ▶ Perform the following

operations

•

[Reset]: Reset the set value.

[From]

Specify the date to start searching from.

[After]

Enter the number of days after the date speciﬁed on "From" using

dial keys. For example, to ﬁnd the date 100 days after "From", enter

"100".

[Result]

Display the date after the speciﬁed days passed.

Own Number

Saving Your Own Name and

Image

You can register your personal information to the FOMA

terminal.

▶ "Own Number" ▶

[Detail] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

Own number

detail screen

[Menu] ▶ "Edit"

The Edit own number screen appears.

Enter the information ▶

[Done]

For steps to register, refer to Step 2 in "Adding Entries to the

FOMA Terminal Phonebook" (P84). You cannot set secret data.

• The pre-installed own number cannot be changed or deleted.

Note

• Even if you change a mail address using i-mode, the address

saved to this function is not updated automatically.

361

Convenient Functions

Own Number Detail Screen Sub Menu

Own number detail screen (P360) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Mail/URL]

Create a mail using the saved mail address or connect to the site

using saved URL.

Compose mail : Create i-mode mail addressed to other than own

number or own mail address.

Attach to mail : Create i-mode mail with own number information

attached.

Compose SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to other than

own number.

Connect to URL : Connect to the site using saved URL.

[Edit]

Edit the Own number detail screen.→P360

[Send Ir data]

Send the information on the Own number detail screen via infrared

communication.→P328

[Copy]

Copy item : Select and copy items from the Own number detail

screen.

to microSD : Copy information from the Own number detail screen

to a microSD card.

[Customize call]

Change the saved number other than the own number and make a

call to the new number.

[Reset]

Delete all registered personal information.

Checking Call Duration/Charge

You can check the last and accumulated call duration and

costs of voice and videophone calls.

• Voice call duration and digital communication duration (videophone

call duration) are displayed as the call duration. The call duration

includes both incoming and outgoing calls.

• Call cost includes only outgoing calls. However, if calls were made

to toll free numbers or the directory assistance service (104),

"0 YEN" or "＊＊＊＊＊＊ YEN" is displayed.

• Call costs are stored on the UIM. When a diﬀerent UIM is used,

the accumulated call costs stored on the UIM are displayed

(accumulation started in December, 2004).

• You can reset the displayed call duration and call cost.

• The displayed call duration and cost are approximate values and

may be diﬀerent from actual ones. Note that call cost does not

include the consumption tax.

Note

• The duration/cost for i-mode communication and packet

communication are not included. For checking i-mode usage

charges, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA

version".

• The cost for sending Chaku-moji is not included.

362

Convenient Functions

Call duration

Checking Call Duration

You can check the duration of the previous and accumulated

duration of voice and videophone calls.

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Call duration"

[Last voice call]

Display the duration of the last voice call.

[Last video call]

Display the duration of the last videophone call.

[Total voice calls]

Display the total duration of voice calls after the last reset.

[Total video calls]

Display the total duration of videophone calls after the last reset.

Note

• The displayed Call duration returns to 0 (zero) seconds and

starts counting when the duration exceeds 99 hours 59

minutes and 59 seconds.

• The ringing and dialing durations are not counted.

Resetting individual items of "Call duration"

Move the cursor to the item to reset ▶

[Reset] ▶ enter the

Terminal security code ▶ "Yes".

Resetting all items of "Call duration"

You can reset all items at once.

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reset all" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

▶ "Yes"

Check call costs

Checking Call Costs

Call cost includes only outgoing calls.

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Call costs" ▶ "Check

call costs"

[Last voice call cost]

Display the last call cost.

[Last video call cost]

Display the last videophone call cost.

[Total calls cost]

Display the total calls costs after the last reset.

[Reset date&time]

Display the last reset date and time.

Note

• International call costs using WORLD CALL are counted. Call

costs when using other international telephone services are not

counted.

Resetting Total Calls Cost

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Call costs" ▶ "Check

call costs"

[Reset] ▶ Enter the PIN2 code ▶ "Yes"

363

Convenient Functions

Set call cost limit

Setting and Notifying Call

Charge Upper Limit

Set the limit of total call cost so that you will be notiﬁed when

the cost reached the limit.

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Call costs" ▶ "Set call

cost limit"

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Set limit]

Set whether to limit total calls cost.

[Call cost limit]*

Set the limit of the total calls cost.

[Notiﬁcation]*

Select how to notify that the total calls cost has reached its limit.

OFF : You will not be notiﬁed.

Sound+Icon : You will be notiﬁed with the call cost icon and the call

cost tone.

Icon : You will be notiﬁed with the call cost icon.

* Set "Set limit" to "ON" to make this setting available.

When the limit is exceeded

(call cost icon) appears on the Stand-by display. When

"Notiﬁcation" is set to "Sound+Icon", the call cost tone sounds

when you ﬁnish the call that exceeds the limit.

Hiding the displayed call cost icon

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Call costs" ▶ "Delete call cost icon" ▶

enter the Terminal security code.

World time

Using World Time

You can view the date and time in major cities around the

world stored in the FOMA terminal.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "World time"

•

[Search]: Display the city names in list and select. You can

also use dial keys to enter a city name and search.

Use

to move to the destination region ▶

[Zoom in]

Date and time of Home (own country)

Time diﬀerence from Home

Daylight saving indicator

Appear if daylight saving is set.

The selected city name, date, and

time

World time

setting screen

Use

to move to the destination city ▶

[Set]

364

Convenient Functions

World Time Setting Screen Sub Menu

World time setting screen (P363) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Search city]

Display the cities in list and select. You can also use dial keys to

enter a city name and search.

[Daylight Saving ON/Daylight Saving OFF]

Set/cancel the Daylight savings time.

Note

• If the display language of the FOMA terminal is set to Korean,

this option is not available.

Stopwatch

Using Stopwatch

You can use the FOMA terminal as a stopwatch.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Stopwatch"

•

[Start/Stop/Resume]: Start/stop/resume measurement.

•

[Reset]: Clear the measurement result.

•

[Lap]: Displayed during the measurement. Each time you

press this, up to 20 lap times can be displayed.

Unit converter

Using Unit Converter

You can convert the units for measuring currency, surface,

length, weight, temperature, volume, or velocity.

Converting Currency Units

This function is useful in occasions such as exchanging from

YEN to USD.

Setting Exchange Rate

Before converting, set the exchange rate.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Unit converter" ▶

"Currency"

World time

setting screen

Move the cursor to the unit ﬁeld ▶

[Rate]

• "YEN", "USD", "EURO", and "Currency1 to 3" are registered by

default.

365

Convenient Functions

Perform the following operations

[(Currency name ﬁeld)]

Press

[Select] to change the currency. Up to 10 full-pitch or 20

half-pitch characters can be entered.

• "YEN" in the top row cannot be changed.

[(Exchange rate ﬁeld)]

Set the exchange rate. Up to 10 digits (including the decimal point)

can be entered. Up to 2 digits after the decimal point can be entered.

For example, to exchange between USD and YEN (example: one US

dollar is 120 yen), set 120 to "YEN" and 1 to "USD".

•

[.]/

: Enter the decimal point.

•

: Delete from the last entered digit.

[Done]

Converting Currencies

Convert the one currency to another based on the rates set

for those 2 currencies.

Select two currencies from the Currency unit

ﬁelds in the Currency exchange screen (P364)

•

[List]: The Currency list screen is displayed.

Enter the amount in the Value entry ﬁeld of the

benchmark currency

The converted amount is displayed in the other Value entry ﬁeld.

You can enter/convert in either Value entry ﬁeld.

• Available maximum number of digit is as follows.

- Whole number only: 10 digits

- Decimal number only: 10 digits (8 digits after decimal point)

- Including whole and decimal numbers: 9 digits (excluding

decimal point)

• If the number after conversion exceeds the following, no more

digit can be entered.

- Whole number only:10 digits

- Decimal number only: 8 digits (6 digits after decimal point)

- Including whole and decimal numbers: 14 digits (excluding

decimal point)

- Exceeding 2,147,483,647

• If the currency in the Currency unit ﬁeld is changed after the

amount was entered, the new amount will be displayed in the

lower Value entry ﬁeld using the amount in the upper Value

entry ﬁeld as the benchmark.

•

: Enter the decimal point.

•

: Clear from the last entered number.

•

[Reset]: Clear all entered numbers.

Converting Area Units

Convert one deﬁned area unit to another type of deﬁned area

unit.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Unit converter" ▶

"Surface"

Select two units in the Surface unit ﬁelds

•

[Unit]: The unit list screen is displayed.

Enter the value in the Value entry ﬁeld of the

benchmark surface

The converted value is displayed in the other Value entry ﬁeld.

You can enter/convert in either Value entry ﬁeld.

• The description of the values entry is the same as in

"Converting Currencies".→P365

366

Convenient Functions

Converting Temperature Units

You can convert temperature between Fahrenheit and

Celsius.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Unit converter"

▶ "Temperature" ▶ Enter the temperature in

the Value entry ﬁeld of either "Celsius(℃)" or

"Fahrenheit(F)"

The converted temperature is displayed in the other Value entry

ﬁeld. You can enter/convert in both Value entry ﬁelds.

• From −40 to 309, or up to 10 digits (including − (minus) and

the decimal point) can be entered.

•

[(−)]: Enter − (minus) before the value.

•

: Enter the decimal point.

•

: Clear from the last entered digit.

•

[Reset]: Clear all entered numbers.

Converting Length, Weight, Volume, and

Velocity

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Unit converter" ▶

"Length"/"Weight"/"Volume"/"Velocity"

Perform further operations as the same in "Converting Area

Units" (P365).

Calculator

Using the FOMA Terminal as

Calculator

You can use the Calculator to perform arithmetic operations

or functional computations.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Calculator"

Calculator screen

Calculation display

Arithmetic operation (+, −, ×, ÷(/), =)

Use

and

for operation.

Calculate

•

: Enter the decimal point.

•

: Enter ( ) (parentheses).

•

: Delete from the last entered digit.

•

[AC]: Clear all entered numbers and calculated results.

367

Convenient Functions

Calculator Screen Sub Menu

Calculator screen (P366) ▶

[Func.] ▶

Perform the following operations

[＋/−]

Switch the operators, +/− of the entered number.

[sin]

Used for the trigonometric function.

[cos]

Used for the trigonometric function.

[tan]

Used for the trigonometric function.

[log]

Used for the logarithmic function.

[ln]

Used for the natural logarithm.

Calculate the natural logarithm of the speciﬁed positive value

(logarithm with the base of e).

[exp]

Used for the exponential function.

[sqrt]

Used to calculate the square root of a number.

[deg]

Set the unit of angle to "degree".

[rad]

Set the unit of angle to "radian".

Radian expresses an angle using the constant number of π (180

degrees equal to π radians). One radian (360 degrees/2π) is

approximately 57.29578 degrees; One degree (2π/360 degrees) is

approximately 0.01745 radians (π=3.141592653).

Sketch memo

Using Sketch Memos

Using the display as canvas, you can make a drawing with

ﬁngers, etc. and save it.

Creating Sketch Memos

Create and save a sketch memo. Up to 10 sketch memos

can be saved.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Sketch memo" ▶

[New]

New sketch

screen

Perform the following operations

• For the following, only touch operation is available.

[ (Draw)]

Draw lines using a ﬁnger, etc.

[ (Erase)]

Erase a drawing where traced with a ﬁnger, etc. Touch and hold with

a ﬁnger, etc. for 1+ seconds to erase all drawings.

Continued on next page

368

Convenient Functions

[ (Set)]

Set pen width or pen colors. After the settings, touch "Set".

Pen height : Set pen width.

Eraser height : Set eraser width.

Pen color : Set pen color.

Background color : Set background color.

[ (Save)]

Save a sketch memo.

[ (Cancel)]

Cancel a currently creating sketch memo.

Viewing Sketch Memos

You can list and view saved sketch memos.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Sketch memo"

Sketch memo list

screen

Move the cursor to a sketch memo to view ▶

[View]

The Sketch memo detail screen appears.

•

[Edit]: Edit the selected sketch memo.

• Use

to display the previous or next sketch memo.

Sketch Memo List/Detail Screen Sub Menu

Sketch memo list screen (P368)/Sketch memo

detail screen (P368) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[View]

Display the detail screen of the selected sketch memo.

[Add new]

Save a new sketch memo.→P367

[Set as]

Set the selected sketch memo to a screen respectively. The set

image is saved in "Camera" folder of "My picture" in "Data box".

Stand-by display : Set as the Stand-by display.

Voice call display : Set as the Incoming voice call screen.

Video call display : Set as the Videophone call incoming call

screen.

Mail sending image : Set as the Mail sending screen.

Mail receiving image : Set as the Mail receiving screen.

Mail complete image : Set as the Mail receive results screen.

Wake-up display : Set as the Wake-up screen.

[Save to Databox]

Save the selected sketch memo to Data box.

• On the Sketch memo list screen, you can select and save multiple

sketch memos.

One : Save the selected sketch memo.

Selected : Save multiple sketch memos.

▶ Mark sketch memos to save ▶

[Save] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

All : Save all sketch memos.

369

Convenient Functions

[Edit]

Edit the selected sketch memo.→P367

[Rename]

Edit the selected sketch memo title. Up to 15 full-pitch or 30 half-

pitch characters can be entered.

[Delete]

Delete the selected sketch memo.

• On the Sketch memo list screen, you can select and delete multiple

sketch memos.

One : Delete a selected sketch memo.

Selected : Delete multiple sketch memos.

▶ Mark sketch memos to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all sketch memos.

[View timestamp/Hide timestamp]

Show/hide the date and time.

[Send via mail]

Create mail with the selected sketch memo attached.

*1 Not displayed on the detail screen.

*2 Not displayed on the list screen.

Text memo

Using Text Memos

Creating Text Memos

Create and save a text memo. Up to 50 text memos can be

saved.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Text memo" ▶

[New] ▶

Perform the following operations

[ Category]

Select a type (category) of text memo. Icons vary depending on the

selected category.

[ Subject]

Enter a text memo. Up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters

can be entered. The subject is required to save a memo.

[Done]

370

Convenient Functions

Viewing a Text Memo

You can list and view saved memos.

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Text memo"

Text memo list

screen

Select a text memo to view

The Text memo detail screen appears.

•

[Edit]: Edit the selected text memo.

•

[Mail]: The Compose message screen with "Category" and

the contents of "Subject" already entered in the message text

appears.

Text Memo List/Detail Screen Sub Menu

Text memo list screen (P370)/detail screen ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Add new]

Save a new text memo.→P369

[Send via]

Send the selected text memo as i-mode mail or via infrared

communication. You can also send all memos via infrared

communication.

[Edit]

Edit the selected text memo.→P369

[Delete]

Delete the selected text memo.

• On the Text memo list screen, you can select and delete multiple

sketch memos.

▶ Mark text memos to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

[Copy to microSD]*

Copy the selected text memo to the microSD card.

* Not displayed on the detail screen.

371

Convenient Functions

Earphone/Microphone with Switch

Using Earphone/Microphone

with Switch

You can connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with

Switch (optional) to the FOMA terminal to make and receive

calls.

• To connect the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (optional) or Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with Switch (optional) to the FOMA terminal,

use the Earphone Plug Adapter for External connector terminal

(optional).→P29

Setting Switch Actions

Specify the phone number to call using the Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with Switch via a memory number of

the Phonebook in the FOMA terminal.

• The phone number saved as "Phone number 1" in the FOMA

terminal Phonebook will be speciﬁed.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Headset" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Switch call]

Select "ON" to make calls by pressing the switch of the Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with Switch.

[Memory number]*

If the Phonebook search screen appears select the other party.

* Set "Switch call" to "ON" to make this setting available.

Making a Call Using Switch

Press the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone

with Switch to make a voice call to the number assigned to

the memory number of the Phonebook set under Headset

(P371).

Press the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch once

To end the call, press the switch of the

Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch for

1+ seconds

Receiving a Call Using Switch

A call arrives ▶ Press the switch of the

Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch

Answer the call.

• When a videophone call arrives, the camera image is sent to

the other party.

To end the call, press the switch of the Flat-

plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch for

1+ seconds

372

Convenient Functions

Answering Another Call during a Call

If you subscribe to Call waiting and activated the service, you

can answer the second call during a voice call by pressing

the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch.

A call arrives ▶ Press the switch of the

Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch

The active voice call is placed on hold and you can answer the

incoming call. The 3-way connecting screen appears.

To reject an incoming call without answering

Press the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch for 2+ seconds.

To end the call, press

• While the 3-way connecting screen is displayed, you cannot

terminate the call by pressing the switch of the Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with Switch.

To switch to the held voice call while connecting

3- way

Press the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone

with Switch for 2+ seconds.

Note

• When using the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch,

a call will not be terminated or placed on hold by closing the

FOMA terminal during the call regardless of the setting of

"Close setting" (P74).

Auto answer

Receiving a Call Automatically

when an Earphone/Microphone

with Switch is Connected

You can set to answer a call automatically after the set ring

time has elapsed with the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone

with Switch (optional) connected.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Auto answer" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Auto answer]

Selecting "ON" to answer calls automatically using the Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with Switch.

[Delayed time]*

Enter the time before answering the call automatically.

* Set "Auto answer" to "ON" to make this setting available.

Note

• If you set "Delayed time" shorter than the Ring time of the Voice

mail or Call forwarding service, or the Response time of the

Record message, this function takes precedence.

373

Convenient Functions

Hour indication

Chiming Hour

Set whether to sound the indication tone on the hour every

hour.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Date&Time" ▶ "Hour

indication" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Set sound]

Specify the indication tone.

• Press

[List] to display the Indication tone list screen. Press

[Play] to sound the selected indication tone.

[Time]*

Set the time to sound the indication tone.

* Set "Set sound" to other than "OFF" to make this setting available.

[Done]

Note

• For the notiﬁcation volume at the setting conﬁrmation, "Popup

tone" is used, and for the notiﬁcation volume at chiming hour

"Alarm/Schedule" is used.→P101

Memory status

Checking Status of Memory

Usage

You can check the status of memory usage and the free

space of the FOMA terminal. If a microSD card is inserted,

you can also check the status of the microSD card memory

usage.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Memory status"

Select a memory to check

Data box memory : Display data saved in "Data box".

Personal info. : Display the number and data saved in the

Phonebook, Schedule, Holiday, Memo, To

do, and Date counter.

UIM memory : Display the number and the amount of data

saved on the UIM.

microSD : Display the memory status of the microSD

card.

375

Character Entry

For details about Kuten code list, see "Kuten Code List" (PDF format) contained in the bundled CD-ROM or available at the

DOCOMO's web site.

Adobe

Reader

is required to open "Kuten Code List" in PDF format. If the program is not installed on your PC, install

Adobe

Reader

contained in the bundled CD-ROM.

For details about using the program, see "Adobe Reader Help".

Entering Characters ････････････････････････････････ 376

Character Input Method ････････････････････････････ 377

Conﬁguring Character Input Settings

････････････････････････････････････････ Input setting 383

Editing/Saving Common Phrases

･･･････････････････････････････Edit Common phrases 384

Copying/Cutting/Pasting Text ･･････････････････････ 385

Entering Characters Using Kuten Code

･･････････････････････････････････････････Kuten code 386

Saving Often-used Words ･･･････････User dictionary 387

Saving Keywords for Deco-mail Pictograms

･･････････････････････････････････ Picto. D dictionary 388

Resetting Learning Dictionary ････ Reset learnt info 388

Using Downloaded Dictionary

･･･Download dictionary 388

Creating a Leaning Dictionary

･････････････････････････････････ Learning Dictionary 389

376

Character Entry

Entering Characters

Various operations require entering characters, such as

registering to the Phonebook or creating a message. Learn

how to enter characters to fully use the FOMA terminal.

Character Entry Screen

The Character entry screen displays the current input mode

and operation guide.

Character entry

screen

Available number of characters

Indicate the remaining number of characters or bytes that

can be entered further.

Input mode ﬁeld

Display input mode.

Switching Input Modes

Switch input modes for entering various types of characters.

In some input modes, you can switch between full-pitch and

half-pitch characters.

• Depending on the input screen, input mode switching may not be

available.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Mode]

[Change]

Each time you press

[Change], the input mode switches.

Pressing

[To full/To half] switches between full-pitch and

half-pitch (excluding Hiragana or Kanji input mode and Korean

input mode).

• You can also switch the input mode by pressing

[Mode]

and then press

, or switch between full-pitch and half-pitch

characters by pressing

漢: Hiragana and Kanji input mode

カ (ｶﾅ) : Katakana input mode

a/A

(ab/AB

)

: Alphabetic input mode

1 (

): Numeric input mode

韓

: Korean input mode

*1 Press

[Upper/Lower] to switch between upper and

lower case.

*2 Appear when SMS input character is set to "JP/

KR(70Chara)".

377

Character Entry

Character Input Method

In the Hiragana and Kanji input mode, you can enter

characters using the Prediction input function that predicts

conversion options from the characters being entered, and the

Next phrase prediction function that predicts the next phrase.

• You can turn the Prediction input function on or oﬀ in "Prediction" in

"Input setting" (P383).

• For characters that can be entered with keys, refer to "List of

Characters Assigned to Dial Keys" (P443).

Entering Characters with the FOMA Terminal Opened

Example: To enter characters in the Hiragana and Kanji input

mode

Enter characters on the Character entry

screen (P374)

Character input ﬁeld

Prediction option ﬁeld

Conversion options predicted by the Prediction input function

appear.

•

If the Prediction is set to "OFF", prediction options will not appear.

• When characters are entered in the Hiragana and Kanji,

Katakana, or Alphabetic input mode, and after ﬁxed period of

time, the cursor moves to the right automatically (Auto cursor

function). The Auto cursor function can be disabled, or can

change the time before the cursor moves.→P383

The cursor also moves when pressing

•

[Set]: Fix the entered characters. In the Hiragana and

Kanji input mode, press this key to ﬁx the characters without

converting them.

•

[KanaA1]: Display conversion options in combination of

Katakana and alphanumeric characters.

•

[Conv.]: Display conversion options without using the

Prediction input function. Press this key when conversion

option to look for is not displayed as prediction options.

Example of entering text

Entering "ドコモ (DOCOMO)"

Enter "どこも (DOCOMO)" in Hiragana and Kanji mode

"ど (DO)": Press

5 times →

once

"こ (KO)": Press

5 times

"も (MO)": Press

5 times

▶ Use

to move the cursor to prediction options ▶

Use

to move the cursor to "ドコモ (DOCOMO)" ▶

[Select]*

* On character entry screen other than the Message

text entry screen for i-mode mail, "Set" is displayed.

Operations other than character entry

Operation Description

Switch between upper and lower case or

add a voiced/semi-voiced symbol.

The key is not available for characters

that cannot be switched or added, or in

the Numeric input mode.

Insert line feeds after characters are

converted/ﬁxed. Only

is available in the

Numeric input mode.

Display the characters assigned to a key

in the reverse order by pressing this key

before characters are ﬁxed.

(1+ seconds) Restore the converted or ﬁxed characters

to the previous state.

Continued on next page

378

Character Entry

Operation Description

Erase a character in front of the cursor.

(1+ seconds) Erase all converted or ﬁxed characters

after the cursor. When the cursor is at

the end of text, all characters will be

erased.

(1+ seconds) Select text range in which decoration or

copy or paste is applied.

Paste the copied or cut data to the

position after the cursor.

Copy*Copy the selected text.

Cut*Cut the selected text.

Store word*Save the selected text to dictionary.

For further operations, refer to Step 2 in

"Saving Often-used Words" (P387).

Decoration*<Start>

Apply decoration to the selected text. For

further operations, refer to "Specifying a

Decoration before Entering Characters"

(P143).

<None>

Delete the decoration applied to the

selected text.

* Appear when text is selected by dragging the range at

message entry of mail.

Use

to move the cursor to the Prediction

option ﬁeld

•

[KanaA1]: Display conversion options in combination of

Katakana and alphanumeric characters.

•

[Conv.]: Display conversion options without using the

Prediction input function. Press this key when conversion

option to look for is not displayed as prediction options.

Select the characters to convert

The conversion of the entered characters is ﬁxed.

Conversion options, if applicable, predicted by the Next phrase

prediction function appear in the Prediction option ﬁeld. If

desired characters are displayed, perform Steps 2 and 3 to

select and enter the characters.

• Press

to cancel conversion and resume entering

characters.

Converting characters without Prediction function

Perform the following steps if desired characters are not

displayed as prediction options or if Prediction is set to "OFF":

Enter characters on the Character entry screen (P376)

[Conv.]

Conversion options for the area where the

cursor is pointed (conversion area) will

appear.

• To change the highlighted area, use

to move the cursor.

Use

to move the cursor to the conversion option area

Select the characters to convert

The conversion of the entered characters is ﬁxed. As each

phrase is converted, the next phrase will be highlighted.

379

Character Entry

Entering Characters with the FOMA Terminal Closed

Enter characters on the Character entry

screen (P376)

Character input ﬁeld

Prediction option preview ﬁeld

Touch the Prediction option preview ﬁeld to display conversion

options predicted by the Prediction input function.

•

If the Prediction is set to "OFF", prediction options will not appear.

• When characters are entered in the Hiragana and Kanji,

Katakana, or Alphabetic input mode, and after ﬁxed period of

time, the cursor moves to the right automatically (Auto cursor

function). The Auto cursor function can be disabled, or can

change the time to ﬁx the entered characters.→P383

Also, touch / to move the cursor.

• "Set": Fix the entered characters. In the Hiragana and Kanji

input mode, press this key to ﬁx the characters without

converting them.

• [KanaA1]: Display conversion options in combination of

Katakana and alphanumeric characters.

• [Conv.]: Display conversion options without using the

Prediction input function. Press this key when conversion

option to look for is not displayed as prediction options.

Example of entering text

Entering "ドコモ (DOCOMO)"

Enter "どこも (DOCOMO)" in Hiragana and Kanji mode

"ど (DO)": Touch "た TA" 5 times → "A/a" once

"こ (KO)": Touch "か KA" 5 times

"も (MO)": Touch "ま MA" 5 times

▶ Touch the Prediction option preview ﬁeld ▶ Touch

"ドコモ (DOCOMO)" ▶ Touch "Select"*

* On character entry screen other than the Message

text entry screen for i-mode mail, "Set" is displayed.

Operations other than character entry

For "Copy", "Cut", "Store word", "Decoration Start",

"Decoration None", refer to "Operations other than

character entry" of "Entering Characters with the FOMA

Terminal Opened" (P377).

Operation Description

Touch this key before characters are ﬁxed,

and the characters assigned to a key are

displayed in reverse order.

Touch after text entry is ﬁxed, to paste the

copied/cut data after the cursor. Also, if

touched for 1+ seconds right after being

pasted, the pasting is undone.

Insert line feeds after characters are

converted/ﬁxed.

"CLR" Erase a character after the cursor.

"CLR"

(1+ seconds) Erase all converted/ﬁxed characters after the

cursor. When the cursor is at the end of text,

all characters will be erased.

Touch the Prediction option preview ﬁeld

• [KanaA1]: Display conversion options in combination of

Katakana and alphanumeric characters.

• [Conv.]: Display conversion options without using the

Prediction input function. Press this key when conversion

option to look for is not displayed as prediction options.

Select the characters to convert

The conversion of the entered characters is ﬁxed.

• Touch to cancel conversion and resume entering

characters.

Continued on next page

380

Character Entry

Converting characters without Prediction function

Perform the following steps if desired characters are not

displayed as prediction options or if Prediction is set to "OFF":

Enter characters on the Character entry screen (P376)

"Conv."

The area where the cursor

is pointed (conversion

area) will be converted.

• To change the

highlighted area, use

/ to move the

cursor.

Move the cursor to

characters to convert ▶

"Select"

Conversion

option area

The conversion of the entered characters is ﬁxed.

If text is converted by phrase, the next phrase will be highlighted.

Character Entry Screen Sub Menu

• Displayed items vary depending on the options or entered

characters on the Character entry screen.

• Refer to "Message Text Entry Screen Sub Menu" (P140) for

information on the items displayed on the Message text entry

screen of i-mode mail.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Common phrases]

Select and enter a saved common phrase.

Input : Select and enter a saved common phrase.

Edit : You can create and save a common phrase, or edit a saved

common phrase.→P384

[Edit character]

Copy/cut characters by specifying a range, and paste them.→P385

[Edit user dict.]

[Quote]

Phonebook : Quote an entry from Phonebook.

Own number : Quote your phone number. The Terminal security

code is required to quote.

Bar code : Bar code reader starts and an information scanned

is quoted.

[Input setting]

Auto cursor : Set whether to automatically ﬁx the entered

characters and move the cursor.→P383

Operation guide : Set whether to display the operation guide.

Prediction : Activate or deactivate the Prediction input

function.→P383

[Special input]

Space : Enter a space before the cursor.

Changing line : Enter a linefeed before the cursor.

Kuten code : Enter a character using the Kuten code.→P386

[Cancel]

Discard all entered characters.

381

Character Entry

Entering Common Phrases

You can enter text using common phrases saved in the

FOMA terminal.

• "Original" and "Password" are empty by default.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Common phrases" ▶ "Input"

Select a category ▶ Select a common phrase

The common phrase is entered.

Note

• Common phrases can be edited/registered.→P384

•

Press mail address or

[http://] that appears at URL direct entry to

enter a common phrase saved in Common phrases, "Internet". Press

[http://] to switch common phrases to be entered.

•

The Terminal security code entry is required for password entry.

Entering Pictographs/Symbols/Emoticons

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Pict/

Sym]

Pictograph list

screen

Use

[Change] to select an input mode

絵: Pictograph input mode

記: Symbol input mode

顔: Emoticon input mode

Continued on next page

382

Character Entry

Switch input modes

Pictograph input mode : Use

[Picto./Picto. D] to switch

between pictograph and Picto. D

(Deco-mail pictogram).

Symbol input mode : Use

[FullSymb/HalfSymb] to switch

between full-pitch and half-pitch

characters.

Emoticon input mode : Use

[Category] to select a

category from the displayed category

list.

•

[▲Page]/

: Display the

Pictograph list screen/the Symbol

list screen in order of screen number.

For the Emoticon list screen, switch

categories.

•

[▼Page]/

: Display the

Pictograph list screen/the Symbol

list screen in reverse order of screen

number. For the Emoticon list screen,

switch categories.

Select a desired pictograph/symbol/emoticon

The selected character will be entered.

• If you proceed to press

[Select] in the input option area, the

selected character will be entered in series.

• If a pictograph/symbol is selected by direct touch on the

Pictograph list screen/the Symbol list screen, the pictographs/

symbols around the touched pictograph/symbol are enlarged.

Touch and select the pictograph/symbol to enter.

Note

• Depending on the current input screen, some characters may

not be entered or mode/type may not be switched.

Editing emoticons

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Character input" ▶ "Edit

emoticon"

The Edit emoticon screen appears.

Select a category ▶ Move the cursor to an emoticon to edit

▶

[Edit]

The Character entry screen appears with the selected

emoticon entered.

Change the emoticon ▶

[Set]

The new emoticon is saved overwriting the existing one.

The sub menu during Emoticon edit is the same one during

Common phrase edit.→P385.

Entering in Korean

This FOMA terminal allows you to enter text in Korean

exclusively in SMS.

• To enter in Korean, set the input mode of SMS message to

"JP/KR(70Chara)".→P178

SMS message text entry screen ▶

[Mode]

▶ Use

[Change] to move the cursor to "韓"

Enter text

• Combine consonants and vowels when entering text.

383

Character Entry

Key operations on entering in Korean

Consonant

Operation

Consonant

Operation

1 5

* 5

# 7

2 7

* 7

# 7

4 8

5 8

Vowel Operation Vowel Operation

3 3

* 3

3 3

* 3

6 6

* 6

6 6

* 6

0 0

Input setting

Conﬁguring Character Input

Settings

Conﬁgure various settings related to character entry.

Setting Prediction Input Functions

Set whether to enable the Prediction function that displays

conversion options matching with the beginning of the

characters being entered, or the Next phrase prediction

function that displays the predicted next phrase, in the

Hiragana and Kanji input modes.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Input setting" ▶ "Prediction" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Note

• You can also set the Prediction input function by performing

the following steps:

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Character input" ▶ "Prediction

input" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Fixing Entered Characters Automatically

You can conﬁgure the input method so that the cursor moves

to a new position for the next input automatically after a set

time so that another character can be entered with the same

key.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Input setting" ▶ "Auto cursor" ▶ "OFF"/"Slow"/

"Normal"/"Fast"

• Setting "OFF" disables Auto cursor function.

384

Character Entry

Edit Common phrases

Editing/Saving Common Phrases

Save frequently used greetings or phrases as common

phrases to enter them quickly.

Saving Common Phrases

Up to 10 newly deﬁned common phrases can be saved in

"Original" and up to 10 passwords used for the Internet in

"Password".

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Common phrases" ▶ "Edit"

The common phrase categories are listed.

Edit common

phrase list screen

"Original"/"Password" ▶ Move the cursor to a

number to add a phrase ▶

[Edit]

• Up to 64 full-pitch or 128 half-pitch

characters can be entered.

Edit common

phrase screen

Enter text to save ▶

[Set]

The common phrase is saved and available to view in the Display

all screen.

Editing Pre-installed Common Phrases

You can edit a pre-installed common phrase.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Common phrases" ▶ "Edit" ▶ Select a common

phrase category

"Greeting" Common

phrase list screen

385

Character Entry

Move the cursor to a phrase ▶

[Edit]

The Common phrase edit screen appears with the selected

common phrase entered.

Edit the common phrase ▶

[Set]

The common phrase is saved and available to view in the Display

all screen.

Note

•

You can also edit common phrases saved in a user-deﬁned folder.

• You can also save or edit a common phrase by performing the

following steps:

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Character input" ▶ "Edit

common phrase"

• For saving/changing password, the Terminal security code is

required.

Common Phrase Edit Screen Sub Menu

Edit common phrase list screen (P384) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Reset all]

Restore all common phrases to their defaults.

[Cancel]

Terminate editing a common phrase.

Common Phrase List/Display All Screen Sub Menu

Common phrase list/Display all screen (P384)

▶

[Menu]

▶

Perform the following operations

[Delete one]

Delete the selected common phrase.

[Reset 1 item]

Restore the selected common phrase to its default.

[Category reset]

Restore all common phrases in the category to their defaults.

[Cancel]

Terminate editing a common phrase.

*1 A common phrase in "Password" cannot be selected.

*2 Not displayed in the sub menu of the Display all screen.

Copying/Cutting/Pasting Text

You can copy/cut characters and paste them to other

locations or on other screens. Copied/cut characters can be

pasted any number of times until the FOMA terminal is turned

oﬀ or another copy/cut is performed.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Edit character" ▶ "Copy"/"Cut"

Use

to move the cursor to start point ▶

[Select]

•

[SelAll]: Select the entire message.

•

[Top]: The cursor moves to the top of the message text.

•

[End]: The cursor moves to the end of the message text.

Use

to move the cursor to end point ▶

[Select]

Open the character entry destination screen ▶

Use

to move the cursor to pasting position

[Menu]

▶

"Edit character"

▶

"Paste"

• To undo a cut or paste operation, press

[Menu] ▶ "Edit

character" ▶ "Undo".

Continued on next page

386

Character Entry

Note

• You can also copy/cut and paste characters by performing the

following operation;

[Menu] (for 1+ seconds) ▶ Use

to move the cursor to

start point ▶

[Select] ▶ Use

to move the cursor to end

point ▶

[Select] ▶ "Copy"/"Cut" ▶ Open the character entry

destination screen ▶ Use

to move the cursor to pasting

position ▶

• Pressing

(for 1+ seconds) also undo a cut or paste

operation.

• If copied or cut text contains more characters than the

allowable number of characters, the excess characters are

truncated when pasted.

• Characters can be pasted only if copied or cut text can be

entered in the destination screen. For example, Hiragana or

Kanji characters cannot be pasted in the mail address ﬁeld

(half-pitch alphanumeric characters).

• Line feeds in a copied text are replaced with half-pitch spaces

if the text is pasted to an input screen that does not allow line

feeds.

• When pasting in the Deco-mail message after copying or

cutting, the decoration information will also be pasted (except

for some decoration information).

Kuten code

Entering Characters Using

Kuten Code

You can enter a 4-digit Kuten code to enter a letter, numeric

character, or symbol, etc.

• For the Kuten code list table, refer to "Kuten Code List" on the

bundled CD-ROM in PDF format.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Special input" ▶ "Kuten code"

Kuten Code entry

screen

Enter the Kuten code (4-digit number) for the

character ▶

[Select]

The associated character is entered.

• If you proceed to press

[Select], the selected characters

will be entered in serial.

387

Character Entry

User dictionary

Saving Often-used Words

You can save up to 100 words that is not listed as

conversion options, or words with diﬃcult readings,

along with the readings. Saved words will be displayed as

conversion options when the readings are entered.

Character entry screen (P376) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Edit user dict."

•

[Select]: Edit the saved word.

Stored word list

screen

[Add] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Reading]

Enter the reading of the saved word to ﬁnd. Up to 20 full-pitch

Hiragana characters only can be entered.

• Space cannot be saved.

[Word]

Enter a word to save. Up to 20 full-pitch or 40 half-pitch characters

can be entered. On the Character entry screen, after the characters

set as "Reading" are entered, the saved word appears as a

conversion option.

• The line feed cannot be saved.

[Store]

The word is saved to the dictionary.

Note

• You can also save a word by performing the following operation;

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Character input" ▶ "User

dictionary"

• You can save already entered characters to a dictionary.

[Menu] (for 1+ seconds) ▶ use

to move the cursor to

start point ▶

[Select] ▶ use

to move the cursor to end

point ▶

[Select] ▶ "Store word" ▶ for further operations,

refer to Step 2 in "Saving Often-used Words" (P387).

• Korean cannot be saved to the dictionary.

Deleting Words

You can delete one word or all words saved on "User dictionary".

Example: To delete one word

Move the cursor to a word to delete on the

Stored word list screen (P387)

[Menu] ▶ "Delete one" ▶ "Yes"

The selected word will be deleted.

To delete all words

On the Stored word list screen, press

[Menu] ▶

"Delete all" ▶ "Yes" .

388

Character Entry

Picto. D dictionary

Saving Keywords for Deco-mail

Pictograms

Save keywords for each Deco-mail pictogram so that you can

enter your intended Deco-mail pictograms quickly.

Up to 5 keywords for a Deco-mail pictogram can be saved.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Character

input" ▶ "Picto. D dictionary" ▶ Select a Deco-

mail pictogram

Select a Keyword store ﬁeld ▶ Enter a keyword

•

[DelAll]: Delete all saved keywords.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected keyword.

Note

• When creating a message text and relevant keyword is entered,

"Picto. D" appears on a soft key. Press

[Picto. D] to display

Deco-mail pictograms with forward match to the keyword in

list where you can select and enter your intended Deco-mail

pictogram.

• The Deco-mail pictograms acquired via download or mail

attachment are saved with a keyword, "あたらしいでこめえもじ"

that you can later edit/add.

Reset learnt info

Resetting Learning Dictionary

Restore the learned data regarding character entry saved in

the FOMA terminal to its default.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Character

input" ▶ "Reset learnt info" ▶ "Yes"/"No"

Learned data

Learned data consists of recorded characters, which were

entered and converted by selecting from conversion options, or

ﬁxed by pressing

[Set] without conversion. The next time you

enter the same ﬁrst character, the learned word appears as the

ﬁrst conversion option.

389

Character Entry

Download dictionary

Using Downloaded Dictionary

You can enable dictionaries downloaded from i-mode

sites, etc. and use them for character conversion. Up to 5

dictionaries can be enabled.

• Up to 10 dictionaries can be stored in the FOMA handset.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Character

input" ▶ "Download dictionary"

Downloaded

dictionary screen

Move the cursor to a dictionary to enable ▶

[ON]

Each checked dictionary is enabled.

To disable a dictionary

Move the cursor to an available dictionary and press

[OFF].

Download Dictionary Screen Sub Menu

Downloaded dictionary screen (P389) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

•

[View]: Display details of the dictionary.

[Delete one]

Delete the selected dictionary.

[Delete all]

Delete all listed dictionaries.

Learning Dictionary

Creating a Learning Dictionary

Automatically create a learning dictionary that will be

displayed as prediction options at character entry using

content of sent mail. Copy sent mail, in advance, from the

model you used before.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Character

input" ▶ "Create Learn. dic."

The Guidance screen appears.

[OK]

391

Network Services

Available Network Services

The following DOCOMO network services are available for

the FOMA terminal.

Service name Subscription Monthly

charge Service name Subscription Monthly

charge

Voice Mail

Service Required Charged Dual Network

Service Required Charged

Call Waiting Required Charged English

Guidance Not required Free

Call Forwarding

Service Required Free Multi Number Required Charged

OFFICEED Required Charged

Nuisance Call

Blocking Service Not required Free Public mode

(Drive mode)

Not required Free

Caller ID

Notiﬁcation

Service

Not required Free Public mode

(Power OFF)

Not required Free

Caller ID

Request Service Not required Free Melody Call

Required Charged

* Caller ID Notiﬁcation Service→P54

Public mode→P76, P77

Melody Call →P102

• You cannot use network services while you are out of service area or

where there is no signal reception.

• For subscription or inquiries, contact "General Inquiries" at the back

of this manual.

• "OFFICEED" is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription.

For details, visit the DOCOMO's web site for corporations

(http://www.docomo.biz/d/212/). (Japanese only)

• This manual describes an overview of network services using menus

on the FOMA terminal. For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[Network Services]".

Voice Mail Service ･･･････････････････････ Voice mail 392

Call Waiting ･････････････････････････････Call waiting 394

Call Forwarding Service ･････････････ Call forwarding 396

Nuisance Call Blocking Service

･･････････････････････････････ Nuisance call blocking 397

Caller ID Request Service･････････ Caller ID request 398

Dual Network Service ･････････････････Dual network 398

English Guidance ･･････････････････ English guidance 399

Service Numbers ･････････････････ Service numbers 399

Setting In-call Arrival Act ･････ Set in-call arrival act 400

Selecting Actions for an Incoming Call during a Call

･･･････････････････････････････････････Arrival call act 400

Setting Remote Control ･････････････Remote control 401

Multi Number ･･････････････････････････Multi Number 401

OFFICEED ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 403

Saving and Using Services

･････････････Additional service (USSD Registration) 403

Saving Additional Guidance ････････ Additional guide 404

392

Network Services

Voice mail

Voice Mail Service

When your FOMA terminal is out of service area or turned

oﬀ, or you cannot answer a call, this service automatically

responds with reply message to incoming voice/videophone

calls and records messages.

• The message can be recorded up to 3 minutes per message, up to

20 messages each for voice and videophone calls, and retained for

up to 72 hours.

• When a message is recorded, (with the number of received

messages) appears on the Stand-by display. In Stand-by,

▶ use

to select to play a recorded voice message by making a

call to the Voice mail service center.

• When Record message (P77) is activated concurrently, set the

ringing time of the Voice mail service shorter than the Response

time of Record message to use the Voice mail service ﬁrst.

• If you do not answer an incoming voice or videophone call when the

Voice mail service is activated, the call is recorded as a Missed call

in Received calls and appears (with the number of the Missed

calls).

Basic Flow of Voice Mail Service

Step 1: Activate the Voice mail service

Step 2: A call arrives*

Step 3: Caller records a message

Step 4: Play the message

* If you are in a hurry and want to record a message without listening

to the response message of the Voice mail service, press "#" while

you hear the message to switch to the recording mode.

Note

• In Step 2, when you are in a service area and the FOMA

terminal is turned on, a ring tone sounds until the set ring time

elapses. If an incoming call is not answered while a ring tone is

sounding, the call is connected to the Voice mail service center.

The ring time can be changed.

• In Step 3, when a message is recorded, appears (with the

number of recorded messages) on the Stand-by display, and a

missed call is recorded in Received calls. However, if you set

the ring time to zero, missed calls are not recorded in Received

calls.

• Even when the Voice mail service is deactivated, you can

forward an incoming voice call to the Voice mail center manually

using the sub menu.→P73

393

Network Services

Using Voice Mail Service

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Voice

mail" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Activate]

Activate the Voice mail service.

▶ "Yes" ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the ringing time with dial keys ▶

[Done]

[Set ring time]

Set time to connect to the Voice mail service center after call arrival.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Use dial keys to enter the ringing time ▶

[Done]

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Voice mail service.

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status of the Voice mail service.

Press

[Menu] to activate/deactivate the Voice mail service, or set

a ring time, etc.

[Play messages]

Make a call to the Voice mail service center and play the recorded

voice mail message.

▶ "Play(voice call)"/"Play(videophone)" ▶ "Yes"

[Voice mail setting]

Make a call to the Voice mail service center and change settings

according to the voice guidance.

▶ "Setting(voice call)"/"Setting(videophone)" ▶ "Yes"

[Check messages]

Check whether new messages are recorded.

[Notify missed call]

When a call arrives while the FOMA terminal is turned oﬀ or out of

service area, an SMS is sent to notify you of missed calls after the

FOMA terminal is turned on or in a service area.

Activate : Activate the Notify missed call service.

Deactivate : Deactivate the Notify missed call service.

Check setting : Check the setting status of the Notify missed call.

[Del. voice mail icon]

Delete displayed in the icon display area.

[Tone/Vibration message notiﬁcation]

Set whether to notify you of a new recorded message with

illumination and a ring tone.

[Voice mail setting for videophone]

Set whether to activate voice mail for videophone calls.

Note

• Even when you activate "SMS一括拒否 (Reject All SMS)", the

notiﬁcation will be received.

394

Network Services

Call waiting

Call Waiting

When another call arrives during a call, in-call arrival tone

sounds to notify you of the call arrival. You can place the

active call on hold and answer another call. You can also

place the active call on hold to make another call.

• To use Call waiting, set "Arrival call act" (P400) to "Answer" in

advance. If this option is set to other item, an incoming voice call

during active voice call cannot be answered even if Call waiting is

activated.

• Call waiting is not available when:

- Dialing a number or ringing the other party

- A voice call arrives during a videophone call

- A videophone call arrives during a voice call

Using Call Waiting

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Call

waiting" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Activate]

Activate Call waiting.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate Call waiting.

[Check setting]

Check whether Call waiting is activated or deactivated.

Holding the Active Call to Answer Another

Call

When a call arrives during a voice call, in-call arrival tone

sounds from the earpiece and the Incoming call screen

appears.

A call arrives ▶

The active voice call is placed on hold and you can answer the

incoming call. A message "Connecting 3-way" appears (3-way

connecting screen).

•

[Switch]: Switch between the active call and the held call.

•

[Spk ON/Spk OFF]: Switch Hands-free ON and OFF.

•

[End]: End the active call.

Note

• If you deactivate Call waiting, you cannot answer a call even

when you hear in-call arrival tone during a call with "Set in-call

arrival act" activated.

Holding the Active Call to Make a New Call

You can place the active voice call on hold and make a new

voice call.

Voice call screen (P57) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "New

call" ▶ Enter a phone number ▶

The new call becomes active. The previous call is placed on hold

and the 3-way connecting screen appears.

• To switch to a held call, press

[Switch].

• To end the held call, switch to the held call by performing the

above step and press

395

Network Services

Terminating the Active Call to Answer

Another Call

You can end the active voice call and answer an incoming

voice call. This is available even when Call waiting is

activated.

A call arrives ▶

[Menu] ▶ "End active call"

The Voice call termination screen appears, and the Incoming

voice call screen for the new call appears.

To end the held call and answer the incoming call

Press

[Menu] ▶ "End" ▶ "End held call".

• When connecting 3-way, the active call is placed on hold,

and you can answer the incoming call.

[Answer]

In-Call Arrival Screen Sub Menu

When a call arrives during a call,

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Voice mail]

Connect an incoming call to the Voice mail service center.

[Call rejection]

Reject an incoming call and hang up.

[Call forwarding]

Forward an incoming call to the speciﬁed number.

[End active call]

Terminate the active call and a new call is arriving.

[Mute/Unmute]

Set the active call to mute/unmute.

*1 Not available unless you subscribe to the Voice mail service.

*2 Not available unless you subscribe to the Call forwarding service

or you have speciﬁed a forwarding number.

3-way Connecting Screen Sub Menu

3-way connecting screen ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Switch]

Switch between the active call and held call.

[End]

Select and end a call.

End active call : Terminate the active call. The held call

automatically becomes active.

End held call : Terminate the held call.

End all calls : Terminate all calls.

[Mute/Unmute]

Set the active call to mute/unmute.

[Send my info]

Create i-mode mail with Own number entered in the message text.

→P138

[Search phonebook]*

Search for a Phonebook entry.→P92

* Not available when the Phonebook is accessed. To use this

function, terminate applicable functions from the Task list screen.

→P350

396

Network Services

Call forwarding

Call Forwarding Service

When your FOMA terminal is out of service area, turned

oﬀ, or a call was not answered within the set ring time, this

service forwards a voice/videophone call.

• Videophone calls are forwarded only to a videophone call capable

destination complying with 3G-324M.

• The subscriber to the Call forwarding service is charged for

forwarding a call to a destination.

• This service is not available for some billing plans.

• When Record message (P77) is activated concurrently, set the ring

time of the Call forwarding service shorter than the Ring time of

Record message to use the Call forwarding service ﬁrst.

• If an incoming voice or videophone call is not answered while the

Call forwarding service is activated, the call is recorded as a Missed

call in Received calls and appears (with number of missed

calls).

Basic Flow of Call Forwarding Service

Step 1 : Register the phone number of the forwarding

destination

Step 2 : Activate the Call forwarding service

Step 3 : A call arrives

Step 4 : Forward the call to the destination

Note

• In Step 3, when you are in a service area and the FOMA

terminal is turned on, a ring tone sounds until the set ring time

elapses. If an incoming call is not answered while a ring tone

is sounding, the call is forwarded to the forwarding destination.

The ring time can be changed.

• In Step 4, when the call is forwarded, the call is recorded as a

Missed call in Received calls. However, if you set the ring time

to zero, missed calls are not recorded in Received calls.

• Even when the Call forwarding service is deactivated, you can

forward an incoming call to the forwarding destination manually

from the sub menu.→P73

Using Call Forwarding Service

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Call

forwarding" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Activate]

Activate the Call forwarding service.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Set the following items ▶

[Done]

number : Register a forwarding number. Press

[Search] to ﬁnd the number from the

Phonebook.

[Select] ▶ Enter the forwarding

number ▶

[Done]

Set ring time : Set time to forward the call after call

arrival.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Call forwarding service.

397

Network Services

[Register the forwarding number]

Change the forwarding number. Press

[Search] to ﬁnd a number

from the Phonebook.

▶

[Select] ▶ Enter the forwarding number ▶

[Done]

• A conﬁrmation appears. Selecting "Yes" changes the forwarding

number and activates the Call forwarding service.

[Setting if forwarding number busy]*

Set whether to connect to the Voice mail service center when the

forwarding number is busy.

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status of the Call forwarding service.

* Not available unless you subscribe to the Voice mail service.

Enabling or Disabling Forwarding Guidance

• This cannot be operated from menu.

• For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network Services]".

Enter "1429" ▶

Follow the voice guidance.

Nuisance call blocking

Nuisance Call Blocking Service

This service rejects incoming nuisance calls. After a phone

number is registered to be rejected, incoming calls from the

registered number are automatically rejected, and the voice

guidance is played to the caller.

• Up to 30 phone numbers can be registered.

• Even when a call arrives from the registered number, the ring tone

does not sound. Also, the call is not recorded in Received calls.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Nuisance

call blocking" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Register nuisance caller]

and set the number to be rejected.

[Register selected number]

Set speciﬁc phone numbers to be rejected.

Phonebook : Search entry from the Phonebook and set.

Recent call logs : Select entry from Recent calls and set.

Manually : Enter a phone number and set.

[Delete all entries]

Delete all phone numbers registered as nuisance callers.

[Delete last entry]

Delete the last saved phone number. Repeat the same steps to

delete phone number one by one from the last saved number.

[Check the number of entries]

Check the number of registered entries.

398

Network Services

Caller ID request

Caller ID Request Service

For a voice/videophone call without caller ID, this service

plays a voice guidance requesting the caller to send caller ID

and terminates the call automatically.

• Calls that did not arrive due to the Caller ID request service are not

recorded in Received calls, and the Missed call notiﬁcation screen

does not appear.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Caller ID

request" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Activate]

Activate the Caller ID request service.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Caller ID request service.

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status of Caller ID request service.

Note

• This service is applicable only to calls with "User unset" as a

reason for hiding caller ID.

Dual network

Dual Network Service

This service allows you to use the mova service with your

FOMA terminal phone number. You can switch between

FOMA and mova depending on the service area.

• You cannot use the FOMA service and mova service concurrently.

• Switch the Dual Network Service from the terminal which is not

using the service.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Dual network" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Dual network switching]

Switch from mova to FOMA to make the FOMA terminal available.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Network security code

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status.

Note

• To switch from FOMA to mova, operate from the mova terminal.

• Switching the network during communication forcibly

terminates the connection.

399

Network Services

English guidance

English Guidance

The voice guidance played when a network service such

as the Voice mail service is activated or when the FOMA

terminal is out of service area can be played in English.

Outgoing call (Guidance to you)

Language Description

Japanese Play the guidance in Japanese.

English Play the guidance in English.

Incoming calls (Guidance to the caller)

Language Description

Japanese Play the guidance in Japanese.

Japanese+

English Play the guidance in Japanese ﬁrst then in English.

English+

Japanese Play the guidance in English ﬁrst then in Japanese.

• When the caller is using this service at the same time, the caller's

settings for making calls have precedence over the receiver's

settings for receiving calls. For example, if the receiver sets the

language to Japanese+English and the caller does not set to

English, the English guidance will not be played.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "English guidance" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Guidance setting]

Set the guidance.

Outgoing+

Incoming call : Set the language for incoming and outgoing calls.

Select the language after selecting "Yes".

Outgoing call : Set the language for outgoing calls.

Select the language after selecting "Yes".

Incoming call : Set the language for incoming calls.

Select the language after selecting "Yes".

[Check guidance setting]

Check the current setting of the guidance setting.

Service numbers

Service Numbers

You can make a call to docomo Information Center or contact

for Repairs.

• Depending on your UIM, the items displayed may diﬀer or some

items may not be displayed.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Service numbers" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[ドコモ故障問合せ (Repairs)]

Make a call for repairs.

[ドコモ総合案内・受付 (General Inquiries)]

Make a call to docomo Information Center.

[海外紛失・盗難等 (Loss or theft of FOMA terminal overseas]

Make a call for loss or theft of the FOMA terminal overseas.

[海外故障 (Failures encountered overseas)]

Make a call for failures of the FOMA terminal encountered overseas.

400

Network Services

Set in-call arrival act

Setting In-call Arrival Act

Activate or deactivate incoming call actions set in "Arrival

call act". You can also check the current settings.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Set in-call

arrival act" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Activate]

Activate the action set in "Arrival call act"

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the action set in "Arrival call act"

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status of the Set in-call arrival act.

Arrival call act

Selecting Actions for an

Incoming Call during a Call

You can set how to respond to an incoming voice/videophone

call during a call when you subscribe to the Voice mail, Call

waiting, or Call forwarding service.

• You cannot answer an incoming call during a call if you do not

subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting, or Call forwarding service.

• Activate "Set in-call arrival act" to use "Arrival call act". If Call

waiting is set to activate, activating "Set in-call arrival act" is not

required.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Arrival

call act" ▶ Perform the following operations

Answer : A call arrives. Incoming call action will follow

the settings of the Voice mail, Call waiting,

and Call forwarding services when they are

activated.

Voice mail : The Voice mail service answers a call. Calls

are connected to the Voice mail service even

when Call waiting is activated.

Call forwarding : Forward a call to the registered phone

number. Calls are forwarded even when the

Voice mail or Call waiting is activated.

Call rejection : Reject incoming call.

401

Network Services

Remote control

Setting Remote Control

You can control the Voice mail or Call forwarding service, etc.

through a land-line/pay phone with the touch tone system or

a DOCOMO mobile phone.

• To use the Voice mail or Call forwarding service from overseas,

Remote control must be activated beforehand.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Remote control" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Activate]

Activate Remote control.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate Remote control.

[Check setting]

Check the setting status of the Remote control.

Multi Number

This service allows you to use up to 2 extra phone numbers,

Additional number1 and Additional number2, as your FOMA

terminal in addition to the basic subscription phone number.

• On the Dialing/Incoming screen, names corresponding to the Multi

Number (Basic number/Additional number1/Additional number2)

appear.

• When you dial from Dialed calls or Received calls, the previously

dialed or received Multi Number is displayed, and this number is

used to dial.

Number setting

Registering Additional Numbers

You can register or set a name, a number, and a ring tone for

additional numbers.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Multi number" ▶ "Number setting" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Basic number : Name]

[Phone number]

Display your phone number (Basic number).

[Additional no1: Name]

[Phone number]

[Additional no2: Name]

Continued on next page

402

Network Services

[Phone number]

[Done]

Setting Primary Number

You can set a registered additional number as the primary

number used for making calls.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Multi number" ▶ "Set multi number"

▶ "Basic number"/"Additional number1"/

"Additional number2" ▶ "Yes"

Checking Primary Number Settings

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Multi number" ▶ "Check setting" ▶ "Yes"

Setting Caller ID for Each Call

Enter a phone number

▶ "Multi number" ▶ Select a name of the

additional number

Setting Ring Tone and Image

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Multi number" ▶ "Ring tone & image setting"

▶ Select a number to set ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Individual setting]

Select whether to set the ring tone or image.

[Ring alert]*

Set the ring tone.

MUSIC : Use

to move the cursor to the lower ﬁeld, and select

from Chaku-Uta Full

songs saved in "Music" of "Data

box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

i-motion : Use

to move the cursor to the lower ﬁeld, and select

a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of "Data

box".→P307

Melody : Use

to move the cursor to the lower ﬁeld, and select

from melodies saved in "Melody" of "Data box".→P314

OFF : Set no ring tone.

[incoming image]*

Set an image to be shown on the incoming call screen.

Image : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data box".

→P296

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data box".→P307

* Available when "Individual setting" is set to "ON".

403

Network Services

[Done]

Note

• If "Select ring tone" (P100) or "Call & Mail image" (P109) is set

with a moving picture/i-motion with audio/video for a speciﬁc

caller and change either of "Ring tone" or "Incoming call image",

the default sound or image is played for "Ring tone" or "Incoming

call image" with the setting unchanged.

OFFICEED

"OFFICEED" is an internal voice call service with ﬁxed

charges oﬀered for the speciﬁed in-building mobile

communication system (IMCS). It requires a separate

subscription. For details, visit the web page "NTT docomo

Business Online" (http://www.docomo.biz/d/212/).

(Japanese only)

Additional service (USSD Registration)

Saving and Using Services

When DOCOMO oﬀers a new network service, you can add

the service into the menu. Up to 10 new network services

can be saved.

Adding Services

Save a service name and "Service code (USSD)" provided by

DOCOMO.

• Service code (USSD) is a code to notify the service center.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Additional service"

Additional service

list screen

Move the cursor to "Not recorded" ▶

[Edit]

Move the cursor to an item to set ▶

[Edit]

USSD code : Save a service code (USSD).

Service name : Save a service name.

[Done]

404

Network Services

Additional Service List Screen Sub Menu

Additional service list screen (P403) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Edit]

Edit the selected service.

[Select]

Perform the selected service.

[Delete one]

Delete the selected service.

[Delete all]

Delete all added services.

*1 Appear only when the saved item is selected.

*2 Appear only when more than one item is registered.

Performing Added Services

Additional service list screen (P403) ▶ Select

a service

Connect to the service center.

Additional guide

Saving Additional Guidance

You can save up to 10 response messages which

correspond to a service code (USSD) returned from the

service center when additional services connect to the

center using the USSD.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Additional guide"

Additional guide

list screen

Move the cursor to "Not recorded" ▶

[Edit]

Move the cursor to an item to set ▶

[Edit]

USSD code : Save a service code (USSD).

Reply message : Save a reply message.

[Done]

405

Network Services

Additional Guide List Screen Sub Menu

Additional guide list screen (P404) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Edit]

Edit the selected reply message.

[Delete one]

Delete the selected reply message.

[Delete all]

Delete all reply messages.

*1 Appear only when the saved item is selected.

*2 Appear only when more than one item is registered.

407

Overseas Use

Outline of International Roaming (WORLD WING) ･･･ 408

Available Services Overseas ･･･････････････････････ 409

Before Use Overseas ･･･････････････････････････････ 409

Making a Call from the Country You Stay ･･････････ 413

Receiving a Call Abroad ･････････････････････････････ 415

Setting a Search Method of Telecommunications

Carrier ････ Network search mode, 3G/GSM setting

416

Setting Telecommunications Carrier to

Preferentially Connect to ････････････ PLMN setting 417

Displaying Telecommunications Carrier during

Roaming ･･･････････････････････ Operator name disp 418

Activating Roaming Guidance

･･････････････････････････ Roaming guidance setting 418

Setting Incoming Call to Reject during Roaming

･･････････････････････････････････････････Call barring 418

Setting Missed Call Notiﬁcation during Roaming

･･･････････････････････････････････ Notify missed call 419

Using Network Services during Roaming ･･･････････ 419

408

Overseas Use

Outline of International Roaming

(WORLD WING)

International roaming (WORLD WING) is a service that

allows to talk or make communications over an aﬃliated

international carrier's network using the same phone number

as used domestically.

• See the following before using the FOMA terminal overseas.

- "Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]"

- "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network Services]"

- DOCOMO International Services website

Convenient functions and services available overseas

Function/service Description

Roaming

guide(Int.) The other party is notiﬁed with a voice guidance

that the terminal is in international roaming.

Call barring Reject reception during international roaming.

Dual clock

display You can display the times of two cities on the

Stand-by display simultaneously.

Unit converter You can convert currencies by setting an

exchange rate.

Overseas network

Network Description

W-CDMA (3G) Third generation mobile communication network

compliant with the international standard 3GPP.

GSM

Digital-based second generation mobile

communication network most used worldwide.

GPRS

2.5 generation mobile communication network

for which high-speed packet communication is

available using GSM communication.

*1 The abbreviation of 3rd Generation Partnership Project. A regional

standardization organization to establish common technical

speciﬁcations for third generation mobile communication

systems (IMT-2000).

*2 The abbreviation of Global System for Mobile Communications.

Second generation mobile communication system in digital

method most used worldwide.

*3 The abbreviation of General Packet Radio Service. Data

communication such as packet communication is facilitated by

speeding up GSM.

Subscribing to WORLD WING

If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1,

2005, a separate subscription is not required.

• If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005, a

separate subscription is not required. However, if you unsubscribed

to the FOMA service subscription or canceled the service, a

separate subscription is required.

• If you initially subscribed to the FOMA service before August 31,

2005 and have not subscribed to "WORLD WING", a separate

subscription is required.

409

Overseas Use

Available Services Overseas

Available communication services vary depending on the

international carrier and/or network used.

Available Communication Services

Communication service 3G GSM GPRS

Voice call

○○○

Videophone

○××

SMS

○○○

i-mode

*1 ○×○

i-mode mail

○×○

i-Channel

*1 *2 *3 ○×○

Packet communication

connecting to a PC

○×○

○ : Available × : Not available

*1 Conﬁguration of i-mode international settings is required.

*2 Conﬁguration of i-Channel settings is required. Packet

communication charges apply to receive each i-Channel (including

Basic Channels).

*3 Auto-update will be automatically suspended if the FOMA terminal

is connected to an international carrier. To resume Auto-update

of i-Channel overseas, you need to conﬁgure i-Channel settings

again. However, packet communication charges apply in addition

to the monthly charge.

Note

• Some services are not available depending on the

telecommunication carrier and network you use. For information

about the countries or areas, and telecommunication carriers

that support FOMA videophone calls, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [International Services]" or the DOCOMO International

Services website.

• Packet communication charges overseas diﬀer from domestic

charges.

Before Use Overseas

STEP1 : Preparation before departure

STEP2 : Using FOMA overseas

STEP3 : Setting after returning to Japan

Preparation before Departure

Subscription

If you have not subscribed to WORLD WING (P408),

subscribe to the service.

• Insert a UIM (green/white) that supports WORLD WING into the

FOMA terminal.

Charging

• Cautions when handling the AC adapter→P23

• Charging using the AC adapter→P47, P49

Using i-mode

You have to conﬁgure "International Settings" in advance. Select

"iMenu"

▶

"English"

▶

"Options"

▶

"International Settings"

▶

"i-mode services Settings" to display the setup screen. You can

conﬁgure settings regarding i-mode on this screen.

* For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA

version".

Continued on next page

410

Overseas Use

Setting network services

You can activate or deactivate the subscribed network

services overseas. The following network services can be

accessed:

• Caller ID Notiﬁcation service

*1 *2

• Voice Mail service

*1 *3

• Call Forwarding service

*1 *3

• Caller ID Request service

*1 *3

• Call Waiting

• English Guidance

• Nuisance Call Blocking service

• Roaming guidance setting

*1 *3

• Call barring

*1 May be unavailable in some service areas.

*2 Caller ID may not be sent correctly or not be sent at all.

*3 To operate overseas, you need to activate "Remote control"

(P401, P421) before leaving Japan.

Billing of charges

Overseas charges are billed with your monthly charge. Note

that they may appear on a billing invoice of the next month

or later due to the situation of the international carrier of

your overseas location. Also note that the billing invoice for

charges in the same charging period may be sent to you in

a diﬀerent month.

Note

• For overseas use of the FOMA terminal, use the Quick Manual

(Overseas Use) for an easy reference of operations.

Overseas Use

Network switching

By default, "Network search mode" is set to "Auto".

The FOMA terminal connects to an available network

automatically overseas.

• To switch networks manually→P416

Display on screen

The network name does not appear

when the terminal is connected to

the FOMA network in Japan.

• To display the roaming network name

→P418

Connected network Icon

Connecting to the FOMA

network in Japan

Connecting to 3G network

overseas

Connecting to GSM network

overseas

Connecting to GPRS network

overseas

Connected network name

Note

• If "Auto time adjust" is set to "ON" and you receive information

about time and time diﬀerence from a connecting international

carrier, time and time diﬀerence of the FOMA terminal are

adjusted. The adjusting timing diﬀers depending on international

carriers.

• Auto time adjust function may not available overseas. In that

case, set date and time manually.→P53

411

Overseas Use

Inquiries from abroad

If your UIM (green/white) is lost or stolen overseas, contact

DOCOMO immediately and suspend your subscription

temporarily. For loss or theft of FOMA terminal, accumulated

amount settlement, or terminal failure while overseas, see

"Loss or theft of FOMA terminal or payment of cumulative

cost overseas" or "Failures encountered overseas" at the

back of this manual. Call and communication fees are

charged to you even after the terminal was lost or stolen.

•

Add "International Access Code (Table 1)", or

"International Preﬁx Number for the Universal Number

(Table 2)" that is assigned to the country you stay, to

the head of the number for inquiries.

Country Codes of Major Countries

Area Code

Australia 61

Austria 43

Belgium 32

Brazil 55

Canada 1

China 86

Czech 420

Egypt 20

Fiji 679

Finland 358

France 33

Area Code

Germany 49

Greece 30

Hong Kong 852

Hungary 36

India 91

Indonesia 62

Italy 39

Japan 81

Korea 82

Macau 853

Malaysia 60

Area Code

Maldives 960

Netherlands 31

New Caledonia 687

New Zealand 64

Norway 47

Peru 51

Philippines 63

Russia 7

Singapore 65

Spain 34

Area Code

Sweden 46

Switzerland 41

Tahiti 689

Taiwan 886

Thailand 66

Turkey 90

U.K. 44

U.S.A. 1

Vietnam 84

• The codes may be changed.

• For the codes of other countries and details, see "Mobile

Phone User's Guide [International Services]" or the DOCOMO

International Services website.

• From a land-line phone, International phone call charges to

Japan apply.

Continued on next page

412

Overseas Use

International Access Code for Major Countries (Table 1)

International access codes for major countries are as follows:

Area Code

Australia 0011

Belgium 00

Brazil 0021/

0014

Canada 011

China 00

Czech 00

Denmark 00

Finland 00

France 00

Germany 00

Greece 00

Hong Kong 001

Hungary 00

India 00

Indonesia 001

Ireland 00

Italy 00

Korea 001

Luxembourg 00

Macau 00

Area Code

Malaysia 00

Monaco 00

Netherlands 00

New Zealand 00

Norway 00

Philippines 00

Poland 00

Portugal 00

Russia 810

Singapore 001

Spain 00

Switzerland 00

Sweden 00

Taiwan 002

Thailand 001

Turkey 00

U.A.E. 00

U.K. 00

U.S.A. 011

Vietnam 00

International Preﬁx Number for the Universal Number (Table 2)

International preﬁx numbers for the universal number are as follows:

Area Code

Argentina 00

Australia 0011

Austria 00

Belgium 00

Brazil 0021

Bulgaria 00

Canada 011

China 00

Colombia 009

Denmark 00

Finland 990

France 00

Germany 00

Hong Kong 001

Hungary 00

Ireland 00

Israel 014

Italy 00

Area Code

Korea 001

Luxembourg 00

Malaysia 00

Netherlands 00

New Zealand 00

Norway 00

Peru 00

Philippines 00

Portugal 00

Singapore 001

South Africa 09

Spain 00

Sweden 00

Switzerland 00

Taiwan 00

Thailand 001

U.K. 00

U.S.A. 011

• The codes may be changed.

• For the codes of the other countries and details, see "Mobile

Phone User's Guide [International Services]" or the DOCOMO

International Services website.

• Domestic call charges for your overseas stay may apply to calls.

413

Overseas Use

• If you make a call from a hotel, you may be charged for

the telephone usage from the hotel. In that case, you are

responsible for the charge.

• If you make a call from a mobile phone, the domestic call charge

for your overseas stay applies to that call.

• The universal numbers are only available in the countries listed

in "International Preﬁx Number for the Universal Number".

Setting after Returning to Japan

When you return to Japan, the FOMA terminal automatically

connects to the FOMA network and appears at the top

of the screen.

• If the FOMA network is not connected, check whether "3G/GSM

setting" is set to "AUTO" and "Network search mode" is set to

"Auto".→P416

Making a Call from the Country

You Stay

When you and the other party are using a telecommunication

carrier capable of handling FOMA videophone calls,

international videophone calls are also available.

• Depending on the terminal of the other party of an international

videophone call, the video streaming may fail, or the connection

may not be established.

• Even if the Caller ID notiﬁcation is set, the caller ID may not be

notiﬁed or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on

the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call

using the Received calls.

Making an International Call (Including to

Japan)

Make a call preﬁxing "+" and a country code to the other

party's phone number.

• Press

for 1+ seconds to enter "+".

• To call an overseas "WORLD WING" user, enter "81" as the country

code and make a call as an international call to Japan.

(for 1+ seconds) ▶ Enter "Country Code

- Area Code (City Code) - Phone Number"

• When making a call to a land-line phone in Japan from abroad,

enter "81" as the country code.

• If the Area Code (City Code) starts with "0", remove the "0".

(In a few countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be

removed.)

• When making a call to a mobile phone or PHS in Japan, omit

the leading "0" as well.

• Country codes can be checked in "Country Codes of Major

Countries".→P411

To make a videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

414

Overseas Use

Making a Call Easily to Japan

You can make a call to Japan easily by using Redial/Received

call logs.

• Available only when the phone number starts with "0". Also, set

"Auto Int'l dial" in "International dial" (P69) to "ON" and "Japan + 81"

beforehand. (Default settings)

Display an entry in logs/Phonebook

To use the Redial logs

Display the Redial list screen (P60) or the Redial detail

screen (P61).

To use the Received call logs

Display the Received calls list screen (P62) or the

Received call detail screen (P62).

To use the Phonebook

Display the Phonebook list screen (P93) or the

Phonebook detail screen (P93).

Select an entry in logs/Phonebook ▶

When two or more phone numbers are saved in the

Phonebook entry on the Phonebook list screen

Use

to select a phone number to dial.

When two or more phone numbers are saved in the

Phonebook entry on the Phonebook detail screen

Use

to display the phone number to call, and press

[Call].

• The Dialing conﬁrmation screen displays a phone number

preﬁxed with "+ Country code".

To make a videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

"Dial"

Original number : The leading "0" will not be replaced with

"+ Country code".

Cancel : Dialing will be canceled.

Note

• This function is available only during international roaming.

Selecting Registered Country Code and Making an

International Call (Including to Japan)

in "Country code list" of "International dial" (P70) to make a

call quickly.

Enter "Area code (City code) - other party's

phone number"

[Menu] ▶ "Int. call"

The Country code selection screen appears.

Select a country code

"+ Country code" is added at the beginning of the entered phone

number.

• When the entered phone number starts with "0", it is replaced

with "+ Country code".

To make a videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Note

• By default, 22 country codes are stored in the Select country

screen. Country codes can be added.→P70

415

Overseas Use

Making a Domestic Call while Overseas

Make a call by dialing the other party's phone number from

the area code (city code).

• If you make a call to the WORLD WING user who stays overseas,

make a call as an international call to Japan using the same steps

in "Making an International Call (Including to Japan)" (P413) even if

you and the other party are in the same country or region.

•

When "Auto Int'l dial" is set to "ON", the Dialing conﬁrmation screen

appears if a call is made to a phone number whose area code (city

code) starts with "0" from an entry in the Phonebook or Redial call

log. In this case, select "Original number" without conversion to make

a call.

When you and the other party are using a telecommunication

carrier that handles FOMA videophone calls, "international

videophone calls" are available by pressing

[V. phone]

after the international call dialing procedure.

• Depending on the terminal of the other party of an international

videophone call, the video streaming may fail, or the connection

may not be established.

Receiving a Call Abroad

A call arrives

The ring tone sounds.

•

: Place the call on hold.→P75

Answer the call.

To answer a videophone call using a camera image

Press

To answer a videophone call using an alternate image

Press

[Image].

To terminate the call,

Note

•

When a call arrived during international roaming, the call will be

forwarded internationally from Japan. The caller is charged for the

call fee to Japan and the receiver is charged for the reception fee.

Making calls to your FOMA terminal from Japan

You can receive calls to your phone number as in Japan.

Receiving a call to your FOMA terminal from an overseas

caller

You can receive a call via Japan regardless of where you are.

Similarly to making an international call to Japan, you can be

called using the following steps.

Make a call by entering "International Access Code

- 81

‐ your phone number excluding the leading "0"

*1 When dialing to a mobile phone, you may be able to dial by

entering "+" instead of the International Access Code.

*2 Enter the country code of Japan.

*3 Enter "90-XXXX-XXXX" if the number starts with "090" or

"80-XXXX-XXXX" if it starts with "080".

416

Overseas Use

Network search mode, 3G/GSM setting

Setting a Search Method of

Telecommunications Carrier

Select a search mode to ﬁnd available networks when the

network is switched overseas.

• By default, "Network search mode" is set to "Auto". In Japan or while

connecting to the 3G network, setting "3G/GSM setting" to "3G" is

recommended to reduce the battery drain.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Network" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Network search mode]

Auto : Automatically search and set a network.

Manual : The Network search screen appears. Select and

conﬁgure one of the networks in the list.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Select a network

• Available networks are followed by "0" mark.

Network

re-search : Search a network using the same method (Auto/Manual)

as the previous search.

[3G/GSM setting]

Specify a network to be searched.

AUTO

: Search both 3G and GSM/GPRS networks, and give

priority to 3G when detected both networks.

: Search only 3G network.

GSM/GPRS

: Search only GSM/GPRS network.

• Before setting, check the communication system of the country

where you use.

[PLMN setting]

Prioritize networks to be searched or set.→P417

[Operator name disp]

Set whether to show the name of the currently connected network on

the Stand-by display.→P418

[Host selection]

Specify a host other than i-mode.→P199

[SMS center]

Set the SMS center address.→P178

Note

• After returning to Japan, if the network status indicator remains

out of service area, set "3G/GSM setting" to "AUTO" or "3G",

and "Network search mode" to "Auto".

• Searching for networks may take a while.

• When this option is set to "Auto", the FOMA terminal

reconnects to available network automatically.

417

Overseas Use

PLMN setting

Setting Telecommunications Carrier

to Preferentially Connect to

You can register up to 20 networks to be searched or set by

priority.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Network" ▶ "PLMN setting"

• If networks have been already registered,

the network names appear in order of

precedence.

•

[Change]: Change and overwrite the

selected setting.

PLMN setting

screen

[Add] ▶ Perform the following operations

[UPLMN manual select]

Add a network to the Preferred NW list by entering "Country No.

(MCC)" and "Network No. (MNC)".

▶ Enter an MCC and MNC ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

[UPLMN select by list]

Select and add a network from the default network list.

▶ Select a network ▶ "Yes"

•

[Country]: Select a country name to specify an available network

in the country from the list. (Use

to select a country.)

[Set VPLMN to UPLMN]

Add the network currently connected.

Note

• Depending on the signal strength, a network other than

registered one may be connected.

• The settings of this function are saved on the UIM.

PLMN Setting Screen Sub Menu

PLMN setting screen (P417) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Add new]

Search and add a newly found network to the selected network. Go

to Step 2 in "Setting Telecommunications Carrier to Preferentially

Connect to" (P417).

[Change]

Change and overwrite the selected setting. Go to Step 2 in "Setting

Telecommunications Carrier to Preferentially Connect to" (P417).

[Delete]

Delete the selected network.

[Change priority]

Move up*: Move the selected network up by one in the list.

Move down*: Move the selected network down by one in the list.

* Cannot be selected depending on the selected network position.

418

Overseas Use

Operator name disp

Displaying Telecommunications

Carrier during Roaming

Set whether to show the name of the currently connected

network on the Stand-by display.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Network" ▶ "Operator name disp" ▶ "Yes"

Perform this operation to switch ON and OFF.

Roaming guidance setting

Activating Roaming Guidance

Before leaving Japan, you can set to play a voice guidance

that indicates you are overseas.

• Setting must be done while in Japan.

• The service may not be operable when "圏外" is displayed.

▶ "Settings" ▶ NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Roaming guidance setting" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Activate]

Activate the roaming guidance.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the roaming guidance.

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status.

Note

• When deactivating the guidance, a ring tone set by the

international carrier sounds.

• Some international carriers may not oﬀer this option.

• Even if you activated this option, a voice guidance in a foreign

language may be played due to the international carrier's

services.

Call barring

Setting Incoming Call to Reject

during Roaming

You can set to restrict all incoming calls, messages, etc,

during roaming. You can also set to restrict only incoming

videophone calls.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming"

▶ "Call barring" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Activate]

Activate incoming call restriction.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Select from the following options ▶ Enter the Network

security code

Barring all incoming calls : Restrict all incoming calls.

Data calls barring : Restrict only incoming videophone calls.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate incoming call restriction.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Network security code

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status.

419

Overseas Use

Note

• This may not be set depending on international carriers.

Notify missed call

Setting Missed Call Notiﬁcation

during Roaming

If a call arrives when you are out of service area, the

terminal is turned oﬀ, or you cannot answer the call during

international roaming, you are notiﬁed of the incoming call

information (received date and time and caller ID) by SMS.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Others"

▶ "Notify missed call" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Activate]

Activate the incoming notiﬁcation during roaming.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the incoming notiﬁcation during roaming.

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status.

Using Network Services during

Roaming

You can use network services of the Voice mail service, Call

forwarding service, and Roaming guidance, etc. overseas.

• To use Voice mail (Int.) or Call forwarding service (Int.), subscription

to Voice mail or Call forwarding service is required.

• To use the network service overseas, activate Remote Control

beforehand.→P401

• International call charges to Japan apply.

• When "圏外" is displayed, operations cannot be performed.

• The services may not be operable in some countries.

Voice mail(Int.)

Operating the Voice Mail Service Overseas

You can activate/deactivate the Voice mail service overseas.

You can also play recorded messages or change the settings

following a voice guidance.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming"

▶ "Voice mail(Int.)" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Activate]

Activate the Voice mail service.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Voice mail service.

[Play messages]

Play a Voice mail message.

Continued on next page

420

Overseas Use

[Voice mail setting]

Change the settings according to the voice guidance.

[Set ring time]

Set time before connecting to the Voice mail service center after a

call arrives.

"Yes"

Operate according to the voice guidance

Note

•

If moving to another area with power "ON" while staying overseas,

and in the result, the FOMA terminal turns to "圏外", the Voice

mail service may not be activated. Therefore, if you want to use

the Voice mail service without fail when the terminal turns to "圏

外", it is recommended to turn the power "OFF" at the area where

signals are received before moving to another area where the

terminal might turn to "圏外".

Call forwarding(Int.)

Operating the Call Forwarding Service

Overseas

You can activate/deactivate the Call forwarding service

overseas.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Call forwarding(Int.)" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Activate]

Activate the Call forwarding service.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Call forwarding service.

[Call forwarding settings]

Check the current setting status.

"Yes"

Operate according to the voice guidance

Note

• If moving to another area with the power "ON"

while staying

overseas

, and in the result, the FOMA terminal turns to "圏外",

the Call forwarding service may not be activated. Therefore, if

you want to use the Call forwarding service without fail when

the terminal turns to "圏外", it is recommended to turn the power

"OFF" at the area where signals are received before moving to

another area where the terminal might turn to " 圏外".

Roaming guide(Int.)

Operating the Roaming Guidance Overseas

You can activate/deactivate the Roaming guidance overseas.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Roaming guide(Int.)"

"Yes"

Operate according to the voice guidance

421

Overseas Use

Remote access setting(Int.)

Setting Remote Control Overseas

You can activate/deactivate the Remote access overseas.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Remote access setting(Int.)"

"Yes"

Operate according to the voice guidance

Caller ID request(Int.)

Operating the Caller ID Request Service

Overseas

You can activate/deactivate the Caller ID request service

overseas.

• While you are abroad and even if "Caller ID request" is activated,

"Not support" may be displayed and a call may arrive.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Caller ID request(Int.)"

"Yes"

Operate according to the voice guidance

Missed call notiﬁcation for roaming setting(Int.)

Setting Missed Call Notiﬁcation Overseas

Set to activate/deactivate the missed call notiﬁcation

overseas.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Missed call notiﬁcation for roaming setting(Int.)"

"Yes"

Operate according to the voice guidance

423

PC Connection

For details about data communication, see "Manual for PC Connection" (PDF format) contained in the bundled CD-ROM or

available at the DOCOMO's web site.

Adobe

Reader

is required to open "Manual for PC Connection" in PDF format. If the program is not installed on your PC,

install Adobe

Reader

contained in the bundled CD-ROM.

For details about using the program, see "Adobe Reader Help".

Data Communication ････････････････････････････････ 424

Before Using Data Communication ･････････････････ 426

Flow of Setup for Data Transmission

(OBEX™ Communication) ･･･････････････････････････ 427

Flow of Setup for Data Communication ･････････････ 427

AT Command ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 428

Using CD-ROM ･･････････････････････････････････････ 428

Introduction of DOCOMO keitai datalink ････････････ 428

424

PC Connection

Data Communication

Data Communications Available with the

FOMA Terminal

When you connect your FOMA terminal to a PC, you can use

data communication via packet communication as well as

data transmission (OBEX™ Communication).

• The FOMA terminal does not support 64K data communication.

• The FOMA terminal does not support Remote Wakeup.

• The FOMA terminal does not support FAX communication.

• The FOMA terminal does not support DOCOMO's PDA, "musea" and

"sigmarion Ⅲ".

Data Transmission (OBEX™ Communication)

You can exchange data such as images, songs, Phonebook

entries, or mail with another FOMA terminal or a PC.

L-01B

Infrared communication

(P327)

microSD

Card

* This FOMA terminal cannot send images to a PC.

L-01B

• FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional)

• microSD Card (P317)

• DOCOMO keitai datalink* (P428)

425

PC Connection

Packet Communication

Communication charges

are based on the amount of

data sent and received. It is suitable for use to exchange

data only when you want while keeping the network

connected. DOCOMO provides a best-eﬀort service in

which communication speeds change in response to the

communication environment and network congestion.

Using an access point of DOCOMO internet connection

service such as "mopera U" that supports FOMA packet

communication allows you to use high-speed communication

at the maximum rate of 7.2Mbps for receiving and 384kbps

for sending (based on best-eﬀort connection)

*1 Communication charges become high when you exchange a large

amount of data.

*2 • The maximum speed of 7.2Mbps for receiving and 384kbps for

sending are theoretical values and they do not show the actual

performance. The actual performance depends on the network

congestion and your communication environment.

• If you connect to an area which is out of the FOMA

HIGH-SPEED Area or an access point that does not support

HIGH-SPEED, the performance may be lower.

L-01B can use an access point, even while in overseas, that

supports 3G or GPRS packet communication to perform data

communication.

Precautions before Use

Internet Service Provider Fees

Fees to an Internet service provider (ISP) are required to

connect to the Internet. These connection fees, paid to the

ISP, are separate from the FOMA service fees. For detailed

information on connection fees, contact your ISP.

You can use DOCOMO Internet connection services;

"mopera U". A separate subscription (fee-based) is required

to use "mopera U".

Setting the Internet Connection

For packet communication, use an access point compatible

with packet communication.

• DoPa access points cannot be connected.

• For service contents of "mopera" and its connection settings, visit

"mopera" web site.

http://www.mopera.net/mopera/index.html (Japanese only)

Conditions for Packet Communication

The following conditions* must be met to connect the FOMA

terminal to a PC and perform communication. However,

even if the conditions are met, communication may still not

be possible depending on the amount of traﬃc at the base

station or the strength of the signal.

• FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) must be

available on the PC.

• The FOMA terminal must be in the FOMA service area.

• The access point must support FOMA packet communication.

* These conditions are for domestic use in Japan.

426

PC Connection

Before Using Data Communication

Operating Environment

The following operating environment is required for a PC to

use data communication.

Item Requirements

PC main unit • PC-AT compatible device with a CD-ROM capable

drive

• USB port (Universal Serial Bus Speciﬁcation

Rev1.1/2.0 compliant)

• Display resolution of 800x600 dots, High Color

(65,536 colors) or higher recommended

*1 *2

• Windows Vista, Windows XP, or Windows 2000

(Japanese versions)

Memory

requirement

• Windows Vista: 512MB or more

• Windows XP: 128MB or more

• Windows 2000: 64MB or more

Hard disk

space

*3 *4

• Available space of 5MB or more

*1 The operation on an upgraded OS cannot be guaranteed.

*2 The operating environment of DOCOMO Connection Manager is

Windows 2000 SP4 or later, or Windows XP SP2 or later. For

detailed operating environment, check DOCOMO's web site.

*3 Memory requirement or hard disk space may vary depending on

the PC system conﬁguration.

*4 DOCOMO Connection Manager requires 15MB or more.

A warning screen may appear when you insert the bundled CD-

ROM into a PC. This warning appears as a result of a security

setting of Microsoft Internet Explorer, however, there is no problem.

Click [はい (Yes)].

Required Device

To use data communications, the following devices and

software are required in addition to the FOMA terminal and a

PC:

• FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) or FOMA

USB Cable (optional)

• CD-ROM for L-01B (supplied)

Note

• Purchase the exclusive FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function

01/02 or FOMA USB Cable . A generic USB cable for PC is not

available because it does not ﬁt the FOMA USB connector.

• The FOMA terminal may not work properly with a USB HUB.

427

PC Connection

Flow of Setup for Data Transmission

(OBEX™ Communication)

Install the L-01B communication setting ﬁles to use the

FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional).

Download and install the L-01B communication setting ﬁles

• Install them using bundled CD-ROM

• Download and install from the DOCOMO web page

Data transfer

Flow of Setup for Data

Communication

The ﬂow for preparing to connect the FOMA terminal and a

PC for performing packet communication is as follows. For

details, see "Manual for PC Connection" (PDF format).

Check that "USB mode setting" of the FOMA terminal is set

to "Communication mode"

Connect the FOMA terminal and the PC using a FOMA USB

Cable with Charge Function 01/02

Download and install the L-01B communication setting ﬁles

• Install it using bundled CD-ROM

•

Download and install from the DOCOMO web page

Check after installation

Install DOCOMO Connection

Manager and set up with it Set up without DOCOMO

Connection Manager

Connect

Continued on next page

428

PC Connection

Note

• You can also download software for data communication,

"L-01B Communication Setting Files (Driver)" or "DOCOMO

Connection Manager" that are contained on "CD-ROM for L-01B"

from DOCOMO's web site.

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/support/download/

Software for data communication contained on "CD-ROM

for L-01B"

L-01B Communication Setting Files (Driver)

This software (driver) is required for packet communication or ﬁle

transfer when the FOMA terminal and a PC are connected using

the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02.

DOCOMO Connection Manager

This software facilitates simple conﬁguration or the settings for a

packet communication connection (APN), dial-up connection, etc.

AT Command

AT commands are used to check the FOMA terminal function

settings or status using a PC. For details, see "Manual for PC

Connection" (PDF format) in the bundled CD-ROM.

Using CD-ROM

The bundled CD-ROM contains applications to perform data

communication with the FOMA terminal, "Manual for PC

Connection", and "Kuten Code List" (PDF). For details, see the

bundled CD-ROM.

Introduction of DOCOMO keitai

datalink

"DOCOMO keitai datalink" is a software to allow you to make

a backup of "Phonebook" or "Mail" on your FOMA terminal

and edit them. This software is provided at the DOCOMO's

web site. For details and to download the software, visit the

following web site.

http://datalink.nttdocomo.co.jp/ (Japanese only)

Note

• For details about downloading, transferable data, operating

environment such as supported OS, installing, operating, or

restrictions, visit the above web site. For operations after

installing the software, see Help of the software. To use

DOCOMO keitai datalink, a USB Connection Cable (optional) is

required.

429

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Menu List ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 430

List of Characters Assigned to Dial Keys ･･･････････ 443

Multiaccess Combinations ･･････････････････････････ 444

Multitask Combinations ･････････････････････････････ 445

Service Available for the FOMA Terminal ･･･････････ 446

Introduction of Options and Related Devices ･･･････ 447

Interfacing to External Devices

Introduction of Moving Picture Playing Software ･･･ 447

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting ･････････････････････････････････････ 448

If Error Message Appears Mentioned Below ････････ 451

Warranty and After-Sales Service ･･････････････････ 457

i-mode Fault Diagnosis Site ･････････････････････････ 459

Updating Software ････････････････ Software Update 459

Protecting the FOMA Terminal from Harmful Data

･･･････････････････････････････････Scanning function 464

Main Speciﬁcations ･････････････････････････････････ 466

Number of Items that Can Be Stored/Protected in

the FOMA Terminal ･････････････････････････････････ 471

Speciﬁc Absorption Rate (SAR) of Mobile Phone ･･･ 472

Export Administration Regulations ･･････････････････ 475

Intellectual Property Right ･･････････････････････････ 476

430

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Menu List

Functions with indicated in "Default settings" column are

those that can be initialized to their defaults with "Reset

settings".→P132

Function name Default settings

Reference

Mail Inbox Inbox " Welcome

Mail " "Welcome

ドコモ動画 "

message

P154

MessageR None P174

MessageF None P174

Compose message − P138

Unsent message Empty P155

Outbox Empty P155

Check new messages − P150

Receive option − P149

SMS Compose

SMS −P176

Check new

SMS −P177

Template Pre-installed data

only P144

Mail

setting

Communication

Receive option set:

OFF

Receive attach ﬁle:

All items selected

Check new

messages: All

items selected

P168

Function name Default settings

Reference

Mail Mail

setting Display Font size: Medium

Folder lock: All

items unmarked

Melody auto play:

Receiving display:

Alarm mode

P169

Mail group Empty P169

Auto sort Empty P170

SMS SMS report

request: OFF

SMS validity

period: 3 days

SMS input

character: JP/

KR(70Chara)

P178

Edit Edit header: None

Edit signature:

None

Edit quotation: >

Auto attach:

"Signature"

selected

P172

Others Check settings: −

Reset settings: − P172

i-mode iMenu − P183

Bookmark Empty P190

Screen memo Empty P192

Last URL − P185

Go to

location Enter URL − P188

URL history None P189

431

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

i-mode i-Channel i-Channel

list Basic channels P204

Ticker

setting Ticker display: ON

Ticker speed:

Normal

Font size:

Standard

Font color: Black

P204

Reset

i-Channel −P204

MessageR/F

Inbox " Welcome

Mail " "Welcome

ドコモ動画 "

message

P154

MessageR None P174

MessageF None P174

Check new messages − P173

i-mode

setting

Communication

Connection

timeout: 60

seconds

Check new

messages: All

items selected

P197

Image&Eﬀect

set.

Images: ON

Sound eﬀect: ON

Font size: Standard

Scroll: 1 line

Use phone info.:

Auto-display

setting: MessageR

preferred

Melody auto play:

P198

Function name Default settings

Reference

i-mode i-mode

setting i-motion

setting Auto-replay

setting: ON

i-motion type:

Std/Streaming

P202

Home Disable, No URL P198

Certiﬁcates All valid P200

Others Check settings: −

Reset settings: − P199

Full

browser Home − P206

Bookmark Empty P206

Last URL − P206

Go to

location Input address: −

URL history: None P207

P207

Full

Browser

Settings

Communication:

- Access Setting:

Not Use

- Cookie Setting:

Valid

- Delete Cookie: −

- Referer Setting:

Send

- TLS: ON

P214

Continued on next page

432

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

i-mode Full

browser Full

Browser

Settings

Image&Eﬀect set.:

- Zoom: 100%

- Display Mode

Setting: Keitai

mode

- Set Image

display: ON

- Bookmark

Display:

Thumbnail

- Window Open

Guard Setting:

Invalid

- Script Setting:

Valid (notify)

P215

Home URL: http://

www.google.co.jp/ P215

Others:

- Check Settings:

−

- Reset Settings:

−

P215

i-αppli Software list Pre-installed

i-αppli only P275

i-αppli info Security

error

history

None P286

Auto start

info None P286

Trace info None P286

Standby

error info None P286

Function name Default settings

Reference

i-αppli i-αppli

settings Display SW

info Not display P275

Auto start

set ON P284

End stand-

by display −P286

Phonebook

Add to phonebook Empty P84

Search phonebook Show all data P92

No. of phonebook − P97

Phonebook

settings

Default

mode Show all data P97

Create

domain list @docomo.ne.jp P97

Accept/

Reject list Accept list:

Unregistered

Reject list:

Unregistered

P97

Group settings None P89

Call/Mail

history Received

calls Empty P62

Redial Empty P60

Received

mails Empty P166

Sent mails Empty P166

Call duration − P362

433

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Phonebook

Call costs Check call

costs −P362

Set call

cost limit Set limit: OFF P363

Delete call

cost icon −P363

Data box My picture i-mode None P296

Camera None P296

Decomail

picture Pre-installed ﬁles

only P296

Decomail

picto Pre-installed ﬁles

only P296

Preinstalled Pre-installed ﬁles

only P296

Item Pre-installed ﬁles

only P296

Data

transfer None P296

Slide show スライドショー(サ

ンプル)

(Slideshow

(Sample))

P305

microSD − P296

Search by

i-mode −P294

Music i-mode None P270

Playlists None P270

Movablecontents

− P270

Function name Default settings

Reference

Data box Music Resume

play −P263

WMA − P294

SD-Audio − P294

Search by

i-mode −P294

Music&Video

Distributed

program None P259

i-motion i-mode None P307

Camera None P307

Preinstalled Pre-installed ﬁles

only P307

Playlists None P313

Data

transfer None P307

microSD − P307

Search by

i-mode −P295

Melody i-mode None P314

Preinstalled Pre-installed ﬁles

only P314

Data

transfer None P314

microSD − P314

Search by

i-mode −P295

Continued on next page

434

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Data box Kisekae

Tool i-mode None P111

Preinstalled Pre-installed ﬁles

only P111

Search by

i-mode −P111

Motion Oekaki − P342

MUSIC MUSIC

player All songs Empty P263

Playlists Empty P267

Artist Empty P263

Genre Empty P263

Album Empty P263

Resume

play*−P263

Music&Video

Program 1 Empty P254

Program 2 Empty P254

Set

program −P254

Program

list −P254

About this

service −P254

LifeKit Bar code reader − P234

Receive Ir

data Receive − P329

Receive all − P329

* "Now playing" is displayed when a song is in playback. Selecting

the song opens the Player screen for the song in playback.

Function name Default settings

Reference

LifeKit microSD PIM − P322

Data

update −P325

Memory

info. −P325

Reset

microSD −P325

Data

security

service

Connect to

center −P131

Exchanging

history −P131

Sndg img in

phonebook OFF P131

Check FOMA HIGH-

SPEED area −P342

Schedule Empty P352

Alarm Empty P350

Text memo Empty P369

Sketch memo Empty P367

To do list Empty P357

Others World time Japan P363

Calculator − P366

Unit

converter Currency: YEN,

USD P364

Surface: Square

cm, Square m P365

Length: mm, cm P366

Weight: mg, g P366

435

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

LifeKit Others Unit

converter Temperature:

Celsius (℃),

Fahrenheit (F) P366

Volume: Milliliter,

Liter P366

Velocity: km/h,

meter/sec P366

Remembering

dates

Date counter:

Empty

Date search: −

P359

P360

Stopwatch − P364

Media Camera Photo-

mode −P222

Movie-mode − P227

Bar code

reader −P234

Muvee Studio − P338

Motion Oekaki − P340

Record

message

Record msg.

setting

Activate record

msg.: OFF P78

Record msg.

list

Empty P79

Document viewer − P330

Dictionary − P344

M-Toy − P342

Touch game − P343

Function name Default settings

Reference

1Seg Activate 1Seg − P245

Program guide − P248

TV timer list Empty P248

TVlink Empty P251

Channel settings Empty P243

1Seg settings Subtitles: ON

Backlight: 80%

Set image display:

Set eﬀect sound:

OFF

Main/Sub sound:

Main+Sub

Reset permission

display: −

Reset 1Seg

settings: −

Erase storage

area: −

1Seg settings

status: −

P252

Settings Sounds&

Vibration Select ring

tone Voice call: Ring 01

Video call: Ring 09

Mail: Message 09

MessageR:

Message 10

MessageF:

Message 10

SMS: Message 09

P100

Continued on next page

436

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Sounds&

Vibration Select

eﬀect tone Keypad tone:

Keypad tone 4

Slide tone: Slide

tone 1

Dial sound: Digital

tone

Power ON: Power

on 01

Power OFF: Power

oﬀ 01

Low battery alert:

P103

Touch

settings Touch type: Sound

+ Vib.

Touch sound:

Sound1

Touch vibration:

Vib. 1

Touch sound level:

Level 4

Touch vib. level:

Level 7

P104

Volume Incoming call:

Level 4

Mail/Message/

SMS: Level 4

Alarm/Schedule:

Level 4

Keypad tone:

Level 2

Slide tone: Level 2

Dial sound: Level 2

Power ON/OFF:

Level 4

Popup tone: Level 4

Receiver volume:

Level 4

P101

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Sounds&

Vibration Vibrator Incoming call: OFF

Mail/Message/

SMS: OFF

Alarm/Schedule:

OFF

Pop-up: OFF

Power ON/OFF:

OFF

P102

Manner

mode set General manner P105

Mail ring

duration 1 cycle P104

Set mute

ring(sec.) OFF P130

Headset

usage

setting

Headset+speaker P105

Display Stand-by

display Wallpaper: Kisekae

settings

Display items: Do

not show

Battery icon:

Kisekae settings

Antenna icon:

Kisekae settings

P106

Live

Character

Park theme

WallPaper: Zoo

Live Character:

Animal P337

Kisekae

Tool L04A_white P111

Color

theme Follow Kisekae

setting (White) P111

437

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Display Call & Mail

image Incoming voice

call: Follow

Kisekae setting

Incoming video

call: Follow

Kisekae setting

Mail sending:

Follow Kisekae

setting

Mail receiving:

Follow Kisekae

setting

Mail complete:

Follow Kisekae

setting

Check new

messages: Follow

Kisekae setting

P109

Wake-up

display pwron P110

Quick dial ON P109

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Display Lighting

LED

Lighting LED: ON

Incoming voice call:

Green&Aqua 1

Incoming video call:

Green&Aqua 1

New mail: Aqua&Blue 3

Mail sending:

Aqua&Blue 2

New MessageR/F:

Pink 2

New SMS: Gold 2

New Voice mail:

Gold&Green 2

New Record message:

Green

Playing Music: OFF

Alarm: Aurora&Red

Schedule/To do:

Aurora&Pink

Ir exchange:

Aqua&Aurora

Barcode reading:

7colors 2

IC card(Felica): ON

Slide open/close: ON

Lock release: OFF

Key press: OFF

Unread message: ON

Missed call: ON

Low battery: OFF

P113

Backlight

Display duration:

20 sec

Display brightness:

80%

AC connected: Display

setting

P110

Continued on next page

438

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Call/VT/

Dialing Incoming

call Answer mode:

Send key only

Auto answer: OFF

Accept/Reject call:

- Accept/Reject

set: Accept

P74

P372

P128

- Edit reject list:

Empty P127

- Reject unknown:

OFF

Anonymous

caller: (All items)

Disable

On hold tone:

Hold tone 1

Show ph. book

img: ON

Melody Call

setting: −

P130

P129

P75

P110

P102

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Call/VT/

Dialing Videophone Videophone set:

- Display setting:

Other - Me

- Send camera

image: ON

- Screen size:

Large

- Visual preference:

Normal

- Light: Always ON

- Auto redial as

voice: OFF

- Hand-free switch:

- V-phone while

packet: V-phone

priority

Substitute image:

Default

Response hold

image: Default

Holding image:

Default

P80

P81

P80

Call feature Reconnect alarm:

Alarm OFF

Quality alarm:

Alarm OFF

Holding tone: Hold

tone 1

Close setting: End

the call

Noise reduction:

P71

P104

P75

P74

P72

Self mode OFF P124

439

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Call/VT/

Dialing Preﬁx dial PREFIX 1:

009130010

PREFIX 2/PREFIX

3: Empty

P70

Sub

address

setting

ON P71

Headset Switch call: OFF P371

Lock/

Security Lock Lock all: Not set

Call/Mail lock: OFF

Data access lock:

OFF

Live Character

Park lock: OFF

P121

P123

P124

P125

Secret

mode OFF P127

Display

Call/Mail

logs

(All items) ON P126

Auto touch

lock When LCD oﬀ P126

Change

security

code

Terminal Security

code (4 digits):

0000 P120

PIN code − P120

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Lock/

Security Scanning

function Update: −

Set auto-update: −

Set scan:

- Scan: ON

- Message scan:

Version:

−

P464

P465

P464

P466

Services Voice mail Activate: − P393

Set ring time: − P393

Deactivate: − P393

Check setting: − P393

Play messages: − P393

Voice mail setting:

−P393

Check messages:

−P393

Notify missed

call: − P393

Del. voice mail

icon: − P393

Tone/Vibration

message

notiﬁcation: No P393

Voice mail setting

for videophone: − P393

Continued on next page

440

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings NW

Services Call waiting Activate: − P394

Deactivate: − P394

Check setting: − P394

Call

forwarding Activate: − P396

Deactivate: − P396

forwarding number:

−P396

Setting if

forwarding number

busy: − P396

Check setting: − P396

Chaku-moji Create message:

Not recorded P65

Message display

set: With Caller ID P65

Nuisance

call

blocking

caller: − P397

number: − P397

Delete all entries:

−P397

Delete last entry:

−P397

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings NW

Services Nuisance

call

blocking

Check the number

of entries: − P397

Caller ID

notiﬁcation Activate/

Deactivate: − P54

Check setting: − P54

Caller ID

request Activate: − P398

Deactivate: − P398

Check setting: − P398

Set in-call

arrival act Activate: − P400

Deactivate: − P400

Check setting: − P400

Arrival call

act Answer P400

Others Additional service:

Not recorded P403

Additional guide:

Not recorded P404

English guidance:

−P399

Service numbers:

−P399

Roaming guidance

setting: − P418

441

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings NW

Services Others Multi number:

- Set multi number:

−

- Check setting: −

- Number setting:

Empty

- Ring tone &

image setting:

Individual setting

(All) OFF

P401

Dual network: − P398

Remote control: − P401

Notify missed

call: − P419

International

dial

Auto assist Auto P69

IDD preﬁx IDD preﬁx name:

WORLDCALL

IDD preﬁx code:

009130010

P69

Auto Int'l

dial

Auto Int'l dial: ON

Country code:

Japan +81 P69

Country

code list Australia 61,

Brazil 55,

Canada 1,

China 86,

England 44,

France 33,

Germany 49,

Hong Kong 852,

India 91,

Indonesia 62,

Italy 39, Japan 81,

Korea 82,

P70

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings

International

dial

Country

code list Malaysia 60,

Netherlands 31,

Philippines 63,

Singapore 65,

Spain 34,

Taiwan 886,

Thailand 66,

USA 1,

Vietnam 84

P70

International

roaming

Network Network search

mode: Auto

3G/GSM setting:

AUTO

PLMN setting:

(Display the

contents saved in

the UIM)

Operator name

disp: ON

Host selection:

imode

SMS center:

DOCOMO

P416

P417

P418

P199

P178

Voice mail

(Int.) −P419

Call

forwarding

(Int.)

−P420

Remote

access

setting(Int.)

−P421

Caller ID

request(Int.)

−P421

Roaming

guide(Int.) −P420

Continued on next page

442

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings

International

roaming

Call barring − P418

Missed call

notiﬁcation

for roaming

setting(Int.)

−

P421

Date&Time

Set

Date&Time Auto time adjust:

ON P53

Date&Time

format Date format:

YYYY/MM/DD

Time format:

24-hour

P115

Hour

indication Set sound: OFF P373

マルチリンガル

(Select language) 日本語

(Japanese) P52

Others Character

input Edit common

phrase: Pre-

installed data only P384

Edit emoticon: Pre-

installed data only P382

User dictionary:

None P387

Picto. D dictionary:

Pre-installed data

only P388

Download

dictionary: None P389

Create Learn. dic.: −

P389

Reset learnt

info: − P388

Function name Default settings

Reference

Settings Others Character

input Prediction input:

ON P383

Memory

status −P373

Power

saver mode OFF P111

Reset/Clear

− P132

Software

Update Update: −

Set auto-update:

- Set auto-update:

auto-update

- Day: None

- Time: 03:00

P462

P461

USB mode

setting Communication

mode*P326

Battery

level −P50

Calibration − P115

Own Number Empty P360

Osaifu-

Keitai IC card content Pre-installed

Osaifu-Keitai

compatible i-αppli

only

P291

DCMX − P282

IC card lock set IC card lock(Power

ON): OFF

IC card lock(Power

OFF): Follow power

P292

Search by i-mode − P291

* When the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02

(optional) is disconnected, the USB mode automatically returns to

"Communication mode" even if the setting has been changed.

443

Appendix/Troubleshooting

List of Characters Assigned to Dial Keys

Entry Mode

Key Hiragana and Kanji Katakana Alphabetic character Digit

あいうえお

ぁぃぅぇぉ*2

アイウエオァィゥェォ

1 . / @ - : ~

_ 1 1

かきくけこカキクケコ 2 a b c A B C

2 2

さしすせそサシスセソ 3 d e f D E F

3 3

たちつてとっ

タチツテトツ

4 g h i G H I

4 4

なにぬねのナニヌネノ 5 j k l J K L

5 5

はひふへほハヒフヘホ 6 m n o M N O

6 6

まみむめもマミムメモ 7 p q r s P Q R S

7 7

やゆよゃゅょ

ヤユヨャュョ

8 t u v T U V

8 8

らりるれろラリルレロ 9 w x y z W X Y Z

9 9

わをんゎ

ーワヲンヮ

*2 *3

ー 0 0 0

ﾞﾟ

(Line feed) ﾞﾟ

(Line feed) (Line feed)

、。？！・

□

(Half-pitch space) 、。？！・

□

(Half-pitch space) , . ? ! ' - & ( ) ￥

□

(Half-pitch space) ＃

*1 For full-pitch character entry, "∼" is entered.

*2 Press

to switch between upper and lower cases.

*3 Can be entered in full-pitch character entry.

*4 Can be added or entered when a character has not been set.

*5 Can be entered when these symbols are valid in a ﬁeld.

444

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Multiaccess Combinations

New communication

task

Function in

progress

Voice call Videophone i-mode i-mode mail SMS Packet

communication

connected to a PC

Outgoing Incoming Outgoing Incoming Connect Send Receive Send Receive Send Receive

Voice call △

△

××

○

○○○○×

Videophone × ×

××

××××○××

i-mode ○ ○ △

△

×○○○○××

i-mode mail ○ ○ △

△

○××○○××

Packet communication

connected to a PC ○○××

××××○××

○ : Can be launched.

△ : Can be launched under certain conditions.

× : Cannot be launched.

*1 If you subscribe to Call waiting, you can place the current voice call on hold and make another call.

*2 If you subscribe to Call waiting, you can place the current voice call on hold and answer another call. If you subscribe to the Voice mail

service/Call forwarding service, the function can be launched.

*3 The call is recorded in Received call log as a missed call.

*4 The i-αppli cannot initiate communication.

*5 Available only for outgoing calls using Phone To function. In that case, i-mode will be disconnected.

*6 If "V-phone while packet" is set to "V-phone priority", videophone calls can be received. In this case, i-mode connection will be terminated.

445

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Multitask Combinations

The combination of functions that can be used concurrently for Multitask are as follows.

(○: Available △: Available partially ×: Not available)

• Depending on the condition of the FOMA terminal, functions may not be activated.

New function

Running function

i-mode Mail

function Full

browser i-αppli Settings Data

box

LifeKit

Media

(Others) Phonebook MUSIC

(Play in

background) 1Seg Voice

call Videophone

call Mail

Mail function ○ △ ○ △ × ○ △ △ × ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △

i-mode △ ○ △ △ × ○ △ △ × ○ ○ ○ ○ △ ○

Full browser × ○ × × × ○ △ △ × ○ ○ × ○ × ○

i-αppli △ △ × △ × △ △ △ × △ × △ △ △ △

Settings × × × × × △ × × × △ △ △ △ × ×

Activate Data

box

△○ ○×××△△× ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○

LifeKit

○○ ○××○△×× ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○

Media

○○ ○△×○×△× ○ ○ △○ ○ ○

Media (Others)

○○ ○××○××× ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○

Phonebook ○ ○ ○ × × ○ △ △ × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Voice call ○ ○ ○ × × ○ △ × × ○ × × △ × △

Videophone call × × × × × × × × × △ × × × × ×

MUSIC (Play in

background) ○○ ○×△△△△× ○ × ×△ △ ○

1Seg ○ ○ × △ × × △ × × ○ × × ○ △ ○

*1 Only "Schedule", "Alarm", "Text memo", "Sketch memo", "To do list", "World time", "Calculator", "Unit converter", "Remembering dates", and

"Stopwatch".

*2 Only "Camera", "Muvee Studio", and "Motion Oekaki".

*3 Except for data in a microSD.

*4 Except for "M-Toy" and "Touch game". (While "M-Toy" or "Touch game" is activated, other functions cannot be activated.)

446

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Service Available for the FOMA

Terminal

Services available for the FOMA terminal Phone number

Directory assistance service (charges apply:

service and call fees)

(No assistance provided for phone numbers

of customers who do not wish to have such

information listed)

(No preﬁx) 104

Telegraph (charge applies: telegraph fee) (No preﬁx) 115

Time tone (charge applies) (No preﬁx) 117

Weather forecast (charge applies) Area code + 177

Police (No preﬁx) 110

Fire department and ambulance (No preﬁx) 119

Emergency and accident at sea (No preﬁx) 118

Disaster emergency message dial (charge

applies) (No preﬁx) 171

Collect call (charges apply: service and call

fees) (No preﬁx) 106

Note

• If you use the collect call (106) service, the receiver of the call

is charged for the call cost and a commission of 90 Yen (94.5

Yen including tax) per call (as of June, 2009).

• When you use the directory assistance service (104), you are

charged for the call fee and service fee of 100 Yen (105 Yen

including tax). This service is provided free of charge for those

visually impaired or physically disabled in the upper body. For

details, call 116 (NTT sales contact) from a land-line phone (as

of June, 2009).

• When you use "Call forwarding" from a land-line phone and have

speciﬁed a mobile phone as its forwarding destination, the

caller may hear a ring tone even if the mobile phone is busy, out

of service area, or turned oﬀ depending on the settings of the

land-line phone and mobile phone.

• Note that services such as a call to 116 (NTT sales contact),

Dial Q2, Message Service and credit card calls are unavailable.

(Automatic credit card calls can be made from a land-line phone

or public phone to a FOMA terminal.)

• Even when a UIM is not inserted, emergency phone numbers

(911, 999, 112, 000, and 08) can be dialed to make an

emergency call overseas. However, while the Self mode is set,

emergency calls cannot be made.

• This FOMA terminal supports "緊急通報位置通知 (Emergency

Location Report)". When calling 110, 119, or 118 from the

FOMA terminal, your current location (location information) is

automatically notiﬁed to the agency such as the Police that

receives emergency calls. The agency may not receive accurate

location information depending on your current location or

signal conditions. If you do not specify your caller ID by dialing

with "184" added, the location information and caller ID will

not be sent. However, if the agency judges the information is

necessary to protect a human life, it may acquire your location

information and caller ID. The introduction area/time of the

"Emergency Location Report" depend on the readiness of the

respective emergency report reception agencies.

• For a call to 110, 119 or 118 from the FOMA terminal, because

the police or ﬁre department may try to contact you, inform

them that you are calling using a mobile phone and give them

your phone number and detailed information about your current

location. Do not move around while you are talking during

an emergency call to prevent the call from being terminated

unexpectedly. Do not turn the FOMA terminal power oﬀ

immediately after the call is over; and keep the FOMA terminal

ready to receive calls for approximately 10 minutes.

• Depending on the area you are calling from, you may not be

connected to the local police or ﬁre department. In such case,

use a public phone or land-line phone nearby.

447

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Introduction of Options and

Related Devices

Using the FOMA terminal with optional devices makes it more

convenient for various purposes, both personal and business.

Some of the products listed below may be unavailable in

some areas.

For details, contact a service counter such as the docomo

Shop. For details about optional devices, see the related

instruction manuals.

• Battery Pack L04

• Back Cover L11

• Desktop Holder L03

• Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch P01/P02

• Earphone Plug Adapter P001

• Earphone/Microphone with Switch P001/P002

• FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01

• Bone conduction microphone/receiver

• FOMA Indoor Booster Antenna

• FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01

• Carry Case L 01

• FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02

• FOMA Indoor Booster Antenna (Stand Type)

• FOMA USB Cable

• FOMA AC Adapter 01/02

• FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use

• Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01

• Stereo Earphone Set P001

• FOMA DC Adapter 01/02

• Earphone Plug Adapter 01 for External connector terminal

• Earphone/Microphone 01

• Earphone Plug Adapter 01

• Stereo Earphone Set 01

• In-Car Holder 01

*1 Earphone Plug Adapter P001 is required to connect to L-01B.

*2 For domestic use.

*3 The FOMA terminal may not work properly with a USB HUB.

*4 Charging Using the AC Adapter→P47 to 49

Introduction of Moving Picture

Playing Software

You need Apple Computer Inc.'s QuickTime Player (free)

Version 6.4 or higher (or ver.6.3+3GPP) to play moving

pictures (in the MP4 ﬁle format) captured with the FOMA

terminal on a PC.

QuickTime Player is available for download from the following

web site:

http://www.apple.com/jp/quicktime/download/

(Japanese only)

Note

• You need a PC connected to the Internet to download the

software. Communication charges may apply for downloading.

• For details about operating environment, downloading or

operations, visit the above web site.

448

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

• First, check whether the software update is required. If required,

update the software. (Software Update→P459)

• When the conditions are not improved even after you checked the

following symptoms, contact "Repairs" at the back of this manual or

a repair counter speciﬁed by DOCOMO.

Symptom Check

Power does not

turn on • Is the battery pack inserted correctly?→P46

• Is the battery pack charged?→P47, P50

Cannot charge

(Ex.: Illumination

does not light or

blinks)

• Is the battery pack inserted correctly?→P46

• Is the adapter power plug connected to an

outlet or cigarette lighter socket correctly?

• Is the adapter connected to the FOMA

terminal correctly?→P49

• If the AC adapter (optional) is used, is the AC

adapter connecter connected to the FOMA

terminal correctly?→P49

• If the desktop holder is used, is the charger

terminal of the FOMA terminal clean? If it is

dirty, clean with a dry cloth or cotton swab.

• If you are talking or performing communication

or other operations while charging for a long

time, the terminal may become hot and the

charger light may blink. In this case, charge

again after the FOMA terminal cools down.

Symptom Check

Becomes hot

during operations

or charging

• The FOMA terminal, battery pack, adapters

may become hot during operations or

charging, or when using i-αppli, videophone,

or 1Seg function, etc. for a long time while

charging. In this case, exit functions in use

and wait until the FOMA terminal becomes

cool down.

Battery usage

time is short • Is the FOMA terminal left with the out of

service area condition for a long time?

Under the out of service area condition, as

the terminal searches for radio wave to make

communication possible, more electricity is

consumed than usual.

• The battery pack usage time diﬀers

depending on the ambient environment or the

degradation level.

• The battery pack is a consumable. The

available usage time shortens every time the

battery pack is recharged.

If the usage time becomes extremely shorter

than at the time of purchase even if the

battery pack is fully charged, purchase the

speciﬁed battery pack.

Power turns oﬀ or

automatic restart

occurs

• If the battery pack terminal is dirty, the

contact may become poor and the power may

be turned oﬀ. If it is dirty, clean with a dry

cloth or cotton swab.

Keys do not

respond • Is the Touch lock activated?→P125

Screen reacts

slowly when keys

are pressed

• Large amount of data may be saved in the

FOMA terminal or large-sized data may be

transferred between the terminal and a

microSD card.

UIM is not

recognized • Is the UIM installed in the right direction?

→P43

Calls cannot be

made with dial

keys

• Is Dialing call lock set?→P123

• Is Lock all set?→P121

• Is Self mode set?→P124

449

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Symptom Check

Ring tone does

not sound • Is the ring tone volume for incoming voice/

videophone calls set to "Silent"? →P101

• Is Public mode (P76), Manner mode (P105),

or Self mode (P124) activated?

• Is Accept/Reject call (P95), Incoming call

(P123), Reject on list (P127), Reject all calls

(P128), Anonymous caller (P129), Set mute

ring(sec.) (P130), or Reject unknown (P130)

set?

• Is Set ring time for Voice Mail or Call

Forwarding service set to "0 Sec."?

→P393, P396

• Is answering time for Record message set to

"0 sec."?→P77

• Is Delayed time for Auto answer set to

"0 Sec."?→P372

Calls cannot be

made

(Ex.: "圏外" does

not disappear

even when you

move, or making/

receiving calls

is unavailable

although radio

wave is strong

enough)

• Turn power oﬀ and on, or remove and install

battery pack or the UIM.

• Even when "FOMA terminal is not out of

service area" or "signal strength is shown as

", calls may not be made or received due to

the type of radio waves. Move and call again.

• Is incoming restriction such as Reject on list

(P127) or Accept/Reject call (P95) set?

• Depending on crossing of radio waves, calls

or mails are crossed at the crowded places

and connection status may not be good. In

this case, "Please wait for a while" appears

and the caller hears a busy tone. Move to

other place or call again later.

Symptom Check

Display is dim • Is the display duration in "Backlight" set

short?→P110

• Is "Display brightness" in "Backlight"

changed?→P110

• Is "Power saver mode" set to "ON"?→P111

• Is the battery running low? Charge the

battery.→P49

During a call,

the other party's

voice is hard to

listen to or too

loud

• Is Receiver volume in "Volume" changed?

→P101

Images or

melodies set for

each function

do not work and

default settings

are used

• Is the same UIM, used when obtaining images

or melodies inserted?→P44

Mail cannot

be received

automatically

• Is "Receive option set" in mail settings set to

"ON"? Set to "OFF".→P168

Cannot connect

to i-mode, i-mode

mail, i-αppli, or

i-Channel

• Is "Host selection" set to other than "imode"?

→P199

• If subscribing to i-mode while operating, turn

the FOMA terminal oﬀ and on again.

i-mode mark

continues blinking

and does not

disappear

• When i-mode connection is terminated after

or while checking new messages to the

i-mode center or receiving mails, i-mode mark

continues blinking. If data communication is

not performed, it is automatically interrupted,

but pressing

terminates the connection

immediately.

Continued on next page

450

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Symptom Check

Still images/

moving pictures

captured with

Camera are

blurred

• Switch to macro function when capturing

close object.→P233

• Check whether clouds or dirt attach to the

camera lens.

• Capture with Shake reduction set to "ON".

→P233

• When capturing portrait image, set Auto

focus to "Face tracking".→P233

Cannot watch

1Seg • Are you out of digital terrestrial broadcasting

service area or in the location with poor signal

reception?

• Is Channel setting made?→P243

Cannot delete

Osaifu-Keitai

compatible i-αppli

•

After deleting data on the IC card, delete

i-αppli.

If data on the IC card used by i-αppli to delete

is not deleted, i-αppli may not be deleted.

If you cannot delete, contact the docomo

Shop, etc.

Cannot use

Osaifu-Keitai •

While removing the battery pack or setting

Omakase Lock, IC card functions become

unavailable regardless of IC card lock settings.

• Is the IC card lock set?

• Is the mark on the FOMA terminal held

over a scanning device?

"圏外" appears and

the international

roaming service is

unavailable

•

Are you out of the international roaming service

area or in a location with poor signal reception?

• Check international service guides such as

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International

Services]" about whether you are in

available service area or using available

telecommunication carrier.

• Search for telecommunication carriers that

supports the service from Network search

mode.→P416

• Switch 3G/GSM setting to "AUTO" or

available network after moving from Japan to

overseas. If this option was set to "Auto" in

Japan, turn the FOMA terminal oﬀ and on.

Symptom Check

Cannot receive

Voice/Videophone

calls while using

overseas

• Is "Call barring" set to "Activate"?→P418

• Is "V-phone while packet" set to other than

"V-phone priority"?

• Videophone call is unavailable while using

GSM/GPRS network.

Cannot make/

receive calls

suddenly while

using overseas

• Check total amount of charges at docomo

Information Center. For use of "International

roaming (WORLD WING)", the limit of

maximum charges for use is set beforehand.

When exceeding the limit, all services stop.

If exceeding the limit, pay the charges to

resume services.

• Check Network search mode. If set to "Auto",

speciﬁc networks may not be used. Switch

the setting to "Manual" and change the

network (3G) available for the country or area

where you stay.

No caller ID is

notiﬁed/caller ID

diﬀerent from that

of the caller is

notiﬁed/Functions

using contents

in Phonebook

or Caller ID

notiﬁcation do not

work

• Even when a caller notiﬁes caller ID, it is

not displayed on the FOMA terminal unless

notiﬁed from network or telecommunication

carrier in use. Caller ID diﬀerent from that of

the caller may be notiﬁed depending on the

network or telecommunication carrier in use.

Cannot transfer

data • Is USB HUB used? If USB HUB is used,

operations may not be performed correctly.

Cannot display

data saved in a

microSD card

• Perform "Data update" of a microSD.→P325

451

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Symptom Check

When trying to

display images,

"X" appears, or

"X" appears in

preview mode

• If images are broken, "X" may appear.

Attached ﬁle

is deleted and

cannot be viewed

• Check "Receive attach ﬁle" setting.→P168

• Check "Mail size restriction" setting. For

details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

If Error Message Appears

Mentioned Below

Error Message Description

"i-αppli To" function

is not set The i-αppli cannot be started because "Site

i-αppli To" is not enabled. Enable the function

and try again.

Already exist The network cannot be registered because it

is already registered.

Attached ﬁle is

deleted The attached ﬁle will be deleted and the

message will be forwarded because a

diﬀerent UIM card is inserted than the one

that was inserted when the i-mode mail

attachment ﬁle was received.

Authentication

canceled(401) The connection was suspended because

authentication failed.

Auto start already

3 software set Up to 3 i-αppli can be set to auto start.

Battery low The battery level is low. Charge the battery.

Error Message Description

Can't save over 99

songs Up to 99 songs can be added to the playlist.

Delete unnecessary music data from the

playlist.

Cannot access A connection cannot be established because

the host address set for "Host selection" is

wrong. Check the setting and then try again.

Cannot add song Up to 99 songs can be registered per

playlist. Delete unnecessary music data from

the playlist.

Cannot add to

playlist! The song cannot be added because the

maximum number of playlists/songs in each

playlist has already been added. Delete

unnecessary playlists/songs.

Cannot attach to

Mail The attachment exceeds available size.

Cannot create

playlist! Up to 10 playlists can be added. Delete

unnecessary playlists.

Cannot delete due

to error in IC card

data

Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli cannot be

deleted because there is an error in IC card

data.

Cannot save image The ﬁle cannot be saved because it is a

Flash ﬁle that cannot be saved or an image

that has been partially downloaded.

Cannot save image

without playing The data cannot be saved because it is an

unplayed Flash animation.

Certiﬁcate is

rejected (tampered) A problem was detected during the

authentication process of SSL. The

connection will be terminated.

A connection could not be established

because a modiﬁed SSL certiﬁcate was

received.

Continued on next page

452

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Error Message Description

Connection failed

(562) A connection cannot be established because

there is a problem with the network. Wait a

while and try again.

Connection

interrupted Try again in a location with better signal

reception. If the same error occurs, wait for a

while and then try again.

Connection

suspended The connection was suspended because a

certain period of time elapsed without ﬁnding

the other party. Check the distance from the

other device, angle, and operating procedure.

Could not receive

message The selected message cannot be received

because the host address set for "Host

selection" is wrong. Check the setting and

then try again.

Data access lock

is set The operation cannot be performed because

the function is restricted by Data access

lock. Unmark the function in "Data access

lock".

Display Call/Mail

log is set "OFF" The Live Character Park screen cannot be

displayed because "Display Call/Mail logs"

is set to "OFF". Set all items in "Display Call/

Mail logs" to "ON".

Dialing call is

limited The operation cannot be performed because

Dialing call lock is set. Unmark "Dialing call" in

"Call/Mail lock" setting.

Exchange failed Communication failed because the operation

was suspended.

Failed to retrieve

channel information i-Channel information was not downloaded

because part or all channel information could

not be downloaded. Move to a location with a

strong signal and then press

in Stand-

by to receive the information.

Error Message Description

File with copyright

will be deleted The FOMA terminal will delete the attached

ﬁle and forward message because the ﬁle is

Format not

supported The operation cannot be performed because

it is not supported.

Frame number of

this page is not

supported

The site or web page may not exist or URL

may be incorrect. Check URL and perform

operation again.

Handset memory

is full Save data to a microSD card or delete

unnecessary ﬁles on the FOMA terminal.

(Operating according to on-screen

instructions will display estimated size of

each ﬁle.)

Home page

disabled "Home" is set to "Disable". Set it to "Enable".

Host name already

exists The host name cannot be registered because

it is already registered.

i-mode Center is

busy.

Please try again

later.(555)

The line facility failed, or the line is very busy.

Wait a while and try again.

Inbox is full The i-mode mail cannot be received because

there is not enough storage space in Inbox.

Delete unnecessary received mail.

Incoming call is

limited The operation cannot be performed because

Incoming call lock is set. Unmark "Incoming

call" in "Call/Mail lock".

Incorrect folder

name Invalid characters or no characters were

entered for the folder name. Enter a valid

folder name.

Input error(205) The input data contains an error. Check the

input data.

453

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Error Message Description

Insert UIM Check whether UIM is inserted properly.

→P43

Invalid content.

Change i-motion

type for replay.

The FOMA terminal is set not to obtain

streaming type i-motion. Change the setting.

Invalid data No character is entered as a playlist name.

Enter a playlist name.

The operation cannot be performed because

an inappropriate ﬁle is selected.

The operation cannot be performed because

the data is invalid.

The operation cannot be performed because

the received data contains an error.

Invalid data.

Connection cannot

be established.

(400)

The FOMA terminal was unable to connect

properly because of an error at the host.

Invalid ﬁle name is

included Invalid characters or no characters were

entered as a ﬁle name/folder name. Enter a

valid ﬁle name/folder name.

Invalid number A call cannot be made because the received

mail does not contain a phone number.

Invalid title is

included Invalid characters or no characters were

entered as a ﬁle name/folder name. Enter a

valid ﬁle name/folder name.

Invalid UIM, Auto-

start failed i-αppli could not be started automatically due

to the UIM security function. Insert the UIM

that was inserted when the ﬁle was obtained,

and then try again.

Invalid UIM, cannot

access The operation cannot be performed due to

the UIM security function. Insert the UIM that

was inserted when the ﬁle was obtained, and

then try again.

Error Message Description

Invalid UIM,

incorrect display. Some data subject to restrictions such

as images cannot be displayed because

a diﬀerent UIM card is inserted than the

one that was inserted when the data was

downloaded from the site, or the attached ﬁle

or MessageR/F was saved. Insert the same

UIM that was inserted when you downloaded

or saved the data.

A diﬀerent UIM card is inserted than the one

that was inserted when the screen memo

was saved. Insert the same UIM card that

was inserted when you saved the screen

memo.

Invalid UIM,

requested service

not available.

A diﬀerent UIM card is inserted than the

one that was inserted when the data

was downloaded from a site, or the mail

attachment ﬁle or MessageR/F was saved.

Insert the same UIM that was inserted when

you downloaded or saved the data.

Invalid UIM,

requested software

failed to start

An i-αppli that is linked to the UIM inserted

at the time of download from a site cannot

be started. Insert the UIM that was inserted

when the software was downloaded.

Invalid UIM,

requested software

failed to start.

The speciﬁed software cannot be started

because a diﬀerent UIM is inserted than

the one inserted when the software was

downloaded from a site. Insert the UIM

that was inserted when the software was

downloaded.

Invalid UIM. Start

failed. An i-αppli that is linked to the UIM inserted

at the time of download from a site cannot

be started. Insert the UIM that was inserted

when the software was downloaded.

Mails could not be

sent to following

address (561)

Mail could not be sent to the displayed

address properly.

Continued on next page

454

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Error Message Description

Mail receiving

disabled

No items in "Check new messages" are marked.

Mark the item to check and then try again.

Memory if full

Delete existing

software?

Delete unnecessary software. (Operating

according to on-screen instructions will

display estimated size of each software.)

Memory shortage. The process will be suspended because

there is not enough memory. If you see this

message frequently, turn oﬀ, then turn on

your FOMA terminal.

MessageF service

unavailable while

abroad. Check

the Center Inquiry

functions.(566)

MessageF service unavailable while

abroad. Uncheck "MessageF" in "Check new

messages" settings.

Music player is

running The operation cannot be performed because

MUSIC player is running. Press

to end

MUSIC player.

No PLMN found There is no network that can be selected.

No response (408) The FOMA terminal was unable to connect

because there was no response from the site

or web page. Try again.

No save area The operation cannot be performed because

there is not enough storage space in the

saving location. Delete unnecessary ﬁles.

No space to attach

ﬁle The maximum attachment size has been

exceeded.

Not enough

memory

Please delete some

ﬁles

Delete unnecessary ﬁles on the FOMA

terminal. (Operating according to on-screen

instructions will display estimated size of

each ﬁle.)

Page is not found

(404) The site or web page may not exist, or the

URL may be wrong. Check the URL and then

try again.

Error Message Description

PIN1 (PIN2) code

blocked If an incorrect PIN1/PIN2 code is entered 3

times in a row, the PIN lock is set. Enter the

PUK code.

PIN1 (PIN2) code

error The entered PIN1/PIN2 code is wrong.

Enter the correct PIN1/PIN2.

PIN1 (PIN2) code

not recognized If an incorrect PIN1/PIN2 code is entered 3

times in a row, the PIN lock is set. Enter the

PUK code.

Please check SMS

Center settings The FOMA terminal failed to send SMS.

Check "SMS center" setting.

PUK blocked If you enter an incorrect PUK code 10 times

in a row, the PUK code is blocked. Contact

the docomo Shop.

PUK code error An incorrect PUK code was entered. Enter

the correct PUK code.

PUK code not

recognized If you enter an incorrect PUK code 10 times

in a row, the PUK code is blocked. Contact

the docomo Shop.

Reading UIM The UIM is being read. Wait a while and try

again.

Received mail

display is limited The operation cannot be performed.

Unmark "Rcv. mail display" in "Call/Mail lock".

Receiving canceled Downloading was suspended because the

FOMA terminal is out of service area. Move to

a location with a strong signal.

Replay is restricted

(XXXX/XX/XX, XX:

XX) - (XXXX/XX/

XX, XX:XX)

The ﬁle cannot be played because today is

out of the playback period set to the i-motion,

music data, or Music&Video Channel program.

Play the ﬁle during the playback period.

* Month, day, year, and time are displayed in

the place of X.

455

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Error Message Description

Replay is restricted

(XXXX/XX/XX, XX:

XX)

The ﬁle cannot be played because the

playback limit set to the i-motion, music

data, or Music&Video Channel program has

passed. You cannot play the ﬁle after the

playback limit has expired.

* Month, day, year, and time are displayed in

the place of X.

Replay period has

not started yet The ﬁle cannot be played because the

playback period set to the i-motion, music

data, or Music&Video Channel program has

not yet started. Play the ﬁle on or after the

day for which playback is possible.

Requested

software

unavailable

i-αppli failed to be activated, because an error

occurs to i-αppli. If there is a problem with

software setting or activation conditions, etc.

when activating from i-αppli To.

Retention period

has expired (492) An attached ﬁle can no longer be obtained

because the retention period at the i-mode

center has expired.

Root certiﬁcate is

not valid The certiﬁcate of the FOMA terminal is set

to invalid. Change the setting to establish a

connection.

Run i-αppli?

Yes/No/Terminate This message will be displayed when an

i-αppli performs a lot of data transfer within

a short time.

Select "Yes" to continue using the i-αppli.

Select "No" to continue using the i-αppli

without communication.

Select "Terminate" to end the i-αppli.

Same time already

set Another i-αppli is set to start automatically

at the same time. Two or more i-αppli cannot

start automatically at the same time.

Same URL already

saved The URL cannot be saved because it is

already registered in the FOMA terminal.

Error Message Description

Self mode is set The operation cannot be performed because

Self mode is set. Set Self mode to "OFF".

Send mail is limited The operation cannot be performed.

Unmark "Send mail" in "Call/Mail lock".

Size of this page is

not supported The reception was stopped because the

page at the site or web page is too large;

only an obtained part is displayed.

The download was stopped because the data

exceeded the maximum size that can be

downloaded/obtained.

Software

terminated due to

security error

i-αppli attempted to perform a prohibited

activity.

Some data couldn't

save

There is data that could not be saved because

there was not enough storage space in the

saving location. Delete unnecessary ﬁles.

Some function is

limited in UIM Functions are limited because a diﬀerent

UIM card is inserted than the one that was

inserted when the data was downloaded

from a site, the ﬁle was attached to mail, or

MessageR/F was saved.

SSL session

cannot be

established

A connection could not be established

because a modiﬁed SSL certiﬁcate was

received or an SSL error occurred.

SSL session failed A problem was detected during the

authentication process of SSL. The

connection will be terminated.

A session was not possible because of an

authentication error on the server.

There is a message

already composing.

Delete and create

new?

Yes/No

This message appears when attempting

to create a new mail/SMS using Multitask

function while composing a mail/SMS. Select

"Yes" to delete the currently composing

message, and create a new mail/SMS.

Continued on next page

456

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Error Message Description

This data cannot

be saved The ﬁle cannot be saved because the

playback limit of the i-motion or music data

has expired, or there is no remaining playback

count available.

This ﬁle is not

supported The ﬁle cannot be played because the data is

not supported or is corrupted.

This software

contains an error The i-αppli data cannot be downloaded or

upgraded because it contains an error.

This UIM cannot be

recognized The UIM cannot be recognized or the wrong

type of UIM is inserted. Reinsert the UIM

or insert the correct UIM and then try the

operation again.

Time out The network traﬃc to the i-mode center is

heavy. Wait a while and then try again.

The FOMA terminal searched for a network

for a certain period of time, but no network

was found.

Time out. Resume

download? The attached ﬁle linked to the i-mode mail

could not be downloaded within the set time.

Do you want to try downloading again?

Transmission failed

(XXX) The mail could not be sent properly.

* A number to indicate an error type is

displayed in the place of X.

Unable to acquire The ﬁle cannot be acquired because it is

invalid or an error occurred.

Unable to acquire

remaining data.

Data deleted.

While attempting to download the remaining

data of a partially saved ﬁle, the data was

deleted because an error occurred and the

download failed.

Unable to download

remaining data.

Data deleted.

Error Message Description

Unable to download The program cannot be downloaded because

there is no registration for it in My Menu.

provider site in My Menu.

The ﬁle cannot be downloaded because it is

invalid or an error occurred.

Unable to obtain

data due to replay

restriction data

error

The data cannot be obtained because it is

invalid or today is out of the playback period.

Unable to retrieve

the requested URL

(504)

The site cannot be accessed due to some

reasons. Try again.

Unable to set.

Mute ring time or

Phonebook lock is

enabled

"Reject unknown" cannot be set when "Set

mute ring time" is set to "ON", or "Data

access lock" is set to "ON" and "Phonebook"

is marked.

Unable to set.

Reject unknown is

enabled.

If "Reject unknown" is set to "ON", "Set mute

ring time" cannot be set.

unsupported card

format. Please

format again.

The format of the microSD card is not

supported. Use L-01B to format the microSD

card.

Usage is currently

restricted. Try

again later

This message will be displayed when

extremely large amount of data is transferred

via your FOMA terminal. This message is

displayed only when you subscribe to the

ﬁxed amount service for i-mode packet

communication. Wait for a while and try again

later after you see this message.

α error An error occurred while an i-αppli is running.

457

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Warranty and After-Sales

Service

Warranty

• Be sure to receive a warranty at the time you purchase your FOMA

terminal. Read contents of the warranty and conﬁrm information

such as "shop name and the date of purchase" and keep it in a

safe place. If necessary information is not described, immediately

contact the shop of purchase. The warranty for free repair is valid

for one year from the date of purchase.

• This product and its accessory kit are subject to change, in part or

whole, for improvement without prior notice.

• The saved contents of phonebook and other functions may be

altered or lost by failure, repair or other handling of the FOMA

terminal. It is recommended that you write down the contents of the

Phonebook. If a FOMA terminal is repaired, with some exceptions,

information downloaded with i-mode or i-αppli is not transferred to

the repaired FOMA terminal, because of the copyright law.

* This FOMA terminal allows you to save data, such as Phonebook

entries or i-motion onto a microSD card.

* This FOMA terminal allows you to save data such as Phonebook

entries to the Data Center by using the Data Security Service

(fee-based service requiring separate subscription).

* If you have a PC, your Phonebook entries can be transferred to

and stored on your PC using DOCOMO keitai datalink (P428)

and FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) or

FOMA USB Cable (optional).

After-Sales Service

For Problems with Your FOMA Terminal

Before requesting for repairs, read "Troubleshooting" in this

manual. If the problem persists, call "Repairs" at the back of

this manual.

For Repairs after Inquiry

Bring your FOMA terminal to a repair counter speciﬁed by

DOCOMO. Repairs are accepted during business hours of the

service center. Be sure to bring the warranty when you visit.

During the warranty period

• The FOMA terminal will be repaired free of charge under the

conditions of the warranty.

• Make sure that you bring the warranty for repair. You will be

charged even during the warranty period for repair if the warranty

is not presented or the trouble or damage is caused by your

inappropriate handling.

• You will be charged even during the warranty period for repair of

failures caused by the use of devices or consumable items that

are not DOCOMO-speciﬁed.

•

You will be charged for repair of the LCD screen or the connectors.

Repair may not be possible in the following cases.

• When the repair counter judges the cause of malfunction

is exposure to moisture. (For example, when perspiration is

detected by the moisture detection seal.)

• When corrosion due to exposure to moisture, condensation or

sweat is found in a test result, or any of the internal boards are

damaged or deformed. (Breakage of External connector terminal

(earphone/microphone jack), LCD, or cracked chassis could be

the case as well.)

* Since these conditions are outside the scope of the warranty,

any repairs, if at all possible, will be charged.

After expiration of the warranty

• All repairs that are requested are charged.

Continued on next page

458

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Replacement parts

• Replacement parts (required to maintain the FOMA terminal

function) will be kept in stock for at most 4 years in principle

after termination of production. However, repair may still not be

possible due to a lack of replacement parts depending on the

defective part. Even after the parts holding period, some failures

are repairable depending on the detective part. Call "Repairs" at

the back of this manual.

Notes

• Do not modify the FOMA terminal or its accessory kit.

- Fire, injury or damage may result.

- The modiﬁed FOMA terminal will be repaired only after the terminal

is restored to its original condition. However, depending on the

details of modiﬁcation, repair may be refused.

Modiﬁcations may include the following cases:

･ Put a seal on LCD and Keys

･ Add a decoration on the FOMA terminal with bond

･ Exchange exterior with ones other than DOCOMO genuine parts

- Repair of failure or damage caused by modiﬁcation is charged

even during the warranty period.

• Do not remove inscription stickers placed on the FOMA terminal.

The inscription stickers certify that the FOMA terminal satisﬁes

speciﬁc technical standards. If stickers are removed intentionally

or are reattached in such a way that conﬁrmation of the sticker's

contents is impossible, repair may be refused because conﬁrmation

of whether or not the device conforms to relevant technical

standards cannot be made.

• Various function settings and information including total call time

may be cleared (reset) by failure, repair or other handling of the

FOMA terminal. In such a case, make function settings again.

• The FOMA terminal contains magnetic components given below.

Keep cash cards and other objects vulnerable to magnetism away

from such components or they may become unusable.

Magnetic components: Speaker and earpiece

• If the FOMA terminal gets wet or moistened, immediately turn the

power OFF, remove the battery pack, and bring the terminal to a

DOCOMO service center. Note that, depending on the conditions of

the FOMA terminal, it may not be repaired.

Memory Dial (Phonebook) and Downloaded Data

• Write down and keep separately the data you registered in your

FOMA terminal. DOCOMO will not accept any liability whatsoever for

changes or loss of data.

• The data you created, imported or downloaded from external

sources may be altered or lost as a result of changing the FOMA

terminal model or repairing the terminal. DOCOMO is not responsible

for data alteration or loss under these circumstances. Under some

circumstances, DOCOMO may replace your FOMA terminal with its

equivalent instead of repairing it. Data including images or melodies

downloaded to the FOMA terminal and user-deﬁned data will be

transferred to another terminal when the terminal is repaired. (Some

data may not be transferred. Depending on severity of the failure,

data may not be transferred.)

* Depending on the amount of data saved on the FOMA terminal, it

may take a while to transfer data or data may not be transferred.

459

Appendix/Troubleshooting

i-mode Fault Diagnosis Site

You can check yourself whether your FOMA terminal is

properly sending/receiving mail, downloading images or

melodies.

TOP screen Test menu

screen

• Accessing "ｉモード故障診断サイト (i-mode fault

diagnosis site)"

i-mode site: iMenu ▶ お知らせ (Information) ▶ サー

ビス・機能 (Service/Function) ▶ ｉモード (i-mode)

▶ ｉモード故障診断 (i-mode fault diagnosis)

QR code for

accessing

web sites

Note

• No packet communication charges apply for the i-mode

malfunction diagnosis. (Note that the charges apply for this

service when you access from overseas.)

• Test items diﬀer depending on the FOMA terminal model. Test

items may change.

• Before diagnosing operations for each test item, read the

cautions on the site carefully.

• When accessing the i-mode malfunction diagnosis site, and

performing the sending mail test, information unique to your

FOMA terminal (such as a model name and mail address) is

automatically sent to the server (i-mode malfunction diagnosis

server). The information sent is used only for i-mode malfunction

diagnosis.

• After the diagnosis, if you think that the FOMA terminal is

malfunctioning, call "Repairs" at the back of this manual.

Software Update

Updating Software

Connect the FOMA terminal to the network and check for

software update. If necessary, use packet communication* to

download a part of software and update the software.

Updating software, which is important for the FOMA terminal

operations, improves functions and operations of the FOMA

terminal. If software update is required, you are informed at

the DOCOMO's web site or "お客様サポート (user support)"

in iMenu. To update software, select "auto-update", "Now

update", or "Reserve".

• auto-update: Download new software automatically and rewrite at

the time set in advance.

• Now update: Update software immediately.

• Reserve: Reserve the date and time, and update software on the

reserved date and time.

* No packet communication charge applies for updating software.

Continued on next page

460

Appendix/Troubleshooting

• Software update is available even if you set the access

point other than i-mode.

• Fully charge the battery pack before updating software.

• Software update is not available in the following cases:

- Lock all

- Another function is running

- The date and time are not set

- UIM not inserted

- The battery pack is not fully charged

- Omakase Lock

- "圏外" appears at the top of the screen

- Self mode

- Terminal power is oﬀ

• Software update (downloading and rewriting) may take a

while.

• Updating software with "PIN1 code request" set to "ON"

does not display PIN1 code entry screen at the automatic

restart after rewriting the software.

• You cannot make or receive calls or use communication or

other functions while updating software (you can receive

voice calls while downloading).

• When updating software, SSL communication to the

server (DOCOMO's site) is performed. Set the SSL

certiﬁcate setting to be valid. (Default: Valid. Setting

method→P200)

• It is recommended that you update software in a location

with strong signal reception with three antenna bars

displayed in stationary state. If the signal becomes weak

during software download, or download is suspended, retry

software update in a location with better signal reception.

• When your software is up to date, a message indicating

that "No update is needed. Continue to use as before"

appears when you check availability of software update.

• After software is updated, an icon indicating the i-mode

Center storage status disappears. When mail is delivered

during software update with "Receive option set" set to

"ON", a screen indicating that there is mail may not appear

after software update.

• During an update, information unique to your FOMA

terminal (such as a terminal model and the serial number)

is automatically sent to the server (software update

server managed by DOCOMO). DOCOMO does not use the

sent information for other purposes than Software update.

• If software update fails, a message, "Rewrite failed"

appears. All operations become unavailable. In this case,

bring the FOMA terminal to a repair counter speciﬁed by

DOCOMO.

• Software update is unavailable overseas.

Note

• Do not remove the battery pack during software update. Doing

so may cause update to fail.

• Software can be updated with data such as Phonebook entries,

camera images, downloaded data maintained on the FOMA

terminal. Note that, however, such data may not be protected

depending on the conditions of the FOMA terminal (failure,

damage, expose to moisture, etc.). It is recommended that you

make a backup of important data. However, note that some

data such as downloaded data cannot be backed up.

461

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Set auto-update

Updating Software Automatically

Download new software automatically and rewrite software

at the time set in advance.

• By default, Set auto-update is set to "auto-update", Day is set to

"None", and Time is set to "03:00".

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Software

Update" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

▶ "Set auto-update" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Set auto-update]

auto-update : Update automatically.

only notiﬁcation : Notify of update information without updating

automatically.

disable : Do not update automatically.

[Day]*

Specify the day to rewrite software.

[Time]*

Specify the time to rewrite software.

* Available when "Set auto-update" is set to "auto-update".

[Done]

If Update is Required

When software becomes ready to be rewritten, (rewrite

notice icon) appears on the Stand-by display, and you can

check the time to rewrite and select whether to change the

time or rewrite immediately.

• When the time to rewrite software comes with (rewrite notice

icon) displayed, software is automatically rewritten and (rewrite

notice icon) disappears.

In Stand-by,

▶ Select (rewrite notice

icon)

"OK"

The Stand-by display returns and rewrite starts at the set time.

• "Change time": Change the time to rewrite.

• "Rewrite now": Rewrite starts immediately. For further

operations, refer to "Updating Software Immediately" (P462).

462

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Starting Software Update

To start software update, select (update notice icon)

displayed on the Stand-by display, or perform from the menu

screen.

To select (update notice icon)

Select (update notice icon) in Stand-by ▶

"Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

To perform from the menu screen

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Software

Update" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶

"Update"

Communication starts and check for software update.

• If update is required, the Software update conﬁrmation screen

appears.

• If update is not required, "No update is needed. Continue to use

as before" appears.

Updating Software Immediately

On the Software update conﬁrmation screen,

"Now update" ▶ "OK" on the Download start

screen

Download starts. When download completes, the conﬁrmation

screen for rewriting software appears.

"OK"

Rewrite starts. When rewrite completes, the FOMA terminal

restarts automatically and the Software update completion

screen appears.

• All operations are disabled while rewriting.

"OK"

463

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Setting Date and Time to Update Software

Set date and time to update software in advance when

downloading takes too much time or the server is congested.

On the Software update conﬁrmation screen,

"Reserve"

The Schedule selection screen appears.

Select the date and time ▶ "Yes"

• At the set time, software update start

automatically.

• Select "Others" on the Schedule selection screen to set the

desired date and time separately.

Note

• When software update is scheduled, the server time appears.

• Note that if you are using other functions, the software update

may not start at the scheduled time.

• If alarm is activated, the software update may not start.

• If you perform "Clear memory" (P132) after the reservation is

made, the software update does not start at the scheduled

time. Reschedule the update.

Conﬁrming/Changing/Canceling Reservation

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Software

Update" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶

"Update"

The reserved time appears.

• "Change": Change the reserved date and time.

• "Cancel": Cancel the reservation.

464

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Ending Software Update

When pressing

[Cancel] or selecting "Cancel" on each

screen, the screen for canceling the operation appears.

Select "Yes" to end software update and return to the Stand-

by display. Select "No" to return to the previous screen.

Scanning function

Protecting the FOMA Terminal

from Harmful Data

First, update the pattern deﬁnition to the latest.

For data and programs downloaded to FOMA terminal from

a site or via i-mode mail, etc., this function enables you to

detect and delete data or disable applications that may cause

troubles.

• Pattern deﬁnition is used for checking. Update pattern deﬁnition,

which is upgraded as needed when new problems are detected.

→P464

• Scanning function provides a means to protect FOMA terminal from

data that may invade when viewing web site or receiving mail, etc.,

causing troubles to FOMA terminal. Note that this function cannot

avoid occurrence of troubles if pattern deﬁnition speciﬁc to the

individual troubles has not been downloaded to FOMA terminal or

such pattern deﬁnition does not exist.

• Pattern deﬁnition has diﬀerent contents depending on mobile

phone models. Note that, therefore, DOCOMO may stop distributing

pattern deﬁnition for models that have been on the market for 3

years or more.

Setting Scanning Function

When Scanning function is set to "ON", data and programs to

be performed are automatically checked.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"Scanning function" ▶ "Set scan"

"Scan"/"Message scan" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Scan : If "ON" is set, an alert is made in 5 levels when

data that may cause troubles is detected.

→P465

Message scan : If "ON" is set, a screen notifying a phone

number or URL is included appears when ﬁrst

displaying the SMS which contains a phone

number or URL.

"Yes"/"No"

Updating Pattern Deﬁnition

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"Scanning function" ▶ "Update" ▶ "Yes" ▶

"Yes"

Updating starts. Upon completion of update, a screen notifying

the completion appears.

• When the pattern deﬁnition is the latest one, a message

screen appears.

[OK]

465

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Note

• During pattern deﬁnition update, information unique to your

FOMA terminal (such as a terminal model and the serial

number) is automatically sent to the server (software update

server managed by DOCOMO). DOCOMO does not use the sent

information for other purposes than the Scanning function.

• Correctly set the clock of FOMA terminal in advance.

• Pattern deﬁnition update is disabled in the following:

- Date&Time is not set

- UIM is not inserted

- Low battery level

- Out of service area

- Another function is running

- Lock all

- During a call

- Self mode

- Data access lock

- Connected to external device such as a PC

Updating the pattern deﬁnition automatically

Automatically update the pattern deﬁnition to keep up to date.

Press

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Scanning function"

▶ "Set auto-update" ▶ "Enable" ▶ "Yes" ▶ "Yes" ▶

[OK].

Scan Result Display

If data that may cause a problem is detected, a screen

appears to show its alert level.

Alert level 0 Alert level 1 Alert level 2

"OK": Continue the

operation. "Yes": Stop the

operation and exit.

"No": Continue the

operation.

"OK": Stop the

operation and exit.

Alert level 3 Alert level 4

"Yes": Delete the

data and exit.

"No": Stop the

operation and exit.

"OK": Delete the data

and exit.

Continued on next page

466

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Note

• The screen may be diﬀerent depending on the scan result.

Display of problem factors after scanning

If you select "Detail" on the Alert level

screen, the problem list screen as on the

right appears.

• The screen image only provides an example.

In the actual screen, a detected problem is

displayed in the place of "XXXXXXXX".

• Depending on the type of the detected data,

"Detail" is displayed.

• When 6 or more problem factors are

detected, subsequent factors after 6th one

will not be shown and only the total number

of the factors is displayed.

Conﬁrming Pattern Deﬁnition Version

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"Scanning function" ▶ "Version"

Main Speciﬁcations

■ Phone

Model name L-01B

Dimensions (H×W×D) Approx. 110mm×Approx. 52mm×

Approx. 15.9mm

Weight Approx. 130g (with battery pack

installed)

Continuous

stand-by

time

FOMA/

3G/GSM

setting:

Moving: Approx. 260 hours

3G/GSM

setting:

AUTO

Stationary: Approx. 310 hours

Moving: Approx. 200 hours

GSM 3G/GSM

setting:

AUTO

Stationary: Approx. 220 hours

Continuous

call time

FOMA/3G Voice call: Approx. 200 minutes

Videophone: Approx. 90 minutes

GSM Voice call: Approx. 180 minutes

1Seg watching time Approx. 140 minutes

Charging time AC adapter: Approx. 180 minutes

DC adapter: Approx. 180 minutes

LCD

Type TFT 262,144 colors

Size Approx. 3.0 inches

Pixels 384,000 pixels

(480 dots×800 dots)

467

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Image

censor

Type Inner camera: CMOS

Outer camera: CMOS

Size Inner camera: 1/11.0 inches

Outer camera: 1/3.2 inches

Eﬀective pixels

Inner camera: Approx. 310 Kilo

pixels

Outer camera: Approx. 5.1 Mega

pixels

Camera

Recorded pixels

(maximum)

Inner camera: Approx. 300 Kilo

pixels

Outer camera: Approx. 5.0 Mega

pixels

Zoom (Digital)

Inner camera: None (For still image)

Up to

approx. 5 times

(For moving picture)

Outer camera:

Up to approx. 2 times

(For still image)

Up to approx. 5 times

(For moving picture)

Storage

Number of

recordable still

images

Approx. 100 (for default settings)

Approx. 1,900

(When deletable

pre-installed data are deleted)

Continuous

shooting

CIF (352×288): 4

QVGA (320×240)/ QCIF

(176×144)/ Sub-QCIF (128×96):

Still image ﬁle

format JPEG

Moving picture

recording time Approx. 60 minutes

Moving picture

ﬁle format MP4

Music

Playback Continuous

playback time

SD-Audio (Supports background

playback): Approx. 500 minutes

Chaku-Uta Full

(Supports

background playback): Approx. 600

minutes

i-motion

: Approx. 180 minutes

WMA data (Supports background

playback): Approx. 550 minutes

Music&Video Channel:

Music: Approx. 600 minutes

(Supports background

playback)

Video: Approx. 180 minutes

Capacity Chaku-Uta

Chaku-Uta Full

Approx. 150MB

*1 Select size: Sub-QCIF (128×96) Image quality: Normal

File size: 10K

*2 Maximum recording time per moving picture saved under the

following conditions.

Select size: Sub-QCIF Size restriction: No restriction

Video quality: Normal Type: Sound+Video

*3 File format: AAC

*4 Sound only i-motion

*5 Shared with Music&Video Channel

Continued on next page

468

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Battery pack

Model name Battery Pack L04

Battery type Lithium ion battery

Nominal voltage 3.7V

Nominal capacity 900mAh

• Continuous call time is approximate duration of time to be spent for

talking with normal radio wave reception level.

• Continuous stand-by time is approximate duration of battery while

in motion with normal radio wave reception level. Depending on the

battery level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient

temperature, or radio wave reception level (poor or weak radio

wave reception level), stand-by time can be reduced by half. When

i-mode communications are performed, the call (communication)/

stand-by time becomes shorter. Even if you do not make calls or

perform i-mode communications, the call (communication)/stand-

by time becomes short when you compose i-mode mail, start a

downloaded i-αppli, start the i-αppli Stand-by display, perform data

communications or Multiaccess, use a camera, or play moving

pictures or music.

• Continuous stand-by time in a stationary state is the average

usage time in stationary state with normal radio wave reception

level with the FOMA terminal closed.

• Continuous stand-by time in motion is the average usage time in a

state combining "stand still", "in motion" and "out of service area" in

an area with normal radio wave reception level while the terminal is

closed.

• 1Seg watching time is approximate time when watching with

normal radio wave reception level and using the Flat-plug Stereo

Earphone Set P01 (optional). It may shorten depending on the

battery level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient

temperature, or radio wave reception level (poor or weak level).

• The estimated charging time is the duration of time to charge a

fully drained battery pack with the FOMA terminal turned oﬀ. The

charging time becomes longer with the FOMA terminal turned on.

Approximate Number of Savable Still

Images

The number of savable still images on the FOMA terminal

varies depending on the resolution, image quality, capture

conditions, and capture objects.

Storage location L-01B (Phone)

Quality

Resolution Super ﬁne Fine Normal

5.1M

(2560×1920)

Approx. 180 Approx. 360 Approx. 470

3M (2048×1536)

Approx. 230 Approx. 470 Approx. 660

2M (1600×1200)

Approx. 330 Approx. 630 Approx. 1,010

1M (1280×960)

Approx. 710 Approx. 1,130 Approx. 1,740

VGA (640×480)

Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900

CIF (352×288)

Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900

QVGA (320×240)

Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900

QCIF (176×144)

Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900

Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900 Approx. 1,900

Wallpaper

(800×480)

Approx. 1,260 Approx. 1,640 Approx. 1,820

* The number of savable images when deletable pre-installed data

are deleted.

469

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Storage location microSD card (64MB)

Quality

Resolution Super ﬁne Fine Normal

5.1M

(2560×1920)

Approx. 70 Approx. 150 Approx. 190

3M (2048×1536)

Approx. 90 Approx. 190 Approx. 260

2M (1600×1200)

Approx. 130 Approx. 250 Approx. 400

1M (1280×960)

Approx. 280 Approx. 450 Approx. 700

VGA (640×480)

Approx. 800 Approx. 1,500 Approx. 2,300

CIF (352×288)

Approx. 2,000 Approx. 3,400 Approx. 5,000

QVGA (320×240)

Approx. 2,500 Approx. 4,300 Approx. 6,000

QCIF (176×144)

Approx. 2,860 Approx. 4,500 Approx. 6.250

Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Approx. 3,230 Approx. 4,700 Approx. 6,550

Wallpaper

(800×480)

Approx. 500 Approx. 660 Approx. 730

Approximate Moving Picture Capture

Duration

The moving picture capture duration varies depending on

the moving picture length, quality, capture conditions, and

capture objects.

Continuous capturing duration per moving picture

Storage location L-01B (Phone)

Type Size restriction No restriction

Resolution

Quality

QVGA

(320×240) QCIF

(176×144) Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Sound＋

Video Super ﬁne

Approx. 45 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Fine

Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Normal

Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Movie

only Super ﬁne

Approx. 45 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Fine

Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Normal

Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Sound only

Approx. 60 min.

Continued on next page

470

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Storage location L-01B (Phone)

Type Size restriction For mail long

Resolution

Quality

QVGA

(320×240) QCIF

(176×144) Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Sound＋

Video Super ﬁne

Approx. 30 sec. Approx. 113

sec. Approx. 205

sec.

Fine

Approx. 47 sec. Approx. 145

sec. Approx. 255

sec.

Normal

Approx. 77 sec. Approx. 233

sec. Approx. 400

sec.

Movie

only Super ﬁne

Approx. 32 sec. Approx. 125

sec. Approx. 240

sec.

Fine

Approx. 50 sec. Approx. 163

sec. Approx. 320

sec.

Normal

Approx. 83 sec. Approx. 245

sec. Approx. 472

sec.

Sound only

Approx. 1,161 sec.

Storage location L-01B (Phone)

Type Size restriction For mail short

Resolution

Quality

QVGA

(320×240) QCIF

(176×144) Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Sound＋

Video Super ﬁne

Approx. 7 sec. Approx. 28 sec. Approx. 51 sec.

Fine

Approx. 11 sec. Approx. 36 sec. Approx. 63 sec.

Normal

Approx. 19 sec. Approx. 58 sec. Approx. 100

sec.

Movie

only Super ﬁne

Approx. 8 sec. Approx. 31 sec. Approx. 60 sec.

Fine

Approx. 12 sec. Approx. 40 sec. Approx. 80 sec.

Normal

Approx. 20 sec. Approx. 61 sec. Approx. 118

sec.

Sound only

Approx. 290 sec.

Storage location microSD card (64MB)

Type Size restriction No restriction

Resolution

Quality

QVGA

(320×240) QCIF

(176×144) Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Sound＋

Video Super ﬁne

Approx. 20 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Fine

Approx. 30 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Normal

Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Movie

only Super ﬁne

Approx. 20 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Fine

Approx. 35 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Normal

Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min. Approx. 60 min.

Sound only

Approx. 60 min.

Storage location microSD card (64MB)

Type Size restriction For mail long

Resolution

Quality

QVGA

(320×240) QCIF

(176×144) Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Sound＋

Video Super ﬁne

Approx. 30 sec. Approx. 113

sec. Approx. 205

sec.

Fine

Approx. 47 sec. Approx. 145

sec. Approx. 255

sec.

Normal

Approx. 77 sec. Approx. 233

sec. Approx. 400

sec.

Movie

only Super ﬁne

Approx. 32 sec. Approx. 125

sec. Approx. 240

sec.

Fine

Approx. 50 sec. Approx. 163

sec. Approx. 320

sec.

Normal

Approx. 83 sec. Approx. 245

sec. Approx. 472

sec.

Sound only

Approx. 1,161 sec.

471

Appendix/Troubleshooting

Storage location microSD card (64MB)

Type Size restriction For mail short

Resolution

Quality

QVGA

(320×240) QCIF

(176×144) Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Sound＋

Video Super ﬁne

Approx. 7 sec. Approx. 28 sec. Approx. 51 sec.

Fine

Approx. 11 sec. Approx. 36 sec. Approx. 63 sec.

Normal

Approx. 19 sec. Approx. 58 sec. Approx. 100

sec.

Movie

only Super ﬁne

Approx. 8 sec. Approx. 31 sec. Approx. 60 sec.

Fine

Approx. 12 sec. Approx. 40 sec. Approx. 80 sec.

Normal

Approx. 20 sec. Approx. 61 sec. Approx. 118

sec.

Sound only

Approx. 290 sec.

Total recording time: Common to all size restrictions

Storage location L-01B (Phone)

Type

Resolution

Quality

QVGA

(320×240) QCIF

(176×144) Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Sound＋

Video Super ﬁne

Approx. 50 min. Approx. 165

min. Approx. 300

min.

Fine

Approx. 70 min. Approx. 210

min. Approx. 380

min.

Normal

Approx. 110

min. Approx. 300

min. Approx. 512

min.

Movie

only Super ﬁne

Approx. 50 min. Approx. 180

min. Approx. 426

min.

Fine

Approx. 70 min. Approx. 240

min. Approx. 512

min.

Normal

Approx. 118

min. Approx. 358

min. Approx. 737

min.

Sound only

Approx. 1,600 min.

* Recording time when deletable pre-installed data are deleted.

Storage location microSD card (64MB)

Type

Resolution

Quality

QVGA

(320×240) QCIF

(176×144) Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Sound＋

Video Super ﬁne

Approx. 22 min.

Approx. 74 min. Approx. 135 min.

Fine

Approx. 31 min.

Approx. 95 min. Approx. 172 min.

Normal

Approx. 50 min.

Approx. 135 min. Approx. 232 min.

Movie

only Super ﬁne

Approx. 22 min.

Approx. 82 min. Approx. 194 min.

Fine

Approx. 32 min.

Approx. 109 min. Approx. 233 min.

Normal

Approx. 54 min.

Approx. 163 min. Approx. 335 min.

Sound only

Approx. 800 min.

Number of Items that Can Be

Stored/Protected in the FOMA

Terminal

The maximum number of items that can be stored or

protected varies depending on the data size or memory

usage.

Type

Maximum number of

savable items Maximum number of

protectable items

Phonebook 1,000

−

Schedule Schedule 200 −

Holiday 100

−

To do 50 −

Memo Sketch memo 10 −

Text memo 50 −

Continued on next page

472

Mail Inbox

1,000 1,000

Outbox 500 500

Unsent message −

Message MessageR 100 100

MessageF 100 100

Template 100

−

Bookmarks i-mode 100 −

Full Browser 100 −

Screen memo 50 25

i-αppli 100

−

Data box Images

2,000

−

Moving picture/

i-motion 2,000

−

Melody 2,000

−

Kisekae Tool 2,000

−

*1 Up to 50 entries can be saved on the UIM.

*2 Includes holidays set by default.

*3 Includes a message " Welcome Mail " "Welcome ドコモ動画 "

saved in "Inbox".

*4 Includes pre-installed data.

*5 Up to 30 slideshows can be saved. (This number is included

within 2,000, which is the maximum number of savable images).

LG Electronics USA L01B PCS GSM Phone User Manual

LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone

User manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation